Manual SIMOCODE Pro PROFIBUS en-US 2014 PDF

SIMOCODE pro
Motor Management and Control Devices

SIMOCODE pro for PROFIBUS
System Manual
Edition 08/2013
Answers for industry.

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS ___________________
Introduction 1
___________________
System description 2
Short instructions for
___________
3
configuring a reversing
starter
___________________
Motor protection 4
SIRIUS
SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS ___________________
5
Motor control
___________________
Monitoring functions 6
System Manual
___________________
Outputs 7
___________________
Inputs 8
___________________
Analog value recording 9
___________________
3UF50 compatibility mode 10
___________________
Standard functions 11
___________________
Logic modules 12
___________________
Communication 13
___________________
Mounting, wiring, interfaces 14
___________________
Commissioning and service 15
___________________
Alarms, faults and system
events 16
___________________
Tables 17
08/2013
NEB631605022000/RS-AA/004
Continued on next page
Continuation
Data formats and data

records 18
Dimension drawings 19
Technical data 20
SIRIUS
SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS Example circuits 21
Safety and commissioning
information for EEx areas 22
System Manual
Compartment identification 23
List of abbreviations A
Appendix B
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG 3UF7970-0AA00-0 Copyright © Siemens AG 2005.

Industry Sector Ⓟ 08/2013 Technical data subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Table of contents
1 Introduction................................................................................................................................. 19
1.1 Important information ............................................................................................................. 19
2 System description ...................................................................................................................... 23
2.1 System description - general information ................................................................................ 23
2.2 Overview ................................................................................................................................ 24
2.3 Benefits .................................................................................................................................. 25
2.4 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro........................................................................ 34
2.5 Application example ............................................................................................................... 36
2.6 Check list for selecting a device series ................................................................................... 38
2.7 Overview of functions ............................................................................................................. 40
2.7.1 Protection functions ................................................................................................................ 40
2.7.2 Monitoring functions ............................................................................................................... 40
2.7.3 Safety-oriented tripping .......................................................................................................... 43
2.7.4 Control functions .................................................................................................................... 45
2.7.5 Communication ...................................................................................................................... 46
2.7.6 Standard functions ................................................................................................................. 46
2.7.7 Freely-programmable logic modules ....................................................................................... 47
2.7.8 Operating, service and diagnostics data ................................................................................. 48
2.8 An overview of system components........................................................................................ 50
2.9 Description of system components ......................................................................................... 59
2.9.1 Basic units (BU) ..................................................................................................................... 59
2.9.2 Operator panel (OP) ............................................................................................................... 61
2.9.3 Operator panel with display (OPD) ......................................................................................... 64
2.9.3.1 Description of the operator panel with display ......................................................................... 64
2.9.3.2 Operator controls and display elements of the operator panel with display .............................. 67
2.9.3.3 Menu of the operator panel with display .................................................................................. 68
2.9.3.4 Displays of the operator panel with display ............................................................................. 80
2.9.3.5 Read and adapt main display ................................................................................................. 82
2.9.3.6 Display of measured values in the measured values display ................................................... 85
2.9.3.7 Motor protection and motor control status ............................................................................... 86
2.9.3.8 Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/maintenance
display ................................................................................................................................... 88
2.9.3.9 Status display for PROFIBUS communication......................................................................... 89
2.9.3.10 Displays the current status of all device I/Os ........................................................................... 89
2.9.3.11 Adapt display settings............................................................................................................. 91
2.9.3.12 Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands ............................................................. 93
2.9.3.13 Displaying all pending messages ............................................................................................ 94
2.9.3.14 Displaying all pending warnings .............................................................................................. 94
2.9.3.15 Displaying all pending faults ................................................................................................... 94
2.9.3.16 Reading the device's internal error buffer................................................................................ 95
2.9.3.17 Reading the device's internal event memory ........................................................................... 95
2.9.3.18 Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components .................................. 96
SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

System Manual, 08/2013, NEB631605022000/RS-AA/004 7
Table of contents
2.9.4 Current measuring modules (IM) for the SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S, and
SIMOCODE pro V device series ..............................................................................................97
2.9.5 Current / voltage measuring modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V device series ................98
2.9.6 Decoupling module (DCM) for current / voltage measuring modules ......................................100
2.9.7 Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V when using an operator panel with
display and/or a decoupling module: ......................................................................................104
2.9.8 Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series ..................................................105
2.9.8.1 Spectrum of the expansion modules ......................................................................................105
2.9.8.2 Digital module (DM)...............................................................................................................106
2.9.8.3 Fail-safe digital module (DM-F)..............................................................................................107
2.9.8.4 Analog module (AM)..............................................................................................................109
2.9.8.5 Ground-fault module (EM) .....................................................................................................110
2.9.8.6 Temperature module (TM).....................................................................................................111
2.9.9 Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro S device series ..................................................111
2.9.9.1 Multifunction module .............................................................................................................111
2.9.10 Accessories ..........................................................................................................................112
2.9.11 Software................................................................................................................................114
2.10 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro ............................................................................117
2.10.1 Function blocks .....................................................................................................................117
2.11 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical) .............................................................................120
3 Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter ....................................................................... 141
3.1 Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter - general information ..............................141
3.2 Introduction and objective of the example ..............................................................................142
3.3 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station..................................................143
3.4 Parameterization ...................................................................................................................146
3.5 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFIBUS DP ...................................150
4 Motor protection......................................................................................................................... 153
4.1 Motor protection - general information ...................................................................................153
4.2 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................154
4.3 Overload protection ...............................................................................................................157
4.3.1 Description ............................................................................................................................157
4.3.2 Set current Is1.......................................................................................................................157
4.3.3 Set current Is2.......................................................................................................................159
4.3.4 Application example ..............................................................................................................160
4.3.5 Further overload protection parameters .................................................................................161
4.4 Unbalance protection ............................................................................................................166
4.5 Stalled rotor protection ..........................................................................................................167
4.6 Thermistor protection ............................................................................................................168
5 Motor control ............................................................................................................................. 171
5.1 Motor control - general information ........................................................................................171
5.2 Control stations .....................................................................................................................172
5.2.1 Description ............................................................................................................................172
5.2.2 Operating modes and mode selectors ...................................................................................175

8 System Manual, 08/2013, NEB631605022000/RS-AA/004
Table of contents
5.2.3 Enables and enabled control command ................................................................................ 177

5.2.4 Control station settings ......................................................................................................... 180
5.3 Control functions .................................................................................................................. 182
5.3.1 Description of control functions ............................................................................................. 182
5.3.2 Control functions - general settings and definitions ............................................................... 187
5.3.3 "Overload relay" control function ........................................................................................... 192
5.3.4 "Direct starter" control function ............................................................................................. 194
5.3.5 "Reversing starter" control function ....................................................................................... 196
5.3.6 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" control function ......................................................... 199
5.3.7 "Star-delta starter" control function ....................................................................................... 202
5.3.8 "Star delta reversing starter" control function ........................................................................ 205
5.3.9 "Dahlander" control function ................................................................................................. 209
5.3.10 "Dahlander reversing starter" control function ....................................................................... 212
5.3.11 "Pole-changing starter" control function ................................................................................ 216
5.3.12 "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function ................................................................. 219
5.3.13 "Solenoid valve" control function ........................................................................................... 223
5.3.14 "Positioner" control function .................................................................................................. 225
5.3.15 "Soft starter" control function ................................................................................................ 230
5.3.16 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function ........................................................... 232
5.4 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for the
control functions ................................................................................................................... 236
6 Monitoring functions................................................................................................................... 239
6.1 Monitoring function - general information .............................................................................. 239
6.2 Earth-fault monitoring ........................................................................................................... 240
6.2.1 Description ........................................................................................................................... 240
6.2.2 Limits of fault current measurement ...................................................................................... 242
6.2.3 Internal earth-fault monitoring ............................................................................................... 244
6.2.4 External ground-fault monitoring (with 3UL22 residual current transformer)........................... 245
6.2.5 External ground-fault monitoring (with residual current transformer 3UL23)........................... 246
6.3 Current limit monitoring ........................................................................................................ 249
6.3.1 Description ........................................................................................................................... 249
6.3.2 I> (upper limit) ...................................................................................................................... 250
6.3.3 I< (lower limit)....................................................................................................................... 251
6.4 Voltage monitoring ............................................................................................................... 253
6.5 Cos phi monitoring ............................................................................................................... 256
6.6 Active power monitoring ....................................................................................................... 258
6.7 0/4 ... 20 mA monitoring ....................................................................................................... 260
6.8 Operation monitoring ............................................................................................................ 264
6.8.1 Description ........................................................................................................................... 264
6.8.2 Operating hours monitoring .................................................................................................. 265
6.8.3 Motor stop time monitoring ................................................................................................... 266
6.8.4 Monitoring the number of starts ............................................................................................ 266
6.9 Temperature monitoring (analog).......................................................................................... 268
6.10 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing .............................................................................. 270
6.11 Hysteresis for monitoring functions ....................................................................................... 271

Table of contents
7 Outputs..................................................................................................................................... 273
7.1 Output - general information ..................................................................................................273
7.2 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................274
7.3 Basic unit outputs ..................................................................................................................276
7.4 Operator panel LEDs.............................................................................................................278
7.5 Digital module outputs ...........................................................................................................281
7.6 Analog module output ...........................................................................................................283
7.7 Cyclic Send ...........................................................................................................................287
7.8 Acyclic Send .........................................................................................................................289
8 Inputs ....................................................................................................................................... 291
8.1 Inputs - general information ...................................................................................................291
8.2 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................292
8.3 Basic unit inputs ....................................................................................................................294
8.4 Operator panel buttons..........................................................................................................296
8.5 Digital module inputs .............................................................................................................298
8.6 Temperature module inputs ...................................................................................................302
8.7 Analog module inputs ............................................................................................................304
8.8 Cyclic Receive ......................................................................................................................306
8.9 Acyclic Receive .....................................................................................................................307
9 Analog value recording ............................................................................................................... 309
9.1 Analog value recording - general information .........................................................................309
9.2 Description ............................................................................................................................310
9.3 Functional principle ...............................................................................................................311
10 3UF50 compatibility mode ........................................................................................................... 313
10.1 3UF50 compatibility mode - general information ....................................................................313
10.2 Description ............................................................................................................................314
10.3 Diagram of send and receive data .........................................................................................315
10.4 Diagram of diagnostics data ..................................................................................................316
11 Standard functions ..................................................................................................................... 319
11.1 Standard functions - general information ...............................................................................319
11.2 Introduction ...........................................................................................................................320
11.3 Test / Reset ..........................................................................................................................321
11.4 Test position feedback (TPF).................................................................................................325
11.5 External fault .........................................................................................................................327
11.6 Operational protection off (OPO) ...........................................................................................329

Table of contents
11.6.1 Response to positioner control function ................................................................................ 329

11.6.2 Response to other control functions...................................................................................... 331
11.7 Power failure monitoring (UVO) ............................................................................................ 332
11.8 Emergency start ................................................................................................................... 334
11.9 Safety-oriented tripping ........................................................................................................ 336
11.10 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring) ................................................................ 342
11.11 Timestamping ...................................................................................................................... 344
12 Logic modules........................................................................................................................... 345
12.1 Logic blocks - general information ........................................................................................ 345
12.2 Introduction .......................................................................................................................... 346
12.3 Truth table for 3I / 1O ........................................................................................................... 347
12.6 Counter ................................................................................................................................ 352
12.7 Timer ................................................................................................................................... 354
12.8 Signal conditioner ................................................................................................................. 359
12.9 Non-volatile elements ........................................................................................................... 362
12.10 Flashing ............................................................................................................................... 365
12.11 Flickering ............................................................................................................................. 366
12.12 Limit monitor ........................................................................................................................ 367
12.13 Calculators (calculation modules) ......................................................................................... 371
13 Communication ......................................................................................................................... 375
13.1 Communication - general information ................................................................................... 375
13.2 Definitions ............................................................................................................................ 376
13.3 Data transfer ........................................................................................................................ 378
13.4 Fail-safe data transfer via PROFIBUS / PROFIsafe .............................................................. 380
13.5 Telegram description and data access.................................................................................. 381
13.5.1 Cyclic data ........................................................................................................................... 381
13.5.2 Diagnostics data and alarms ................................................................................................ 382
13.5.3 Structure of the slave diagnostics ......................................................................................... 383
13.6 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in DP master systems ........................................................... 392
13.6.1 Slave operating modes ......................................................................................................... 392
13.6.2 Preparing the data transfer ................................................................................................... 392
13.6.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the configuring software ............ 393
13.6.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via GSD) in
STEP7 HW Config................................................................................................................ 394
13.6.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro................................. 395
13.6.6 Compatibility of SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V.................................................... 396

Table of contents
13.7 Evaluating diagnostics data ...................................................................................................397

13.7.1 Evaluating diagnostics data ...................................................................................................397
13.7.2 SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD ....................................................................................397
13.7.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES ................................398
13.8 Data records .........................................................................................................................400
13.9 Parameterization via PROFIBUS ...........................................................................................401
13.9.1 SIMOCODE ES Premium ......................................................................................................401
13.9.2 SIMATIC PDM ......................................................................................................................401
13.9.3 Parameter data during startup ...............................................................................................402
13.10 Timestamping/time synchronization .......................................................................................403
14 Mounting, wiring, interfaces ......................................................................................................... 405
14.1 Mounting, wiring, interfaces - general information ..................................................................405
14.2 General information about mounting and wiring .....................................................................406
14.3 Mounting ...............................................................................................................................408
14.3.1 Mounting basic units, expansion modules, and the decoupling module ..................................408
14.3.2 Mounting of digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe..............................................410
14.3.3 Mounting of current measuring modules ................................................................................411
14.3.4 Mounting the current / voltage measuring modules ................................................................412
14.3.5 Mounting of the operator panel and operator panel with display .............................................413
14.3.6 Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel .........................................415
14.4 Wiring ...................................................................................................................................417
14.4.1 Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module ..................................................417
14.4.2 Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe ................................................................436
14.4.3 Current measuring module ....................................................................................................441
14.4.4 Current / voltage measuring modules ....................................................................................442
14.4.5 Measuring current with an external current transformer (interposing transformer)...................444
14.5 System interfaces..................................................................................................................447
14.5.1 General .................................................................................................................................447
14.5.2 System interfaces on basic units, expansion modules, decoupling module, current
measuring modules and current / voltage measuring modules ...............................................448
14.5.3 System interfaces on the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe .........................453
14.5.4 System interfaces on the operator panel and the operator panel with display .........................453
14.5.5 Closing the system interfaces with the system interface cover ...............................................457
14.6 PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D socket..............................................................................458
14.7 Mounting the bus terminal .....................................................................................................459
14.8 Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP.........................................................................460
15 Commissioning and service......................................................................................................... 463
15.1 Commissioning and service - general information ..................................................................463
15.2 General information about commissioning and service ..........................................................464
15.3 Commissioning .....................................................................................................................466
15.3.1 Step sequence ......................................................................................................................466
15.3.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address .......................................................................................467
15.3.3 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel ...............................468
15.3.4 Diagnostics via LED display on the modules DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe .......................469

Table of contents
15.4 Service ................................................................................................................................. 470

15.4.1 Preventive maintenance ....................................................................................................... 470
15.4.2 Backing up and saving parameters ....................................................................................... 472
15.4.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro components ............................................................................... 474
15.4.4 Restoring factory settings ..................................................................................................... 476
15.5 Reading our error buffer / error log (protocol) ........................................................................ 478
15.6 Event memory ...................................................................................................................... 480
16 Alarms, faults and system events ................................................................................................ 481
16.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - general information........................................................ 481
16.2 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling ................................................................ 482
17 Tables ...................................................................................................................................... 493
17.1 Tables - general information ................................................................................................. 493
17.2 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for the
control functions ................................................................................................................... 494
17.3 Abbreviations and specifications ........................................................................................... 497
17.4 Socket assignment table - digital .......................................................................................... 499
17.5 Socket assignment table - analog ......................................................................................... 506
17.6 Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics.......................................................................... 508
18 Data formats and data records .................................................................................................... 513
18.1 Data formats and data records - general information............................................................. 513
18.2 Handling data records .......................................................................................................... 514
18.2.1 Writing / reading data records ............................................................................................... 514
18.2.2 Abbreviations ....................................................................................................................... 516
18.2.3 Specifications ....................................................................................................................... 517
18.3 Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics ............................................................................... 518
18.4 Data record 63 - Analog value recording ............................................................................... 520
18.5 Data record 67 - Process image output................................................................................. 521
18.6 Data record 69 - Process image input ................................................................................... 522
18.7 Data record 72 - Error buffer................................................................................................. 523
18.8 Data record 73 - Event memory ............................................................................................ 524
18.9 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics ..................................................................................... 525
18.10 Data record 94 - measured values ........................................................................................ 532
18.11 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data ........................................................................ 533
18.12 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1 ....................................................................... 534
18.13 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug binary) ................................................... 541
18.14 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1 ................................................................. 545
18.15 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2 (plug binary) ............................................. 552
18.16 Data record 139 - Marking .................................................................................................... 555

Table of contents
18.17 Data record 160 - Communication parameters.......................................................................556

18.18 Data record 165 - Identification ..............................................................................................557
18.19 Data record 202 - Acyclic receive ..........................................................................................558
18.20 Data record 203 - Acyclic send ..............................................................................................559
18.21 Data record 224 - Password protection ..................................................................................560
18.22 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions ..........................561
18.22.1 Overload relay.......................................................................................................................561
18.22.2 Direct starter .........................................................................................................................563
18.22.3 Reversing starter ...................................................................................................................564
18.22.4 Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) .....................................................................................565
18.22.5 Star-delta starter ...................................................................................................................566
18.22.6 Star-delta reversing starter ....................................................................................................567
18.22.7 Dahlander .............................................................................................................................568
18.22.8 Dahlander reversing starter ...................................................................................................569
18.22.9 Pole-changing starter ............................................................................................................570
18.22.10 Pole-changing reversing starter .............................................................................................571
18.22.11 Solenoid valve .......................................................................................................................572
18.22.12 Positioner ..............................................................................................................................573
18.22.13 Soft starter ............................................................................................................................574
18.22.14 Soft starter with reversing contactor.......................................................................................575
19 Dimension drawings ................................................................................................................... 577
19.1 Dimension drawings - general information .............................................................................577
19.2 3UF70 basic unit ...................................................................................................................578
19.2.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 basic unit ..................................................................................578
19.2.2 Basic unit SIMOCODE pro S 3UF7020 ..................................................................................579
19.2.3 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 basic unit ..................................................................................580
19.3 3UF710 current measuring module........................................................................................581
19.3.1 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7101, 2.4
A to 25 A ...............................................................................................................................581
19.3.2 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A........................582
19.3.4 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A ...................................584
19.4 Current / voltage measuring modules ....................................................................................586
19.4.1 Current / voltage measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A .........................................................................................................586
19.4.3 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A ................588
19.4.4 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A............................589
19.5 3UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator panels ................................................................................591
19.5.1 3UF7200 operator panel........................................................................................................591
19.5.2 3UF7210 operator panel with display .....................................................................................592
19.6 Expansion modules / decoupling module ...............................................................................593
19.7 Multifunction module .............................................................................................................594

Table of contents
19.8 Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-PROFIsafe ........................................................................ 595

19.9 Accessories.......................................................................................................................... 596
19.9.1 Door adapter ........................................................................................................................ 596
19.9.2 Operator panel adapter ........................................................................................................ 597
19.9.3 Initialization module .............................................................................................................. 598
19.9.4 Bus connecting terminal ....................................................................................................... 599
19.9.5 3UL23 residual current transformer ...................................................................................... 599
20 Technical data .......................................................................................................................... 601
20.1 Technical data - general information ..................................................................................... 601
20.2 Common technical data ........................................................................................................ 602
20.3 Technical data of the basic units........................................................................................... 604
20.4 Technical data of the current measuring modules or current / voltage measuring modules .... 607
20.5 Technical data of the decoupling module .............................................................................. 609
20.6 Technical data of the expansion modules ............................................................................. 610
20.6.1 Technical data of the digital modules .................................................................................... 610
20.6.2 Technical data, digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe ....................................... 611
20.6.3 Technical data of the DM-F LOCAL digital module ................................................................ 613
20.6.4 Technical data of the DM-F-PROFIsafe digital module .......................................................... 615
20.6.5 Safety-related technical data of the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe ......... 616
20.6.6 Technical data of the analog module .................................................................................... 616
20.6.7 Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7500-1AA00-0 .............................................. 618
20.6.8 Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7510-1AA00-0 .............................................. 619
20.6.9 Technical data of the temperature module ............................................................................ 620
20.7 Technical data of the multifunction module ........................................................................... 621
20.8 Technical data of the operator panels ................................................................................... 624
20.8.1 Technical data of the operator panel ..................................................................................... 624
20.8.2 Technical data of the operator panel with display .................................................................. 625
20.9 Technical data compartment identification ............................................................................ 626
20.10 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA
and 690 V ............................................................................................................................ 627
20.11 Typical reaction times........................................................................................................... 631
20.11.1 SIMOCODE pro C/V basic units ........................................................................................... 631
20.11.2 SIMOCODE pro S device series ........................................................................................... 632
21 Example circuits ........................................................................................................................ 633
21.1 Example circuits - general information .................................................................................. 633
21.2 Example circuits - purpose, steps, preconditions................................................................... 634
21.3 "Overload relay" example circuit ........................................................................................... 635
21.3.1 "Overload relay" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V .................................................. 635
21.3.2 "Overload relay" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S ............................................................ 636
21.3.3 "Overload relay" function circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V ..................................... 637
21.3.4 "Overload relay" function circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S ............................................... 638

Table of contents
21.4 "Direct starter" example circuit ...............................................................................................639

21.4.1 "Direct-on-line starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V ..........................................639
21.4.2 "Direct-on-line starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S ....................................................640
21.4.3 "Direct-on-line starter" function circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V .............................641
21.4.4 "Direct-on-line starter" function circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S .......................................642
21.5 "Reversing starter" example circuit ........................................................................................643
21.5.1 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V ...............................................643
21.5.2 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S..........................................................644
21.5.3 "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V ..................................645
21.5.4 "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S ............................................646
21.6 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" example circuit ...................................................647
21.6.1 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V ..........647
21.6.2 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S.....................648
21.6.3 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" function circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C,
pro V .....................................................................................................................................649
21.6.4 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" function circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S........650
21.7 "Star-delta starter" circuit example .........................................................................................651
21.7.1 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta) - SIMOCODE pro V...............651
21.7.2 Circuit diagram of star-delta starter (current measuring in delta) - SIMOCODE pro S .............652
21.7.3 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta) - SIMOCODE pro
V ...........................................................................................................................................653
21.7.4 Functional diagram of star-delta starter (current measuring in delta) - SIMOCODE pro S .......654
21.7.5 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable) - SIMOCODE pro
V ...........................................................................................................................................655
21.7.6 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable) -
SIMOCODE pro V .................................................................................................................656
SIMOCODE pro S .................................................................................................................657
21.8 "Star-delta reversing starter" circuit example..........................................................................658
21.8.1 "Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram ..........................................................................658
21.8.2 "Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram .............................................................659
21.9 "Dahlander" circuit diagram ...................................................................................................660
21.9.1 "Dahlander" circuit diagram ...................................................................................................660
21.9.2 "Dahlander" function circuit diagram ......................................................................................661
21.10 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram .........................................................................662
21.10.1 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram .........................................................................662
21.10.2 "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram ............................................................663
21.11 "Pole-changing starter" example circuit..................................................................................665
21.11.1 "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram ..................................................................................665
21.11.2 "Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram .....................................................................666
21.12 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit example ..................................................................667
21.12.1 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram ...................................................................667
21.12.2 "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram ......................................................668
21.13 "Solenoid valve" example circuit ............................................................................................670
21.13.1 "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram.............................................................................................670
21.13.2 "Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram................................................................................671

Table of contents
21.14 "Positioner" example circuit .................................................................................................. 672

21.14.1 "Positioner 1" circuit diagram ................................................................................................ 672
21.14.2 "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram ................................................................................... 673
21.15 "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) circuit example ................................... 682
21.15.1 "Soft starter" circuit diagram (for example, 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) - SIMOCODE
pro V .................................................................................................................................... 682
21.15.2 Circuit diagram of soft starter (for example, 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) - SIMOCODE
pro S .................................................................................................................................... 683
21.15.3 "Soft starter" function circuit diagram (for example, 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) -
SIMOCODE pro V ................................................................................................................ 684
21.15.4 Functional diagram of soft starter (for example, 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) -
SIMOCODE pro S ................................................................................................................ 685
21.16 "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407) example circuits................................................. 686
21.16.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407) .................................................. 686
21.16.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)..................................... 687
21.17 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) example circuit ........... 688
21.17.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) ........... 688
21.17.2 Function circuit diagram of "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404).............................................................................................................................. 689
21.18 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (example 3RW405, 3RW407) example circuit ............. 690
21.18.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)........................... 690
21.18.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407) ............. 691
21.19 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" example circuit .................................................................. 692
21.19.1 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit diagram................................................................... 692
21.19.2 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" function circuit diagram ..................................................... 693
22 Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas ..................................................................... 695
22.1 Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas - general information ........................... 695
22.2 Information and standards .................................................................................................... 696
22.3 Set-up and commissioning ................................................................................................... 698
22.3.1 Operating Instructions .......................................................................................................... 698
22.3.2 Setting the rated motor current ............................................................................................. 698
22.3.3 SIMOCODE pro with thermistor input ................................................................................... 700
22.3.4 Sensor circuit wiring ............................................................................................................. 701
22.3.5 Short-circuit protection for type of coordination 2 according to IEC 60947-4-1 ....................... 701
22.3.6 Cable protection ................................................................................................................... 702
22.3.7 Test...................................................................................................................................... 702
22.3.8 Further safety guidelines ...................................................................................................... 703
22.3.9 Ambient conditions ............................................................................................................... 704
22.3.10 Safety data........................................................................................................................... 704

Table of contents
22.4 Maintenance and repairs .......................................................................................................705

22.5 Warranty ...............................................................................................................................706
22.6 Further information ................................................................................................................707
23 Compartment identification .......................................................................................................... 709
23.1 Compartment identification - general information ...................................................................709
23.2 Introduction to compartment identification ..............................................................................710
23.3 Hardware and software requirements for compartment identification......................................712
23.4 Operating compartment identification ....................................................................................713
23.5 Mounting, wiring, interfaces, compartment identification ........................................................716
23.6 Commissioning and service compartment identification .........................................................719
23.7 Alarm, fault, and system events for compartment identification ..............................................720
A List of abbreviations ................................................................................................................... 721
A.1 List of abbreviations ..............................................................................................................721
B Appendix .................................................................................................................................. 723
B.1 Correction sheet ....................................................................................................................723
Glossary ................................................................................................................................... 725
Index ........................................................................................................................................ 745

Introduction 1
1.1 Important information
Purpose of this manual

The SIMOCODE pro System Manual describes in detail the motor management system and
its functions. It contains information about configuring, commissioning, service and
maintenance. The user is introduced to the system quickly and practically using a typical
reversing starter application as an example.
In addition to providing assistance for troubleshooting and fault elimination, this manual also
contains information of special importance to service and maintenance personnel.
To assist in configuration, this manual also contains circuit diagrams, dimension drawings
and technical data of system components.
Required basic knowledge

To understand this manual you will require basic knowledge of low-voltage controls and
distribution, digital circuit engineering and automation technology.
Topics
This manual consists of instructive chapters for reference purposes. The following table lists
the most relevant topics. The highlighted topics correspond largely with the content structure
of the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization and service software:
Topic Target group

System description Configuring engineers, planners
Short instructions for commissioning a reversing Configuring engineers, planners, technicians,
starter commissioning engineers
Motor protection Configuring engineers, commissioning engineers
Motor control Configuring engineers, PLC programmers
Monitoring functions Configuring engineers, programmers,
commissioning engineers, service personnel
Outputs Configuring engineers, planners, programmers
Inputs Configuring engineers, planners, programmers
Analog value recording Configuring engineers, programmers,
commissioning engineers, service personnel
3UF50 compatibility mode Configuring engineers, PLC programmers
Standard functions Configuring engineers, programmers
Logic modules Configuring engineers, programmers
Communication Configuring engineers, PLC programmers

Introduction
Topic Target group

Mounting, wiring, interfaces Technicians, electricians, service and
maintenance personnel
Commissioning and servicing Commissioning engineers, technicians, service
and maintenance personnel
Alarm, fault, and system messages Commissioning engineers, maintenance and
service personnel, configuring engineers, PLC
programmers
Scope of application
This manual is applicable to the listed SIMOCODE pro system components. It contains a
description of the components applicable at the time of printing the manual. SIEMENS
reserves the right to include updated information about new components or new versions of
components in a Product Information.
Definitions
When "SIMOCODE pro" is referred to, the "SIMOCODE pro S," "SIMOCODE pro C," and
"SIMOCODE pro V" device series are meant.
SIMOCODE pro response tables

Specific responses (deactivated, signaling, warning, tripping) can be parameterized for
various SIMOCODE pro functions, such as overload. These are always displayed in tabular
form:
● "X" = Applicable
● "-" = not applicable
● Default values are marked "d" for "default" in parentheses.
Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

Tripping — X (d) X
Warning X (d) X —
Signaling X X —
Deactivated X X X (d)
Delay 0 to 25.5 s — —
(Default: 0)

Introduction
Short description of the responses:

● Tripping: The contactor controls QE* are tripped. A fault message is generated which is
available as a diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP. The fault message and the device-internal
signal remain on until the appropriate length of time has elapsed or the cause of the fault
has been eliminated and acknowledged.
● Warning: In addition to the device-internal signal, a warning signal is generated that is
available as a diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP.
● Signaling: Only a device-internal signal is generated, which can be further processed as
required.
● Deactivated: The appropriate function is switched off, no signals are generated.
A delay time can also be set for specific responses.
Further information
● Please read the operating instructions of the respective components. You can find the
Operating Instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Operating Instructions
(www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals)
● You will need the following manuals in addition to this system manual:
– Manual SIMOCODE pro Safety fail-safe digital modules
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)
– The relevant manual for the DP master.
You will find further information on the Internet:
● Internet (www.siemens.com/simocode)
● Information and Download Center (www.siemens.com/sirius/infomaterial)
● Product Information System (ProdIS) (www.siemens.com/sirius/support)
● Certificates (www.siemens.com/sirius/approvals).
Further support (Service and Support)

Technical Assistance:
Phone: +49 (0) 911-895-5900 (8°° to 17°° CET)
Fax: +49 (0) 911-895-5907
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: Service and Support (www.siemens.com/sirius/technical-assistance)
Correction sheet
A correction sheet is included at the end of this manual. Please use it to enter your
suggestions for improvements, additions and corrections, and send it back to us. This will
help us to improve the next edition of the manual.

Introduction
Disclaimer of liability
The products described here have been developed to perform safety-related functions as
part of a complete plant or machine. In general, a complete safety system consists of
sensors, evaluation units, signaling devices and methods for safe tripping. The manufacturer
is responsible for ensuring safe functioning of the complete plant or machine. Siemens AG,
its subsidiaries, and associated companies (hereinafter referred to as "Siemens") are not in a
position to guarantee every characteristic of a complete plant or machine not designed by
Siemens.
Siemens also denies all responsibility for any recommendations that are made or implied in
the following description. No new guarantee, warranty, or liability claims above those
standard to Siemens can be derived from the following description.

System description 2
2.1 System description - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find an introduction and general information about the
SIMOCODE pro system, including e.g.
● Characteristics of the SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S, and SIMOCODE pro V
device series
● Simplification of SIMOCODE pro circuits
● Overview of functions
● An overview of system components
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target groups:
● Planners and configuring engineers
● People who are already using SIMOCODE DP but wish to use SIMOCODE pro in the
future
● Commissioning engineers, service and maintenance personnel
● System integrators / process technology
Required knowledge
You will require the following knowledge:
● Basic knowledge about load feeders
● Basic knowledge about motor protection
● Basic knowledge of control engineering
● Basic knowledge of industrial bus technology

System description
2.2 Overview
2.2 Overview
Overview
SIMOCODE pro (SIRIUS Motor Management and Control Device) is a flexible and modular
motor management system for motors with constant speeds in low-voltage applications. It
optimizes the link between the control system and the motor feeder, increases plant
availability and allows significant savings to be made during installation, commissioning,
operation and maintenance. SIMOCODE pro is installed in the low-voltage switchgear
system and links the higher-level automation system (via PROFIBUS DP) and the motor
feeder intelligently. It comprises the following functions:
● Multifunctional and electronic full motor protection, independently of the automation
system
● Integrated control functions for motor control (instead of hardware)
● Detailed operating, service and diagnostics data
● Fail-safe shutdown up to SIL3 using fail-safe expansion modules (SIMOCODE pro V
only)
● Open communication via PROFIBUS DP, the standard for fieldbus systems.
● Parameterization with the SIMOCODE ES software package.
Only the switching and short-circuit protection mechanisms of the main circuit (contactors,
circuit breakers, fuses) are additionally needed.

System description
2.3 Benefits
2.3 Benefits
Benefits
● The quantity of cabling required between the motor feeder and the PLC is reduced
significantly by connecting the entire motor feeder to the process control system via the
bus (see Fig. 2-1 / 2-2 "SIMOCODE pro, integrated in the main circuit, control circuit and
at automation level (PLC)")
● Automated processes are decentralized by means of configurable control and monitoring
functions in the feeder. This saves automation system resources and ensures that the
feeder is fully functional and protected even if the control system or bus system fails.
● By recording and monitoring operating, service and diagnostics data in the feeder and
process control system, plant availability is increased, and the feeder is easier to service
and maintain.
● The user can implement plant-specific requirements for every motor feeder thanks to the
high degree of modularity.
● SIMOCODE pro provides compact solutions and different levels of functions for every
customer application.
● By replacing the control circuit hardware with an integrated control function, the quantity
of required hardware components with wiring is reduced. This drives down storage costs
and limits potential wiring errors.
● Using electronic full motor protection allows the motors to be used more efficiently and
ensures that the tripping characteristic remains stable and the tripping response stays the
same, even after many years.

System description
2.3 Benefits
Figure 2-1 SIMOCODE pro V/C, integrated in the main circuit, control circuit and at automation level (PLC)

System description
2.3 Benefits
Figure 2-2 SIMOCODE pro S, integrated in the main circuit, control circuit and at automation level (PLC)

System description
2.3 Benefits
Features
Multifunction, solid-state full motor protection for rated motor currents up to 820 A
SIMOCODE pro provides comprehensive protection of the motor feeder by means of a
combination of delayable, multi-level protection and monitoring functions:
● Current-dependent electronic overload protection (CLASS 5 to 40) (see Chapter Overload
protection (Page 157))
● Thermistor motor protection (see Chapter Thermistor protection (Page 168)).
● Phase failure / phase unbalance protection (see Chapter Unbalance protection
(Page 166))
● Stalled rotor protection (see Chapter Stalled rotor protection (Page 167))
● Monitoring of adjustable limit values for the motor current (see Chapter Current limit
monitoring (Page 249))
● Voltage monitoring (see Chapter Voltage monitoring (Page 253))
● Power monitoring (see Chapter Active power monitoring (Page 258))
● Cos phi monitoring (no-load operation / load shedding) (see Chapter Cos phi monitoring
(Page 256))
● Ground-fault monitoring (see Chapter Earth-fault monitoring (Page 240))
● Temperature monitoring, e.g. using Pt100 / Pt1000 (see Chapter Temperature monitoring
(analog) (Page 268))
● Monitoring of operating hours (see Chapter Operating hours monitoring (Page 265))
● Motor stop time monitoring (see Chapter Motor stop time monitoring (Page 266))
● Monitoring the number of starts within a specific period of time (see Chapter Monitoring
the number of starts (Page 266)).
● Safety-related tripping of motor feeders, e.g. fail-safe tripping in the process industry,
locally or via PROFIBUS DP (see System Manual SIMOCODE pro Safety fail-safe digital
modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)).
Recording of measured curves

SIMOCODE pro is able to record measured curves and can, for example, illustrate the
characteristic curve of the motor current during motor startup. See Chapter Analog value
recording (Page 309).

System description
2.3 Benefits
Flexible motor control with integrated control functions (instead of extensive hardware
interlocks):
SIMOCODE pro has many pre-defined, integrated motor control functions, including all
necessary connections and interlocks:
● Overload relays (see Chapter "Overload relay" control function (Page 192))
● Direct-on-line starters (see Chapter "Direct starter" control function (Page 194))
● Reversing starters (see Chapter "Reversing starter" control function (Page 196))
● Star-delta starters, possibly combined with reversing starters (see Chapters "Star-delta
starter" control function (Page 202) and "Star delta reversing starter" control function
(Page 205))
● Two speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing starters), possibly combined
with reversing starter (see Chapters "Pole-changing starter" control function (Page 216)
and "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function (Page 219))
● Two speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, possibly combined with reversing
starter (see Chapters "Dahlander" control function (Page 209) and "Dahlander reversing
starter" control function (Page 212))
● Positioner control (see Chapter "Positioner" control function (Page 225))
● Solenoid valve control (see Chapter "Solenoid valve" control function (Page 223))
● Circuit breaker control (see Chapter "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" control
function (Page 199))
● Soft starter control, possibly combined with reversing starter (see Chapters "Soft starter"
control function (Page 230) and "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function
(Page 232)).
These control functions are pre-defined in SIMOCODE pro and can be assigned freely to
device inputs and outputs (including PROFIBUS DP).
These pre-defined control functions can also be adjusted flexibly to meet customer
requirements of the motor feeder, without requiring additional auxiliary relays in the control
circuit. This is achieved by means of freely parameterizable logic modules (truth tables,
counters, timers, pulse width modulators, etc.) (see Chapter Logic modules (Page 345)) and
standard functions (power failure monitoring, emergency start, external fault monitoring, ...)
(see Chapter Standard functions (Page 319)).
Detailed operating, service and diagnostics data:

SIMOCODE pro provides a range of operating, service and diagnostics data and helps to
detect impending faults in good time and stop these occurring with preventative measures. If
a fault occurs, it can be diagnosed, traced and resolved within a short period of time. Plant
downtime is thus reduced to a minimum or does not occur at all. See Chapter Operating,
service and diagnostics data (Page 48).

System description
2.3 Benefits
Communication:
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface. This replaces all individual
wiring and distribution boxes (normally required to exchange data with a higher-level
automation system) with a single two-wire cable.
SIMOCODE pro supports:
● Baud rates up to 1.5 Mbit / s or 12 Mbit / s
● Automatic baud rate detection
● Communication with up to 3 masters
● Time synchronization via PROFIBUS (SIMATIC S7)
● High-precision timestamping (SIMATIC S7)
● Cyclic services (DPV0) and acyclic services (DPV1)
● DPV1 communication downstream from the Y-link.
See Chapter Communication (Page 375).
Areas of application
SIMOCODE pro is usually deployed in automated processes that would incur great expense
during downtime (e. g. steel or cement industry), where it is essential to prevent plant
downtime by utilizing detailed operating, service and diagnostics data and ensure that faults
can be detected rapidly if they occur.
SIMOCODE pro is modular, compact and specifically designed to be deployed in motor
control centers (MCC) in the process industry, and power plant engineering.
Protection and control of motors:
● In potentially explosive areas for type of protection EEx e/d according to ATEX directive
94 / 9 / EC (see also Chapter Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
(Page 695))
● Heavy-starting motors (paper, cement and metal industries; water management)
● In high-availability plants (chemical, oil, and raw material processing industry, power
plants)
SIMOCODE pro is especially designed for the chemical industry (including oil and gas), the
steel industry, water management, and the paper, pharmaceutical, cement and glass
industries. Further applications include power plant engineering and diamond, gold and
platinum mines. Based on the experience gained with the predecessor system
SIMOCODE DP, SIMOCODE pro has been tailored even more specifically to the
requirements of these industries. The availability of motors and thus the entire process plays
an important role in these industries. Downtimes caused by faults often lead to high costs.
This is why it is even more important to detect potential faults early on and to initiate
targeted, preventative measures. SIMOCODE pro provides the user with a motor
management system based on years of experience and the latest technology.

System description
2.3 Benefits
Device series
SIMOCODE pro can be subdivided into device series that offer different grades of
functionality:
● SIMOCODE pro C - a compact system for direct-on-line and reversing starters and/or for
controlling a circuit breaker (MCCB).
● SIMOCODE pro S - the smart system for direct-on-line, reversing, and star-delta starters
or controlling a circuit breaker or soft starter. Its expandability with a multifunction module
ensures there are always plenty of inputs and outputs. It enables precise ground-fault
monitoring via the 3UL23 residual current transformer and temperature measurement.
● SIMOCODE pro V - a variable system which offers numerous functions, such as voltage
measurement, fail-safe shutdown, and PROFINET communication, in addition to all the
SIMOCODE pro C/pro S functions.
For each feeder, every system comprises a basic unit and a separate current measuring
module. Both modules are connected to each other electronically via the system interface,
by means of a connecting cable, and can be installed together as a unit (behind one another)
or separately (side-by-side). An operator panel can also be connected optionally via the
second system interface on the basic unit, and installed in the switchgear cabinet door. The
current measuring module and the operator panel are connected to the basic unit via
connecting cables, which also supply the power. More inputs, outputs and functions can be
added to the SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V basic units by means of optional
expansion modules, thus supplementing the inputs and outputs already existing on the basic
unit. All modules are connected by connecting cables. The connecting cables are available
with different lengths (ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.3 m, 0.5 m; round cable 0.5 m, 1.0 m,
2.5 m).
NOTICE
Maximum length of the connecting cable
The total length of all cables must not exceed 3 m on either of the system interfaces of the
basic unit!
NOTICE
The maximum distance between modules
The maximum distance between the modules (e. g. between the basic unit and the current
measuring module) must not exceed 2.5m.
Additional control programs are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V (star-delta starters,

Dahlanders, pole-changing starters, soft starters (each also possible in combination with
reversing starter), solenoid valves and positioners). SIMOCODE pro V is also particularly
versatile. Its functionality can be extended, if required, for example,
● The number and type of binary inputs and outputs can be increased in stages and
adapted.
● A current / voltage measuring module can be used for additional voltage measurement
and for monitoring power-related measured values (power management).
● A temperature module enables the evaluation of several analog temperature sensors.

System description
2.3 Benefits
● A ground-fault detection system can be integrated together with a summation current

transformer.
● An analog module extends the system by additional analog inputs and outputs, for
example, for fill-level or flow-rate monitoring.
● In addition to the standard operator panel (OP), an operator panel with display (OPD) is
optionally available (basic unit SIMOCODE pro V from version *E03*).
SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro S are upwardly-compatible with SIMOCODE pro V.
This means you can combine different series in your plant according to functional
requirements.
Depending on functional requirements, the systems can be used simultaneously in a low-
voltage switchboard without any problems and without any additional effort.
Parameterization of SIMOCODE pro C or SIMOCODE pro S can be transferred without a
problem.
Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S, and SIMOCODE pro V protect and control the motor
feeder independently of the automation system. Even if the automation system (PLC) fails,
or if communication is disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully protected and controllable.
SIMOCODE pro can be used without being connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can easily be
connected later, if required.
Typical configuration
The following scheme shows a typical hardware configuration of SIMOCODE pro C,
SIMOCODE pro S, and SIMOCODE pro V:
Figure 2-3 Typical SIMOCODE pro C hardware configuration

System description
2.3 Benefits
Figure 2-4 Typical SIMOCODE pro S hardware configuration
Figure 2-5 Typical SIMOCODE pro V hardware configuration
For information about system components, see Chapter Description of system components
(Page 59).

System description
2.4 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro
Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro

Individual components are used for control, monitoring and signal pre-processing. The
component and wiring requirements for this type of configuration are as follows:
● Use and wiring of overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current transformers
and analog/digital converters
● Wiring of the control circuit
● Connection of start / stop control devices
● The contactor must be brought into locking mode via the auxiliary switches
● Wiring of the interlocks
The following figure illustrates the conventional configuration of a direct starter:
Figure 2-6 Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)

System description
Configuration with SIMOCODE pro

SIMOCODE pro only is used to perform all control, monitoring and signal pre-processing
functions.
The advantages of this configuration are as follows:
● Additional overload relays, thermistor evaluation devices, current transformers and
analog/digital converters are not necessary.
● The wiring of the control circuit (interlocking) is simplified.
● The start and stop switches are wired directly to the inputs of the basic unit.
● The contactor coil is energized via the output of the basic unit. An auxiliary contact for
locking is not required.
The following figure illustrates a configuration with SIMOCODE pro:
Figure 2-7 Configuration of a load feeder (direct-on-line starter) with SIMOCODE pro

System description
2.5 Application example
Description
The fill level of a liquid container is being monitored. A pump keeps the liquid level (reference
value) almost constant by pumping more liquid into the container. The fill level (actual value)
is measured by the fill level indicator and output as an analog signal. When the fill level sinks
below a specific level, the pump is switched on by SIMOCODE pro. Liquid is pumped in until
the reference value is re-attained. The pump is then switched off.
Controlling the pump

The pump can be controlled as follows:
● Locally: Local control [LC] station for manual switching on and off (by visual contact)
● in the switchboard, cabinet door: Control station operator panel [OP] for manual switching
on and off
● At automation level: Control station PLC / PCS (DP) for remote-controlled switching on
and off (automatic operation) via PROFIBUS DP
● Via SIMOCODE pro, by means of internal fill-level or limit value monitoring

System description
Schematic
Figure 2-8 Schematic of a typical application example
Recording, displaying and evaluating measured values

The following measured values are required for monitoring the process:
● Motor current of the pump is measured by the current measuring module.
● Analog value of the fill-level sensor is acquired by the analog modules.
The measured values are evaluated directly by SIMOCODE pro and /or transferred via
PROFIBUS DP to the PLC / PCS.
Any measured value can be output via the analog module, e.g. the actual motor current to a
connected pointer instrument.
Optionally, a laptop with the SIMOCODE ES software, for example, can be connected to the
operator panel so that further process data can be locally evaluated.

System description
2.6 Check list for selecting a device series

The following check list should help you decide upon the optimum device series for your
requirements:
Function/component pro C pro S pro V

Control functions Intelligent overload relay ✓ ✓ ✓
Direct-on-line, reversing starter ✓ ✓ ✓
Star-delta (wye-delta) starter — ✓ ✓
Dahlander — — ✓
Pole-changing starter — — ✓
Soft starter — ✓ ✓
Solenoid valve — — ✓
Positioner — — ✓
Can be combined with reversing function — — ✓
Protection functions Overload protection ✓ ✓ ✓
Thermistor motor protection with PTC (binary) ✓ ✓ ✓
Stalled rotor ✓ ✓ ✓
Unbalance ✓ ✓ ✓
Phase failure ✓ ✓ ✓
Measurement functions Current measurement ✓ ✓ ✓
Current / voltage / power measurement — — ✓
Monitoring functions Current limits ✓ ✓ ✓
Ground-fault monitoring (internal) ✓ ✓ ✓
Ground-fault monitoring (residual current transformer) — ✓ ✓
Voltage monitoring — — ✓
Temperature monitoring — ✓ ✓
Active power monitoring — — ✓
Power factor (cos phi) monitoring — — ✓
Monitoring operating hours, stop time, and number of starts ✓ ✓ ✓
Monitoring additional process variables via the analog — — ✓
module
Phase sequence detection — — ✓
Monitoring any measured values using unrestricted limit — — ✓
monitors
Safety functions Safety-related tripping — — ✓
Number of inputs/outputs Number of digital inputs of basic unit 4 4 4
Max. number of digital inputs with expansion modules 4 8 12
Number of outputs of basic unit 3 2 3
Max. number of digital outputs with expansion modules 3 4 7

System description
Function/component pro C pro S pro V

Expansion modules Multifunction module; monostable relay; 24 V DC inputs, — ✓ —
temperature measurement, ground-fault monitoring
Multifunction module; monostable relay; 110 - 240 V AC/DC — ✓ —
inputs, temperature measurement, ground-fault monitoring
Digital module; monostable relay; 24 V DC inputs — — ✓
Digital module; bistable relay; 24 V DC inputs — — ✓
Digital module; monostable relay; 110 to 240 V AC/DC — — ✓
inputs
Digital module; bistable relay; 110 to 240 V AC/DC inputs — — ✓
DM-F LOCAL fail-safe digital module — — ✓
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module — — ✓
Analog module: — — ✓
Measuring, processing and outputting analog values
Ground-fault module: — — ✓
Residual current monitoring using a residual current
transformer
Temperature module: — — ✓
Analog temperature monitoring of three measuring circuits
with NTC, PT100, PT1000, and KTY

System description
2.7 Overview of functions
2.7.1 Protection functions

Detailed description: See Chapter Motor protection (Page 153)
Overload protection
Current-dependent electronic protection of three-phase and AC motors with adjustable
tripping characteristics (class times) according to IEC 60947-4-1 requirements.
Unbalance protection
Protects motors from excessive temperatures caused by excessive phase unbalance.
Phase failure protection

Protects motors from excessive temperatures caused by phase failure.
Stalled rotor protection

Immediate trip after the motor current overshoots an adjustable threshold.
Thermistor protection
SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V provide the option of connecting thermistor
sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the motor temperature.
2.7.2 Monitoring functions

Detailed description: See Chapter Monitoring functions (Page 239) and Chapter Logic
modules (Page 345)
Current limit monitoring

Current limit monitoring is used for process monitoring. This enables incipient anomalies in
the system to be detected in good time. If a current limit is exceeded but still below the
overload limit, it can, for example, indicate a dirty filter on a pump, or an increasingly
sluggish motor bearing. If the current limit is undershot, it can be the first sign of a worn-out
drive motor belt.

System description
Ground-fault monitoring
Residual current monitoring relays are used in industry to
● Protect systems from damage caused by residual currents
● Prevent production losses caused by unplanned downtime
● Perform maintenance to meet all demands.
Basic units have:
● an internal ground-fault monitoring system: For motors with a 3-wire connection, the basic
unit calculates a possible residual current / ground-fault current from the total current via
a current measuring module or a current / voltage measuring module. Internal ground-
fault monitoring is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in power systems
that are either grounded solidly or grounded with low impedance.
● external ground-fault monitoring in SIMOCODE pro S and pro V 4): The external ground-
fault monitoring using residual current transformer 3UL23 and ground-fault module is
normally used in the following cases:
– in cases in which power systems are grounded with high impedance
– in cases, in which precise detection of the ground-fault current is necessary, for
example, for condition monitoring.
A ground-fault module can be used to create an additional input on the SIMOCODE pro V
basic unit to connect a 3UL23 residual current transformer.
A multifunction module can be used to create an additional input on the
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit to connect a 3UL23 residual current transformer.
With ground-fault detection using the 3UL23 residual current transformer, it is possible to
determine the precise residual current as a measured value, and to define freely
selectable warning and trip limits in a wide range from 30 mA - 40 A.
See also External ground-fault monitoring (with residual current transformer 3UL23)
(Page 246)
Voltage monitoring1)
SIMOCODE pro V allows voltage monitoring of a three-phase current network or a single-
phase network for undervoltage or further availability:
● Monitoring for undervoltage: Two-level monitoring for freely selectable limits. The
response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a prewarning level or trip level can be freely
parameterized.
● Monitoring for further availability: Even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro V
can indicate the further availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the
circuit breaker or fuses.

System description
Temperature monitoring2)
SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V offer the option of implementing analog
temperature monitoring, e.g. of the motor windings or the bearings - SIMOCODE pro S with
the multifunction module, SIMOCODE pro V with the temperature module.
SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V support two-level monitoring for overtemperature
for freely selectable limit values. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a prewarning
level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed. Temperature monitoring takes
into account the highest temperature of all the sensor measuring circuits in use.
Active power monitoring1)

The active power curve of a motor reflects its actual load. Excess load results in increased
wear of the motor and, thus, may lead to premature motor failure. Excessively low active
power can indicate no-load operation of the motor, for example.
SIMOCODE pro V offers the option of two-level active power monitoring for freely selectable
upper and lower limits respectively. The response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a
prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Cos phi monitoring1)

The power factor fluctuates more than either the motor current or the active power does,
particularly in the low-end performance range of a motor. Monitoring the power factor is
therefore a particularly suitable way of distinguishing between no-load operation and faults,
e.g. a broken drive belt or drive shaft.
SIMOCODE pro V enables two-level monitoring of the power factor (cos phi) for freely
selectable minimum limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a prewarning
level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Monitoring operating hours, stop time, and number of starts

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor to avoid plant
downtimes due to failed motors caused by either running too long (wearing out) or being
stopped for too long. For example, if an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal indicating
that the relevant motor requires maintenance or replacement can be generated. After
replacing the motor, the operating hours and motor stop times can be reset.
To avoid excessive thermal strain and premature aging of a motor, the number of motor
starts in a selected time frame can be limited. The limited number of possible starts can be
indicated by pre-warnings.

System description
Monitoring additional process variables via the analog module3)

SIMOCODE pro V allows measuring and monitoring of any other process variables via the
analog module.
For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect a pump against dry operation, or a
differential pressure transducer can be used to monitor the degree of pollution in a filter. If
the fill level undershoots a specified level, the pump can be switched off and, if a specific
differential pressure value is exceeded, the filter is to be cleaned.
SIMOCODE pro V supports two-level monitoring of the corresponding process variable for
freely selectable upper and lower limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro V on reaching a
prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and delayed.
Phase sequence identification1)

SIMOCODE pro allows the direction of rotation of a motor to be determined by identification
of the phase sequence. If the direction of rotation is wrong, a signal can be generated or the
motor switched off. See Chapter Operator panel (OP) (Page 61).
Monitoring any measured values using unrestricted limit monitors

SIMOCODE pro can monitor every measured value in the system for undershooting or
overshooting a set threshold value by means of unrestricted limit monitors. See also Chapter
Limit monitor (Page 367).
1) For use of SIMOCODE pro V with current / voltage measuring module

2) Temperature module or multifunction module additionally required
3) Analog module additionally required
4) Ground-fault module or multifunction module and residual current transformer additionally
required
2.7.3 Safety-oriented tripping
Safety-related tripping
The SIMOCODE pro V motor management system has two modules for the safety-related
tripping of motors:
● Fail-safe digital module DM-F local: For applications requiring safety-related tripping of a
motor feeder via a hardware signal that is acquired and evaluated by the module.
● DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module: For applications that require the safety-related
tripping of a motor feeder by a fail-safe control (F-CPU) via PROFIBUS with the fail-safe
PROFIsafe profile.
These modules fulfill the general requirements for EMERGENCY STOP mechanisms or
safety circuits, as described in EN 418 and EN 60204-1 (06.2006).

System description
Depending on the external circuit, the following Performance Level / Safety Integrity Level
can be achieved:
● PL e with Category 4 according to ISO 13849-1 or
● SIL 3 according to IEC 61508/62061
Safety technology and safety-related functions
● Are exclusively restricted to the fail-safe digital modules.
● Do not directly affect existing SIMOCODE pro components and concepts.
A more detailed description is provided in the documentation listed below

● Handbuch "Fehlersichere Digitalmodule SIMOCODE pro Safety" (German)
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/50564852)
● Manual "Fail-Safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety" (English)
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/50564852/0/en)
● Manuel "Modules TOR de sécurité SIMOCODE pro Safety" (French)
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/50564852/0/fr)
● Manual "Módulos digitales de seguridad SIMOCODE pro Safety " (Spanish)
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/50564852/0/es)
● Operating Instructions "Fail-safe Digital Module DM-F Local"
● Operating Instructions "Fail-safe Digital Module DM-F PROFIsafe"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/49222281).
You will find the System Manuals and Operating Instructions at Manuals/operating
instructions (www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals)
CAUTION
Loss of safety function is possible
For the 24 V DC power supply, always use an SELV or PELV power supply unit!
For capacitive and inductive loads, an adequate protective circuit is required!

System description
2.7.4 Control functions

Depending on the device series, the following parameterizable control functions are
available:
Table 2- 1 Control functions
Control function pro C pro S pro V

Overload relay ✓ ✓ ✓
Direct starter (direct-on-line starter) ✓ ✓ ✓
Reversing starter ✓ ✓ ✓
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) ✓ ✓ ✓
Star-delta starter — ✓ ✓
Star-delta reversing starter — — ✓
Dahlander starter, combinable with reversing starter — — ✓
Pole-changing starter, combinable with reversing starter — — ✓
Positioner — — ✓
Soft reversing starter — — ✓
All the necessary protection functions and interlocks are already available and can be flexibly
adapted and expanded.
For a detailed description of the individual control functions: See Chapter Motor control
(Page 171).

System description
2.7.5 Communication
PROFIBUS DP
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or terminal
connection on the basic units).
SIMOCODE pro supports, for example, the following services:
Table 2- 2 PROFIBUS DP services
Service pro C pro S pro V

Baud rates of up to 12 Mbit / s via Sub-D socket ✓ — ✓
Baud rates of up to 1.5 Mbit / s via terminal connection ✓ ✓ ✓
Automatic baud rate detection ✓ ✓ ✓
Cyclic services (DPV0) and ✓ ✓ ✓
acyclic services (DPV1)
Operation as DPV1 slave downstream from the Y link ✓ ✓ ✓
Alarms according to DPV1 ✓ ✓ ✓
Time synchronization via PROFIBUS DP — — ✓
3UF50 compatibility mode — — ✓
Safety-related tripping "PROFIsafe" — — ✓
Detailed description: See Chapter Communication (Page 375)
2.7.6 Standard functions

Standard functions are pre-defined functions that can be easily activated, e.g. time-
staggered restart of the drives after a power failure. SIMOCODE pro has the following
standard functions:
Table 2- 3 Standard functions
Standard function pro C pro S pro V

Number Number Number
Test 2 2 2
Reset 3 3 3
Test Position Feedback (TPF) 1 1 1
External fault 4 4 6
Operational Protection Off (OPO) — — 1
Power failure monitoring (UVO) — — 1
Emergency start 1 1 1
Watchdog (PLC / PCS monitoring) 1 1 1
Time stamping — — 1
Safety-related tripping "Local" — — 1
Detailed description: See Chapter Standard functions (Page 319)

System description
2.7.7 Freely-programmable logic modules

If you need any other additional functions for your application, you can use the freely
programmable logic modules. These can be used, for example, to implement logical
operations, time relay functions and counter functions. Furthermore, limit monitors can
monitor any value in SIMOCODE pro for undershooting or overshooting of a freely selected
limit. Depending on the device series, the system provides several freely parameterizable
logic modules:
Table 2- 4 Freely-programmable logic modules
Logic module pro C pro S pro V

Truth tables 3 inputs / 1 output 3 4 6
Truth tables 2 inputs / 1 output — 2 2
Truth tables 5 inputs / 2 outputs — — 1
Timers 2 2 4
Counters 2 2 4
Signal conditioning 2 2 4
Non-volatile elements 2 2 4
Flashing 3 3 3
Flicker 3 3 3
Limit monitor — — 4
Calculation modules (calculators)1) — — 2
1) Only for basic unit SIMOCODE pro V from version *E03*
Detailed description: See Chapter Logic modules (Page 345)

System description
2.7.8 Operating, service and diagnostics data

SIMOCODE pro supplies a large amount of detailed operating, service and diagnostics data.
Operating data
● Motor switching state (ON, OFF, LEFT, RIGHT, SLOW, FAST), derived from the current
flow in the main circuit: thus, feedback via auxiliary contacts of circuit breakers and
contactors is not necessary.
● Current in phases 1, 2 and 3 and maximum current in % of set current
● Voltage in phases 1, 2 and 3 in V 2)
● Active power in W 2)
● Apparent power in VA 2)
● Power factor in % 2)
● Phase unbalance in %
● Phase sequence 2)
● Ground-fault current 7)
● Temperature in the respective sensor measuring circuits, and maximum temperature in
K 1) 4)
● Actual analog signal values 1) 5)
● Time to trip in s
● Temperature rise for motor model in %
● Remaining cooling down period of the motor in s, etc.
It is possible to adapt the units via the device-internal conversion of individual measured
values with the help of the logic modules (calculators) provided by SIMOCODE pro V. For
example, the temperature recorded by SIMOCODE pro can be calculated in either °F or °C
and transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.
Service data
Among other things, SIMOCODE pro provides the following relevant data for maintenance:
● Number of motor operating hours, also resettable
● Motor stop times, also resettable
● Number of motor starts, also resettable
● Number of permissible starts remaining
● Number of overload trips, also resettable
● Feeder power consumption in kWh, also resettable3)
● Internal feeder-related comments stored in the device, e.g. information regarding
maintenance events, etc.
● Safety-related tripping monitoring in h, also resettable6)

System description
Diagnostics data
● Numerous detailed early warning and fault messages, also for further processing in the
device or in the control system
● Device-internal error logging with time stamp
● Value of the last trip current
● Feedback faults (e.g. no current flow in the main circuit after switch-on command), etc.
● Diagnostic message "Local" and PROFIsafe
1)When using basic unit SIMOCODE pro V

2)When using basic unit SIMOCODE pro V with current / voltage measuring module
3)When using basic unit SIMOCODE pro V (from version *E03*) with current / voltage
measuring module
4)When using the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit with the 3UF77 temperature module or
the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit with multifunction module
5)Analog module additionally required
6)SIMOCODE pro V together with DM-F
7)When using the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit with the 3UF7510 ground-fault module or
the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit with a multifunction module and 3UL23 residual
current transformer

System description
2.8 An overview of system components
Devices
Selection and ordering data: See also Catalog IC 10. You will find this catalog at Technical
documentation (www.siemens.com/sirius/infomaterial).
Table 2- 5 System components, devices
System component Control supply MLFB Diagram Number that can be connected to
voltage pro C pro S pro V
Basic units (BU)
SIMOCODE pro C — — —
The compact system for direct-on-line and reversing starters
and/or for controlling a circuit breaker.
4 inputs/3 outputs freely parameterizable, input for thermistor,
monostable relay outputs, expandable with expansion
modules
24 V DC 3UF7 000-1AB000
110- 3UF7 000-1AU000
240 V AC/DC
SIMOCODE pro S — — —
The smart system for direct-on-line, reversing, and star-delta
starters or for controlling a circuit breaker or soft starter.
expandable with expansion modules
24 V DC 3UF7 020-1AB000
110- 3UF7 020-1AU000
240 V AC/DC
SIMOCODE pro V — — —
The variable system that offers numerous functions in addition
to all of the SIMOCODE pro C/S functions.
monostable relay outputs, expandable with expansion
modules
24 V DC 3UF7 010-1AB000
110- 3UF7 010-1AU000
240 V AC/DC
Operator panel (OP)
Installation in control cabinet door or front plate, for
connection to basic unit, system interface for connecting a
PC, 10 LEDs for status indication and user-assignable buttons
for controlling the motor.
— 3UF7 200-1AA00-0 1 1 1
— 3UF7 200-1AA01-0 1 1 1

System description
Operator panel with display (OPD)
Installation in control cabinet door or front panel, for
connection to a pro V basic unit, system interface for
connecting a PC, 7 LEDs for status indication and user-
assignable buttons for controlling the motor, multiple-language
display, e.g. for indication of measured values, status
information or fault messages.
— 3UF7 210-1AA00 — — 1 (as from product
version*E03*)
Current measuring module (IM)
Current measuring with through-hole or bus connection
system.
0.3 A to 3 A (through- — 3UF7 100-1AA00-0 1 1 1
hole transformer) 3UF7 101-1AA00-0 1 1 1
2.4 A to 25 A (through- 3UF7 102-1AA00-0 1 1 1
hole transformer)
3UF7 103-1AA00-0 1 1 1
10 A to 100 A
3UF7 103-1BA00-0 1 1 1
(through-hole
transformer) 3UF7 104-1BA00-0 1 1 1
20 A to 200 A
(through-hole
transformer)
20 A to 200 A
(bus connection)
63 A to 630 A
(bus connection)

System description
Current / voltage measuring module (UM)
Can only be mounted next to the basic unit, otherwise like
current measuring modules.
Additionally:
• Voltage measurement
• Power measurement
• Power factor (cos phi) measurement
• Phase sequence
0.3 A to 3 A (through- — 3UF7 110-1AA00-0 — — 1 (as from product
hole transformer) 3UF7 111-1AA00-0 — — version*E02*)
2.4 A to 25 A (through- 3UF7 112-1AA00-0 — — 1 (as from product
hole transformer) version*E02*)
3UF7 113-1AA00-0 — —
10 A to 100 A 1 (as from product
3UF7 113-1BA00-0 — —
(through-hole version*E02*)
transformer) 3UF7 114-1BA00-0 — —
1 (as from product
20 A to 200 A version*E02*)
(through-hole 1 (as from product
transformer) version*E02*)
20 A to 200 A 1 (as from product
bus connection) version*E02*)
63 A to 630 A
(bus connection)
Decoupling module (DCM)
For connecting on the line side of a current/voltage
measurement module at the system interface for use of
voltage measurement in isolated system configurations with
high-resistance or asymmetrical grounding and in single-
phase systems.
— 3UF7 150-1AA00-0 — — —
Digital modules (DM)
Up to two digital modules can be used to add additional binary
inputs and relay outputs to the basic unit. The input circuits of
the digital modules are supplied from an external power
supply.
4 binary inputs and 2 relay outputs.
Input voltage 24 V DC; — 3UF7 300-1AB00-0 — — 2
monostable relay 3UF7 300-1AU00-0 — — 2
outputs
Input voltage 110 V-
240 V AC/DC; monost
able relay outputs
Input voltage 24 V DC; — 3UF7 310-1AB00-0 — — 2
bistable relay outputs 3UF7 310-1AU00-0 — — 2
Input voltage 110 V-
240 V AC/DC; bistable
relay outputs

System description
Fail-safe digital module (DM-F)
DM-F Local fail-safe digital module
For fail-safe tripping via hardware signal.
2 relay enabling circuits, wired in parallel;
2 relay outputs, common ground, fail-safe tripping.
Inputs for sensor circuit, start signal, cascading and feedback
circuit
Safety function via DIP switch
Rated control supply voltage Us:
24 V DC 3UF7 320-1AB00-0 — — 1 (as from product
110 to 240 V 3UF7 320-1AU00-0 — — version *E07*)
AC/DC 1 (as from product
version *E07*)
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module
For fail-safe tripping via PROFIBUS/PROFIsafe:
2 relay enabling circuits, wired in parallel
2 relay outputs, common ground, fail-safe tripping
1 input for feedback circuit; 3 binary standard inputs.
24 V DC 3UF7 330-1AB00-0 — — 1 (as from product
110 to 240 V 3UF7 330-1AU00-0 — — version *E07*)
AC/DC 1 (as from product
version *E07*)
Analog module (AM)
By means of the analog module, the basic unit can be
optionally expanded by analog inputs and outputs (0 to
20 mA).
2 inputs (passive) for inputting and 1 output for outputting 0/4
to 20 mA signals.
— 3UF7 400-1AA00-0 — — 1
Ground-fault module (EM)
The external ground-fault monitoring using residual current
transformer and ground-fault module is normally used in the
following cases:
• in cases in which power systems are grounded with high
impedance
• in cases, in which precise detection of the ground-fault
current is necessary, for example, for condition monitoring.
— 3UF7 500-1AA00-0 — — 1 (as from product
for connecting a version *E02*)
summation current
transformer 3UL22
for connecting a version *E10*)
residual current
transformer 3UL23

System description
Temperature module (TM)
Irrespective of the thermistor protection of the basic units, an
additional max. 3 analog temperature sensors can be
evaluated using a temperature module.
Sensor types: PT100/PT1000, KTY83/KTY84 or NTC
3 inputs for connecting up to 3 analog temperature sensors.
version*E02*)
Multifunction module
To expand
• the number of inputs and outputs
• the functional scope
the SIMOCODE pro S basic units.
The following inputs and outputs are available:
• 4 digital inputs
• 2 relay outputs
• 1 input for connecting an analog temperature sensor
(sensor types: PT100/PT1000, KTY83/KTY84 or NTC)
• 1 input for connecting a 3UL23 residual current
transformer
Input voltage 24 V DC 3UF7 600-1AB01-0 — 1 —
Input voltage 110-240 V AC/DC 3UF7 600-1AU00-0 — 1 —
For a detailed description of the system components: See Chapter Description of system
components (Page 59).
Dimension drawings: See Chapter Dimension drawings (Page 577).
Mounting instructions See Chapter Mounting, wiring, interfaces (Page 405).
Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V when using an operator panel with display
and/or a decoupling module: See Chapter Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V
when using an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module: (Page 104).

System description
Accessories
Table 2- 6 System components, accessories that can be connected
System component, accessory MLFB Diagram for for for

pro C pro S pro V
Connecting cable for connecting the ✓ ✓ ✓
basic unit, current
measurement
module,
current/voltage
measurement
module, operator
panel, and
decoupling module
0.025 m ribbon 3UF7 930-0AA00-0
0.1 m ribbon 3UF7 931-0AA00-0
0.3 m ribbon 3UF7 935-0AA00-0
0.5 m ribbon 3UF7 932-0AA00-0
0.5 m round 3UF7 932-0BA00-0
1.0 m round 3UF7 937-0BA00-0
2.5 m round 3UF7 933-0BA00-0
Interface covers 3UF7 950-0AA00-0 ✓ ✓ ✓
For covering unused system interfaces 3RA69 36-0B
Memory module 3UF7900-0AA00-0 ✓ ✓ ✓
Backing up a complete parameterization of a 3UF7901-0AA00-0 — ✓ ✓ 1)
SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S or
SIMOCODE pro V systems when a unit is replaced. If
a device is replaced, parameter transfer without PC.
Initialization module 3UF7 902-0AA00-0 — ✓ ✓ 1)
Storage and initialization of device parameters and
device addressing in motor control centers.
Y connecting cable — ✓ ✓
Connection of the basic unit and current or current/voltage measurement
module with the initialization module when using the initialization module
Length of system Length of open cable end
interface 1.0 m 3UF7 931-0CA00-0
0.1 m 1.0 m 3UF7 932-0CA00-0
0.5 m 1.0 m 3UF7 937-0CA00-0
1.0 m
Addressing plug 3UF7 910-0AA00-0 ✓ ✓ ✓
Assignment of the PROFIBUS address without PC/PG
on SIMOCODE pro via the system interface
PC cable 3UF7 940-0AA00-0 ✓ ✓ ✓
for connecting SIMOCODE pro to the serial interface of
a PC/PG

System description

pro C pro S pro V
USB PC cable 3UF7 941-0AA00-A ✓ ✓ ✓
for connecting SIMOCODE pro to the USB interface of
a PC/PG
USB-to-serial adapter 3UF7 946-0AA0-0 ✓ ✓ ✓

For connecting an RS 232 PC cable to the interface of
a PC.
Door adapter 3UF7 920-0AA00-0 ✓ ✓ ✓
for bringing out the system interface, for example, out
of a cabinet
Operator panel adapter 3UF7 922-0AA00-0 ✓ ✓ ✓

Enables use of the smaller operator panel (OP) after
system replacement in a front panel cutout in which a
larger operator panel 3UF5 2 of SIMOCODE DP had
previously been used.
Degree of protection: IP54.
Labeling strips ✓ ✓ ✓
for pushbuttons of the operator panel 3UF7 20 3UF7 925-0AA00-0
for pushbuttons of the operator panel with display 3UF7 925-0AA01-0
3UF7 21 3UF7 925-0AA02-0
for LEDs of the operator panel 3UF7 20
Push-in lugs for screw mounting ✓ ✓ ✓
e.g. on mounting plate; 2 unit required per device
can be used for 3UF7 1.0, 3UF7 1.1 and 3UF7 1.2 3RV2928-0B ✓ ✓ —
can be used for 3UF700, 3UF701, 3UF7 3, 3UF7 4, 3RP19 03 ✓ ✓ —
3UF7 5 and 3UF7 7
can be used for 3UF7020-1A.01-0 and 3ZY1311-0AA00 — — ✓
3UF7600-1A.01-0
Terminal covers
Covers for cable lug and busbar connections: ✓ ✓ ✓
Length 100 mm, can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0 3RT19 56-4EA1
Covers for box terminals: ✓ ✓ ✓
Covers for screwed connection: ✓ ✓ ✓
between contactor and current measurement module
or
between current/voltage measurement module with 3RT19 56-4EA3
direct mounting
3RT19 66-4EA3
can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0
can be used for 3UF7 1.4-1BA00-0

System description

pro C pro S pro V
Box terminal blocks ✓ ✓ ✓
for round and ribbon cable conductors
up to 70 mm2, can be used for 3UF7 1.3-1BA00-0 3RT19 55-4G
Bus termination module ✓ ✓ ✓
with dedicated power supply;
for bus connection after the last device on the bus
Supply voltage:
115/230 V AC 3UF1 900-1KA00
24 V DC 3UF1 900-1KB00
Note
The use of bus connection modules is recommended,
in particular, when using SIMOCODE pro S.
Bus connecting terminal 3UF7 960-0AA00-0 — ✓ —
For securing the PROFIBUS cable on the
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit.
Software
For parameterization, control, diagnostics and testing.
Software components MLFB

SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic
• Complete device parameterization
• Online access through local device interface
Floating License for one user
License key on USB stick, Class A 3ZS1 312-4CC10-0YA5
License Key Download, class A 3ZS1 312-4CE10-0YB5
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard
• Graphical editor
• Extended monitoring and diagnostic functions
License Key Download, class A 3ZS1 312-5CE10-0YB5

System description
Software components MLFB

Upgrade for SIMOCODE ES as from 2004 3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YE5
Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic 3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YD5
Software Update Service 3ZS1 312-5CC10-0YL5
for 1 year with automatic extension, requires the current software version.
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium
• Graphical editor
• Extended monitoring and diagnostic functions
• Convenience functions
• Online access via PROFIBUS DP
• Online access via remote access
• STEP 7 integration
License key download, Class A 3ZS1 312-6CE10-0YB5
Upgrade for SIMOCODE ES as from 2004 3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YE5
Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic 3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YD5
Software Update Service 3ZS1 312-6CC10-0YL5
for 1 year with automatic extension, requires the current software version.
SIMOCODE pro function block library for SIMATIC PCS 7

Engineering software V7 3UF7 982-0AA10-0
for an engineering station (single license), including runtime software for running the AS
modules in an automation system (single license).
Runtime license V7 3UF7 982-0AA11-0
for running the AS modules in an automation system (single license)
required for use of the AS modules of the engineering software V7 or engineering
software migration form V7 to V8 onto an additional automation system within a plant.
Upgrade for PCS 7 block library SIMOCODE pro, V 6.0 or V 6.1 to version 3UF7 982-0AA13-0
SIMOCODE pro V 7.0/V 7.1
for an engineering station (single license), including runtime software for running the AS
modules in an automation system (single license)
Engineering software migration from V7 to V8 3UF7 982-0AA20-0
upgrade (migration) of existing engineering software V7 of the block library
SIMOCODE pro for PCS 7

System description
2.9 Description of system components
2.9.1 Basic units (BU)
Types of basic units

The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro system. Basic units
are always necessary when using SIMOCODE pro. They contain the processor in which all
protection/control and monitoring functions of the SIMOCODE system are executed.
Figure 2-9 Basic units
The basic units are suitable for DIN rail mounting or with additional push-in lugs for mounting
on a mounting plate. They are always equipped with removable terminals.
The basic units are available in different types for the following supply voltages:
● 24 V DC
● 110 to 240 V AC / DC
SIMOCODE pro C basic unit

Basic unit pro C is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro C device series and is
used in conjunction with a current measuring module and optional operator panels.
The following motor control functions are supported:
● Overload relay
● Direct starters (direct-on-line starters) and reversing starters
● Circuit breaker control (MCCB).

System description
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Basic unit pro S is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro S device series and is
used in conjunction with a current measuring module and an optional operator panel. As
compared with the basic unit SIMOCODE pro C provides the following expansion options by
means of connecting a multifunction module:
● Increased device functionality with additional inputs and outputs
● Connection of a residual current transformer
● Connection of a temperature sensor.
● Overload relay
● Star-delta starter
● Circuit breaker control (MCCB)
● Control of a soft starter.
SIMOCODE Pro V basic unit

Basic unit pro V is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro V device series and is
used in combination with a current measuring module or current / voltage measurement
module and optional operator panels.
● Overload relay
● Star-delta starter, possibly combined with reversing starter
● 2 speeds, motors with separate windings (pole-changing starters), possibly combined
with reversing starter
● 2 speeds, motors with separate Dahlander windings, possibly combined with reversing
starter
● Positioner control
● Solenoid valve control
● Circuit breaker control (MCCB)
● Soft starter control, possibly combined with reversing starter
The basic unit SIMOCODE pro V provides the following expansion options not offered by the
basic unit SIMOCODE pro C:
● Increased device functionality via various expansion modules according to need
● Use of a current / voltage measuring module in place of a current measuring module
● Additional inputs and outputs, as required.
● Use of an operator panel with display in place of a standard operator panel.

System description
Operator controls and display elements, system interfaces basic units

LEDs for device diagnostics (Device, Bus, Gen.Fault)
These LEDs on the front of the device are used for device and fault diagnostics, and indicate
the basic status:
● Of the device itself via the Device LED
● About PROFIBUS communication via the Bus LED
● About any motor feeder faults via the Gen. Fault LED
You can find more detailed information on this in Chapter Diagnostics via LED display on the
basic unit and on the operator panel (Page 468).
Test / Reset button

Enables the device to be reset after tripping or after a fault has occurred and makes it
possible to test the device/motor feeder with or without tripping the contactor control.
If a memory module or addressing plug is plugged in, the PROFIBUS address can be
parameterized or accepted via the Test / Reset button.
For more information, see Chapter Test / Reset (Page 321), ChapterSetting the
PROFIBUS DP address (Page 467), and Chapter Backing up and saving parameters
(Page 472).
System interfaces
2 system interfaces for connecting
● a current measuring module or a current / voltage measuring module and
● an operator panel or expansion modules
2.9.2 Operator panel (OP)
Function of the operator panel

The operator panel controls the motor feeder from the switchgear cabinet. It has an external
system interface on the front to allow easier parameterization or diagnostics via a
PC / programming device. A PC with the "SIMOCODE ES" software, or the memory module
or addressing plug can be connected via this system interface (with a cover for IP54) using a
PC cable.
On the rear system interface, it is connected to the basic unit or to an expansion module via
a connecting cable. It is supplied with power via the basic unit.
The operator panel is frequently installed in the front panels of motor control centers. It is
used in all device series. It also contains all the status LEDs available on the basic unit and
the "TEST / RESET" button, and facilitates access to the system interface from outside the
cabinet.

System description
The following are available:

● 5 buttons, of which 4 are freely parameterizable
● 10 LEDs, of which 7 are freely parameterizable
The following figure shows an operator panel:
Figure 2-10 Operator panel
Labeling strips:
Labeling strips are enclosed for designating buttons 1 to 4 and the yellow LEDs 1 to 3:
● Buttons 1 to 4: 6 pre-assigned labeling strips and 1 individually inscribable labeling strip
● LEDs 1 to 3: 1 individually inscribable labeling strip
Figure 2-11 Labeling strips for operator panel buttons and LEDs

System description
Unused labeling strips can be stored on the back of the operator panel:
Figure 2-12 Storage clips for labeling strips for pushbuttons and LEDs of the operator panel
"Park position" for memory module:

The memory module can be protected from unauthorized use by "parking" it on the rear of
the operator panel inside the switchgear cabinet. In this case, the storage clips for the
labeling strips cannot be used.
Figure 2-13 "Park position" for memory module

System description
2.9.3 Operator panel with display (OPD)
2.9.3.1 Description of the operator panel with display

Apart from the standard operator panel (OP), an optional operator panel with display (OPD)
is also available for SIMOCODE pro V. This operator panel can additionally display current
measured values, operating data, diagnostics data or status information of the motor feeder
on the cabinet. It also contains all the status LEDs that are present on the basic unit and
facilitates access to the system interface from outside the cabinet. The motor can be
controlled via the buttons on the operator panel. Current measured values, status
information, fault messages or the device-internal error log are simultaneously shown on the
display.
Note
The operator panel with display can only be used with basic unit SIMOCODE pro V from
version *E03*.

● 4 freely parameterizable buttons for controlling the motor feeder
● 4 keys for navigating the display menu, 2 of these are softkeys with different functions (e
g. test / reset)
● 2 system interfaces (front and back)
● 7 LEDs, 4 of which are freely parameterizable (4 green LEDs integrated in the motor
control buttons, primarily for feedback regarding the switching state, e.g. ON, OFF, CCW,
CW, etc.)
The following figure shows an operator panel with display:
Figure 2-14 Operator panel with display

System description
The operator panel with display can be connected directly to basic unit SIMOCODE pro V or
an expansion module via the rear system interface. Voltage is supplied by the basic unit.
This front-face system interface (with cover for IP54) can be used to connect (by means of
the PC cable) a PC with the SIMOCODE ES software installed or the memory module or the
addressing plug.
NOTICE
Active operation
The operator panel with display may not be removed or plugged in during operation!
Note
When using an operator panel with display, please note that the type and number of
expansion modules that can be connected to a basic unit are limited! See Chapter
Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V when using an operator panel with display
and/or a decoupling module: (Page 104).
Labeling strips:
Labeling strips for labeling buttons 1 to 4 are included:
● 6 pre-assigned labeling strips and 1 individually inscribable labeling strip
Figure 2-15 Labeling strips for the buttons of the operator panel with display

System description
Unused labeling strips can be stored on the back of the operator panel with display:
Figure 2-16 Storage clips for labeling strips
"Park position" for memory module:

The memory module can be "parked" on the front of the operator panel with display beneath
the system interface:
Figure 2-17 "Park position" for memory module

System description
2.9.3.2 Operator controls and display elements of the operator panel with display
Displays of the operator panel with display

The display shows current measured values, operating data and diagnostics data as well as
the status information of the motor feeder in plain text or with the aid of symbols.
Figure 2-18 Display elements of the operator panel with display
1
Shows the set current Is/ nominal motor current in A. For motors with two speeds, the
relevant set current Is1 or Is2 is always displayed depending on whether the current speed is
slow or fast, e.g. 8.00 A.
For motors with two speeds, the left-hand softkey can be used when the motor is stopped to
alternate between the display of the two set currents. When running, the set current for the
active motor speed is always displayed.
2
Shows the set class time of the overload protection, e.g.: 10 = class 10 (class = trip class)
3
Indicates that temperature monitoring is active, e.g. the motor temperature is being
monitored by thermistors or analog temperature sensors (Pt100, Pt1000, KTY, NTC) (T =
temperature monitored).
4
The main display enables customized depiction of different measured values when running.
This is the standard display at the topmost menu level. Predefined profiles in the display
settings can be selected for this purpose. When the "Menu" softkey on the right is pressed,
the submenus of the main display can be navigated (see "Read and adapt main display").

System description
Operator controls of the operator panel with display
Figure 2-19 Operator controls of the operator panel with display
1
Four freely parameterizable control buttons with status LED.
These control buttons are used to control the motor with integrated status LEDs for any
status feedback. The functions can be user-defined. Labeling can be either freely chosen or
achieved using the labeling strips supplied with the device (see also Chapters Operator
panel buttons (Page 296) and Operator panel LEDs (Page 278)).
2
Two softkeys.
These softkeys can have different functions, depending upon the menu depicted (e.g. Open
Menu, Leave Menu, Test / Reset). The currently assigned functions are shown on the lower
left or right edge of the display.
3
Two arrow keys (up and down).
These arrow keys can be used for menu navigation or for changing the display settings, e.g.
contrast adjustment or selection of the main display profile.
2.9.3.3 Menu of the operator panel with display
Menu of the operator panel with display
Navigating the menu of the operator panel with display

System description
Main menu (OPD)

Details: See "Displays of the operator panel with display (Page 80)."
Figure 2-20 Main menu (OPD)

System description
1 Main display (OPD)

Details: See "Read and adapt main display (Page 82)."
Figure 2-21 Main display (OPD)

System description
2 Measured values display (OPD)

Details: See "Display of measured values in the measured values display (Page 85)."
Figure 2-22 Measured values display, OPD

System description
3 Status display motor protection/motor control (OPD)

Details: See "Motor protection and motor control status (Page 86)."
Figure 2-23 Status display motor protection/motor control (OPD)

System description
4 Statistics/maintenance (OPD)
Details: See "Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the
statistics/maintenance display (Page 88)."
Figure 2-24 Statistics/maintenance, OPD

System description
5 PROFIBUS communication (OPD)

Details: See "Status display for PROFIBUS communication (Page 89)."
Figure 2-25 PROFIBUS communication (OPD)

System description
6 Device I/Os (OPD)

Details: See "Displays the current status of all device I/Os (Page 89)."
Figure 2-26 Device I/Os, OPD

System description
7 Display settings (OPD)

Details: See "Adapt display settings (Page 91)."
Figure 2-27 Display settings (OPD)

System description
8 Commands (OPD)
Details: See "Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands (Page 93)."
Figure 2-28 Commands (OPD)
9 Messages (OPD)
Details: See "Display of all pending status information (Page 94)."
Figure 2-29 Messages (OPD)
10 Warnings, OPD
Details: See "Display of all pending warnings (Page 94)."
Figure 2-30 Warnings (OPD)

System description
11 Faults (OPD)
Details: See "Display of all pending faults (Page 94)."
Figure 2-31 Faults (OPD)
12 Error buffer (OPD)

Details: See "Reading out the device-internal error buffer (Page 95)."
Figure 2-32 Error buffer (OPD)
13 Event memory (OPD) (only with OPD as from *E04* and BU2 as from *E07*)
Details: See "Reading out the device-internal event memory (Page 95)."
Figure 2-33 Event memory (OPD)

System description
14 Identification (OPD)
Details: See "Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components
(Page 96)."
Figure 2-34 Identification (OPD)

System description
2.9.3.4 Displays of the operator panel with display

You can navigate through the menu using the arrow keys and softkeys. Each menu item
may have one or more submenus. The menu structure and display are, in part, directly
dependent on the device parameterization (e. g. selected control function) and hardware
configuration (e.g. type and number of expansion modules used).
● Main display
The "main display" is the standard display of the SIMOCODE pro. It displays current
measured values, which can be selected via profiles predefined to meet user-specific
requirements. For detailed information: See "Read and adapt main display (Page 82)"
● Measured values display
The "Measured values display" provides an overview of all values measured by
SIMOCODE pro. For example, all phase currents, phase voltages, power-related
measured values or temperatures. For detailed information: See "Display of measured
values in the measured values display (Page 85)."
● Status display
The "Status display" shows all higher-level status information, i.e. all status information
relevant to the protection and control of the motor. For detailed information: See "Motor
protection and motor control status (Page 86)."
● Statistics/Maintenance
The "Statistics/Maintenance" menu item provides an overview of all SIMOCODE pro
information that is primarily relevant to maintenance. For detailed information: See
"Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the statistics/maintenance
display (Page 88)."
● Communication
The "Communication" menu item displays all important information concerning
PROFIBUS communication. For detailed information: See "Status display for PROFIBUS
communication (Page 89)."
● Device I/Os
The "Device I/Os" menu item provides a complete overview of the current status of all
inputs and outputs of the basic unit as well as any connected expansion modules. For
detailed information: See "Displays the current status of all device I/Os (Page 89)."
● Display settings
All settings relevant to the operator panel with display can be carried out via "Display
Settings". In addition to selecting the language and adjusting the contrast or illumination,
it is also possible to select the profiles here that are relevant for adjusting the main
display. For detailed information: See also "Adapt display settings (Page 91)."
● Commands
The "Commands" menu item contains all commands relating to SIMOCODE pro, e.g. for
testing the feeder, resetting after tripping and/or transferring parameters into the memory
module or into SIMOCODE pro. For detailed information: See "Resetting, testing and
parameterizing via commands (Page 93)."

System description
● Messages
The "Status Information" menu item provides an overview of all pending status
information. For detailed information: See "Display of all pending status information
(Page 94)."
● Warnings
The "Warnings" menu item provides an overview of all pending warnings. For detailed
information: See "Display of all pending warnings (Page 94)."
● Faults
The "Faults" menu item provides an overview of all pending faults. For detailed
information: See "Display of all pending faults (Page 94)."
● Error buffer
The "Error buffer" menu item displays the SIMOCODE pro device-internal error buffer.
For detailed information: See "Reading out the device-internal error buffer (Page 95)."
● Event memory
The "Event Memory" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro device-internal
event memory. For detailed information: See "Reading out the device-internal event
memory (Page 95)."
Note
Precondition for event memory display
Is only displayed if DM-F present.
● Identification
In the "Identification" menu item, you will find detailed information/labeling regarding
SIMOCODE pro hardware components (basic unit, operator panel with display). For
detailed information: See "Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro
components (Page 96)."
● About SIMOCODE
The "About SIMOCODE" menu item displays further information about SIMOCODE pro.
See Menu of the operator panel with display (Page 68).

System description
2.9.3.5 Read and adapt main display

To enable users speedy viewing of the measured values typically shown on their
switchboard, various profiles are stored in the operator panel with display that enable user-
specific adaptation of the standard measured values displayed in the SIMOCODE pro
operations display. The profile can be selected in menu "Display settings" -> "Profile" (see
Section "Adapt display settings (Page 91)").
If available, the present set current, the set class time for overload protection and the use of
temperature monitoring with the help of thermistors or analog temperature sensors are
displayed in the lower left of the main display. The submenus of the main display can be
navigated with the right-hand softkey. For motors with two speeds, the left-hand softkey can
be used to alternate between the display of the two set currents while the motor is stopped.
● IL1, IL2, IL3 [A] 1)
Displays the currents in all three phases in A.
● IL1, IL2, IL3 [%] 1)
Displays the currents in all three phases as a percentage of the set current.
● Imax [A] 1)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A.
● Imax [%] 1)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases as a percentage of the set current.
● Imax, Cos phi 2)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A and the power factor.
● Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi, S 3)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the phase voltage UL1 in V, the
power factor, and the apparent power in kVA.
● Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi, S 4)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the line-to-line voltage UL1-L2 in
V, the power factor, and the apparent power in kVA.
● Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi, P 3)
Displays the maximum current of all three phases in A, the phase voltage UL1 in V, the
power factor, and the active power in W.
● Imax, UL1-L2, Co phi, P 4)
V, the power factor, and the active power in W.
● In1/output [mA] 5)
Indicates the current value at input 1 of the analog module and at the output of the analog
module in mA.
● In2/output [mA] 5)
Indicates the current value at input 2 of the analog module and at the output of the analog
module in mA.

System description
● Inputs [mA] 5)
Shows the current value at the two inputs of analog module in mA.
● Max. temp. °C 6)
Shows the maximum temperature of all sensor sensor measuring circuits of the
temperature module that are used, in °C.
● Temperatures °C 6)
Shows the individual temperatures of all sensor sensor measuring circuits of the
temperature module that are used, in °C.
● Max. temp. °F 6)
Shows the maximum temperature of all sensor sensor measuring circuits of the
temperature module that are used, in °F.
● Temperatures °F 6)
Shows the individual temperatures of all sensor sensor measuring circuits of the
temperature module that are used, in °F.
● UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N 3)
Indicates all line-to-line voltages UL1-N, UL2-N, and UL3-N in V.
● UL1-L1, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 4)
Shows line-to-line voltages UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1 in V.
● Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi 3)
Indicates the maximum current of all three phases in A, the phase voltage UL1-N in V,
and the power factor.
● Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi 4)
V and the power factor.
● Imax, UL1-N, °C 7)
and the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module in °C.
● Imax, UL1-N, °F 7)
and the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module in °F.
● I_max, UL1-L2, °C 4)
V, and the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the
temperature module in °C.
● I_max, UL1-L2, °F 4)
V, and the maximum temperature of all used sensor measuring circuits of the
temperature module in °F.

System description
● Calculator 1
Indicates the calculated result that the function block calculator 1 provides without units in
the range 0 ...65535.
Permits display, for example, of a 2-byte or 4-byte value sent directly from the automation
system on the display of the switchboard, or the unitless display of a 2-byte and 4-byte
value in SIMOCODE pro
● Calculator 2
Indicates the calculated result that the function block calculator 2 provides without units in
the range 0 ...65535.
Permits display, for example, of a 2-byte or 4-byte value sent directly from the automation
system on the display of the switchboard, or the unitless display of a 2-byte and 4-byte
value in SIMOCODE pro.
● Energy consumed 8)
Note
Modified system expansion or hardware configuration
If the main display permanently fails to show measured values, this indicates that a profile
has been selected in the display settings that is no longer supported, due, for example, to a
changed system expansion or changed hardware configuration. The profile must be
reselected.
1) Possible only if a current measuring module or current / voltage measuring module is

used.
2) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used.
3) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used. If an OPD version *E04* or
higher is used: Values will only be displayed if phase voltage is set/configured.
4) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used, line-to-line voltage is
set/configured and the OPD used is version *E04* or higher.
5) Possible only if the analog module is used.
6) Possible only if the temperature module is used.
7) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module and temperature module are used. If
an OPD version *E04* or higher is used: Values will only be displayed if phase voltage is
set/configured.
8) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used and the OPD is version
*E04* or higher.

System description
2.9.3.6 Display of measured values in the measured values display

The "Measured Values" menu item displays all current SIMOCODE pro measured values.
Depending upon the type of expansion modules used, all or only some of the values listed
here will be available.
The key menus are described below by way of example:
● Imax 1)
Indicates the maximum current of all three phases and can be switched between A or %
of Is
● IL1, IL2, IL3 1)
Indicates the currents of all three phases and can be switched between A or % of Is.
● Phase unbalance 1)
Displays the current phase unbalance as a percentage.
● UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N 2)
Displays all phase voltages in V.
● U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1 3)
Displays all line-to-line voltages in V.
● Cos phi, P, S 4)
Indicates the power factor (0 to 100 % or absolute, switchable using the right softkey), the
active power in kW, and the apparent power in kVA.
● Ground-fault current [mA]
Indicates the measured value of the residual current.
● Last trip current [mA]
Indicates the last measured value of the residual current.
● Analog input 1, analog input 2, analog output 5)
Indicates the current values at both inputs and the current value at the output of the
analog module and can be switched over between mA and %.
● Max. temperature 6)
Indicates the maximum temperature of all sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module in °C (can be switched to °F).
● T1, T2, T3 6)
Indicates the individual temperatures of all sensor measuring circuits of the temperature
module in °C (can be switched to °F).
● Thermal motor model
Indicates the current temperature rise of the internal thermal motor model in %.
● Time to trip
Indicates the estimated time to trip.

System description
● Cooling-down period
Indicates the cooling down period remaining before the motor can be switched on again
after an overload trip.
● Last trip current
Indicates the magnitude of the current that was measured at the moment of the overload
trip, unit of measurement can be switched between A and % of Is.
1) Possible only if a current measuring module or current / voltage measuring module is
used.
2) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used. If an OPD version *E04* or
higher is used: Values will only be displayed if phase voltage is set/configured.
4) Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used.
5) Possible only if the analog module is used.
6) Possible only if the temperature module is used.
2.9.3.7 Motor protection and motor control status

The status display shows all higher-level status information, i.e. all status information
relevant to the protection and controlling of the motor. The type of status information
depicted is, therefore, in part directly dependent upon the parameterized control function and
the hardware configuration of SIMOCODE pro, and may vary.
These are the most important menus by way of example:
General
● General fault, general warning
● Current flowing, device ok
● Bus ok, PLC/PCS in Run

System description
Control
Note
Display status information
The display of the status information can vary according to the control function.
● ON<<, ON<, OFF, ON>, ON>>, start active

● Interlocking time active, change-over pause active
● OPO, Remote, TPF
● FC, FO, TC, TO: Only for "Positioner" control functions.
● Positioner runs in CLOSED direction, positioner runs in OPEN direction: Only for
"Positioner" control functions.
● Non-maintained command mode
Protection
● Cooling down period active, pause time active, emergency start executed
Other
● Device test active
● Phase sequence 1-2-3, phase sequence 3-2-1
Possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used.
Safety
● Safety DM-F Local: Status enabling circuit, shutdown "Safety," "Safety o.k." (only with an
OPD as from product version *E04*, a basic unit SIMOCODE pro V as from product
version *E07* and a DM-F Local)
● DIP switches, DM-F Local: Status of DIP switches 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 (only with an OPD
as from product version *E04*, a basic unit SIMOCODE pro V as from product version
*E07* and a DM-F Local)
● Safety DM-F PROFIsafe: Status enabling circuit, shutdown "Safety," "PROFIsafe active"
(only with an OPD as from product version *E04*, a basic unit SIMOCODE pro V as from
product version *E07* and a DM-F PROFIsafe)

System description
2.9.3.8 Display of statistical and maintenance-relevant information on the

statistics/maintenance display
The "Statistics/Maintenance" menu item provides an overview of all SIMOCODE pro
information that is primarily relevant to maintenance. The states of timers and counters, etc.
are displayed, as well as operating hours, stop times and the number of starts.
General
● Number of overload trips
● Motor operating hours
● Motor operating hours >: Displays overshooting of the set limit for operating hours
monitoring.
● Permissible starts - actual value
● Permissible starts - actual value
● One more start only, no start
● Stop time: Displays overshooting of the set limit for motor stop time monitoring.
● Energy consumed (possible only if a current / voltage measuring module is used).
● Number of parameterizations
● Operating hours BU
● Timer
● Timer 1 (2, 3, 4) - actual value
● Timer 1 (2, 3, 4) - output
● Counter
● Counter 1 (2, 3, 4) - actual value
● Counter 1 (2, 3, 4) - output
Calculators
● Calculator 1
● Calculator 2
Safety
● Time until test requirement: Remaining time until next test is required in weeks.
This is only displayed for OPD versions as from *E04* and SIMOCODE pro V as from *E07*
with a DM-F present.

System description
2.9.3.9 Status display for PROFIBUS communication

The "Communication" menu item displays all important information concerning PROFIBUS
communication. In addition to the current PROFIBUS device address, the baud rate or
PROFIBUS-relevant settings concerning process and diagnostic alarms to the automation
system.
● PROFIBUS address
● PROFIsafe address: Indicates the PROFIsafe address (only for OPD versions as from
*E04* and SIMOCODE pro V as from *E07* with a DM-F present.)
● Baud rate
● Bus ok, Bus monitoring
● PLC/PCS in Run, PLC/PCS monitoring
● Bus/PLC fault - reset
● Startup parameter block
● Time stamping active
● Compatibility mode
● Compatibility mode 1, 3UF50 Mode
● 3UF50 mode DPV0, DPV1
● 3UF50 basic type
● Diagnostics device error, diagnostics message: Displays which diagnostic information of
type "device error" and/or "message" is sent by SIMOCODE pro to a higher-level
automation system via PROFIBUS.
● Diagnostics warning, diagnostics trip: Displays which diagnostic information of type
"warning" and/or "trip" is sent by SIMOCODE pro to a higher-level automation system via
PROFIBUS.
2.9.3.10 Displays the current status of all device I/Os

The "Device I/Os" menu item provides a complete overview of the current status of all inputs
and outputs of the basic unit as well as any connected expansion modules. The type of
status information displayed is directly dependent upon the SIMOCODE pro hardware
configuration.
The key menus are described below by way of example:
Basic unit
● Inputs 1 (2, 3, 4)
● Outputs 1 (2, 3)
● PTC high resistance/not present
● PTC ok, PTC short circuit

System description
Current measurement
IL1, Il2, IL3: Displays the currents (in A) in all three phases (possible only if a current
measuring module or current / voltage measuring module is used).
Voltage measurement
● UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N: Displays all line-to-line voltages in V (possible only if a current /
voltage measuring module is used and the OPD is version *E04* or higher and line-to-line
voltage is set/configured).
● U L1-L2, U L2-L3, U L3-L1: Displays all line-to-line voltages in V (possible only if a
current / voltage measuring module is used, line-to-line voltage is set/configured and the
OPD used is version *E04* or higher).
Digital module 1, digital module 2

● Inputs 1 (2, 3, 4): Inputs 1, 2, 3, 4 "monostable" or "bistable."
● Outputs 1, 2 "monostable" (possible only if digital module 1 is used as "monostable").
Note
Display
For OPD up to product version *E03*, the display is different.
● Outputs 1, 2 "bistable" (possible only if digital module 1 is used as "monostable" or

"bistable").
Note
Display
For OPD up to product version *E03*, the display is different.
Digital module 1 as DM-F Local

Possible only if digital module 1 is "Local," an OPD as from version *E04* and a
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit as from product version *E07* are used.
● Inputs DM-F Local: Inputs "IN," "Start," "Feedback circuit," "Cascaded."
● Sensor channels DM-F Local: Sensor channels 1, 2
● Outputs DM-F Local: Outputs 1, 2, "Enabling circuit."
Digital module 1 is DM-F PROFIsafe

Possible only if digital module 1 is "PROFIsafe," an OPD as from version *E04* and a
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit as from product version *E07* are used.
● Inputs DM-F PROFIsafe: Inputs 1, 2, 3, "Feedback circuit".
● Outputs DM-F PROFIsafe: Outputs 1, 2, "Enabling circuit."

System description
Ground-fault module
Possible only if the ground-fault module is used.
● Ground-fault current [mA]
● Inputs
- Open circuit
- Short-circuit.
Analog module
Possible only if the analog module is used.
● Input 1, input 2
● Output
● Open circuit
Temperature module
Possible only if the temperature module is used.
● Max. temperature
● T1, T2, T3
● Sensor type Pt100, Pt1000, NTC, KTY83, KTY85
● Sensor fault sensor out of range
2.9.3.11 Adapt display settings

All settings relevant to the operator panel with display can be made in the display settings. In
addition to selecting the language and adjusting the contrast or illumination, it is also
possible to select the profiles here that are relevant for adjusting the main display. The
display settings can be completely reset to the factory settings with the Factory settings
menu item.
The essential menus are described by way of an example below:
Languages
English (default), German, French, Polish, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Finnish
Contrast
0 % ... 100 % (default: 50 %)
Illumination
Stipulates for how long the background illumination will remain on after a button has been
pressed on the operator panel with display, and it enables the illumination to be switched off
permanently:
Off, 3 s, 10 s (default), 1 min, 5 min

System description
Profiles
Enables selection of the display profiles for the main display. If a defined profile is no longer
supported by SIMOCODE pro, for example, due to a changed hardware configuration, the
start display will be shown instead of the default main display:
● IL1, IL2, IL3 [A] (default)
● Imax [A]
● IL1, IL2, IL3 [%]
● Imax [%]
● Imax, Cos phi
● Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi, S
● Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi, S
● Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi, P
● Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi, P
● In1/Output [mA]
● In2/Output [mA]
● Inputs [mA]
● Max. temp. °C
● Temperatures °C
● Max. temp. °F
● Temperatures °F
● UL1-N, UL2-N, UL3-N
● UL1-L2, UL2-L3, UL3-L1
● Imax, UL1-N, Cos phi
● Imax, UL1-L2, Cos phi
● Imax, UL1-N, °C (max. temp.)
● Imax, UL1-L2, °C (max. temp.)
● Imax, UL1-N, °F (max. temp.)
● Imax, UL1-L2, °F (max. temp.)
● Calculator 1
● Calculator 2
● Energy consumed [kWh]
See Section Read and adapt main display (Page 82).

System description
Voltage display
Switch voltage display: Defines whether "phase voltages" or "line-to-line voltages" will be
displayed. (available only with an OPD as from product version *E04* and a
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit up to product version *E06*). Configuration performed in the
basic unit as from basic unit SIMOCODE pro V, product version *E07*.
Warnings
Sets whether the display will switch over to the "Warnings" menu item to display details
when a group warning is pending (not activated by default): Do not display (default) - Display
Faults
Sets whether the display will switch over to the "Faults" menu item to display details when a
group warning is pending (activated by default, higher priority than pending warnings): Do
not display - Display (default)
Return to operations display after

Sets whether and after how long to return from the current menu to the main display
(operations display):
Manual, 3 s, 10 s (default), 1 min, 5 min
Factory settings display

For resetting the display settings (not returning to the factory settings of SIMOCODE pro!).
2.9.3.12 Resetting, testing and parameterizing via commands

The "Commands" menu item contains all commands relating to SIMOCODE pro, e.g. for
testing the feeder, resetting after tripping and/or transferring parameters into the memory
module or into SIMOCODE pro. By safeguarding the device-internal parameterization
against external access, e.g. with a password set in SIMOCODE pro, individual commands
and/or even the entire "Commands" menu item can be blocked.
Addressing plug - adopt DP address

The DP address will be read from the addressing plug. The addressing plug must first be
plugged into the system interface.
Program memory module

Parameters in memory module are deleted. The memory module must first be plugged into
the system interface.
Clear memory module

Parameters in memory module are deleted. The memory module must first be plugged into
the system interface.

System description
Memory module write protection on

All contents of the memory module are write-protected. This prevents any inadvertent
changes to the contents of the memory module and any parameter changes for the
connected SIMOCODE pro V PN basic unit.
An inadvertent modification of parameters for a motor feeder is prevented.
SIMOCODE pro signals the successful execution of the command with the event "Memory
module write protected."
Memory module write protection off

With this command you can cancel the write protection of the memory module.
Restart
Initialization of SIMOCODE pro. New start.
Factory settings
All parameters have their factory setting again, except for the password. Only possible if
password protection is not active or the password is known.
Test
The test function is run. Same function at "TEST/RESET" button on the basic unit and
operator panel.
Reset
A reset is performed. Errors are acknowledged. Same function at "Test/Reset" button on the
basic unit and operator panel.
2.9.3.13 Displaying all pending messages

This menu item provides an overview of all pending status information. A detailed description
of pending messages is provided in Chapter "Alarms, faults, and system events (Page 481)."
2.9.3.14 Displaying all pending warnings

This menu item provides an overview of all pending warnings. In the displays settings, it is
possible to set that the display will automatically switch to this menu item when a new
general warning occurs so that the exact cause of the general warning can be displayed. A
detailed description of pending warnings is provided in Chapter "Alarms, faults, and system
events (Page 481)."
2.9.3.15 Displaying all pending faults

This menu item provides an overview of all pending faults. In the display settings, it is
possible to set that the display will automatically switch to this menu item when a new
general fault occurs so that the exact cause of the general fault can be displayed. A detailed
description of pending faults is provided in Chapter "Alarms, faults, and system events
(Page 481)."

System description
2.9.3.16 Reading the device's internal error buffer

The "Error buffer" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro's internal error buffer.
The time and cause of the last 21 faults are displayed here. See also Chapter "Reading the
error buffer/error log (Page 478)." A detailed description of faults is provided in Chapter
"Alarms, faults, and system events (Page 481)."
2.9.3.17 Reading the device's internal event memory

The "Event memory" menu item enables access to the SIMOCODE pro's internal event
memory. The two most recent events "DM-F enabling circuit closed" and "DM-F enabling
circuit open" are displayed, together with the time, for both digital modules "DM-F Local" and
"DM-F PROFIsafe".
Event memory
The event memory is displayed.
Last event "Enabling circuit closed," DM-F Local

The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed," the time and the related DIP
switch configuration.
Note
Requirements
Possible only if digital module 1 is used as a DM-F Local module.
Last event "Enabling circuit closed." DM-F PROFIsafe

The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed," the time and the related
PROFIsafe address.
Note
Requirements
Possible only if digital module 1 is used as a DM-F PROFIsafe module.
Last event "Enabling circuit open"

The entry contains the last event "DM-F enabling circuit open" and the corresponding time.
Note
Requirements
Possible only if digital module 1 is used as a DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe module.

System description
2.9.3.18 Identification of the motor feeder and the SIMOCODE pro components
In the "Identification" menu item, you will find detailed information about the used
SIMOCODE pro hardware components, e.g. hardware and firmware versions. This dialog
box also enables identification of the motor feeder via a plant identifier stored in SIMOCODE
pro, as well as a request for the location designation and display of the device's internal
comment.
The essential menus are described by way of an example below:
Identification
● Plant identifier
● Location designation
● Date installed
● Description
Basic unit
● Order number
● Short code
● Vendor
● Device subfamily
● Device class
● System
● Ident. no.
● Hardware version
● Firmware version
● Time stamp
Display
● Order number
● Hardware version
● Firmware version

System description
2.9.4 Current measuring modules (IM) for the SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S,
and SIMOCODE pro V device series
Current measuring modules can be used together with all device series.
The current measuring module must be selected according to the set current to be monitored
for each feeder (rated operating current of the motor). The current measuring modules cover
current ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with interposing transformers up to 820 A.
Current measuring modules are available for the following current ranges (see figure below):
● 0.3 to 3 A with through-hole connection
● 2.4 to 25 A with through-hole connection
● 10 to 100 A with through-hole connection
● 20 to 200 A with through-hole technology or bus connection system
● 63 to 630 A with bus connection system
Figure 2-35 Types of current measuring modules

System description
The current measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a connecting cable, which
also supplies the power. Current measuring modules up to 100 A are suitable for standard
rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using additional push-in lugs.
Basic units can be snapped directly onto the current measuring modules. Current measuring
modules up to 200 A can also be mounted on the standard mounting rail or, optionally, they
can be fixed directly to the mounting plate with the screw attachments that are integrated in
the enclosure. The current measuring module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the
integrated screw attachments.
Note
Current measuring modules with a set current of up to 100 A can be connected to the basic
unit mechanically and be installed as a unit (behind one another). Larger current measuring
modules can only be mounted separately.
2.9.5 Current / voltage measuring modules (UM) for the SIMOCODE pro V device
series
The SIMOCODE pro V device series allows use of a current / voltage measuring module
instead of a current measuring module. In addition to measuring the motor current, current /
voltage measuring modules also enable:
● Monitoring of voltages up to 690 V
● Calculation and monitoring of power and power factor (cos phi)
● Monitoring of the phase sequence

System description
The following figure shows the various current / voltage measuring modules:
Figure 2-36 Current / voltage measuring modules
The current / voltage measuring module is connected to the basic unit via a connecting
cable, which also supplies the power. Current / voltage measuring modules up to 100 A are
suitable for standard rail mounting or can be fixed directly to the mounting plate using
additional push-in lugs. Current / voltage measuring modules up to 200 A can also be
mounted on the standard mounting rail or, optionally, they can be fixed directly to the
mounting plate with the screw attachments that are integrated in the enclosure. The current /
voltage measuring module up to 630 A can only be mounted using the integrated screw
attachments. Basic units can only be mounted separately next to current / voltage measuring
modules.
For calculating or monitoring performance variables, current / voltage measuring modules
have additional, removable terminals to which all three phase voltages of the main circuit can
be connected. An additional 3-core cable can be used, for example, to connect the main
circuit directly from the bus connections of the current / voltage measuring module with the
connection terminals of the voltage measurement module.
Note
Requirements
The use of a current / voltage measuring module requires a SIMOCODE pro V, version
*E02* or later (from 04/2005).

System description
Using a decoupling module

A decoupling module may be required when using a voltage measuring module. See
Chapter Decoupling module (DCM) for current / voltage measuring modules (Page 100).
2.9.6 Decoupling module (DCM) for current / voltage measuring modules
Function of the decoupling module

When measuring voltage and power with SIMOCODE pro in ungrounded networks, each
current / voltage measuring module must have a decoupling module connected upstream in
series at the system interface. Where voltage or power is measured with SIMOCODE pro in
systems with additional insulation measurement or insulation monitoring, a decoupling
module must be connected between the basic unit and each current / voltage measuring
module. If using the 3UF710 current measuring module in these networks, it is imperative
that an additional decoupling module is not used.
● 1 decoupling module for connection between a current / voltage measuring module and
the basic unit at the system interface
Figure 2-37 Decoupling module, SIMOCODE pro V device series
Note
Connectable expansion modules
When using a decoupling module, note that the type and number of expansion modules that
can be connected to a basic unit are limited! See Chapter Configuration information for
SIMOCODE pro V when using an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module:
(Page 104).

System description
Using the decoupling module in different networks

A decoupling module may be required when using a voltage measuring module, especially
for the following networks:
● Isolated systems
● High-impedance grounded systems
● Asymmetrically grounded systems
● Single-phase systems
The tables below show decoupling module requirements for different grounding systems and
system configurations (star systems, delta systems, and single-phase systems):

System description
Star networks:
Table 2- 7 Decoupling module requirements for star networks
Star configuration Network configuration Decoupling module Note

required?
4-wire, star, grounded No "TN-S system"
with low impedance according to IEC 60364
4-wire, star, grounded Yes —

with high impedance
3-wire, star, grounded No "TN-C system"

with low impedance according to IEC 60364
3-wire, star, grounded Yes —

with high impedance
3-wire, star, with Yes "IT system" according

isolated neutral to IEC 60364

System description
Delta configurations
Table 2- 8 Decoupling module requirements for delta networks
Delta network1) Network configuration Decoupling module Note

required?
3-wire, delta, one Yes Parameter "Voltage
phase grounded display → phase
voltages" must be
active.
3-wire, delta, Yes Parameter "Voltage

with isolated ground display → phase
voltages" must be
active.
Center tap grounded Yes Parameter "Voltage

display → phase
voltages" must be
active.
1) Mainly in North America
Single-phase systems
Table 2- 9 Decoupling module requirements for single-phase networks
Single-phase network Network configuration Decoupling module Note

required?
Yes Parameter "Voltage
display → Phase
voltages" must be
active. The voltage
applied is calculated
from U_L1N + U_l2N

System description
2.9.7 Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V when using an operator panel
with display and/or a decoupling module:
Use of a decoupling module and/or an operator panel with display

If a decoupling module and/or an operator panel with display is to be used in the
SIMOCODE pro system, the following configuration information regarding the type and
number of expansion modules must be observed.
The following table shows the maximum possible configuration with expansion modules for
the various combinations (✓ = possible, - = not possible):
Maximum configuration with expansion modules
Table 2- 10 Maximum configuration with expansion modules when using an operator panel with display, a current / voltage
measuring module and a decoupling module for SIMOCODE pro V basic units with a 24 V DC or 110 V -
240 V AC/DC supply
SIMOCODE pro basic unit SIMOCODE pro basic unit

Us = 24 V DC Us = 110-240 V AC/DC
OP Measurement Decoupling DM-F DM AM TM EM DM-F DM AM TM EM
module
None/ I - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
OP U/I - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
U/I ✓ ✓1) ✓1) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓
✓1) ✓1) ✓ ✓ -
✓ - ✓ ✓ -
✓ - ✓ - ✓
OPD I - Max. 4 modules Max. 4 modules
U/I - Max. 4 modules Max. 3 modules
- - ✓ ✓ -
U/I ✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓2) - ✓ ✓ ✓
✓ ✓ - ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ - - -
✓1) ✓1) ✓3) - -
✓ - - ✓ ✓
1) No bistable relay outputs and a maximum of 5 of the 7 relay outputs are active
simultaneously (> 3 s)
2) No bistable relay outputs and a maximum of 3 of the 5 relay outputs are active
simultaneously (> 3 s)
3) Analog module output is not used

System description
2.9.8 Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro V device series
2.9.8.1 Spectrum of the expansion modules
Spectrum of the expansion modules

Expansion modules are provided as optional additions for the SIMOCODE pro V device
series. The following expansion modules are available:
● Digital modules (DM)
● Fail-safe digital module Local (DM-F Local)
● Fail-safe PROFIsafe digital module (DM-F PROFIsafe)
● Analog module (AM)
● Ground-fault module (EM)
● Temperature module (TM).
All expansion modules have a housing width of 22.5 mm or 45 mm. They are equipped with
2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and removable terminals. The expansion module is
connected, for example, to the system interface of the basic unit via the first system interface
using a connecting cable. For example, further expansion modules can be connected via the
second system interface or the operator panel.
All expansion modules are suitable for DIN rail mounting or can be fastened directly to a
mounting plate using additional push-in lugs.
Figure 2-38 Expansion module, SIMOCODE pro V device series
Note
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit:
Expansion modules can only be used in conjunction with SIMOCODE pro V!
Up to 5 expansion modules can be connected to a basic unit in any order.
When using an operator panel with display and/or a decoupling module, please note that
additional limitations governing the number of expansion modules that can be connected per
basic unit apply!
See also Chapter Configuration information for SIMOCODE pro V when using an operator
panel with display and/or a decoupling module: (Page 104).

System description
2.9.8.2 Digital module (DM)
Digital module (DM)

Digital modules allow the type and number of binary inputs and relay outputs on
SIMOCODE pro V to be further increased, if required.
The digital modules listed below are available for SIMOCODE pro V:
Table 2- 11 Variants of digital modules
Inputs Power supply Outputs

4 inputs External 24 V DC 2 monostable relay outputs
4 inputs External 110 V to 240 V AC/DC 2 monostable relay outputs
4 inputs External 24 V DC 2 bistable relay outputs
4 inputs External 110 V to 240 V AC/DC 2 bistable relay outputs
Up to two digital modules can be connected to one SIMOCODE pro V basic unit. 4 additional
binary inputs and 2 additional binary outputs are thus provided by each module. All types
can be combined with each other. SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of
12 binary inputs and 7 relay outputs.
In the case of the monostable version, the relay outputs open after disconnection / failure /
interruption of the supply voltage. In the case of the bistable version, the switching state of
the relay outputs remains intact even after disconnection / failure / interruption of the supply
voltage.
If required, you can set a debounce time for the digital module inputs (see Chapter Digital
module inputs (Page 298)).
Power supply to the inputs: See also Chapter Basic units, expansion modules and the
decoupling module (Page 417).
Note
To implement some motor control functions, a further digital module is required in addition to
the relay outputs on basic unit 2.
Note
If 2 digital modules are being used, the digital module connected the closest to the basic unit
via the system interface will be identified as digital module 1. The digital module connected
next in line will be identified as digital module 2. If one digital module is connected to the
front side and another to the lower system interface of the basic unit, the digital module on
the front system interface of the basic unit will always be identified as digital module 1.

System description
2.9.8.3 Fail-safe digital module (DM-F)
Fail-safe digital module DM-F

The fail-safe digital module DM-F extends the SIMOCODE pro motor management system
with fail-safe functions for switching off motors:
● DM-F Local fail-safe digital module
● DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module
These modules conform to the general requirements for emergency stop devices or safety
circuits described in EN 418 and EN 60204-1 (06.2006).
With appropriate external circuitry, the following performance levels / safety integrity levels
can be achieved:
● PL e with Category 4 according to ISO 13849-1 or
● SIL 3 according to IEC 61508 / 62061.
Safety engineering and safety-related functions:
● These are exclusively restricted to the fail-safe digital modules.
● They therefore have no direct impact on existing SIMOCODE pro components and
concepts.
LEDs for DM-F device diagnostics

See Chapter Technical data, digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe (Page 611)
and / or Manual SIMOCODE pro Safety fail-safe digital modules
"TEST / RESET" DM-F button

See Manual SIMOCODE pro Safety fail-safe digital modules
Setting the DM-F DIP switches

See Chapter Safety-oriented tripping (Page 336) and / or Manual SIMOCODE pro Safety
fail-safe digital modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).
DM-F system interfaces


System description
Documentation for safety-related functions and fail-safe digital modules

Safety-related functions and additional information on fail-safe digital modules can be found
in the following documentation:
● System Manual "SIMOCODE pro Safety Fail-Safe Digital Modules"
● Operating Instructions "Fail-safe Digital Module DM-F Local"
● Operating Instructions "Fail-safe Digital Module DM-F PROFIsafe"
You will find the System Manuals and Operating Instructions at Manuals/operating
instructions (www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals)
The fail-safe digital module DM-F Local provides safety-related tripping of a motor feeder via
a hardware signal that is detected and evaluated by the module.
From a non-safety-related perspective, the DMF comprises:
Table 2- 12 Inputs, outputs and voltage supply to the digital module Fail-safe Local (DM-F Local)
Inputs Power supply 1) Outputs

4 non-safety-related digital 24 V DC 2 non-safety-related monostable
inputs: relay outputs
• Input 1: Sensor circuit
• Input 2: Start input
• Input 3: Feedback circuit
• Input 4: Cascading input
1)
The fail-safe DM-F PROFIsafe digital module provides safety-related tripping of a motor
feeder by a fail-safe control (F-CPU) via PROFIBUS with the fail-safe PROFIsafe profile.
From a non-safety-related perspective, the DM-PROFIsafe module comprises:
Table 2- 13 Inputs, outputs and voltage supply to the digital module Fail-safe PROFIsafe
(DM-F PROFIsafe)
Inputs Power supply1) Outputs

4 non-safety-related digital 24 V DC 2 non-safety-related monostable
inputs relay outputs
1)
WARNING
Hazardous voltage
Surge suppressors are required for inductive loads!

System description
2.9.8.4 Analog module (AM)
Analog module (AM)

By means of the analog module, the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit can be optionally
expanded by analog inputs and outputs (0 / 4 mA to 20 mA). This makes it possible to
measure and monitor any process variables that can be mapped onto a 0 / 4 mA to 20 mA
signal.
Typical applications would be, for example, fill-level monitoring for protecting pumps from dry
operation, or the monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer.
The automation system has free access to the measured process variables. The analog
output can, for example, be used for the visualization of any process variables on a pointer
instrument. The automation system can also freely access the output via PROFIBUS.
● 1 analog module can be connected to the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit
● 2 analog inputs (passive) for measuring 0 / 4 mA to 20 mA signals. Both inputs are set
either to 0 mA to 20 mA or to 4 mA to 20 mA.
● 1 output for outputting a 0 / 4 mA to 20 mA signal.
Note
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs that have to be supplied in each case by
an external, isolated current source (e.g. isolating transformer). If the output of the analog
module is not being utilized, it can be used as current source for an input.
Note
The use of an analog module requires a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit, version *E02* or later
(from 04/2005).

System description
2.9.8.5 Ground-fault module (EM)

The 3UF7 500-1AA00-0 and 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 ground-fault modules are suitable for use
with the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit. 1 ground-fault module can be connected to each
1 SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.
NOTICE
Using summation and residual current transformers
The 3UF7 500-1AA00-0 ground-fault module requires the 3UL22 residual current
transformer.
transformer.
Note
Precondition for using a 3UF7 500-1AA00-0 ground-fault module
The use of an ground-fault module requires a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit, version *E02* or
later (from 04/2005).
Note
Detailed information on ground-fault monitoring: See Monitoring functions (Page 40) and
Earth-fault monitoring (Page 240).

System description
2.9.8.6 Temperature module (TM)

The temperature module offers the option of expanding the SIMOCODE pro V device series
by an analog temperature monitoring system. In addition to the thermistor monitoring system
for the basic units, up to 3 analog sensor measuring circuits (in two or three-wire systems)
can be connected, the temperatures in the 3 sensor measuring circuits can be measured,
and the highest temperature in all sensor measuring circuits can be determined. The
measured temperatures can be fully integrated into the process, and they can be further
monitored and also made available for a higher-level automation system via PROFIBUS.
You can, for example, implement analog temperature monitoring of the motor windings,
bearings, coolant or gear box oil.
SIMOCODE pro V supports various sensor types (NTC, KTY83/84, PT100/PT1000) for use
with solid, liquid, or gaseous media.
Note
The same sensor type must be used in all sensor measuring circuits.
● 1 temperature module can be connected to the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

● 3 sensor measuring circuits in 2 or 3-wire systems.
Note
The use of a temperature module requires a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit, version *E02* or
2.9.9 Expansion modules for the SIMOCODE pro S device series
2.9.9.1 Multifunction module
Multifunction module (MM).

The multifunction module is the expansion module of the SIMOCODE pro S device series
with the following functions:
● Digital module function with four digital inputs and two monostable relay outputs
● Ground-fault module function with one input for connecting a 3UL23 residual current
transformer
● Temperature module function with one input for connecting an analog PT100, PT1000,
KTY83, KTY84 or NTC temperature sensor.
No more than one multifunction module can be connected to one SIMOCODE pro S basic
unit.

System description
2.9.10 Accessories
Accessories overview
The following figure shows selected accessories:
Figure 2-39 Accessories
PC cable
For device parameterization, for connecting a PC via its USB interface or serial interface to
the system interface of a basic unit.
USB-to-serial adapter
For connecting an RS -232 PC cable to the USB interface of a PC.

System description
Memory module
Enable all system parameter settings to be backed up and transferred to a new system
without the need for additional resources or specialist expertise, for example, if the device is
replaced (see also the chapter Replacing SIMOCODE pro components (Page 474)).
Note
Memory module type
The basic units SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V up to product version *E08* only
support the memory module 3UF7900-0AA00-0.
The basic units SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V as from product version *E09*
support both the memory module 3UF7900-0AA00-0 and the memory module 3UF7901-
0AA00-0.
Initialization module
The initialization module enables all system parameter settings to be backed up and
transferred to a new system without the need for additional resources or specialist expertise,
for example, if the device is replaced. It can be installed permanently in the switchboard.
Note
Basic unit support
The basic units SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V as from product version *E09*
support the initialization module.
Further information: See Chapter Compartment identification (Page 709).
Addressing plug
For "hardware" assignment of the PROFIBUS DP address without PC / PG on
SIMOCODE pro via the system interface. Setting the PROFIBUS DP address with the
addressing plug: See Chapter Setting the PROFIBUS DP address (Page 467).
Connecting cable
Different types and lengths of connecting cable are available. It is required to connect the
basic unit to its current measuring module and, if applicable, to its expansion modules or the
operator panel.
Note
basic unit!

System description
Door adapter
The door adapter is used to facilitate access to the SIMOCODE pro system interface, for
example via the front panel, to ensure fast parameterization.
System interface cover

The system interface cover helps to protect and/or seal the system interfaces against the
ingress of dirt. In normal operation, unused system interfaces must be closed.
Operator panel adapter

The operator panel adapter enables the use of the 3UF720 operator panel of
SIMOCODE pro in a front panel cutout, in which a 3UF52 operator panel of SIMOCODE DP
(IP54 degree of protection) has previously been used, e.g. after system replacement.
2.9.11 Software
Software overview
With the communication-capable switching devices, the user-friendliness of the
parameterization software and good system integration (in other words, the ability to
integrate optimally and quickly into the most diverse plant configurations and process
automation systems) also play an important role alongside the device functionalities and the
hardware configuration.
For this reason, the SIMOCODE pro system provides suitable software tools for consistent,
time-saving parameterization, configuring and diagnostics:
● SIMOCODE ES for totally integrated commissioning and service
● SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library for total integration into PCS 7.
SIMOCODE ES
SIMOCODE ES is the standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE ES provides the SIMOCODE pro motor management system with a user-
friendly and clear user interface with which to configure, operate, monitor and test
SIMOCODE pro in the field or from a central location via PROFIBUS. By displaying all
operating, service and diagnostics data, SIMOCODE ES supplies important information on
whether maintenance work is required or, in the event of a fault, helps to prevent faults or to
localize and rectify them once they have occurred.
Unnecessary plant downtimes can be prevented by changing parameters online (even
during operation).

System description
In addition, the graphical editor enables extremely ergonomic and user-friendly

parameterization by dragging and dropping: Inputs and outputs of function blocks can be
linked graphically and the parameters set. Configured functions can be described in detail
and device parameterization can be documented graphically using comments. This speeds
up commissioning and simplifies plant documentation. The optimized user interface and
integrated graphic editor are used to assign parameters.
Further functions: Operation, diagnostics, testing, S7 routing, teleservice via MPI, STEP-7
object manager.
Versions:
● SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic
● SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard
● SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium.
● SIMOCODE ES in the TIA Portal.
Note
SIMOCODE ES 2007
The operating procedures described in this manual are based on SIMOCODE ES 2007.
See also An overview of system components (Page 50) for more information.
You will find a demo version and the current updates on the Internet at Support
(http://www.siemens.com/simocode) → Software.
Note
SIMOCODE ES is updated and improved continually.
You can download the current service packs and hot fixes from Support
(http://www.siemens.com/simocode) → Software.
OM SIMOCODE pro Object Manager

The OM SIMOCODE pro Object Manager is a component of SIMOCODE ES. When
SIMOCODE ES and OM SIMOCODE pro are installed on a PC / PG, SIMOCODE ES can be
called directly from STEP 7 HW Config, This enables simple and universal SIMATIC S7
configuration.

System description
SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library

The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library is used to simply and conveniently
integrate SIMOCODE pro into the SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system. The
SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block library contains the diagnostic and driver blocks that
correspond to the diagnostic and driver concept of SIMATIC PCS 7 and the elements
(symbols and faceplates) necessary for operating and monitoring. The application is
integrated by graphic interconnection using the CFC Editor.
Signal processing and technological functions of the SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 function block
library are based on the SIMATIC PCS 7 standard libraries (Driver Blocks, Technological
Blocks) and are optimized for SIMOCODE pro. Users who until now have configured motor
feeders in conventional technology via signal blocks and motor or valve blocks can thus
easily change to the SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 block library.
The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 block library supplied on CD-ROM allows the user to run the
required engineering software on an engineering station (single license) including the
runtime software for executing the AS modules in an automation system (single license). If
the AS blocks are to be used in additional automation systems, the corresponding number of
runtime licenses are required, which are supplied without a data medium.
Note
The PCS 7 libraries are subject to continual updating and improvement.
You can download the current service packs and hot fixes from Support
(http://www.siemens.com/simocode)→ Software.
Note
Observe the respective system versions!
GSD file
To integrate SIMOCODE pro as a standard slave into SIMATIC S7 or any standard DP
master system (automation system). The latest version is on the Internet at GSD file
(http://www.siemens.com/profibus-gsd). Further information on integrating DP slaves can be
found in the automation system documentation.
Win SIMOCODE DP converter

Software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files (3UF5 device series)
into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.
See also
Overview of function blocks (alphabetical) (Page 120)

System description
2.10 Structural configuration of SIMOCODE pro
2.10.1 Function blocks

See also Chapter Overview of function blocks (alphabetical) (Page 120).
Properties
Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for the
administration of various control stations, for the set control function, or for motor protection.
Every function block has a name and can be equipped with inputs and outputs. The inputs
and outputs are used for the internal connection of the various function blocks and, thus, the
setup of a device-internal logic instead of an externally wired logic in the control circuit.
The table below shows the possible input types of the internal function blocks of
SIMOCODE pro:
Table 2- 14 Input types of the internal function blocks of SIMOCODE pro
Input Symbol Example

Plugs (binary) Function blocks in the basic unit may have binary plugs.
These are connected to binary sockets via software. They
are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with
SIMOCODE ES.
Plugs (analog) Function blocks in the basic unit may have analog plugs.
These are connected via software to analog sockets. They
are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with
SIMOCODE ES. Example: 2-byte word for cyclic send
data.
Screw terminals Screw terminals are outside, e.g. "BU Input" function block.
Control devices and auxiliary switches are normally
connected there.
Receive data from From the DP master to SIMOCODE pro, e.g. "Cyclic
PROFIBUS DP receive" function block.

System description
The following table shows the possible output types of the internal function blocks of
SIMOCODE pro:
Table 2- 15 Output types of the internal function blocks of SIMOCODE pro
Output Symbol Example

Sockets (binary) Function blocks in the basic units may have binary
sockets. These sockets are assigned to binary plugs in the
software. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g. with
SIMOCODE ES.
Sockets (analog) Function blocks in the basic units may have analog
sockets. These sockets are assigned to analog plugs in
the software. They are relevant for parameterization, e.g.
with SIMOCODE ES.
Example: 2-byte word, max. current I_max.
Screw terminals Screw terminals are outside, e.g. "BU Output" function
block. The contactors, for example, are connected here.
Send data to From SIMOCODE pro to the DP Master, e.g."Cyclic send"
PROFIBUS DP function block.
Binary terminal Internal binary signals (binary sockets) that are not
block assigned to a function block (fault, status, other), e.g.
"Status - Device OK." (in the graphic editor).
Analog terminal Internal analog signals (analog sockets) that are not
block assigned to a function block, e.g. "Phase Unbalance" (in
the graphic editor).

System description
Diagram of basic structure

The following function block diagram shows the basic structure of SIMOCODE pro with its
external inputs and outputs and internally stored function blocks:
Figure 2-40 Basic structure of SIMOCODE pro
Connecting plugs with sockets
Note
The function block plugs and sockets have not already been connected at the factory with
the binary inputs and the relay outputs of the basic unit. The internal wiring (connection
between plugs and sockets) is determined by the selected application. 1)
Note
If external wiring connections have already been made, but SIMOCODE pro has not yet
been parameterized:
If you press a button now, the contactors will not be energized! 1)
1) If you select and load a preset application (e.g. the reversing starter) in SIMOCODE ES,
all links and interlocks for the reversing starter will be set up in the basic unit.

System description
2.11 Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)
Overview of function blocks (alphabetical)
Analog value recording (Record)
Figure 2-41 Analog value recording (Record)
See Chapter Analog value recording (Page 309).
AM output
See Chapter Outputs (Page 273).
Figure 2-42 AM1 output
AM inputs
See Chapter Inputs (Page 291).
Figure 2-43 AM1 inputs

System description
Acyclic send byte 0 (1)
Figure 2-44 Acycl. send byte 0
Acyclic receive byte 0 (1, 2/3)
Figure 2-45 Acycl. Receive byte 0
OP LED
Figure 2-46 OP LED

System description
OP buttons
Figure 2-47 OP buttons
Operation monitoring
Figure 2-48 Operation monitoring
See Chapter Monitoring functions (Page 239).
Flashing 1 (2, 3)
Figure 2-49 Flashing 1
See Chapter Logic modules (Page 345).
OPO
Figure 2-50 OPO
See Chapter Standard functions (Page 319).

System description
Calculator 1
Figure 2-51 Calculator 1
Calculator 2
Figure 2-52 Calculator 2
DM1(2) outputs
Figure 2-53 DM1(2) outputs


System description
DM1(2) inputs
Figure 2-54 DM1(2) inputs
DM-F Local inputs
Figure 2-55 DM-F Local inputs
DM-F PROFIsafe inputs
Figure 2-56 DM-F PROFIsafe inputs

System description
Extended protection
Figure 2-57 Extended protection
See Chapter Motor protection (Page 153).
Extended control
Figure 2-58 Extended control
See Chapter Motor control (Page 171).

System description
External fault 1 (or 2, 3, 4, 5, 6)
Figure 2-59 External fault 1
Flicker 1 (2, 3)
Figure 2-60 Flicker 1
BU outputs
Figure 2-61 BU outputs, SIMOCODE pro C/V basic units
See the chapter Outputs (Page 273)
Figure 2-62 BU outputs, SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

System description
BU inputs
Figure 2-63 BU inputs
Limit monitor 1 (2, 3, 4)
Figure 2-64 Limit monitor 1
Emergency start
Figure 2-65 Emergency start
Non-volatile element 1 (2, 3, 4)
Figure 2-66 Non-volatile element 1

System description
TPF - Test position feedback
Figure 2-67 TPF
Protection/Control
Figure 2-68 Protection/Control
Signal conditioning 1 (and 2, 3, 4)
Figure 2-69 Signal conditioning 1

System description
Safe tripping, DM-F Local
Figure 2-70 Safe tripping, DM-F Local
Safe tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe
Figure 2-71 Safe tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe

System description
Control stations
Figure 2-72 Control stations

System description
Current limits
Figure 2-73 Current limits
Test 1 (2) and Reset 1 (2, 3)
Figure 2-74 Test 1, reset 1
Thermistor
Figure 2-75 Thermistor
See Chapter Motor protection (Page 153).
Timer 1 (2, 3, 4)
Figure 2-76 Timer 1

System description
TM inputs
Figure 2-77 TM inputs
0/4 to 20 mA monitoring
Figure 2-78 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring

System description
Cos phi monitoring
Figure 2-79 Cos phi monitoring
Ground-fault monitoring with ground-fault module 3UF7500
Figure 2-80 Ground-fault monitoring with EM 3UF7500

System description
Ground-fault monitoring with ground-fault module 3UF7510
Figure 2-81 Ground-fault monitoring with ground-fault module 3UF7510
Power monitoring
Figure 2-82 Power monitoring

System description
Monitoring interval for mandatory testing
Figure 2-83 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing
Voltage monitoring
Figure 2-84 Voltage monitoring
Temperature monitoring
Figure 2-85 Temperature monitoring

System description
UVO - Undervoltage off
Figure 2-86 UVO
Truth table TT 3I/1O (TT 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 3I/1O)
Figure 2-87 Truth table TT 3I/1O
Truth table TT 7 2I/1O (TT 8 2I/1O)
Figure 2-88 Truth table TT 7 2I/1O

System description
Truth table TT 9 5I/2O
Figure 2-89 Truth table TT 9 5I/2O
Watchdog
Figure 2-90 Watchdog

System description
Counter 1 (2, 3, 4)
Figure 2-91 Counter 1
Time stamp
Figure 2-92 Time stamp

System description
Cyclic send byte 0 (1, 2/9)
Figure 2-93 Cyclic send
Cyclic receive byte 0 (1, 2/3)
Figure 2-94 Cyclic receive

System description

Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter 3
3.1 Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter - general
information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find short instructions for configuring a reversing starter, with the aid
of a practical example. The majority of the parameters have been appropriately preset at the
factory for most applications.
You only need to set a few parameters.
Target groups
● Planners
● Configuring engineers
● Technicians
● Electricians
● Commissioning engineers
Required knowledge
● Basic SIMOCODE pro knowledge (see Chapter System description (Page 23))
● Basic knowledge about SIMOCODE ES parameterization software (see Chapter Software
(Page 114)).

Short instructions for configuring a reversing starter
3.2 Introduction and objective of the example
3.2 Introduction and objective of the example
Introduction
The following simple example of a reversing starter demonstrates step-by-step how to
commission SIMOCODE pro. In this context, the reversing starter will be equipped with:
● Initially, one local control station - Local Control
● Followed by a second control station with PROFIBUS DP.
SIMOCODE ES software is used for parameterization.
The PC / PG is connected to the basic unit via a PC cable.
Objective of the example

This example is intended to:
1. Show you how to implement a standard switching operation with a reversing starter using
SIMOCODE pro in just a few steps.
2. Help you modify this example for your application.
3. Help you implement other applications easily.
Fundamental steps
The two fundamental SIMOCODE pro steps are always:
● Implementation of external wiring (for control and feedback of main current switching
devices and control and signaling devices)
● Implementation / activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions (function blocks), with
control and evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs/outputs (internal SIMOCODE pro
wiring).
Prerequisites
● Load feeder / motor is present
● PLC / PCS with PROFIBUS DP interface is present
● The main circuit of the reversing circuit, including the current measuring module, has
already been wired. In this case, the 3 cables leading to the motor must be led through
the feed-through openings of the current measuring module.
● PC / PG is present
● SIMOCODE ES software is installed
● The basic unit has the factory settings. You can find out how to restore the basic factory
settings in Chapter Restoring factory settings (Page 476).

3.3 Reversing starter with motor feeder and local control station
Required components
The following table lists the components required for this example:
Table 3- 1 Components required for this example
Item Ordering data Order number

1 Basic unit SIMOCODE pro C, pro S, or pro V 3UF7000-1AU00-0 (pro C),
3UF7020-1AU00-0 (pro S),
3UF7010-1AU00-0 (pro V)
2 0.3 A to 3 A current measuring module 3UF7100-1AA00-0
3 Connecting cable for connecting basic unit to the current 3UF793.-1AA00-0
measuring module, depending on length
4 "SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic" software for parameterization via 3ZS1312-4CC10-0YA5
the system interface
Or: "SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard" software for 3ZS1312-5CC10-0YA5
parameterization via the system interface with graphic editor
Or: "SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium" software for 3ZS1312-6CC10-0YA5
parameterization via PROFIBUS DP and the system interface
with the graphic editor, includes STEP -7 Object Manager
5 PC cable for connecting the basic unit to a PC / PG 3UF7940-0AA00-0 (RS232)
or 3UF7941-0AA00-0 (USB)

Reversing starter circuitry with SIMOCODE pro

The following schematic shows the circuitry of the main circuit and the control circuit:
Figure 3-1 Wiring of the main circuit and the control circuit with SIMOCODE pro

Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit

The following schematic shows the circuit diagram of the control circuit with a local control
station for the commands:
● CCW
● OFF
● CW
Displays, messages, etc, have not been taken into account.
Figure 3-2 Circuit diagram of a reversing starter control circuit
The necessary interlocks and connections are carried out in the basic unit via software.

3.4 Parameterization
The basics of parameterization

After the external wiring connections have been made (contactor coils connected, current
measuring module integrated in the main circuit), SIMOCODE pro is then parameterized.
For this purpose, you need to understand the following points:
Table 3- 2 Schematic of the various SIMOCODE pro function blocks
Point Description
1 Function blocks are stored internally in the SIMOCODE pro system, e.g. for control stations,
control functions and motor protection.
2 Function blocks have names.
3 Function blocks may have set values, e.g. the type of control function and the set current for
overload protection.
4 Function blocks are equipped with plugs and sockets. These are clearly designated.
5 To achieve the desired functionality, proceed as follows:
1. Interconnect the function blocks by connecting specific plugs to specific sockets (i.e "plug
the plugs into the sockets").
2. If required, set values in the function blocks, e.g. the set current, type of control function.
6 The inputs of the function blocks in the basic unit are designated as plugs and labeled as
follows:
7 The outputs of the function blocks in the basic unit are designated as sockets and labeled as
follows:
8 The plugs and sockets of the device inputs and outputs are not connected as factory
defaults. If you press a button now, the contactors will not be energized.
General procedure for parameterizing the reversing starter

Parameterization means:
● Setting values
● Connecting function blocks
Where this example is concerned, this means:
1. Select the control function "Reversing Starter". This establishes all the interlocks and
connections for the reversing starter in the basic unit.
2. Determine the set current Is for motor protection. In this case, the set current corresponds
to the rated motor current, i.e. 3 A.

3. The "BU Outputs" function block must be connected to the sockets of the
"Protection / Control" function block via the software, i.e:
– "BU Output 1" plug to "Contactor Control QE1" socket (right)
– "BU Output 2" plug to "Contactor Control QE2" socket (left)
4. The plugs on the "Protection / Control" function block must be connected via software to
the sockets on the "BU Inputs" function block, i.e.
– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] ON< to "BU Input 1" socket
– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] OFF to "BU Input 2" socket
– Control station plug - Local Control [LC] ON> to "BU Input 3" socket
Figure 3-3 Schematic of a parameterization example
The assignment of the contactor controls QE depends on the parameterized control function.
See Chapter Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information
for the control functions (Page 236).

Concrete procedure for parameterization with SIMOCODE ES

Proceed as follows:
Table 3- 3 Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES
Step Description
1 Start SIMOCODE ES on your PC / PG.
2 Select the control function "Reversing Starter" as application. When you select this
application, a range of presets will be automatically carried out that you will have to check
later.
3 Select SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S or SIMOCODE pro V under "Device
Configuration". Deactivate the operator panel if this is not installed.
4 Open the dialog Device Parameters > Motor Protection > Overload / Unbalance / Stalled
Rotor. Set the set current Is1 to 3 A.
5 Open the dialog Further Function Blocks > Outputs > Basic Unit and check the following
settings:
• BU Output 1 > Contactor Control QE1
• BU Output 2 > Contactor Control QE2
The relay outputs are connected to the contactor controls.

Note
By choosing a preset application (Step 2), other presets might be made when the BU outputs
are assigned to the contactor controls.
6 Open the dialog Device Parameters > Motor Control > Control Stations and check the
following settings:
• Local Control [LC] ON<: BU - Input 1
• Local Control [LC] OFF: BU - Input 2
• Local Control [LC] ON>: BU - Input 3
The control station "Local Control" is now connected with the binary inputs of the basic unit.
Check whether the enables for "ON" and "OFF" for operating mode "Local2" are set.
7 Parameterization is complete. Save the parameter file on your PC / PG using Device > Save.

Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and commissioning

After creating the parameter file, you can transfer it to SIMOCODE pro and commission the
reversing starter.
To do this, proceed as follows:
Table 3- 4 Transferring the parameters to the basic unit and commissioning
Step Description
1 Switch on the voltage supply of the basic unit.
2 Connect the serial interface of the PC / PG to the system interface of the basic unit using the
PC cable.
3 Observe the status LED on the basic unit. The "Device" LED should light up green.
SIMOCODE pro can be started up.
4 Transfer the parameter file to the basic unit via the menu, e.g. using Target System > Load
to Switching Device. Select the RS-232 interface through which SIMOCODE pro is
connected to the PC via the PC cable.
5 After transferring the data to the basic unit, you will receive the message "Download to
device successfully accomplished".
Note
Switching between "RIGHT" and "LEFT" is only possible via "OFF" after the preset, 5-second
interlocking time has expired.
Configuration with local control station completed

The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a functional
reversing starter with a local control station. If the wiring and parameterization are correct,
the contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation will be activated when the
corresponding buttons are pushed.

3.5 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using PROFIBUS DP
3.5 Adding a control station to the reversing starter using

PROFIBUS DP
In this section
In this section, you will find out how a control station can be added to the previously
configured example by means of PROFIBUS DP. You can switch between the local control
station (local) and PLC / PCS (remote). Thus, SIMOCODE pro system can be controlled
locally via the buttons, as well as via PLC/PCS.
The necessary connections are preset as factory defaults in SIMOCODE pro. Therefore, you
only have to set the PROFIBUS DP address for SIMOCODE pro so that it can be recognized
correctly as a DP slave on the PROFIBUS DP.
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
● The motor is switched off.
● The supply voltage for the basic unit is switched on. The "Device" LED lights up green
● You have connected the basic unit to the PROFIBUS DP. The PROFIBUS DP interface is
on the front (9-way SUB-D socket)
● SIMOCODE pro is integrated in your automation system. Further information on
integrating DP slaves can be found in the automation system documentation.

Setting the PROFIBUS DP address

First, set the PROFIBUS DP address of the basic unit.
You can do this by the following methods:
● Via the addressing plug
● Via SIMOCODE ES
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Proceed as follows:
Table 3- 5 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES
Step Description
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2 Start SIMOCODE ES.
3 Open menu Switching Device > Open online.
4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.
Confirm with OK.
5 Open the dialog Device Parameters > Bus Parameters.
6 Select the DP address.
7 Save the data in the basic unit with Target System > Load to Switching Device. The address is set. Confirm the
change of address.
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug

Proceed as follows:
Table 3- 6 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Step Description
1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.
The switches are numbered.
For example, address 21: Put the "16"+"4"+"1" switches in the "ON" position.
2 If necessary, remove the PC cable from the system interface.
3 Plug the addressing plug into the system interface.
The "Device" LED lights up yellow.
4 Briefly press the Test / Reset button. The address you set is now stored. The "Device" LED flashes yellow for
approx. 3 seconds.
5 Remove the addressing plug from the system interface.

Additional internal components of the basic unit

The local control [LC] station is already wired, the external components are connected and
the necessary internal connections have been made. The following additional internal
components, which have already been connected as factory defaults and do not have to be
parameterized, are now required:
● PROFIBUS DP bit 0.0, bit 0.1 and bit 0.2 for the commands "LEFT", "OFF" and "RIGHT"
● PROFIBUS DP bit 0.5 for switching between the local control station [LC] and PLC/PCS
[DP] (remote)
– Bit 0.5= 0: Local control station [LC] active
– Bit 0.5=1: PLC/PCS [DP] control station active.
The PLC/PCS [DP] control station and the change-over (plug S1) have already been
connected as factory defaults with the bits (sockets) of PROFIBUS DP cyclic send data. The
assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Device Parameters > Motor Control >
Control Stations.
Figure 3-4 Schematic of basic unit internal components for this example
Not all pre-assigned cyclic send data is shown here.

Assignments can be found in SIMOCODE ES under Further function blocks > Outputs >
Cyclic send data (Page 287).
Configuration with PLC/PCS [DP] control station is complete
The configuration with SIMOCODE pro is now complete. You now have a reversing starter
with an additional control station implemented via PROFIBUS DP.
The contactors for clockwise and counterclockwise rotation are controlled by setting the
corresponding bits.

Motor protection 4
4.1 Motor protection - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find information about motor protection.
The motor protection system includes:
● Overload protection
● Unbalance protection
● Stalled rotor protection
● Thermistor protection.
Motor protection operates alongside motor control "at a higher level in the background". All
motor protection parameters are explained here. They can be active or not, according to the
control function selected.
Target groups
● Commissioning engineers.
Required knowledge
● In-depth knowledge about SIMOCODE pro
● The principle of connecting plugs to sockets
● Electrical drive engineering.
Navigation in SIMOCODE ES
You will find the dialogs in SIMOCODE ES under Device Parameters > Motor Protection.

Motor protection
4.2 Introduction
4.2 Introduction
Description
The motor protection functions "Overload Protection," "Unbalance Protection," "Stalled Rotor
Protection," and "Thermistor Protection" are described in Chapters Overload protection
(Page 157) to Stalled rotor protection (Page 167).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Ext. Protection" function block ("Overload Protection,"
"Unbalance Protection," and "Stalled Rotor Protection") with optional parameter settings and
events.

Motor protection
4.2 Introduction
Figure 4-1 "Ext. Protection" function block ("Overload Protection," "Unbalance Protection," and
"Stalled Rotor Protection")
1)Adjustable transformation ratio when using interposing transformers with SIMOCODE pro
V, version *E03* and higher

Motor protection
4.2 Introduction
Adjustable responses "Overload Protection," "Unbalance Protection," and "Stalled Rotor Protection"
Response Prewarning level Trip level "overload Level "unbalance" Level "stalled
"overload protection" rotor protection"
protection"
disabled X X X X
signal X X X X
warn X X X X
tripping — X X X
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (0.5 s) — 0 to 25.5 s (0.5 s) 0 to 25.5 s (0.5 s)
Responses for "Overload Protection", "Unbalance Protection" and "Stalled Rotor Protection"
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important information
(Page 19).
Note
Deactivate Unbalance Protection in SIMOCODE ES when the load type is set to single-
phase!

Motor protection
4.3 Overload protection
4.3.1 Description
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase or AC motors in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1
requirements. The trip class can be set to eight different settings, ranging from Class 5 to
Class 40. Thus, the tripping time can be adapted precisely to the power-up behavior of the
motor, improving utilization of the motor capacity. Additionally, the "Thermal motor model"
and time to overload trip are calculated and made available to the control system. After an
overload trip, the remaining cooling down period is displayed (see Class). The motor current
is saved in the case of an overload trip.
Depending on the control function, the set current Is is separately parameterizable for one or
two speeds (Is1 and Is2).
The rated motor current is usually set with set current Is1. This value can be found on the
type plate of the motor. It is the basis for calculating the overload trip characteristic curve.
The Set current Is2 is only necessary for motors with 2 speeds so that adequate overload
protection for the higher speed is also ensured. Generally, Is2 should be set higher than Is1.
4.3.2 Set current Is1
Setting ranges for set current ls1

Range: Depends on the selected current measuring module or current / voltage measuring
module.
Set current Is1: 0.3 to 3 A (default: 0.3)

2.4 to 25 A
10 to 100 A
20 to 200 A
63 to 630 A

Motor protection
Transformation ratio - active

When using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped several times
through the current measuring module or the current / voltage measuring module, you can
enter the transformation ratio of the interposing transformer. Activate the checkbox if you
wish to use this option. The parameterized set current thus continues to correspond to the
actual nominal motor current and does not have to be converted.
The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between nominal motor current [A] and
measuring current [A] or any multiple of this ratio.
Note
This parameter is only available when using basic unit SIMOCODE pro V as from version
*E03*.
Transformation ratio - primary

Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox selected.
Range: 0 to 8191.875 (default: 0).
Transformation ratio - secondary

Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox selected.
Range: 0 to 15 (default: 0).

Motor protection
4.3.3 Set current Is2
Setting ranges for set current Is2

Range: Depends on the selected current measuring module or current / voltage measuring
module.
Set current Is2: 0.3 to 3 A (default: 0.3)

2.4 to 25 A
10 to 100 A
20 to 200 A
63 to 630 A
Transformation ratio - active

When using an interposing transformer, or if the main supply cable is looped several times
through the current measuring module or the current / voltage measuring module, you can
enter the transformation ratio of the interposing transformer.
Select the checkbox if you wish to use this option. The parameterized set current thus
continues to correspond to the actual nominal motor current and does not have to be
converted.
The transformation ratio is calculated from the ratio between nominal motor current [A] and
measuring current [A] or any multiple of this ratio.
Note
This parameter is only available when using SIMOCODE pro V as from version *E03*.
Transformation ratio - primary

Enter the primary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox selected.
Range: 0 to 8191.875 (default: 0).
Transformation ratio - secondary

Enter the secondary current here, with the "Transformation ratio - active" checkbox selected.
Range: 0 to 15 (default: 0).
Note
In the case of motors with two speeds, the same or different transformation ratios can be set
for each speed, depending upon whether the same or two different interposing transformers
is/are used for each speed.

Motor protection
4.3.4 Application example
Example 1:
Rated motor current: 700 A.
A 3UF18 68-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing transformer
(transformation ratio 820 : 1), the secondary side is looped once through a current
measuring module (0.3 A to 3 A):
Transformation ratio for Is = 820 : 1; Is = 700 A
Settings (primary and secondary)
● Set current Is1: 700 A
● Is1 Transformation ratio primary: 820
● Is1 Transformation ratio secondary: 1
Example 2:
Rated motor current: 225 A.
A 3UF1868-3G current transformer (205 to 820 A) is used as interposing transformer
(transformation ratio 820 : 1), the secondary side is looped twice through a current
measuring module (0.3 A to 3 A):
Transformation ratio for Is = 820 : 2; Is = 225 A
● Set current Is1: 225 A
Example 3:
The motor cable is looped twice through a current measuring module (0.3 to 3 A, for a motor
with a rated current of 0.25 A):
Transformation ratio for Is = 1 : 2; Is = 0.25 A
● Set current Is1: 0.25 A

Motor protection
4.3.5 Further overload protection parameters
Class
The Class (trip class) defines the maximum time within which SIMOCODE pro must trip from
cold at 7.2 times the set current Is (motor protection to IEC 60947). SIMOCODE pro meets
the requirements of tolerance band E according to IEC / EN 60947-4-1 in respect of the
accuracy of the tripping times. Note that, for starts > "Class 10," the permissible 3AC current
may have to be reduced (derating), that is, a larger contractor must be chosen.
The following figure shows trip classes 5, 10 (d), 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 for 3-pole
balanced loads:
Figure 4-2 Trip classes for 3-pole symmetrical loads

Motor protection
The following figure shows trip classes 5, 10 (d), 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 and 40 for 2-pole loads:
Figure 4-3 Trip classes for 2-pole loads
Response to overload
The SIMOCODE pro response to overload can be additionally adjusted here:
Further information: See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter Important
information (Page 19) and Table "Responses" in Chapter Introduction (Page 154).
Note
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must remain set to "Tripping"!

Motor protection
Cooling-down period
The cooling down period is the amount of time that must elapse before an overload trip can
be reset. This is usually 5 minutes. The thermal memory (motor model – see below) is
deleted after the cooling down period elapses. Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro
during this time extend the specified time correspondingly.
Range:
Cooling down 60 to 6553.5 s (default: 300 s)

period:
Thermal motor model (thermal memory)

When the rated motor current (Is) is at 100%, the value of "Thermal motor model" is 87 %
(1/1.15 -15 x 100 %) in a steady state and 100 % at the moment of an overload trip.
"At operating temperature" state

In the "at operating temperature" state, the tripping times are reduced by the factors listed in
the table. These factors apply to 3-pole symmetrical loads, Class 5 to Class 40:
Table 4- 1 Factors for trip times at operating temperature
x Is Preload as a percentage of the set current Is

0 20 40 60 80 100
1,15 1 1 1 1 1 1
1,5 1 0,90 0,78 0,64 0,57 0,24
2 1 0,88 0,74 0,58 0,40 0,19
4 1 0,85 0,69 0,52 0,35 0,16
6 1 0,84 0,68 0,51 0,34 0,15
7,2 1 0,84 0,68 0,51 0,33 0,15
8 1 0,84 0,67 0,51 0,33 0,15
Example:
You have operated and switched off a motor with set current 100% Is.
You immediately switch the motor back on. This causes an overload trip with 2 x Is, Class 10.
● Tripping time in cold state: approximately 40 s (acc. to tripping characteristic)
● Factor for tripping time with preload 100% Is: 0.19 (see Table)
● Reduced tripping time: 0.19 x 40 s = 7.6 s.
Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling down response of the motor when
tripped under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an overload trip). After this
interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is erased and a new cold start is possible.
This means that many startups can be performed in a short space of time.

Motor protection
The following schematic shows the cooling down response with and without pause time:
Figure 4-4 Cooling down response with and without pause time
Note
Both the motor and the switching devices must be dimensioned specifically for this load!
Pause time: 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 0).
Load type
You can select whether SIMOCODE pro is to protect a 1-phase or a 3-phase load. For a 1-
phase type of load, the internal ground-fault monitoring and the unbalance protection must
be deactivated. Phase failure monitoring is deactivated automatically.
Type of load: 1-phase, 3-phase (default)

See also Table "Decoupling module requirements for star networks."

Motor protection
Delay prewarning
The "Delay" parameter (default: 0.5 s) defines the length of time for which the prewarning
level (1.15 x Is) must be permanently exceeded before SIMOCODE pro will execute the
desired response. If no setting is made, there will be no response. In the event of a loss of
phase or an unbalance > 50%, the prewarning level will be reached earlier, at approximately
0.85 x Is.
Reset
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Auto," the "Overload," "Overload + Unbalance," and
"Thermistor" faults will be acknowledged automatically:
● If the cooling down period has expired.
● If the thermistor value has dropped back down to the specified resetting value.
If the "Reset" parameter is set to "Manual", the faults must be acknowledged by a reset
signal:
● "Reset" button on the basic unit
● "Reset" button on the operator panel.
● Standard functions "Reset."
For this, the "Reset - Input" (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, e.g.
using reset via bus.
Reset: Manual, Auto (default: Manual)
WARNING
Unexpected restart of the motor
The "Auto-Reset" mode must not be used for applications where an unexpected motor
restart may cause personal injury or damage to property.

Motor protection
4.4 Unbalance protection
4.4 Unbalance protection
Description
The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the control system.
A definable and delayable response can be triggered when an adjustable limit has been
overshot. If the phase unbalance is more than 50 %, the tripping time is also automatically
reduced in accordance with the overload characteristic since the heat generation of the
motors increases in asymmetrical conditions.
Phase balance formula

The phase unbalance is calculated using the following equation:
Level
The level of unbalance to which SIMOCODE pro should react is set here.
Level: 0 to 100 % (default: 40 %)
Response
Here you can choose the response of SIMOCODE pro in case of phase unbalance:
(Page 19) and Table "Responses" in Chapter Important information (Page 19).
Delay
The unbalance level must be exceeded for the period of the set delay time before
SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. If no setting is made, there will be no
response.
Setting range: 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s).
See also
Introduction (Page 154)

Motor protection
4.5 Stalled rotor protection
4.5 Stalled rotor protection
Description
If the motor current rises above an adjustable stalled rotor protection level (current
threshold), a defined and delayable response can be configured for SIMOCODE pro. In this
case, for example, the motor can be shut down independently of the overload protection.
The stalled rotor protection is only active after the parameterized class time has elapsed,
e.g. for Class 10 after 10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical
loads as well as premature aging of the motor.
Level
When the stalled rotor level is exceeded, SIMOCODE pro reacts according to the selected
response.
Level: 0 to 1020 % of ls (default: 0)
Response
Here you can determine the response to violation of the stalled rotor level:
(Page 19) and Table "Responses" in Chapter Important information (Page 19).
Delay
The "Delay" parameter determines the length of time that the stalled rotor level must be
permanently exceeded before SIMOCODE pro executes the desired response. If no setting
is made, there will be no response.
Setting range: 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s).
See also
Introduction (Page 154)

Motor protection
4.6 Thermistor protection
Description
Thermistor protection is based on a direct temperature measurement in the motor via binary
PTC thermistors which can be connected to the SIMOCODE pro basic unit.
Thermistor protection is used in the case of:
● Motors with high switching frequencies
● Converter operation
● Motors with heavy starting
● Intermittent duty and/or braking operation
● Restricted air supply
● Speeds below the rated speed.
In this case, the sensors are mounted in the winding slot or bearing of the motor.
Schematic and characteristic curve

The resistance of the thermistors increases rapidly (abruptly) when the temperature limit is
reached.
Figure 4-5 Thermistor function block (thermistor protection)

Motor protection
Response
● Overtemperature:
Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response to violation of the trip level for
overtemperature.
Note
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must be set to "tripping"!
● Sensor fault (sensor circuit fault): Here you can select the SIMOCODE pro response in
the case of a short circuit or open circuit in the thermistor sensor cable.
Table 4- 2 "Thermistor protection, binary" response
Response Trip level Sensor fault

disabled — X
signal X X
warn X X (d)
tripping X (d) X

(Page 19).

Motor protection

Motor control 5
5.1 Motor control - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find information on:
● Control stations which you can select and enable according to need. The following related
topics are explained:
– How control stations, operating modes and enables work together,
– How control commands, e.g. "ON," "OFF," are switched through to the control
function.
● Control functions you can select according to need. The following related topics are
explained:
– How control commands, e.g. "ON," "OFF," are switched through from the control
stations to the contactor controls/relay outputs
– Which parameters apply depending on the control function chosen.
Target groups
● PLC programmers
Required knowledge
● Electrical drive engineering
● Motor protection
You will find the dialog boxes in SIMOCODE ES under Device Parameters > Motor Control.

Motor control
5.2 Control stations
5.2.1 Description
Control stations - overview

Control stations are places from which control commands are issued to the motor. The
"Control Stations" function block is used for administration, switching and prioritization of
these different control stations. SIMOCODE pro allows parallel administration of up to four
different control stations. Dependent on the set control function, up to five different control
commands can be transmitted from every control station to SIMOCODE pro.
● Local in the direct vicinity of the motor; control commands via pushbuttons.
● PLC/PCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system (remote).
● PC, control commands are issued via an operator control station or via
PROFIBUS DPV1 with the SIMOCODE ES software.
● Operator panel, control commands are issued via the buttons of the operator panel in the
cabinet door.
Examples of control commands:
– Motor ON (ON >), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter
– Motor LEFT (ON <), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON >) for a reversing starter
– Motor SLOW (ON >), Motor FAST (ON >>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit.
The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets (e.g.
binary inputs on the basic unit, control bits from the PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for the control
commands to take effect.
Up to five different control commands can be transferred from each control station. Up to five
plugs (plug ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) are available on the function block for
each control station. The number of active plugs depends on the control function selected.
With a direct starter, for example, only the plugs "ON >" and "OFF" are active.
Control stations
● Control station - local control
In this case, the control devices are usually in the direct vicinity of the motor and are
wired to the inputs of SIMOCODE pro. The plugs of the "Control Stations" function block
must be connected to any sockets (normally the function blocks for the basic units or the
digital module inputs – BU Inputs, DM Inputs) for the control commands to take effect.
Note
The OFF command "LC OFF" is 0-active. This ensures that SIMOCODE pro shuts the
motor down safely if an open circuit occurs in the supply cable, for example. The
precondition is that the control station is active.

Motor control
Figure 5-1 Control station - local control
● Control station - PLC/PCS

This control station is primarily intended for control commands from the automation
system (PLC/PCS) via the cyclic receive telegram from PROFIBUS DP.
The plugs of the "Control stations" function block must be connected to any sockets,
normally the function blocks for the cyclic PROFIBUS DP bits (cyclic receive) for the
control commands to take effect.
Figure 5-2 Control station - PLC/PCS

Motor control
● Control station - PC
This control station is primarily intended for switching commands from any PC which,
along with the automation system, is used as a second master on the PROFIBUS DP.
The control commands are received from the PROFIBUS DPV1 via the Acyclic Receive
telegram.
Note
If the SIMOCODE ES or SIMATIC PDM PC software is connected to SIMOCODE pro via
PROFIBUS DP, its control commands automatically take effect via the PC [DPV1] control
station. In this case connection is not required.
Figure 5-3 Control station - PC
● Control station - operator panel

This control station is primarily intended for control commands issued via the buttons on
the 3UF72 operator panel, which is mounted in a cabinet door, for example. The plugs of
the "Control Stations" function block must be connected to any sockets (normally to the
function block for the buttons of the operator panel - OP buttons) for the control
commands to take effect.
Note
Since the operator panel only has four buttons for controlling the motor feeder, one button
must be used as a speed switch button for control functions with two rotational speeds
and two directions of rotation.
For this purpose, the button must be assigned to the internal control command
"[OP]<>/<<>>."
Note
If the SIMOCODE ES PC software on a programming device is connected to
SIMOCODE pro via the system interface, its control commands automatically take effect
via the "operator panel [OP]" control station and must also be enabled here as applicable.

Motor control
Figure 5-4 Control station - Operator panel
5.2.2 Operating modes and mode selectors
Operating modes
You can use the control stations either individually or in combination. There are four different
operating modes available for selection:
● Local 1
● Local 2
● Local 3
● Remote / Automatic: In this operating mode, the system must communicate via PLC.
Not all control stations are usually connected. If more than one control station (e.g. local and
PLC / PCS) is connected, it makes sense and is also mandatory to operate the control
stations selectively. Four operating modes are provided for this purpose which can be
selected via two control signals (mode selectors). For each individual control station in every
operating mode, it can be stipulated if "ON commands" and / or "OFF commands" are to be
accepted. The operating modes are controlled in such a way that only one operating mode is
active at any one time.
Example: There are three operating modes in a system:
Table 5- 1 Operating modes
Operating mode Description

Key-operated switch operation, e.g. Local 1 Only local control entries are permitted!
All other control stations are locked.
Manual operation, e.g. Local 3 Only operator panel control commands and local
control commands can be issued.
Remote operation, e.g. remote / automatic Only PLC/PCS control commands are permitted;
locally, only OFF commands are permitted.

Motor control
The key-operated switch must be read in via an input to select these operating modes. The
remote switching operation should be controlled via the bus. The key-operated switch
operation has priority over all other operating modes.
Mode selector
The S1 / S2 mode selectors are used to switch between the operating modes "Local 1,"
"Local 2," "Local 3," and "Remote/Automatic." The S1 and S2 plugs must be connected to
any sockets (e.g. device inputs, control bits from the PROFIBUS DP, etc.) for this.
The following table shows the operating modes, depending on the signal status of the S1
and S2 mode selectors:
Table 5- 2 Operating modes depending on S1 and S2
Input Operating mode

Local 1 Local 2 Local 3 Remote / Automati
c
S1 0 0 1 1
S2 0 1 0 1
The different operating modes for enabling the control stations can be used to specify the
switch authorizations for the individual control stations:
● Local control [LC]
● PLC / PCS [DP]
● PC [DPV1]
● Operator panel (OP)
Only the following are active:
● The operating mode set by the plugs S1 and S2 of the "Control Stations" function block
● and enables the selected on "Control Stations."
Example of a dynamic mode selection as a function of time:
Figure 5-5 Example - mode selection

Motor control
5.2.3 Enables and enabled control command
Enables
Enables, which have to be activated, are assigned to the "ON" and "OFF" control commands
for each control station in every operating mode. That is, depending on the mode, it is
possible to define for each control station whether it is permitted to switch the motor on only,
off only, or on and off. The relevant checkbox is selected in the "Control stations" dialog
box in SIMOCODE ES.

Motor control
Diagram of enables and enabled control command

The following diagram shows the "Control Stations" function block and the operating modes:
Figure 5-6 Function block "Control Stations"

Motor control
Example of enabled commands

The following diagram shows an example of enabled commands for the "Local 2" operating
mode, "Dahlander reversing starter" control function:
Figure 5-7 Example of enabled commands
In the example, the motor can only be switched on and off in the "Local 2" operating mode
via the buttons (local) connected to the inputs of the basic unit and the digital module.

Motor control
5.2.4 Control station settings
Table 5- 3 Control station settings
Control stations Description

LC Activates the control station via any signal (any sockets ,
ON << but typically device inputs).
The "OFF" plug is 0-active on the control station [LC].
ON <
OFF
ОN >
ON >>
PLC / PCS [DP] Activates the control station via any signal (any sockets ,
ON << but typically control bits from PROFIBUS DP)
ON <
OFF
ОN >
ON >>
PC [DPV1] Activates the control stations via any signal (any sockets ,
ON << but typically control bits from PROFIBUS DPV1)
ON <
OFF
ОN >
ON >>

Motor control
Control stations Description

Operator panel [OP] Activates the control stations via any signal (any sockets ,
<>/<<>> but typically buttons on the operator panel)
ON <
OFF
ОN >
ON >>
Mode selector For switching between the 4 operating modes Local 1, Local 2,
S1 Local 3, and remote with any signals (any sockets , e.g.
device inputs, control bits from PROFIBUS DP, etc.)
S2

Motor control
5.3 Control functions
5.3.1 Description of control functions
Control functions - overview

Depending on the device series, the system provides the following control functions:
Table 5- 4 Control functions
Control function SIMOCODE

pro C pro S pro V
Overload relay ✓ ✓ ✓
Direct starter (direct-on-line starter) ✓ ✓ ✓
Reversing starter ✓ ✓ ✓
Circuit breaker ✓ ✓ ✓
Star-delta starter — ✓ ✓
Star-delta reversing starter — — ✓
Dahlander — — ✓
Dahlander reversing starter — — ✓
Pole-changing starter — — ✓
Pole-changing reversing starter — — ✓
Positioner 1 to Positioner 5 — — ✓
Soft starter with reversing contactor — — ✓
Control functions (e.g. direct-on-line starters, reversing starters) are used for controlling load
feeders.
They are characterized by the following important features:
● Monitoring of the switch on / off operation
● Monitoring the ON / OFF status
● Tripping if a fault occurs.
SIMOCODE pro uses the "Feedback ON" auxiliary control input to monitor these statuses.
This input is usually derived directly from the current flow in the main circuit via the current
measurement modules.
All necessary interlocks and connections for the corresponding applications are already
implemented in the control functions.
Control functions consist of:

Motor control
● Plugs for
– control commands (ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >>) that are usually connected with
the "Enabled control command" sockets.
● Auxiliary control inputs (plug ), e.g. Feedback ON.
● Sockets for
– Contactor controls QE1 to QE5.
– Displays (lamp controls) QL, QLS.
– Statuses, e.g. "Status - ON <<, Status - ON >>."
– Faults, e.g. "Fault - feedback (FB) ON," "Fault - antivalence."
● Settings, e.g. interlocking time, non-maintained command mode ON / OFF, etc.
● A logic component with all necessary interlocks and connections for the control function.
● Like control functions, the motor protection with its parameters and signals is active "at a
higher level in the background". Motor protection and thermistor protection are
independent functions that switch off the motor when activated via the control functions.
Detailed description: See Chapter Motor protection (Page 153).

Motor control
Control function schematic

The following schematic shows a general view of the control function ("Protection/Control"
function block)
Figure 5-8 "Protection/Control" function block
**) See also Chapter Motor protection (Page 153).
Contactor controls
The QE contactor controls are switched dependent on the incoming control commands and
taking the specified control function into consideration including all corresponding interlocks,
feedbacks, corresponding parameters and the higher-level motor protection. In general, the
QE contactor controls are directly connected to the outputs of the basic unit or the digital
modules and switch the connected contactors using relays. The number of usable QE
contactor controls is directly dependent on the set control function.

Motor control
Lamp controls and status information:

The feeder status feedback is signaled via the status information or the QL lamp controls.
They are all directly dependent on the status of the auxiliary control input "FB ON". The
number of usable lamp controls and status information is directly dependent on the specified
control function.
Feeder status feedback:
● Status information, e.g. "Status ON <": These are transmitted, for example, via
PROFIBUS DP to the automation system and signal the status of the feeder there.
● Displays (lamp control) "Display - QLE <": These can, for example, activate a signal lamp
or a pushbutton lamp for status display
Note
If the motor is running in test operation, the QLE ... / QLA lamp outputs show a different
response (e.g. flashing).
● In addition to the status signals, the "QL..." lamp controls additionally indicate the
following:
– Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
– Saving change-over command (QLE lamp outputs are flickering)
– Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.
Extended status and fault messages

● Additional status information:
– Start active: If "Motor" is selected as the load type, this signal is present during the
start process of the motor for the duration of the specified class time (e.g. 10 s for
Class 10). Exceptions are the "Overload relay" and "Solenoid valve" control functions.
– Interlocking time active: For control functions with a change in the direction of rotation,
the signal remains present until the specified interlocking time has elapsed.
– Change-over pause active: For the "Dahlander," "Pole-changing starter," and "Star-
delta" control functions the signal is present after changeover until the specified time
has elapsed.
● Additional status information for the "Positioner" or "Solenoid valve" control function:
– Feedback CLOSED (FC)
– Feedback OPEN (FO)
– Torque CLOSED (TC)
– Torque OPEN (TO).
These feedback signals specify the present status of the corresponding limit switch and/or
torque switch. The amount of usable status information is directly dependent on the selected
control function.

Motor control
● Additional fault information for the "Positioner" or "Solenoid valve" control function:
– Stalled positioner: The torque switch has been activated before the corresponding limit
switch. The positioner may have stalled.
– Double 0: Both torque switches have responded.
– Double 1: Both limit switches have responded.
– End position: Positioner has left the end position without receiving a control command.
– Antivalence: The change-over contacts of the limit switches do not issue an antivalent
signal (only for the "Positioner 5" control function).
Figure 5-9 "Extended control" function block

Motor control
5.3.2 Control functions - general settings and definitions
Application selection
The following dialog box opens
● when the SIMOCODE ES software starts and
● with menu command Switching Device > New in SIMOCODE ES.
If you select a preset application, e.g. the reversing starter, in SIMOCODE ES and load it
into the switching devices, all protection functions, links, and interlocks for the reversing
starter will be set up in the basic unit. These can be flexibly adapted and expanded.
Figure 5-10 Application selection

Motor control
Depending on the basic unit used, you can choose from among the following control
functions:
Table 5- 5 Application selection
Control function Short Description Further information

Overload relay SIMOCODE pro responds like an See "Overload relay" control function
overload relay. (Page 192)
Direct starter (direct-on-line starter) Switching motor on and off See "Direct starter" control function
(Page 194)
Reversing starter Control of direction of rotation of See "Reversing starter" control function
motors (forward, reverse) (Page 196)
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) Closing and opening a circuit breaker See "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)"
(e.g. 3WL, 3VL) control function (Page 199)
Star-delta starter To limit the starting current, See "Star-delta starter" control function
SIMOCODE pro initially starts a (Page 202)
motor with a star-connected stator
winding and then switches it to delta.
Star-delta reversing starter Star-delta starter with both directions See "Star delta reversing starter" control
of rotation (forward, reverse) function (Page 205)
Dahlander Control of motors with only one See "Dahlander" control function (Page 209)
stator winding in two speed steps
(fast, slow)
Dahlander reversing starter Dahlander starter with both See "Dahlander reversing starter" control
directions of rotation (forward, function (Page 212)
reverse)
Pole-changing starter Control of motors with two stator See "Pole-changing starter" control function
windings in two speed steps (fast, (Page 216)
slow)
Pole-changing reversing starter Pole-changing starter with both See "Pole-changing reversing starter"
directions of rotation (forward, control function (Page 219)
reverse)
Solenoid valve Control of a solenoid valve See "Solenoid valve" control function
(Page 223)
Positioner (1, 2, 3, 4, 5) Control of positioners or valve See "Positioner" control function (Page 225)
actuators, types 1 to 5
Soft starter Control of the 3RW soft starter See "Soft starter" control function
(Page 230)
Soft starter with reversing contactor Control of the 3RW soft starter, See "Soft starter with reversing contactor"
including an additional reversing control function (Page 232)
contactor

Motor control
Parameters for control functions
Table 5- 6 General settings and definitions
Parameter Description
ON <<, ON <, OFF, ON >, ON >> Are usually connected with the "Enabled control command" sockets of the "Control
Station" function block. From there, the control commands come from the different
control stations. The number of active inputs depends on the control function chosen.
With a direct-on-line starter, for example, only the plugs "ON >" and "OFF" are active.
Default: Connected
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with any socket , usually with
"Status - Motor current flowing" socket) as factory default. An auxiliary contact from
the contactor is not required for signaling. Depending on the control function chosen,
this state is signaled by the QLE1 to QLE5 displays and by the "Status - ON <<,
- ON <, - ON >, - ON >>" signals.
"No motor current flowing" means: the motor is switched off. An auxiliary contact from
the contactor is not required for signaling. This state is signaled by the QLA display
and the "Status - OFF" signal.
Default: Status - current flowing
FC, FO, TC, TO Auxiliary control inputs for the "Positioner" and "Solenoid valve" control functions that
are normally connected with the inputs of the basic unit or the digital modules and are
used to query the present status of the torque switch and the limit switches that are
hard-wired to the inputs.
Non-maintained command mode • Deactivated:
The control command on the corresponding plug of the control stations "ON <,
ON <<, ON >, ON >>" is saved. It can only be revoked by an "OFF" control
command from the corresponding control station. An auxiliary contact for locking
the contactor is not required. Motor feeders are usually operated in locking mode.
Locking is preset.
• Activated:
Depending on the control function chosen, non-maintained command mode acts
on the plugs of all control stations "ON <, ON <<, ON >, ON >>." A control
command is only effective as long as there is a "high signal".
Saving change-over command • Deactivated:
Change-over commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational
speed to the other are only implemented with a previous "OFF" and after the
interlocking time / change-over pause has elapsed. This setting is usually used
and is preset.
• Activated:
Change-over commands for switching from one direction of rotation/rotational
speed to the other are implemented without a previous "OFF" once the
interlocking time / change-over pause has elapsed. If the selected direction /
speed cannot be executed immediately due to a parameterized interlocking time /
change-over pause, the selection is signaled by flickering QLE displays. Your
selection can be cancelled at any time with "OFF".

Motor control
Separating DM-FL/FP function • Deactivated:
from control function Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules also affects the SIMOCODE pro
control function, so that the contactor control is always tripped, too. This setting is
selected for applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor
controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated:
Safety-related tripping via the DM-F modules does not affect the SIMOCODE pro
control function, so that the contactor control is not tripped. This setting is
selected for applications where safety-related tripping does not affect the motor
Load type You can select from the following:
• Motor
• Resistive load (e.g. heating):
Since no overcurrent flows during startup on a resistive load, the "Start active"
status is not signaled. In this case, the startup override does not occur for the
"signal," "warn," and "tripping" functions.
Feedback time SIMOCODE pro monitors the status of the feeder (ON or OFF) via FB ON.
If the status of FB ON changes without a corresponding switching command, "Trip -
Feedback (FB)" switches off the feeder.
Default: 0.5 s
The feedback time can be used to suppress such "feedback faults" for a defined
period of time, e.g. in the case of network switches.
When the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro continuously checks if FB ON = 0. If
the current flows longer than the set feedback time without the "ON" control
command being issued, a fault message "Fault - feedback (FB) ON" is issued. The
contactor controls can only be connected after the fault has been rectified.
When the motor is switched on, SIMOCODE pro continuously checks if FB ON = 1. If
no current flows for longer than the set feedback time without the "OFF" control
command being issued, a fault message "Fault - feedback (FB) OFF" is issued. The
contactor controls are deactivated.
Execution time SIMOCODE pro monitors switching on/switching off.
Switching on/switching off must be completed within this time period.
Default: 1.0 s9
After the "ON" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must be able to detect
current in the main circuit within the execution time. Otherwise, the fault message
"Fault - Execution ON command" will be issued. SIMOCODE pro deactivates the
contactor controls.
After the "OFF" control command is issued, SIMOCODE pro must not be able to
detect any current in the main circuit after the execution time has elapsed. Otherwise,
the fault message "Fault - Execution STOP command" will be issued. The contactor
controls can only be connected after the fault has been rectified.
Interlocking time SIMOCODE pro prevents, e.g. in the case of reversing starters, both contactors from
switching on at the same time. Switching from one direction of rotation to the other
can be delayed via the interlocking time.
Default: 0 s)
Change-over pause In the "Dahlander" and "Pole-changing starter" control functions, switching from
FAST to SLOW can be delayed by the time configured.
In the "Star-delta starter" control function, the change-over pause time extends the
time between switching off the star contactor and switching on the delta contactor by
the time configured.
Default: 0.00 s)

Motor control
Max. star time With control function "Star-delta starter" or "Star-delta reversing starter":
Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Max. star time: 0 to 255 s (default: 20 s).
Current measuring module With control function "Star-delta starter" or "Star-delta reversing starter":
installed The set current and the switching levels for star-delta switching depend on the
installation location of the current measuring module:
• In delta circuit: Set current Is is reduced to Irated x 1/√3
• In supply cable: Set current
Figure 5-11 Execution time (ET) and feedback time (FT) in relation to FB ON
Faults
The contactor controls are deactivated.
The following signals are also output:
● A flashing signal on the QLS lamp control
● A flashing signal on the "GEN. FAULT" LED
● The "Status - General fault" signal
● The corresponding signaling bit of the fault.

Motor control
5.3.3 "Overload relay" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro functions like a solid-state overload relay. Control
commands (e.g. ON, OFF) cannot be issued to the load. Control stations and inputs of the
control function (e.g. ON >, OFF), do not have any function in the case of overload relays.
When the control voltage is applied, SIMOCODE pro automatically closes contactor control
QE3; it remains active until it is deactivated by the fault message of a protection or
monitoring system.
Contactor control QE3 must be connected to any relay output that switches off the contactor
coil of the motor contactor in case of overload.
Schematic
Figure 5-12 Schematic of the "Overload relay" control function, "Protection / Control" function block

Motor control
Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Chapter Control functions - general
settings and definitions (Page 187).
Table 5- 7 Overload relay settings
Overload relay Description

FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with any socket , usually
with socket "Status - current flowing")
Load type You can choose between:

• Motor
• Resistive load (see Chapter Control functions - general settings and
definitions (Page 187))
Separate fail-safe • Deactivated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules affects the
function from SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault
control function messages. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related
tripping directly affects the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect the
SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for applications
where safety-related tripping does not affect the motor controlled by
SIMOCODE pro.
Note
In the case of overload, the QE3 output is set (=1) and is only reset after an overload trip
(=0).
This output closes when the overload function is parameterized.
Note
Monitoring the number of starts is not possible for this control function.

Motor control
5.3.4 "Direct starter" control function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can switch a motor on and off with this control function.
Control commands
● Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 internal contactor control.
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates internal contactor control QE1.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations (see also
the description of "control stations"). Thus, the inputs (plugs) must be connected to the
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets.
Every fault message causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated.
Schematic
Figure 5-13 Schematic of the "Direct starter" control function, "Protection / Control" function block

Motor control
Settings
Table 5- 8 Direct starter settings
Direct starter Description

(direct-on-line starter)
OFF Control command OFF
(connection with any socket , usually with socket "Enabled control
command - OFF")
ON > Control command ON
command - ON >")
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with any socket ,
usually with socket "Status - current flowing")
Non-maintained • Deactivated
command mode
• Activated
Separate fail-safe • Deactivated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also affects
function from control the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault
function messages. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not affect
the SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for
applications where safety-related tripping does not affect the motor
• Motor
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 seconds (default: 0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds (default: 1.0 s)

Motor control
5.3.5 "Reversing starter" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control the direction of rotation of the motor
(forwards and backwards).
Control commands
● Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control (clockwise, i.e. forwards)
● Start with "ON <" activates the QE2 contactor control (counterclockwise, i.e. reverse)
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates internal contactor controls QE1 and QE2.
Every fault message causes contactor controls QE1 and QE2 to be deactivated.
Switching the direction of rotation

The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or
"Status - ON <" signal has expired (motor is switched off) AND the interlocking time has
elapsed:
● Via the "OFF" control command.
● Directly when "Saving change-over command" is activated.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Changing
from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.

Motor control
Schematic
Figure 5-14 Schematic of the "Reversing starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Motor control
Settings
Table 5- 9 Reversing starter settings
Reversing starter Description

ON < Control command ON <, counterclockwise
command - ON <")
command - OFF")
ON > Control command ON >, clockwise
command - ON >")
command mode
• Activated
Saving change-over • Deactivated
command
• Activated
Separate fail-safe • Deactivated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also affects
function from control the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault
function messages. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related
• Motor
Feedback time Range 0 to 25.5 seconds (0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds (1.0 s)
Interlocking time Range 0 to 255 seconds (0 s)

Motor control
5.3.6 "Molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)" control function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can mainly switch circuit breakers (e.g. 3WL, 3VL) ON and OFF with this
control function. The circuit breakers are then connected to PROFIBUS DP via
SIMOCODE pro.
Control commands
● Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 contactor control for a pulse of 400 ms.
● Stop with "OFF" activates contactor control QE3 for a pulse of 400 ms.
● With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for a pulse of 400 ms when the circuit
breaker is tripped (alarm switch = ON).
The pulse of a control command is always fully executed before the "counter pulse" is set.
Making internal assignments

You have to make the following assignments:
1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the "ON
connection" of the motorized operating mechanism of the circuit breaker.
2. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that is connected to the "OFF
connection" of the motorized operating mechanism of the circuit breaker.
3. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input that is connected to the auxiliary switch (AUXS) of the
circuit breaker to the auxiliary control input "Feedback ON".
4. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input which is connected to the alarm switch (AS) of the
circuit breaker to the input (socket) of the "External fault 1" standard function.

Motor control
Schematic
Figure 5-15 Schematic of the "Circuit breaker" control function, "Protection / Control" function block

Motor control
Settings
Table 5- 10 Circuit breaker settings
Circuit breaker Description

command - OFF")
command - ON >")
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection always with socket
, (input), which the auxiliary switch of the circuit breaker is connected
to).
command mode
• Activated
Separate fail-safe • Deactivated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also
function from control affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-
function on fault messages. This setting is selected for applications where
safety-related tripping directly affects the motor controlled by
SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does not
affect the SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected for
• Motor
Feedback time A repeated ON pulse is only output by the QE1 contactor control once the
set feedback time has elapsed. Therefore, the feedback time should be
greater than the motor stop time of the motorized operating mechanism of
the circuit breaker.
Range 0 to 25.5 seconds (0.5 s)
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds (1.0 s)

Motor control
5.3.7 "Star-delta starter" control function
Description
Star-delta starting is used to limit the starting current and to avoid overloading the line
supply. In this control function, SIMOCODE pro initially starts the motor with a star-
connected stator winding and then switches it to delta.
Control commands
● Start with "ON" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor) and then
immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (line contactor)
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates contactor controls QE1, QE2, and QE3.
corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled control command" sockets. Every fault
message causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.
Switching from star to delta

For this purpose, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates contactor control QE1 before connecting
contactor control QE2 (delta contactor).
SIMOCODE pro switches over from star to delta:
● Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the following thresholds:
– Transformer installed in delta circuit: I < 150 % Is
– Transformer installed in supply line: I < 90 % Is
● Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Max. star time" when the current in star
operation does not sink below this threshold.
Safety guidelines
Note
It is recommended that contactor controls QE* are wired to the relay outputs of the basic
unit.
Note
if the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit is used, an additional multifunction module is required for
this control function.
The typical change-over time from star to delta is between 100 ms and 150 ms.

Motor control
Note
Spurious tripping can occur if you use the internal ground-fault detection for star-delta
connections. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.
Note
If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a current which is 1/√3
times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter control function.
Example: In = 100 A
Is = In x 1/√3
Is = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Is = 57.7 A
Change-over pause
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the change-over pause.
Reason: For motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated current, the line
voltage plus motor EMF might result in a very high delta starting current if the change-over
pause is too short. The motor EMF decreases if the pause is longer.
Schematic
Figure 5-16 Schematic of the "Direct starter" control function, "Protection/Control" function block

Motor control
Settings
Table 5- 11 Star-delta starter settings
Star-delta starter Description

command - OFF")
command - ON >")
FB ON Auxiliary control input "Feedback ON" (connection with any socket
, usually with socket "Status - current flowing")
Non-maintained command • Deactivated
mode
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function • Deactivated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules affects
from control function the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on
fault messages. This setting is selected for applications where
SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related disconnection by the DM-F modules
does not affect the SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is
selected for applications where safety-related tripping does not
affect the motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
Load type You can select from the following:
• Motor
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds (default: 1 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 to 655.3 seconds (in steps of 10 ms) (default: 0.00 s)
Max. star time Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Range 0 to 255 seconds (default: 20 s)
Current measuring module The set current and the switching levels for star-to-delta switching
installed 1) depend on the installation location of the current measuring module:
• In delta circuit: Set current Is is reduced to In x 1/√3 (default)
• In supply cable: Set current Is = In (rated current of the motor)

Motor control
Note
1) If a current / voltage measuring module is in use, the transformer must be connected in
the supply cable!
It is also necessary to select "Line-to-line voltage" under "Device configuration → Voltage
display".
5.3.8 "Star delta reversing starter" control function
Description
With this control function, a motor can be started in both directions of rotation in star-delta
operation.
Control commands
● CW rotation: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE1 contactor control (star contactor)
and then immediately activates the QE3 contactor control (line contactor, clockwise
rotation)
● Counter-clockwise rotation: Start with "ON <" first activates the QE1 contactor control
(star contactor) and then immediately activates the QE4 contactor control (line contactor,
counter-clockwise rotation)
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates contactor controls QE1, QE2, QE3, and QE4.
Every fault message causes the QE1, QE2, QE3 and QE4 contactor controls to be
deactivated.
Switching from star to delta

For this purpose, SIMOCODE pro first deactivates contactor control QE1 before connecting
contactor control QE2 (delta contactor).
SIMOCODE pro switches over from star to delta:
● Current-dependent, for decreasing current below the following thresholds:
– Transformer installed in delta circuit: I < 150 % Is
– Transformer installed in supply line: I < 90 % Is
● Time-dependent to the time set in the parameter "Max. star time" when the current in star
operation does not sink below this threshold.

Motor control

The direction of rotation can be switched once the "Status - ON >" or "Status - ON <" signal
has expired (motor is switched off) AND the interlocking time has elapsed:
● Via the OFF control command.
SIMOCODE pro prevents both contactors from switching on at the same time. Switching
from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time."
Startup is always performed in star mode
Safety guidelines
Note
It is recommended that the QE1 and QE2 contactor controls are wired to the relay outputs of
the basic unit. You need at least 1 digital module for this control function.
Note
Spurious tripping can occur if you use the internal ground-fault detection for star-delta
connections. During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.
Note
If the current measuring module is switched to delta (normal case), a current which is 1/√3
times smaller must be set for the star-delta starter control function.
Example: In = 100 A
Is = In x 1/√3
Is = 100 A x 1/√3 = 57.7 A
Current to be set Is = 57.7 A
Change-over pause
The switching time from star to delta can be extended by the change-over pause.
Reason: For motors with a high ratio between starting current and rated current, the line
voltage plus motor EMF might result in a very high delta starting current if the change-over
pause is too short. The motor EMF decreases if the pause is longer.

Motor control
Schematic
Figure 5-17 Schematic of the "Star-delta reversing starter" control function, "Protection / Control"
function block
Settings
Table 5- 12 Star-delta reversing starter settings
Star-delta reversing starter Description

OFF Control command OFF (connection with any socket , usually with
socket "Enabled control command - OFF")
ON > Control command ON > (connection with any socket , usually with
socket "Enabled control command - ON >")
ON < Control command ON < (connection with any socket , usually with
socket "Enabled control command - ON <")
mode
• Activated

Motor control
Star-delta reversing starter Description

command
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function • Deactivated: Safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also
from control function affects the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional
follow-on fault messages. This setting is selected for applications
where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor controlled by
SIMOCODE pro.
affect the SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is selected
for applications where safety-related tripping does not affect the
motor controlled by SIMOCODE pro.
• Motor
• Resistive load (see Chapter Control functions - general settings
and definitions (Page 187))
Execution time Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds (default: 1 s)
Change-over pause Range 0 to 655.3 seconds (in steps of 10 ms) (default: 0 s)
Interlocking time Range 0 to 255 seconds (default: 0 s)
Max. star time Time-dependent switching from star to delta.
Range 0 to 255 seconds (default: 20 s)
Current measuring module The set current and the switching levels for star-to-delta switching
installed 1) depend on the installation location of the current transformer / current
measuring module:
• In delta circuit: Set current Is is reduced to In x 1/√3
• In supply cable: Set current Is = In (rated current of the motor)
Note
1) If a current / voltage supply module is in use, the transformer must be connected in the
supply cable!

Motor control
5.3.9 "Dahlander" control function
Description
With this function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with only one stator winding at two
speeds (FAST and SLOW). SIMOCODE pro connects the stator winding via the contactors
so that there is a high pole number at low speed and a low pole number at high speed.
Control commands
● SLOW: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE2 contactor control (SLOW).
● FAST: Start with "ON >>" first activates the QE3 contactor control (star contactor, FAST)
and then immediately activates the QE1 contactor control (line contactor, FAST).
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates contactor controls QE1, QE2, and QE3.
Every fault message causes the QE1, QE2 and QE3 contactor controls to be deactivated.
Switching the speed

The speed can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has expired (motor is switched
off) AND on changeover from "FAST" => "SLOW" after the change-over pause has elapsed:
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for the "FAST" speed from being switched on at the
same time as the contactor for the "SLOW" speed.
Change-over pause
The "Change-over pause" parameter can be used to delay switching from "FAST" to "SLOW"
to give the motor enough time to run down.
Note
Two set currents must be set for this control function:
• Is1 for the SLOW speed
• Is2 for the FAST speed.
Depending on the current range, the current can in many cases be directly measured at both
speeds with a single current transformer. Otherwise you will need two external current
transformers appropriate for the relevant speed (e.g. 3UF18 with a 1 A secondary
transformer rated current), whose secondary cables must lead through the current
measuring module within the range 0.3 to 3 A. The set current Is1 or Is2 must be converted
according to the secondary currents of the external transformers. For more information, see
Chapter Overload protection (Page 157).

Motor control
Schematic
Figure 5-18 Schematic of the "Dahlander" control function, "Protection / Control" function block

Motor control
Settings
Table 5- 13 Dahlander settings
Dahlander Description
ON > Control command ON > (SLOW) (connection with any socket , usually
with socket "Enabled control command - ON >")
ON >> Control command ON >> (FAST) (connection with any socket , usually
with socket "Enabled control command - ON >>")
command mode
• Activated
Separate fail-safe • Deactivated:
function from control
• A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also affects the
function
SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional follow-on fault
messages. This setting is selected for applications where safety-related
command
• Activated
• Motor

Motor control
5.3.10 "Dahlander reversing starter" control function
Description
This control function can be used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at both
speeds.
Control commands
● RIGHT-SLOW: Start with "ON >" activates contactor control QE2 (CW-SLOW)
● RIGHT-FAST: Start with "ON >>" first activates contactor control QE3 (star contactor
FAST) and then immediately activates contactor control QE1 (CW-FAST)
● LEFT-SLOW: Start with "ON <" activates contactor control QE4 (CCW-SLOW)
● LEFT-FAST: Start with "ON <<" first activates contactor control QE3 (star contactor
FAST) and then immediately activates contactor control QE5 (CCW-FAST)
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given. Every fault message
causes the contactor control to be deactivated.

● Via the OFF control command
Switching the speed


Motor control
Change-over pause
Safety guidelines
Note
You need at least one digital module for this control function. This control function cannot be
implemented with bistable relay outputs.
Note

Motor control
Schematic
Figure 5-19 Schematic of the "Dahlander reversing starter" control function, "Protection / Control"
function block

Motor control
Settings
Table 5- 14 Control function settings for Dahlander reversing starter
Dahlander reversing starter Description

OFF Control command OFF (connection with any socket , usually
with socket "Enabled control command - OFF")
ON > Control command ON > (CW, SLOW) (connection with any socket
, usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON >")
ON >> Control command ON >> (CW, FAST) (connection with any socket
, usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON >>")
ON < Control command ON < (CCW, SLOW) (connection with any socket
, usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON <")
ON << Control command ON << (CCW, FAST) (connection with any socket
, usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON <<")
mode
• Activated
command
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function • Deactivated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules also
where safety-related tripping directly affects the motor controlled
by SIMOCODE pro.
• Activated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules does
not affect the SIMOCODE pro control function. This setting is
• Motor

Motor control
5.3.11 "Pole-changing starter" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can control motors with two stator windings at two
speeds (FAST and SLOW).
Control commands
● SLOW: Start with "ON >" first activates contactor control QE2 (SLOW)
● FAST: Start with "ON >>" activates contactor control QE1 (FAST)
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given.
Every fault message causes the contactor control to be deactivated.
Switching the speed

Change-over pause
Note

Motor control
Schematic
Figure 5-20 Schematic of the "Pole-changing starter" control function, "Protection / Control" function
block

Motor control
Settings
Table 5- 15 Pole-changing starter settings
Pole-changing starter Description

ON > Control command ON > (SLOW) (connection with any socket ,
usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON >")
ON >> Control command ON >> (FAST) (connection with any socket ,
usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON >>")
mode
• Activated
command
• Activated
by SIMOCODE pro.
• Motor

Motor control
5.3.12 "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function
Description
This control function can be used to change the direction of rotation of a motor at both
speeds.
Control commands
● RIGHT-SLOW: Start with "ON >" first activates the QE2 contactor control (RIGHT-SLOW)
● RIGHT-FAST: Start with "ON >>" activates contactor control QE1 (CW-FAST)
● LEFT-SLOW: Start with "ON <" activates contactor control QE4 (CCW-SLOW)
● LEFT-FAST: Start with "ON <<" activates contactor control QE5 (CCW-FAST)
● Stop with OFF deactivates the contactor controls.
The control commands can be issued to SIMOCODE pro from any control stations. Thus, the
inputs (plugs) must be connected to the corresponding sockets, preferably to the "Enabled
control command" sockets.
It does not matter in what order the control commands are given. Every fault message
causes the contactor control to be deactivated.

Switching the speed

Change-over pause
SIMOCODE pro prevents the contactors for "FAST" and "SLOW" from being switched on
simultaneously. The "Change-over pause" parameter can be used to delay switching from
"FAST" to "SLOW" to give the motor enough time to coast down.

Motor control
Safety guidelines
Note
At least one additional digital module is required for this control function.
Note
Two set currents must be set for the pole-changing starter:

Motor control
Schematic
Figure 5-21 Schematic of the "Pole-changing reversing starter" control function, "Protection / Control"
function block

Motor control
Settings
Table 5- 16 Pole-changing reversing starter settings
Pole-changing reversing Description

starter
ON > Control command ON > (CW, SLOW) (connection with any socket
, usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON >")
ON >> Control command ON >> (CW, FAST) (connection with any socket
, usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON >>")
ON < Control command ON < (CCW, SLOW) (connection with any socket
ON << Control command ON << (CCW, FAST) (connection with any socket
, usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON <<")
mode
• Activated
command
• Activated
by SIMOCODE pro.
• Motor

Motor control
5.3.13 "Solenoid valve" control function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can use this function to control a solenoid valve. The solenoid valve is
brought into the corresponding end position using the control commands "OPEN" and
"CLOSE". SIMOCODE pro must be informed via corresponding limit switches (OPEN,
CLOSED) when the end position has been reached.
Control commands
● OPEN: Start with "ON >" activates the QE1 internal contactor control.
● CLOSE: Start with "OFF" deactivates the QE1 internal contactor control.
Every fault message causes the QE1 contactor control to be deactivated and puts the
solenoid valve into the "CLOSED" position.
Safety guidelines
Note
The motor protection functions are not active. A current measuring module is not necessary.
Note
If both limit switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the solenoid valve is
immediately switched OFF via the fault message "Fault - double 1" (= "CLOSED").
If the end position feedback is different to the control command, the solenoid valve is
immediately switched OFF via the fault message "Fault - end position" (= "CLOSED").

Motor control
Schematic
Figure 5-22 Schematic of the "Solenoid valve" control function, "Protection / Control" function block

Motor control
Settings
Table 5- 17 Solenoid valve control function settings
Solenoid valve Description

OFF Control command OFF (CLOSED) (connection with any socket , usually
ON > Control command ON (open) (connection with any socket , usually with
command mode
• Activated
Separate fail-safe • Deactivated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules is also
function from control effected by the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding additional
function follow-on fault messages. This setting is selected for applications where
SIMOCODE pro.
Execution time Time until the end position is reached.
Range 0 to 6553.5 seconds (default: 1.0 s)
5.3.14 "Positioner" control function
Description
SIMOCODE pro can control positioners / actuators with this function. The positioner is
moved into the corresponding end position with the "OPEN" and "CLOSE" control
commands and is deactivated via its limit switches (1-active) or torque switches (0-active).
The response of the limit / torque switches must be passed to SIMOCODE pro via its inputs.
Control commands
● OPEN: Start with "ON >" activates contactor control QE1 until "End position OPEN" is
reached (Feedback OPEN)
● CLOSE: Start with "ON <" activates contactor control QE2 until "End position CLOSED" is
reached (Feedback CLOSED)
● Stop with "OFF" deactivates the contactor controls. The drive remains in the present
position.

Motor control
Function schematic
Figure 5-23 Function schematic of the torque and limit switches when controlling positioners
Switching the direction of travel

The direction of travel can be switched once the "Feedback ON" signal has expired (motor is
switched off) AND the interlocking time has elapsed:
from one direction of travel to the other can be delayed via the "interlocking time".
Note
The corresponding torque switch must not respond before the associated limit switch when
the torque switch TO (OPEN) and/or TC (CLOSED) is connected! In this case, the positioner
is switched off immediately with the fault message "Fault - stalled positioner." If both limit
switches respond at the same time (FO=1 and FC=1), the positioner is immediately switched
off with the fault message "Fault - double 1." If both torque switches respond at the same
time (FO=0 and FC=0), the positioner is immediately switched off with the fault message
"Fault - double 0." If the end position feedback does not correspond to the control command,
the positioner is switched off with the fault message "Fault - end position fault."

Motor control
Schematic
Figure 5-24 Schematic of the "Positioner" control function, "Protection / Control" function block

Motor control
Types of positioner control

The following table shows the five types of positioner control:
Table 5- 18 Types of positioner control
Type TC FC FO TO
Tripping Torque Limit Limit OPEN Torque
CLOSED CLOSED OPEN
Positioner 1 — X X —
After reaching the end position FO (OPEN)
or FC (CLOSED).
Positioner 2 X X X X
or FC (CLOSED) AND response of the
associated torque switch TO (OPEN) or TC
(CLOSED)
Positioner 3 X X X —
After reaching end position (CLOSED), the
respective torque switch TC must also
respond after the limit switch FC has
responded.
Positioner 4 — X X X
After reaching the end position FC
(CLOSED) After reaching end position FO
(OPEN), the respective torque switch FO
must also respond after the limit switch TO
has responded.
Positioner 5 Antivalent Antivalent
After reaching the end position or the active active
torque. The valve actuator is monitored
either just with the limit switches or just with
the torque switches. The switches are
implemented as change-over contacts and
are checked for antivalence. In the case of
non-antivalent feedback (e.g. FC=0 and
TC=0), SIMOCODE pro detects an open
circuit and deactivates the positioner with
the fault message "Fault - Antivalence"
Note
The signals of the torque switches and the limit switches must be wired to the inputs of the
basic unit. Torque switches must be 0-active, whereas the limit switches must be 1-active.

Motor control
Settings
Table 5- 19 Positioner control function settings
Positioner Description
ON < Control command ON < (CLOSED) (connection with any socket
OFF Control command STOP (connection with any socket , usually
ON > Control command ON > (OPEN) (connection with any socket ,
usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON <")
FC Auxiliary control input "Feedback CLOSED" (connection with any
socket , usually with the socket of an input to which the limit
switch is wired.)
FO Auxiliary control input "Feedback OPEN" (connection with any socket
, usually with the socket of an input to which the limit switch is
wired.)
TC Auxiliary control input "Torque CLOSED" (connection with any socket
, usually with the socket of an input to which the torque switch is
wired.)
TO Auxiliary control input "Torque OPEN" (connection with any socket
, usually with the socket of an input to which the torque switch is
wired.)
mode
• Activated
Separate fail-safe function • Deactivated: A safety-related tripping by the DM-F modules is
from control function also effected by the SIMOCODE pro control function, avoiding
additional follow-on fault messages. This setting is selected for
applications where safety-related tripping directly affects the
• Motor
Execution time Time until the end position is reached.

Motor control
5.3.15 "Soft starter" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter. Thus, the 3RW
soft starters are connected via SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP.
Control commands
● Start with "ON >" activates contactor controls QE1 and QE4.
● Stop with "OFF" first deactivates contactor control QE4. When the signal "Feedback ON"
has expired, the QE1 contactor control is deactivated 3 s later in order to facilitate a
smooth run down via the soft starter.
● With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the soft starter
an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
Every fault message causes the contactor control to be deactivated.

1. Assign the QE1 contactor control to the relay output which controls the coil of the line
contactor.
2. Assign contactor control QE4 to any relay output from which the "ON input" of the soft
starter is to be controlled.
3. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that supplies the 20 ms
acknowledgment signal to the soft starter.
4. Assign the "ON >" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control commands.
5. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input to which the "Fault" signal output of the soft starter is
connected to the input (socket) of the standard function "External fault 1."
6. The "startup end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the inputs and
processed by SIMOCODE pro.
Note
In order to avoid disconnections due to faults, the "Execution time" parameter in
SIMOCODE pro must be set at least to the soft run-down time of the soft starter.
Note
If the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit is used, an additional multifunction module is required
for this control function.

Motor control
Schematic
Figure 5-25 Schematic of "Soft starter" control function, "Protection / Control" function block

Motor control
Settings
You will find detailed explanations of the settings in Control functions - general settings and
definitions (Page 187).
Table 5- 20 Soft starter settings
Soft starter Description

ON > Control command ON (connection with any socket , usually with
mode
• Activated
follow-on fault messages.™ This setting is selected for applications
SIMOCODE pro.
• Motor
Execution time At least ≥ soft run-down time. Range 0 to 6553.5 s (default: 1.0 s)
5.3.16 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function
Description
With this control function, SIMOCODE pro can activate the 3RW soft starter including an
additional reversing contactor. Thus, the 3RW soft starters are connected via
SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP. SIMOCODE pro can also control the direction of
rotation of the motor (forwards and backwards).

Motor control
Control commands
● Start with "ON >" activates contactor controls QE1 and QE4 (clockwise, i.e. forwards)
● Start with "ON <" activates contactor controls QE2 and QE4 (counterclockwise, i.e.
reverse).
● Stop with "OFF" first deactivates contactor control QE4. When the "Feedback ON" signal
is no longer issued, contactor control QE1 / QE2 is deactivated 3 s later to leave enough
time for a soft run-down via the soft starter.
● With "Reset", the QE3 contactor control is activated for 20 ms and sends the soft starter
an acknowledgement signal via a parameterizable relay output.
Every fault message causes the contactor controls to be deactivated.

from one direction of rotation to the other can be delayed via the interlocking time.

contactor (right).
contactor (left).
3. Assign the QE4 contactor control to any relay output from which the "ON input" of the soft
starter should be controlled.
4. Assign the QE3 contactor control to the relay output that supplies the 20 ms
acknowledgment signal to the soft starter.
5. Assign the "ON >", "ON <" and "OFF" control commands to the enabled control
commands.
6. Assign the SIMOCODE pro input to which the "Fault" signal output of the soft starter is
connected to the input (socket) of the standard function "External fault 1."
7. The "startup end" signal of the soft starter can also be wired to one of the inputs and
processed by SIMOCODE pro.

Motor control
Note
An additional digital module may be necessary for this control function.
Schematic
Figure 5-26 Schematic of the "Soft starter with reversing contactor" control function, "Protection /
Control" function block

Motor control
Settings
Table 5- 21 Soft starter with reversing contactor settings
Soft starter with reversing Description

contactor
ON > Control command ON > (clockwise) (connection with any socket ,
usually with socket "Enabled control command - ON >")
socket "Enabled control command OFF")
ON < Control command ON < (counterclockwise) (connection with any socket
mode
• Activated
command
• Activated
SIMOCODE pro.
• Motor
Execution time Execution time ≥ Soft run-down time

Motor control
5.4 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for the control functions
5.4 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status
information for the control functions
Table 5- 22 Active control stations of control functions
Designation/control function Control station

ON << ON < OFF ОN > ON >>
Overload 1) 2) 3) - - - - -
Direct-on-line starter 1) 2) 3) - - OFF ON -
Reversing starter 1) 2) 3) - CCW OFF CW -
Circuit breaker 1) 2) 3) - - OFF ON -
Star-delta starter 2) 3) - - OFF ON -
Star-delta reversing starter 2) - CCW OFF CW -
Dahlander 2) - - OFF SLOW FAST
Dahlander reversing starter 2) CCW-FAST CCW-SLOW OFF CW-SLOW CW-FAST
Pole-changing starter 2) - - OFF SLOW FAST
Pole-changing reversing starter 2) CCW-FAST CCW-SLOW OFF CW-SLOW CW-FAST
Solenoid valve 2) - - CLOSED OPEN -
Positioner 1 2) - CLOSED Stop OPEN -
Soft starter 2) 3) - - OFF ON -
Soft starter with reversing contactor 2) - CCW OFF CW -

Motor control
Table 5- 23 Contactor control with control functions
Designation/control function Control station

QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5
Overload 1) 2) 3) - - Active - -
Direct-on-line starter 1) 2) 3) ON - - - -
Reversing starter 1) 2) 3) CW CCW - - -
Circuit breaker 1) 2) 3) ON pulse - OFF pulse - -
Star-delta starter 2) 3) Star contactor Delta contactor Line contactor - -
Star-delta reversing starter 2) Star contactor Delta contactor RIGHT line LEFT line -
contactor contactor
Dahlander 2) FAST SLOW Star contactor - -
FAST
Dahlander reversing starter 2) CW-FAST CW-SLOW Star contactor CCW-SLOW CCW-FAST
FAST
Pole-changing starter 2) FAST SLOW - - -
Pole-changing reversing starter 2) CW-FAST CW-SLOW - CCW-SLOW CCW-FAST
Solenoid valve 2) OPEN - - - -
Positioner 1 2) OPEN CLOSED - - -
Soft starter 2) 3) ON line - Reset ON command -
contactor
Soft starter with reversing contactor 2) RIGHT line LEFT line Reset ON command -
contactor contactor

Motor control
Table 5- 24 Lamp control with control functions
Designation / control function Lamp control

QLE << (ON <<) QLE < (ON <) QLA (OFF) QLE < (ON >) QLE >>
(ON >>)
Overload 1) 2) 3) - - - - -
Soft starter with reversing - CCW OFF CW -
contactor 2)
1) SIMOCODE pro C basic unit

2) SIMOCODE pro V basic unit
3) SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Monitoring functions 6
6.1 Monitoring function - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find information about monitoring functions.
● Ground-fault monitoring
● Current limit monitoring
● Voltage monitoring
● Cos phi monitoring
● Active power monitoring
● 0 / 4 A to 20 mA monitoring
● Operation monitoring
● Temperature monitoring (analog)
● Monitoring interval for mandatory testing
As is the case with motor protection and motor control, the monitoring functions work "in the
background". All monitoring function parameters are explained.
Target groups
● Programmers
● Service personnel
Required knowledge
● SIMOCODE pro
● Motor protection, motor control
You will find the dialog boxes in SIMOCODE ES under Device parameters > Monitoring
functions.

Monitoring functions
6.2 Earth-fault monitoring
6.2.1 Description
Residual current monitoring relays are used in industry to:
● Protect systems from damage caused by residual currents
● Prevent production losses caused by unplanned downtime
● Perform maintenance to meet all demands.
In particular, ground-fault monitoring is used in conjunction with 3UL23 residual current
transformers to monitor systems where environmental conditions increase the chance of
fault currents.
Internal ground-fault monitoring

SIMOCODE pro acquires and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the
summation current of the three current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a
possible residual current or ground fault.
Internal ground-fault monitoring via current measuring modules or current / voltage
measuring modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in power systems
that are either grounded solidly or with low impedance.
Internal ground-fault-monitoring can be activated by means of parameterization. It covers
two different operating conditions.
● Normal operation up to 2 x Is. The current operating current must be smaller than twice
the set current Is. Residual currents of > 30 % of the set current Is are detected.
● Startup or overload operation from 2 x IsThe effective operating current is greater than
twice the set current Is. Residual currents of > 15 % of the effective motor current will be
detected.
NOTICE
Star-delta connection
Spurious tripping can occur if you use internal ground-fault monitoring for star-delta circuits.
During delta operation, the summation current is non-zero due to harmonics.
External ground-fault monitoring

The external ground-fault monitoring is normally used in the following cases:
● in cases in which power systems are grounded with high impedance
● in cases, in which precise detection of the ground-fault current is necessary, for example,
for condition monitoring.
With ground-fault detection using the residual current transformer 3UL23, it is possible to
determine the precise residual current as a measured value to define freely selectable
warning and trip thresholds in a wide range 30 mA to 40 A.

Method of operation:
The main conductors and, if present, the neutral conductor to which the load is connected,
are routed through the opening of the residual current transformer 3UL23. Its secondary
winding is connected to the ground-fault module.
If an insulation fault occurs, for example, a residual current arises between the incoming and
the outgoing currents that the ground-fault module evaluates via the residual current
transformer.
For maximum plant availability, the ground-fault module 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 and the residual
current transformer 3UL23 were developed with the following design goals:
● High measuring accuracy: The ground-fault module in conjunction with the residual
current transformer 3UL23 achieves a measuring accuracy of ±7.5 %. This enables set
limit values to be monitored very precisely. Spurious tripping caused by measuring errors
is minimized. The combination of ground-fault module and residual current
transformer 3UL23 is designed so that a warning or alarm is triggered at the latest upon
exceeding the set limit values. To achieve this, slightly higher residual currents than those
actually measured are displayed and compared with the set limit values. The measuring
accuracy is -15 % to 0 % of the value displayed. This takes into account the measuring
accuracy of monitoring relay and residual current transformer.
● Settable prewarning and trip levels: The threshold levels for the residual current are
defined over a very wide range of 30 mA to 40 A. The response of SIMOCODE pro on
reaching a prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized, including a delay.
● Permanent self-monitoring: The permanent self-monitoring of the ground-fault
module 3UF7 510-1AA00-0 and the connected transformer ensures reliable monitoring of
the function. The connected 3UL23 residual current transformer is also permanently
monitored for open-circuit or short-circuit. This means cyclic manual tests to verify the
function are obsolete.
● Settable active status and delay times of the residual current protection. Depending on
the application, the monitoring function can be active permanently, only when the motor is
running, or only after the motor has started. This permits the suppression of residual
currents that are only measured during motor starting due to high starting currents. Short-
term residual currents or immitted interference can be easily suppressed by means of the
adjustable tripping delay time.
Use of the residual current transformers 3UL22 and 3UL23:
● Use the residual current transformer 3UL23 to detect residual currents with the ground-
fault module 3UF7 510-1AA00-0. The residual current transformer 3UL23 is suitable for
detecting pure AC residual currents and AC residual currents with a pulsating DC
component.
Note
● Use the 3UL22 residual current transformer to detect residual currents with the
3UF7 500-1AA00-0 ground-fault module.

Note
Only monitoring of the residual current trip level possible
With this combination, it is only possible to monitor a trip level of the residual current.
Measured values are then not available for the residual current.
Note
DANGER
No personal or fire protection!
The ground-fault modules 3UF75* monitor that devices and systems are functioning
correctly.
They are not suitable for personal protection or protection from fires.
6.2.2 Limits of fault current measurement

In the event of increasing primary currents, imbalances in the cable routing and current loads
in individual cables increasingly cause what appear to be residual currents that are detected
by the evaluation units. Spurious tripping may therefore occur if excessively low monitoring
limit values have been set at high primary currents. Because of these tolerances in the
configuration, the measuring accuracy no longer corresponds to the stated range of ±7.5 %.
To avoid spurious tripping, we recommend setting the limit values to the minimum values
listed in the following graphic, depending on the applicable primary current.

If monitoring is required within limit values that are lower than those recommended, we
recommend the use of delay times, particularly if spurious tripping occurs exclusively during
motor startup. If delay times do not lead to the desired result, the use of shield sleeves may
considerably lower the minimum possible monitoring limit.
You will find more information in Chapters "14.2.5.2 Installation specifications" and
"14.2.5.3 Optimization options" in the Manual "3UG4/3RR2 Monitoring Relay"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50426183/133300).
The monitored current waveforms also have a strong influence on the measuring accuracy.
In the case of loads with generalized phase control, deviations from the measuring accuracy
can occur when monitoring for high residual current limits. The cause of this is the extreme
difference between the monitored rms values and the peak values of the residual current.
The more extreme the generalized phase control, the shorter the time during which current
flows, and the lower the resulting rms value. To achieve and monitor a high rms value in
such a case, an extremely high peak value of the residual current is necessary. In the case
of high currents, current transformers tend towards saturation in which a further increase in
current on the primary side does not result in an equivalent increase on the secondary side.
In the case of extreme peak values of the residual current, the measuring accuracy suffers
as a result of this principle. Due to the great difference between the peak value and the rms
value, monitoring for lower limits is useful.

6.2.3 Internal earth-fault monitoring
Response
Here you can define the response of SIMOCODE pro in the case of an internal ground fault:
(Page 19).
Figure 6-1 "Ground-fault Monitoring" function block
Table 6- 1 "Internal ground-fault monitoring" response
Response Internal ground fault

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
tripping X
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Active status
Unless deactivated, this function is always active, independent of whether the motor is
running or not (operating state "ON").

6.2.4 External ground-fault monitoring (with 3UL22 residual current transformer)
Response
Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro will respond to an external ground fault.
You will find more information in Section "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in
Chapter Important information (Page 19).
Table 6- 2 "External ground-fault monitoring" response
Response External ground fault

Deactivated -
signal X (d)
warn X
tripping X
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)1)
1) Extension of the residual current transformer delay
If the response is set to "signal," a ground fault will trigger the "External ground fault" event.
If the response is set to "warn," a ground fault will trigger the "Warning external ground fault."

6.2.5 External ground-fault monitoring (with residual current transformer 3UL23)
Settings
You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level, warning level) for monitoring
the ground-fault current.
If the ground-fault current exceeds the response level, the current limit monitoring will
respond.
(Page 19).
Trip level, warning level

You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level, warning level) for monitoring
the ground-fault current.
If the ground-fault current exceeds the response level, the current limit monitoring will
respond.
Trip level: 30 mA to 40 A in steps of 10 mA (default: 1000 mA)

Warning level: 20 mA to 40 A in steps of 10 mA (default: 500 mA)

Active status of trip and warning levels

Here you can specify in which motor operating states the trip level / warning level will be
active:
• Always (on) Trip level / warning level is always active,

regardless of whether the motor is running or at a
standstill
• If motor runs, except TPF (run) Trip level / warning level is only active when the
motor is running
• when the motor is on, except TPF, Trip level / warning level is only active when the
with startup override (run+) motor is running and starting has been completed
Response to trip level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the trip level is overshot.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter Important information
(Page 19).
Table 6- 3 Response to "trip level" in ground-fault monitoring
Response Trip level

signal X (d)
warn —
tripping X
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s) 1)
Response to warning level

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond if the warning level is overshot.
See also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in chapter Important information
(Page 19).
Table 6- 4 Response to "warning level" in ground-fault monitoring
Response Warning level

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
tripping —
Delay 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.1 s) 1)

Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the ground-fault current:
Hysteresis 0 to 15% of the level value in steps of 1%

Default setting: 5 %
Response to sensor fault

Here you can set how SIMOCODE pro should respond to a sensor fault. Open circuit and
short-circuit to 3UL23 residual current transformer are recognized as sensor faults.
Response Sensor fault

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
tripping X

6.3 Current limit monitoring
6.3.1 Description
Current limits are monitored for the purpose of monitoring the process independently of the
overload protection system.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the motor current for freely-selectable
upper and lower current limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro when a prewarning or trip
level has been reached can be freely parameterized and delayed.
The motor current is measured by means of current / voltage measuring modules.
Figure 6-4 "Current Limits" function block

6.3.2 I> (upper limit)

When monitoring current limits I > (upper limit), two different response levels can be
parameterized and monitored: I> (upper limit) trip level, I> (upper limit) warning level
If the current of one or more phases exceeds the response level, current limit monitoring
responds.
Trip level 0 to 1020 % of ls in steps of 4% (default: 0)

Warning level 0 to 1020 % of ls in steps of 4% (default: 0)

The trip level / warning level is active only when the motor is running, the startup procedure
has been completed and there is no test position feedback (TPF) (run+).

Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the trip level is undershot.
(Page 19).
Table 6- 5 "Trip level" response for monitoring current limits I >
Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn —
tripping X

Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the warning level is overshot.
(Page 19).
Table 6- 6 "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I >

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
tripping —

Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for the current limits I> (upper limit):

6.3.3 I< (lower limit)
Trip level / warning level

When monitoring current limits I< (lower limit), two different response levels (trip level /
warning level) can be parameterized and monitored:
● I< (lower limit) trip level
● I< (lower limit) warning level
If the current of the phases (Imax) drops below the response level, the current limit monitor
responds.
Trip level 0 to 1020 % of ls in steps of 4% (default: 0)

Warning level 0 to 1020 % of ls in steps of 4% (default: 0)


Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the trip level is undershot:
(Page 19).
Table 6- 7 "Trip level" response for monitoring current limits I <
Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn —
tripping X


Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the warning level is undershot.
(Page 19).
Table 6- 8 "Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I <

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
tripping —
Hysteresis
Here you can set the hysteresis for current limits I< (lower limit):


6.4 Voltage monitoring
Description
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a three-phase
network or a single-phase network for freely selectable limits. The response of
SIMOCODE pro on reaching a prewarning level or trip level can be freely parameterized and
delayed.
Voltage measurement is performed using current / voltage measuring modules. This is
based on the minimum voltage of all voltages Umin.
Note
Please note that only phase voltages are available with SIMOCODE pro V basic units up to
version *E06*. If required, the line-to-line voltage can be calculated from the phase voltage
using the logic module "Calculator 1/2" as follows: Line-to-line voltage = phase voltage *
1.73.
From version *E07* onward, either phase voltage or line-to-line voltage can be used as the
basis for monitoring.
Figure 6-5 "Voltage Monitoring" function block

Furthermore, even when the motor is switched off, SIMOCODE pro can determine and
signal the further availability of the feeder by measuring the voltage directly at the circuit
breaker or at the fuses in the main circuit.

You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level / warning level).
If the voltage in one or more phases falls below the response level or warning level, voltage
monitoring responds.
Trip level: 0 to 2040 V in steps of 8 V (default: 0)

Warning level: 0 to 2040 V in steps of 8 V (default: 0)

active:
• Always (on) 1) Trip level / warning level is always active,

standstill
• Always, except TPF (on+) (default) Trip level / warning level always effective,
standstill;
Exception: "TPF", i.e. motor feeder is in test
position
• If motor runs, except TPF (run) Trip level / warning level only active if the motor is
ON and not in the test position
1) When using basic unit SIMOCODE pro V (product version *E03* and higher) with a
current/voltage measurement module

Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the trip level is undershot.
(Page 19).
Table 6- 9 "Trip level" response for voltage monitoring
Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn —
tripping X


Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the warning level is undershot.
(Page 19).
Table 6- 10 "Warning level" response for voltage monitoring

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
tripping —
Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power

Here you can set the hysteresis for voltage, cos phi and power.
Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power 0 to 15% of the level value in steps of 1%
(default: 5 %)

6.5 Cos phi monitoring
Description
Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main field of
application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks with loads that
fluctuate significantly. The power factor fluctuates more than either the motor current or the
active power does, particularly in the low-end performance range of a motor. Therefore,
power factor monitoring is particularly suitable for distinguishing between no-load operation
and faults, e.g. a broken drive belt or drive shaft. If the set trip level or warning level is
undershot, a signal is generated or the motor is switched off, depending upon the setting.
Figure 6-6 "Cos Phi Monitoring" function block

You can parameterize two different response levels (trip level / warning level) for cos phi
monitoring.
Trip level 0 to 100 % (default: 0 %)

Warning level 0 to 100 % (default: 0 %)
0 % = cos phi = 0.00
50 % = cos phi = 0,50
100 % = cos phi = 1,00



Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the set trip level is undershot:
(Page 19).
Table 6- 11 "Trip level" response for cos phi monitoring
Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn —
tripping X

Here you can define how SIMOCODE pro will respond if the set warning level is undershot.
(Page 19).
Table 6- 12 "Warning level" response for cos phi monitoring

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
tripping —

6.6 Active power monitoring
Description
SIMOCODE pro can indirectly monitor the state of a device or system via the active power.
For example, by monitoring the active power of a pump motor, conclusions can be drawn
from the active power level about the flow rate or fluid fill levels. The active power curve of a
motor is a precise reflection of its actual load across the entire range. Excess load results in
increased wear of the motor and, thus, may lead to premature motor failure. Insufficient
active power can, for example, be a sign of no-load motor operation.
SIMOCODE pro allows two-phase active power monitoring for freely selectable upper and
lower limits. The response of SIMOCODE pro when a prewarning or trip level has been
reached can be freely parameterized and delayed.
The active power is measured by means of current / voltage measuring modules.
Figure 6-7 "Power Monitoring" function block


With active power monitoring, you can parameterize two different response levels (trip level /
warning level) for the upper and lower limits.
Trip level
• P> (upper limit) 0.000 to 4294967.295 kW (default: 0.000 kW)
• P < (lower limit)
Warning level
• P> (upper limit) 0.000 to 4294967.295 kW (default: 0.000 kW)
• P < (lower limit)

Response to trip level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)

Here, you can define the response of SIMOCODE pro in the event that the monitored
variable overshoots/undershoots the set trip level:
For further information, see also "Tables of responses of SIMOCODE pro" in Chapter
Important information (Page 19).
Table 6- 13 "Trip level" response for active power monitoring
Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn —
tripping X
Response to warning level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit)

variable overshoots/undershoots the set warning level:
Table 6- 14 "Warning level" response for active power monitoring

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
tripping —

6.7 0/4 ... 20 mA monitoring
Description
With the aid of an analog module, SIMOCODE pro is capable of measuring and monitoring
further process variables as desired. For example, the fill level can be monitored to protect a
pump against dry operation, or a differential pressure transducer can be used to monitor the
degree of pollution in a filter. If the fill level undershoots a specified level, the pump can be
switched off and, if a specific differential pressure value is exceeded, the filter must be
cleaned.

Figure 6-8 "0/4 to 20 mA monitoring" function block
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a transducer

(standardized 0/4 - 20 mA output signal). The analog signals are fed to the "0/4 - 20 mA"
function block via the analog module.


With 0/4-20 mA monitoring, you can parameterize two different response levels (trip level /
warning level) for the upper and lower limits.
Trip level
• 0/4 to 20 > (upper limit) 0.0 to 23.6 mA (default: 0.0 mA)
• 0/4 to 20 < (lower limit)
Warning level
• 0/4 to 20 > (upper limit) 0.0 to 23.6 mA (default: 0.0 mA)
• 0/4 to 20 < (lower limit)

active:
• Always (on) Trip level / warning level is always active, regardless of

whether the motor is running or at a standstill
• Always, except TPF (on+) Trip level / warning level is always active regardless of
whether the motor is running or at a standstill, with the
exception of "TPF," i.e. motor feeder is in the test position
• If motor runs, except TPF Trip level / warning level only active if the motor is ON and
(run) not in the test position
• If motor runs, except TPF, Trip level / warning level is only active when the motor is
with startup override (run+) running, the startup procedure has been completed, and
no test position (TPF) is detected
Response to trip level 0/4 to 20 mA > (upper limit), 0/4 to 20 mA < (lower limit)
variable overshoots/undershoots the set trip level:
Table 6- 15 "Trip level" response for 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring
Response Trip level

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn —
tripping X

Response to trip level 0/4 to 20 mA> (upper limit), 0/4 to 20 mA< (lower limit)
variable overshoots/undershoots the set warning level:
Table 6- 16 "Warning level" response for 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring

Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
tripping —
Marking
The marking is saved in the device and assigned and displayed in the Faults / Warnings
online dialog. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "0/4 to 20 >"; range:
maximum 10 characters.
Hysteresis for 0/4 to 20 mA

Here you can set the fluctuation range for the analog signal:
Hysteresis for the analog signal 0 to 15 % in steps of 1 % (default: 5 %)
Note
Monitoring of a second process variable via input 2 of the analog module can be done, for
example, by free limit monitors.

6.8 Operation monitoring
6.8.1 Description
Motor operation monitoring - use

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor and restrict the
number of startups in a defined time frame to avoid plant downtimes due to failed motors
caused by running or being stopped for too long.
If an adjustable limit value is exceeded, a signal or warning can be generated that indicates
maintenance or replacement of the motor in question is required.
After replacement of the motor, the operating hours and motor stop times can be reset, for
example.
To avoid excessive thermal strain and premature aging of a motor, the number of motor
starts in a selectable time frame can be limited. The number of starts still possible is
available for further processing in SIMOCODE pro.
The limited number of possible starts can be indicated by prewarnings.
Note
Operating hours, motor stop times and the number of motor starts can be monitored
completely in the device and / or transmitted to the automation system via PROFIBUS.
Figure 6-9 "Operation Monitoring" function block

Response
Table 6- 17 "Operation monitoring" response
Response Monitoring of Stop monitoring - Number of starts - Number of starts -

operating hours - level overshoot prewarning
level
Deactivated X (d) X (d) X (d) X (d)
signal X X X X
warn X X X X
tripping — — X —
6.8.2 Operating hours monitoring
Motor operating hours monitoring - use

The motor operating hours monitoring function enables the operating hours (service life) of a
motor to be recorded so that motor maintenance prompts can be generated in good time as
applicable.
Level
If the operating hours exceed the set response level, the monitoring function responds.
Level 0 to 1193046 hours (default: 0 h)
Active status
Response
Here you can define the response to an overshoot.
Important information (Page 19) and Table "Response of motor operation monitoring."

6.8.3 Motor stop time monitoring
Motor stop time monitoring - use

System parts for important processes often have dual drives (A and B drives). Ensure that
these are always operated alternately. This prevents long motor stop times and reduces the
risk of non-availability. The motor stop time monitoring function can be used, for example, to
generate an interrupt, thus initiating connection of the motor.
Level
The length of the permissible motor stop time is stipulated here; if exceeded, the monitoring
function responds.
Level 0 to 65535 hours (default: 0 h)
Active status
Response
Here you can define the response to overshooting.
6.8.4 Monitoring the number of starts
Number of starts monitoring - use

Monitoring the number of starts can protect system parts (motors and switching devices such
as soft starters and converters) from too many start processes within a parameterizable time
frame and thus prevent damage. This is also particularly useful for commissioning or manual
control.
The following schematic illustrates the principle by which the number of starts is limited.
Figure 6-10 Monitoring the number of starts

Permissible starts
The maximum permissible number of starts is set here. The time interval "Time range for
starts" commences to run after the first start. After the second to last permissible start has
been executed, the "Just one start possible" pre-warning is generated.
Permissible starts: 1 to 255 (default: 1)
Time range for starts

The time range for permissible start processes is set here. The maximum number of starts is
only available again after the parameterized time range for starts has elapsed. The number
of available starts is shown by the analog value "Permissible starts - Actual value".
Time range for starts: 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss (default: 00:00:00)
Active status
Response to overshoot
Here you can define the response if the number of starts in the time range for starts is
overshot.
Response to pre-warning
Here you can define the response after the penultimate start:
Interlocking time
If a new start command is issued within the time range for starts after the last permissible
start, this new start command will no longer be executed if the setting "Response to
overshoot - Tripping" has been set. "Fault - No. of starts >" will be displayed and the set
interlocking time activated.
Interlocking time 00:00:00 to 18:12:15 hh:mm:ss (default: 00:00:00)

6.9 Temperature monitoring (analog)
Schematic and characteristic curve

Temperature monitoring of, for example, motor windings, motor bearings, coolant and
gearbox temperature, can be carried out via up to three analog temperature sensors such as
NTC, KTY 83/84, PT100, PT1000.
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring for overtemperature: Separate levels can be
set for the warning temperature and the trip temperature.
Temperature monitoring is based upon the highest temperature in all sensor measuring
circuits of the temperature module.
Figure 6-11 "Temperature Monitoring" function block
Settings
Table 6- 18 "Temperature monitoring" settings
Temperature Description
Trip level T > -273° to 65262°C (default: -273°)
Response to trip level T > Setting of response when the temperature is overshot (see the
following table and Chapter Important information (Page 19))
Marking for trip level T > No parameters. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g.
"Temperature>"; range: Maximum 10 characters
Warning level T > -273° to 65262°C (default: -273°)
Response to warning level T > Setting of response when the temperature is overshot (see the
following table and Chapter Important information (Page 19))
Marking warning level T > No parameters. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g.
"Temperature>"; range: maximum 10 characters.
Hysteresis 0° to 255°C in steps of 1°C (default: 5°C)


The trip level / warning level is always active, independent of whether the motor is running or
not (operating state "ON").
Response
(Page 19).
● Overtemperature: Here you can select how SIMOCODE pro should respond when the
temperature has overshot the warning level / trip level.
Table 6- 19 "Overtemperature" response
Response Warning level T > Trip level T >

Deactivated X —
signal X X
warn X (d) —
tripping — X (d)
Note
With motors for EEx e applications, the response must be set to "tripping"!
Note
The sensor type, the number of measuring circuits in use and the response to a sensor fault
must be set in the "Temperature Module Inputs (TM Inputs)" function block if temperature
monitoring is being used.
Note
To monitor several sensor measuring circuits individually and independently, a suitable
number of free limit monitors can be linked to the "Temperature Module Inputs (TM Inputs)"
function block and differing limits set for the individual temperature sensors, instead of the
"Temperature Monitoring" function block.

6.10 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing
6.10 Monitoring interval for mandatory testing
Description
Function for monitoring the interval between the connection and the tripping of the enabling
circuit (actuator tripping). The monitoring time starts anew every time the enabling circuit
closes. This function supports you in complying with test intervals that require verification.
In the enabling circuit of the DM-F Local and the DM-F PROFIsafe, relay contacts perform
safety-related tripping. Whether the relay contacts of the enabling circuit actually open or not,
can only be established via a change in the switching state of the contacts.
The "Monitoring interval for mandatory testing" function supports the system operator in the
monitoring of the time that has elapsed since the last connection of the enabling circuit.
When the adjustable limit has been reached, the set reaction follows (disabled, signal, warn;
see response). This is logged in the event memory.
This monitoring function is an organizational measure that supports the system operator in
detecting faults by conducting regular tests, see information in the operating instructions on
regularly testing the function of a safety device. The monitoring function itself need not be
safety-related.
Note
The function "Time until test" is not a safety-related function
Figure 6-12 "Monitoring interval for mandatory testing" function block
Response
You can set the response here.
(Page 19).
Table 6- 20 "Safety-related tripping" response
Response
Deactivated X
signal X
warn X
tripping —
Test interval
Adjustable limit value for the interval for mandatory testing:
Test interval: 0 to 255 weeks (default: 0)

6.11 Hysteresis for monitoring functions

The following diagram illustrates the function of the hysteresis for monitoring functions:
Figure 6-13 The hysteresis operating principle for monitoring functions
TL = Trip level (tripping)

WL = Warning level (warning)


Outputs 7
7.1 Output - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find information about the outputs of SIMOCODE pro:
● Relay outputs on the basic unit and the digital modules
● Analog module output
● Operator panel LEDs
● Send data on the PROFIBUS DP.
Target groups
● Programmers.
Required knowledge
● PROFIBUS DP
You will find the dialog boxes in SIMOCODE ES under
Further Function Blocks > Outputs.

Outputs
7.2 Introduction
7.2 Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro has various outputs. These are represented by different function blocks in
SIMOCODE pro. They are the external SIMOCODE pro interfaces. Within SIMOCODE pro,
the outputs are represented as plugs on the corresponding function blocks and can be
assigned to any functions or events via connections.
Examples of outputs are listed below:
● Output terminals , located on the outside of basic unit, digital modules, and on the
analog module
● LEDs on the operator panel for visualizing the operating state or different statuses
● Outputs to PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of the various types of output:
Figure 7-1 General representation of the various output types

Outputs
7.2 Introduction
Scope and application

Outputs are used, e.g. for controlling motor contactors, displaying states or signaling via
PROFIBUS DP. The system provides different types of output depending on the device
series and the expansion modules in use:
Table 7- 1 Outputs
Outputs SIMOCODE
pro C pro S pro V
Basic unit outputs (BU Outputs) ✓ ✓ ✓
Operator panel LEDs (OP LED) ✓ ✓ ✓
Digital module 1 outputs (DM1 Outputs) — ✓ 1) ✓
Digital module 2 outputs (DM2 Outputs) — — ✓
Analog module output (AM Output) — — ✓
Acyclic send data (Acyclic send) ✓ ✓ ✓
Cyclic send data (Cyclic send) ✓ ✓ ✓
1) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, the DM1 outputs are on the multifunction module.

Outputs
7.3 Basic unit outputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU Outputs" function block with two or three relay outputs. You can,
for example, switch contactors or lamps via these relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs) of
the function block must be connected to the respective sockets (usually the QE contactor
controls of the control function). The "BU Outputs" function block consists of:
● Three plugs corresponding to the relay outputs Out1 to Out3
● Three relays
● Output terminals.
In total, one function block "BU outputs" is available on the pro C, pro S, and pro V basic
units.
Schematic
The following schematics show the "BU Outputs" function block:
Figure 7-2 Function block "BU outputs," SIMOCODE pro C, V
Figure 7-3 Function block "BU outputs," SIMOCODE pro S

Outputs
Application examples
● Activation of the main contactor in the motor feeder: You can, for example, define which
relay output is used for activating the motor contactor in the motor feeder. To do this,
connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE..." contactor activation of the
control function.
● Activation of lamps for displaying operating states: You can define, for example, which
relay outputs are to be used for controlling the lamps / LEDs that display the operating
states of the motor (Fault, ON, OFF, FAST, SLOW...). To do this, connect the desired
relay output to the respective "QE..." contactor activation of the control function. These
are provided specially for activating lamps and LEDs. In addition to the status signals, the
"QL..." lamp controls automatically signal the following using a 2-Hz flashing frequency:
– Test mode (QLE... / QLA lamp outputs are flashing)
– Unacknowledged fault (lamp output general fault QLS is flashing)
– Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay
outputs.
– Lamp test: All QL outputs are activated for approx. 2 s.
In most cases, the outputs of the basic unit will be connected to the QE or QL outputs. By
referring to Table "Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status
information for the control functions," you can determine which QE outputs are required for
which control function.
Settings
Table 7- 2 Basic unit output settings
BU outputs Description
Outputs 1 to 3 Control of the "BU Outputs" function block via any signal (any socket , e.g.
device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.), usually from the QE contactor
controls.
Defaults depend on the selected application (template): See Chapter Example circuits
(Page 633).

Outputs
7.4 Operator panel LEDs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has an "OP LED" function block for controlling the seven freely assignable
LEDs. The LEDs are in the operator panel and can be used to display any status. For this,
the inputs (plugs) of the "OP LED" function block must be connected to the respective
sockets (e.g. to the sockets for the status information of the control function).
Note
The "OP LED" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected and
configured in the device configuration!
The "OP LED" function block consists of:

● Four plugs, "OP LED green 1" to "OP LED green 4," corresponding to the green LEDs.
The green LEDs are optically / mechanically allocated to the buttons on the operator
panel. They normally display feedback concerning the motor operating state.
● Three plugs, "OP LED yellow 1" to "OP LED yellow 3," corresponding to the yellow LEDs.
● Four green LEDs.
● Three yellow LEDs (not for the operator panel with display).
One "OP LED" function block is available for the SIMOCODE pro C, pro S and pro V basic
units.
LEDs of the operator panel

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel and the LEDs:
Figure 7-4 LEDs of the operator panel

Outputs
LEDs of the operator panel with display

The following diagram shows the front view of the operator panel with display and the LEDs:
Figure 7-5 LEDs of the operator panel with display for SIMOCODE pro V
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP LED" function block:
Figure 7-6 Schematic of the "OP LED" function block
Note
The three yellow LEDs mentioned in this section are not available for the operator panel with
display. Status information can be read out here directly via the display. While it is still
possible to connect the corresponding three plugs via the software, they remain non-
functional.

Outputs
● Displaying operating states:
You can define which LEDs are to be used for displaying the operating states (Fault, ON,
OFF, FAST, SLOW...). For this, connect the desired LED to the respective "QL." lamp
control of the control function.
In many cases, the LEDs are connected to the QL outputs. By referring to Table "Active
control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status information for the control
functions," you can determine which QL outputs are required for which control function.
● Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the yellow
LEDs.
Settings
Table 7- 3 Operator panel LED settings
OP LED Description
Green 1 to Green 4 The "OP LED" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets
, e.g. "motor" operating state feedback).
Yellow 1 to Yellow 31) The "OP LED" function block can be activated by any signal (any sockets
, e.g. displays for status, events, faults).
1) No function when using the operator panel with display.
(Page 633).

Outputs
7.5 Digital module outputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM1 Outputs" and "DM2 Outputs" function blocks, which are each
equipped with two relay outputs. You can, for example, switch contactors or lamps via these
relay outputs. For this, the inputs (plugs of the "DM Outputs" function blocks) must be
connected to the respective sockets (e.g. of the control function).
Note
"DM Outputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM) or
multifunction modules (MM) are connected and configured in the device configuration!
Each function block has:

● Two plugs, corresponding to relay outputs Out1, Out2
● Two relays
● Output terminals.
● a function block "DM1 Outputs" on the basic unit pro S
● two function blocks "DM1 outputs" and "DM2 outputs" on the basic unit pro V.
Note
In addition to the two jointly-switched fail-safe enabling circuits, the fail-safe DM-F Local
and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules are equipped with two standard relay outputs, the
common potential of which is switched off for safety reasons via an enabling circuit.
From a logical connection point of view, the standard relay outputs are always switched.
The state of the fail-safe enabling circuits is not affected by the logical wiring.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM Outputs" function blocks:
Figure 7-7 Schematic of the "DM1 Outputs" / "DM2 Outputs" function blocks

Outputs
● Controlling the main contactor in the motor feeder:
You can, e.g., define which relay output is used for controlling the motor contactor in the
motor feeder.
For this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QE..." contactor control of the
control function.
● Controlling lamps for displaying operating states:
You can, e.g., define which relay outputs are to be used for controlling the lamps / LEDs
that display the operating states of the motor (Fault, ON, OFF, FAST, SLOW ...).
For this, connect the desired relay output to the respective "QL..." lamp control of the
control function.
● Transfer of any other information, status information, warnings, faults, etc. to the relay
outputs.
In many cases, the outputs of the digital module will be connected to the QE outputs. By
referring to Table "Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status
information for the control functions," you can determine which QE outputs are required for
which control function.
Settings
Table 7- 4 "DM1 / DM2 Outputs" settings
"DM1 / DM2 Outputs" Description

Outputs 1 to 2 Control of the "DM1 Outputs" and "DM2 Outputs" function blocks via
any signal (any socket , e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP
control bits, etc., usually from the QE contactor controls.)
(Page 633).

Outputs
7.6 Analog module output
Description
The analog module allows you to expand basic unit pro V by one analog output. The
corresponding function block allows every analog value (2 bytes / 1 word) in SIMOCODE pro
to be output as a 0/4 to 20 mA signal to a connected pointer instrument, for example. If the
function block is activated via the "Assigned analog output value" plug using any integer
value between 0 and 65,535, an equivalent analog signal of 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA will be
sent to the output terminals of the analog module.
Note
The "AM1 Output" function block can only be used if the analog module (AM) is connected
and configured in the device configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM1 Output" function block:
Figure 7-8 Function block "AM1 - output"
Settings
Table 7- 5 "Analog module output" settings
Signal/value Range
Assigned analog output value Any value (1 word / 2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro
Output signal 0 to 20 mA (default) or 4 … 20 mA

Start value of value range 0 to 65535 (default: 0)
End value of value range 0 to 65535 (default: 0)

Outputs
1) Output of the effective motor current - across the entire motor current range
The motor current ranges from 0 to 8 A.
The rated current IN of the motor at nominal load is 2 A.
The parameterized set current Is in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the rated current IN (2 A).
In SIMOCODE pro, the present phase currents or the maximum current (current IL_1, IL_2,
IL_3, max. current I_max) are represented as a as a percentage of the parameterized set
current Is in accordance with the selected range:
● 0 A motor current corresponds to 0 % of Is
● The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is 1% (see measured
values data record 94).
Figure 7-9 Application example: Motor current output - entire range
As a result,
● The "Start value of value range" to be selected is: 0
● The "End value of value range" to be selected is: 400.
Figure 7-10 Application example: Motor current output - output values to function block AM output
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 to 20 mA:

● 0 % motor current: 0 mA at the analog module output
● 400 % motor current: 20 mA at the analog module output.

Outputs
2) Output of the effective motor current - only part of the motor current range (overload
range)
The motor current ranges from 0 to 8 A.
The rated current IN of the motor at nominal load is 2 A.
The parameterized set current Is in SIMOCODE ES corresponds to the rated current IN (2 A).
However, only the overload range (2 A to 8 A) is to be displayed on an instrument via the
analog module output. In SIMOCODE pro, the present phase currents or the maximum
current (current IL_1, IL_2, IL_3, max. current I_max) are represented as a as a percentage
of the parameterized set current Is in accordance with the selected range:
● The smallest unit for the effective motor current in SIMOCODE pro is 1% (see measured
values data record 94).
Figure 7-11 Application example: Motor current output - Overload range
As a result,
Figure 7-12 Application example: Motor current output - output value to function block AM1 output


Outputs
Note
(concerning examples 1 and 2):
In SIMOCODE pro, phase currents are available as a percentage of the set current Is. When
using the analog module output to display the present motor current on a connected pointer
instrument, the present motor current is always indicated as a percentage of the set current.
If the selected control function is for a motor with only one speed, the pointer instrument can
display a percentage (% of Is) and an absolute value (e.g. in A).
In the case of motors / control functions with two speeds and, thus, two set currents (e.g.
pole-changing starters or Dahlanders), the motor current is only shown on the pointer
instrument as a percentage of the present set current Is1 or Is2, depending upon which of the
two speeds (slow or fast) currently applies.
3) Output of any analog value from the automation system (cyclically via PROFIBUS)
One word (2 bytes) can be transmitted cyclically from the automation system to
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS. Any value can be output as a 0/4 to 20mA signal by directly
connecting this cyclic control word from the PROFIBUS to the analog module output. If the
transmitted value is in S7 Format (0 to 27648), this must be taken into consideration when
parameterizing:
Figure 7-13 Output of an analog value from the automation system
As a result,
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 0 to 20 mA
● 0: 0 mA at the analog module output
● 27648: 20 mA at the analog module output.
When the parameterized "Output signal" = 4 to 20 mA
● 0: 4 mA at the analog module output
● 27648: 20 mA at the analog module output.

Outputs
7.7 Cyclic Send
7.7 Cyclic Send
Description
The "Cyclic Send" function blocks allow you to specify the information to be transferred
cyclically to the automation system via PROFIBUS DP.
"Cyclic send" function blocks consist of
● Eight bits each (two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
● Four words (= eight bytes, byte 2 to 9 for four analog values, freely parameterizable).
Overall there are four "Cyclic send" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3, 4/9).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic send" function blocks:
Figure 7-14 Schematic of the "Cyclic send" function blocks
Cyclic services
Cyclic send data is exchanged between the DP master and the DP slave once in every DP
cycle. The DP master sends the cyclic receive data to SIMOCODE pro. In response,
SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic send data to the DP master.

Outputs
7.7 Cyclic Send
Settings
Table 7- 6 Cyclic send data settings
Cyclic send data Description

Byte 0 to 1, Bit 0 to Bit 7, Setting and resetting of bits by means of any signal (any sockets ,
Basic types 11), 2 e.g. device inputs, send data, etc.)
Byte 2 / 3, Basic types 11), 2 Assignment of a word (two bytes) by means of any analog value (any
socket , e.g. maximum current Imax, remaining cooling down
period, timer actual value, etc.)
Byte 4 / 5, 6 / 7, 8 / 9, Basic Assignment of three words (six bytes) by means of any analog value
type 11) (any socket )
1) For basic unit pro V only
Byte 0 of the send data is already preset. Byte 2/3 is preset with the max. current I_max!
See also Chapter Telegram description and data access (Page 381).

Outputs
7.8 Acyclic Send
7.8 Acyclic Send
Description
In addition to "Cyclic Send" it is also possible to transfer a further 16 bits of binary
information to the PLC / PC via acyclic services. The "Acyclic Send" function blocks allow
you to specify the information to be transferred acyclically to the automation system via
PROFIBUS DP. The inputs (plugs) of the function blocks must be connected to the
respective sockets.
The "Acyclic send" function blocks consists of:
● Eight bits each (= two bytes, byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
There are two "Acyclic send" function blocks.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic send" function blocks:
Figure 7-15 Function block "Acyclic send"
Acyclic services
Acyclic send data will only be transferred on request. The information (two bytes) can be
found in data record 203. This data record can be read by every master (PLC or PC) that
supports the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.
Settings
Table 7- 7 Acyclic send data settings
Acyclic send data Description

Byte 0 to 1, Bit 0 to bit 7 Setting and resetting of bits by means of any signal (any socket ,
e.g. device inputs, send data, status information, events, etc.)

Outputs
7.8 Acyclic Send

Inputs 8
8.1 Inputs - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find information about SIMOCODE pro inputs.
The inputs are:
● Binary inputs on the basic units and digital modules
● Operator panel buttons
● Temperature module inputs
● Analog module inputs
● Inputs of the multifunction module
● Receive data from the PROFIBUS DP
Target groups
● Planners
Required knowledge
● The principle of connecting plugs to sockets.
Device Parameters > Inputs.

Inputs
8.2 Introduction
8.2 Introduction
Description
SIMOCODE pro has various inputs. These are represented by different function blocks in
SIMOCODE pro. These function blocks are the ingoing SIMOCODE pro interfaces. Within
SIMOCODE pro, these inputs are represented as sockets on the corresponding function
blocks and can be assigned via connections to any functions. Inputs can be:
● Input terminals , located on the outside of the basic units and digital modules
● Buttons on operator panels (one Test / Reset button, four freely parameterizable buttons),
and basic units (one Test / Reset button)
● Temperature module inputs
● Analog module inputs
● Inputs from PROFIBUS DP (cyclic and acyclic).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the various input types:
Figure 8-1 General representation of the input types

Inputs
8.2 Introduction

Inputs are used, for example, to input external signals e.g. via pushbuttons, key-operated
switches, etc. These external signals are processed further internally via appropriate
connections. The system has different inputs depending upon the device series:
Table 8- 1 Inputs
Inputs SIMOCODE
pro C pro S pro V
Basic unit inputs (BU Inputs) ✓ ✓ ✓
Operator panel buttons (OP Buttons) ✓ ✓ ✓
Digital module 1 inputs (DM1 Inputs) — ✓ 1) ✓
Digital module 2 inputs (DM2 Inputs) — — ✓
Temperature module inputs (TM Inputs) — ✓ ✓
Analog module inputs (AM Inputs) — — ✓
Acyclic receive (Acycl. receive) ✓ ✓ ✓
Cyclic receive (Cycl. receive) ✓ ✓ ✓
1) for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, the inputs and the temperature input are on the
multifunction module.

Inputs
8.3 Basic unit inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "BU Inputs" function block with four binary inputs connected to
common potential. You can connect, for example, the buttons for a local control station to the
inputs. These signals can be further processed in SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting
the sockets of the "BU Inputs" function block.
The "BU Inputs" function block consists of:
● Input terminals located on the outside of the basic unit, corresponding to the sockets
"BU Input 1" to "BU Input 4"
● Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the "Control
Stations" function block
● A socket for the "TEST / RESET" button:
The function of the "TEST / RESET" button is generally dependent upon the operating
state of the device:
– Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults
– Test function for carrying out device tests
In addition, other functions can be assigned to the "TEST / RESET" button (e.g. operation of
the memory module and of the addressing plug).
See also Chapter Test / Reset (Page 321).
There is 1 "BU Inputs" function block.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "BU Inputs" function block:
Figure 8-2 Schematic of the "BU Inputs" function block

Inputs
The inputs can be used, for example, for connecting the start and stop buttons of the local
control station, which can then be assigned to the "Local Control Station" function block.
If assigned accordingly, the input signals can also be used to activate function blocks such
as "Reset" or "External Fault."
Power supply to the inputs

See Chapter Mounting basic units, expansion modules, and the decoupling module
(Page 408).
Settings
Table 8- 2 "Basic unit inputs" settings
Inputs Description
Debounce time You can set a debounce time for the inputs, if required. Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms
(default: 16 ms)

Inputs
8.4 Operator panel buttons
Description
The operator panel contains buttons 1 to 4 as well as the "TEST / RESET" button.
Correspondingly, the "OP Buttons" function block is available in SIMOCODE pro with five
sockets.
Note
The "OP Buttons" function block can only be used if the operator panel (OP) is connected
and configured in the device configuration!
Note
The operator panel with display does not have a Test / Reset button. The allocated functions
can be carried out via the operator panel menu or via softkeys. Similarly, the corresponding
status signal will then be available at the "OP Test / Reset Button" socket.
● Operator panel, buttons 1 to 4:

Buttons 1 to 4 are usually used to input control commands for the motor feeder. Control
commands can be, for example:
– Motor ON (ON >), Motor OFF (OFF) for a direct starter
– Motor LEFT (ON <), Motor OFF (OFF), Motor RIGHT (ON >) for a reversing starter
– Motor SLOW (ON >), Motor FAST (ON >>), Motor OFF (OFF) for a Dahlander circuit.
However, buttons 1 to 4 are not rigidly assigned to the above mentioned control commands,
and can be assigned to other functions via different internal connection of the respective
function block socket in SIMOCODE pro.
● "TEST / RESET" button. Operator panel:
The function of the "TEST / RESET" button is generally assigned to fixed functions:
– Reset function for the acknowledgement of pending faults
– Test function for carrying out device tests.
– Operation of the memory module or the addressing plug
Nevertheless, the status of the "TEST / RESET" button is picked off at the corresponding
socket of the function block and assigned to further functions in SIMOCODE pro.
See also Chapters Test / Reset (Page 321) , Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
(Page 467), and Backing up and saving parameters (Page 472).

Inputs
Operator panel buttons

The following figure shows the front view of the operator panel and the buttons:
Figure 8-3 Operator panel buttons
Buttons on the operator panel with display

The following figure shows the front view of the operator panel with display and the buttons:
Figure 8-4 Buttons on the operator panel with display for SIMOCODE pro V
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "OP buttons" function block:
Figure 8-5 Schematic of the "OP Buttons" function block

1) For menu-assisted operation on the operator panel with display

Inputs
8.5 Digital module inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has two "DM Inputs" function blocks, each with 4 binary inputs connected to
common potential. You can connect, for example, the buttons for a local control station to the
inputs. These signals can be further processed in SIMOCODE pro by internally connecting
the sockets of the "DM Inputs" function blocks.
Note
"DM Inputs" function blocks can only be used if the corresponding digital modules (DM) or a
multifunction module (MM) are connected and configured in the device configuration!
Each "DM Inputs" function block consists of:

● Input terminals located on the outside of the digital module, corresponding to the
sockets "DM Input 1" to "DM Input 4"
● Sockets in SIMOCODE pro that can be connected to any plugs, e.g. to the "Control
Stations" function block.
● A function block "DM1 Inputs" on the SIMOCODE pro S multifunction module
● Two function blocks "DM1 inputs" and "DM2 inputs" on the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "DM1 / DM2 Inputs" function blocks:
Figure 8-6 Schematic of the "DM1 / DM2 Inputs" function blocks

Inputs
The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as fail-safe digital module
DM-F Local:
Figure 8-7 Schematic of the "DM1 Inputs" function block as fail-safe digital module DM-F Local
Table 8- 3 Inputs, "DM1 Inputs" function block as fail-safe digital module DM-F Local
Input Description
Input 1 - "tripped" state
Start Start: Start input state (Y33)
Feedback Feedback: Feedback circuit state (Y34):
1 - closed, 0 - open
Cascading Cascading input state (1)
Sensor 1 Sensor circuit 1 state (Y12)
Sensor 2 Sensor circuit 2 state (Y22)
The following schematic shows the "DM1 Inputs" function block as fail-safe digital module
DM-F PROFIsafe:
Figure 8-8 Schematic of the "DM1 Inputs" function block as fail-safe digital module
DM-F PROFIsafe

Inputs
Table 8- 4 Inputs, "DM1 Inputs" function block as fail-safe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe
Input Description
input 1 IN1 (84) state
Feedback Feedback circuit state FBC (91):
1 - closed, 0 - open
Sensor 1 —
Sensor 2 —
Digital modules allow the number of binary inputs and binary outputs on SIMOCODE pro V
basic unit to be increased in increments. SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a
maximum of twelve binary inputs and seven binary outputs. If assigned accordingly, the input
signals can be also used to activate, for example, function blocks such as "Reset" or
"External Fault". An external fault can be, for example, the binary signal of an external speed
monitor, signaling that the nominal speed of a motor has been undershot.
Power supply to the inputs

See Chapter Digital module (DM) (Page 106).
Settings
Table 8- 5 "DM1 / DM2 Inputs" settings
Inputs Description
Debounce time You can set a debounce time for the inputs, if required.
Range: 6, 16, 26, 36 ms (default: 16 ms).
These values apply to digital modules with a 24 V DC input supply.
For digital modules with an input supply of 110 to 240 V AC/DC the values are
approximately 40 ms higher.
Note
The debounce times of the digital module inputs can only be set and/or are only relevant
when "monostable" or "bistable" is set for digital module 1.
The debounce time cannot be set if digital module 1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe.
If digital module 1 is a DM-F Local, the debounce times can be set using the DIP switches on
the front of the DM-F Local.

Inputs
Non-safety functions (fail-safe digital modules)

● If digital module1 is a DM-F Local, it is a digital module with non-safety inputs, relay
outputs and diagnostics in a SIMOCODE pro system.
● If digital module1 is a DM-F PROFIsafe, it is a digital module with non-safety inputs, relay
outputs and diagnostics in a SIMOCODE pro system.
Detailed information on fail-safe digital modules: See Chapter Fail-safe digital module
(DM-F) (Page 107).

Inputs
8.6 Temperature module inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has a "TM1 Inputs" function block with three analog sockets corresponding
to the three sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module. The temperature (in K) of
the three measuring circuits can be read from these sockets and processed internally. An
additional analog socket always supplies the maximum temperature of all three measured
temperatures. Furthermore, the two binary sockets of the function block represent the status
of the sensor measuring circuits. The analog values can be processed internally and / or
transmitted cyclically to the automation system via the "Cyclic Send" function blocks.
Note
The "TM1 Inputs" function block can only be used if the temperature module (TM) or the
multifunction (MM) is connected and configured in the device configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "TM Inputs" function block:
Figure 8-9 Schematic of the "TM Inputs" function block
Notes on wiring
You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors to a temperature module.
You can connect a 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensor to a multifunction module.
For more information, see Chapter Wiring (Page 417).

Inputs
Among other things, you can monitor the following motor components:
● Motor windings
● Motor bearings
● Motor coolant temperature
● Motor gearbox oil temperature
The individual temperatures of the three sensor measuring circuits can be monitored
independently of each other by connecting free limit monitors.
Settings
Table 8- 6 Temperature module input settings
Temperature module Description

Sensor type PT100 (default), PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, NTC
Response 1) to sensor fault/out of range Disabled, signal, warn (default), tripping
Number of active sensors 1 sensor, 2 sensors, 3 sensors (default)
1) see Table "Sensor fault / Out of range response"
Table 8- 7 "Sensor fault / Out of range" response
Response Sensor fault/Out of range

disabled X
signal X
warn X (d)
tripping X
Delay —

(Page 19).

Inputs
8.7 Analog module inputs
Description
SIMOCODE pro has an "AM1 Inputs" function block with two analog sockets, corresponding
to the two analog inputs of the analog module. The effective analog value of each input can
be read from these sockets and processed internally. An additional binary socket of the
function block represents the status of the analog measuring circuits. The analog values can
be processed internally and / or transmitted cyclically to the automation system via the
"Cyclic Send" function blocks.
Note
The "AM1 Inputs" function block can only be used if the respective analog module (AM) has
been connected and configured in the device configuration!
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "AM1 Inputs" function block:
Figure 8-10 Schematic of the "AM1 Inputs" function block
Typical applications are:
● Fill-level monitoring for implementing dry running protection for pumps
● Monitoring of pollution in a filter using a differential pressure transducer.

Inputs
Settings
Table 8- 8 Analog module input settings
Analog module Description

Input signal 0 to 20mA (default), 4 to 20 mA
Response to open circuit Signal, warn (default), tripping
Active inputs 1 input (default), 2 inputs
Notes
Note
The value of the analog module inputs is in S7 format.
Note
The inputs of the analog module are passive inputs, i.e. to configure an analog input circuit,
each input will require an additional, isolated external current source connected in series. If
the output of the analog module is not being used by another application, it can also be used
as a current source for an analog module input circuit. The "Start value of value range" and
the "End value of value range" of the analog module output have to be set to 65535 for this.
Thus, the maximum possible current will always be available via the analog module output.

Inputs
8.8 Cyclic Receive
8.8 Cyclic Receive
Description
With the "Cyclic Receive" function block, you can specify which cyclic data from the
automation system will be further processed via PROFIBUS DP in SIMOCODE pro. These
will normally be PLC / PCS binary control commands. Connection with the "Control Stations"
function block in SIMOCODE pro will allow the motor to be controlled via PROFIBUS DP.
Direct connection of the analog value with the "AM1 Output" function block will result in, for
example, the cyclic output of the value sent via PROFIBUS at the output of the analog
module.
The "Cyclic receive" function blocks consist of:
● Eight bits each (byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
● One word (= two bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely programmable) for basic
type 1.
A total of three "Cyclic receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3) are provided.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Cyclic receive" function blocks:
Figure 8-11 Function schematic of cyclic receive data
Cyclic services
The cyclic data is exchanged between DP master and DP slave once every DP cycle. The
DP master sends the cyclic receive data (Cyclic Receive) to SIMOCODE pro each time.
SIMOCODE pro responds by sending the cyclic send data (Cyclic Send) to the DP master.

Inputs
8.9 Acyclic Receive
8.9 Acyclic Receive
Description
In addition to "Cyclic Receive", it is possible to transfer further data acyclically to
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP. With the "Acyclic receive" function block, you can
specify which acyclic information from the PROFIBUS DP will be further processed in
SIMOCODE pro. With the "Acyclic receive" function block, you can specify which information
will be further processed in SIMOCODE pro.
The "Acyclic receive" function blocks consist of:
● Eight bits each (byte 0 and byte 1 for binary information)
● One word (= two bytes, byte 2 to 3 for an analog value, freely parameterizable).
Overall there are three "Acyclic receive" function blocks (0, 1, 2/3)
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Acyclic receive" function blocks:
Figure 8-12 Function schematic of acyclic receive data
Acyclic services
Acyclic data are transferred only on request.
The information (4 bytes) can be found in data record 202. This data record can be written
by every master (PLC or PC) that supports the acyclic services of PROFIBUS DPV1.
Connection monitoring is activated every time the data record is received. The content of the
data record is deleted after a 5-second time-out has elapsed.

Inputs
8.9 Acyclic Receive

Analog value recording 9
9.1 Analog value recording - general information
In this chapter
This chapter provides information regarding the possibility of recording the measured curves
of different measured values, e.g. the motor current when the motor is started, using
SIMOCODE pro V.
The increasing wear on the motor and the equipment driven by the motor all cause the motor
current to change over time. By recording the motor current at different points in time and
making direct comparisons, conclusions can be drawn regarding the condition of the motor
and the equipment.
Target groups
● Programmers
● Service personnel
Required knowledge
● SIMOCODE pro
● Motor protection, motor control
Device Parameters > Analog Value Recording.

Analog value recording
9.2 Description
9.2 Description
The "Analog Value Recording" function block can be used to record any analog values
(2 bytes / 1 word) in SIMOCODE pro over a set period of time. For example, you can use
this function block to record the characteristic curve of the motor current when the motor is
started.
Recording is carried out directly in SIMOCODE pro on the basis of the motor feeder and
independently of PROFIBUS or the automation system. Every analog value present at the
"Allocated analog value" analog socket is recorded and saved. Recording starts on the basis
of the edge (positive / negative) via any binary signal at the trigger input of the function block.
Up to 60 values can be saved internally in the device. The time frame of the recording is
indirectly determined by the selected sampling rate:
Sampling time = sampling rate[s] * 60 values
The pre-trigger can be used to specify how far in advance the recording should commence
before the trigger signal is issued. The pre-trigger is set as a percentage of the entire
sampling time. In addition, with SIMOCODE ES you can also export the measured curve into
a *.csv file for further processing, for example, in MS Excel.

9.3 Functional principle
Core statement
Figure 9-1 Functional principle of analog value recording
The old measured curve will be overwritten in SIMOCODE pro each time a new trigger signal
is sent to the trigger input.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Analog Value Recording" function block:
Figure 9-2 Schematic of the "Analog Value Recording" function block

Settings
Table 9- 1 "Analog value recording" settings
Signal / value Range

Trigger input Activate analog value recording with any signal (any socket ,
e.g. device inputs, current flowing)
Allocated analog value Any value (1 word / 2 bytes) in SIMOCODE pro
Trigger edge positive (default) / negative
Sampling rate 0.1 to 50 s, in steps of 0.1 s (default: 0.1 s)
Pre-trigger 0 to 100 % in steps of 5 % (default: 0 %)
Application example
Record the motor current when the motor starts / sampling time = 12 s / pre-trigger = 25 %
(3 s):
Figure 9-3 Application example of the analog value recording

3UF50 compatibility mode 10
10.1 3UF50 compatibility mode - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find information on the 3UF50 compatibility mode.
Target groups
● PLC programmers
Required knowledge
● Knowledge about PROFIBUS DP.
Device Parameters > 3UF50 Compatibility Mode.

3UF50 compatibility mode
10.2 Description
10.2 Description
Application of 3UF50 compatibility mode

The 3UF50 compatibility mode is applied when a SIMOCODE-DP device is to be replaced
by a SIMOCODE pro device without changing the configuration.
In the 3UF50 compatibility mode, you can operate a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit with a
3UF50 configuration.
In this case, communication with SIMOCODE pro is the same as communication with
SIMOCODE DP from the point of view of the PLC (class 1 master).
Cyclic communication (basic types 1-3), diagnostics and the DPV1 data records (DS 130,
DS 131, DS 133) of SIMOCODE DP are supported.

In order for the technical functions (parameterization) of SIMOCODE DP to be integrated into
the technical functions of SIMOCODE pro V, the device parameters must be adjusted
accordingly. The "Win SIMOCODE DP Converter" software supports you in this process.
This software enables you to convert the parameter files (smc files) created with Win
SIMOCODE DP into SIMOCODE ES parameter files (sdp files).
Safety guidelines
Note
Communication with a DP master (class 2 master), e.g. with the Win SIMOCODE DP
Professional software via PROFIBUS DP, is not covered by the 3UF50 compatibility mode.
Note
In the 3UF50 compatibility mode, the startup parameter block is always set, i.e. the
transmission of the device parameters created using the SIMOCODE DP GSD or the
SIMOCODE DP object manager cannot be integrated into SIMOCODE pro V.
Note
The 3UF50 compatibility mode supports SIMOCODE DP projects in which SIMOCODE DP
is integrated via GSD SIEM8031.gs?, SIEM8069.gs? or via the SIMOCODE DP Object
Manager (OM).

10.3 Diagram of send and receive data
10.3 Diagram of send and receive data

The following table shows the send and receive data in compatibility mode:
Table 10- 1 "Receive" configuration
Receive
Basic type 1, Basic type 1, Basic type 2, Basic type 2, Basic type 3, Basic type 3,
SIMOCODE DP SIMOCODE SIMOCODE DP SIMOCODE SIMOCODE DP SIMOCODE
pro V pro V pro V
0 Receive data Cyclic receive 0 Receive data Cyclic receive 0 Receive data Cyclic receive
1 bit 0 to 1.7 1 bit 0 to 1.7 1 bit 0 to 1.7
2 Not supported 2 Not supported 2 Not supported
3 3 3
Table 10- 2 "Send" configuration
Send
Basic type 1, Basic type 1, Basic type 2, Basic type 2, Basic type 3, Basic type 3,
SIMOCODE DP SIMOCODE SIMOCODE DP SIMOCODE pro SIMOCODE DP SIMOCODE
pro V V pro V
0 Send data Cyclic receive 0 Send data Cyclic receive 0 Send data Cyclic receive
1 bit 0 to 1.7 1 bit 0 to 1.7 1 bit 0 to 1.7
2 Motor current Specified: max. 2 Motor current Specified: max. 2 Acycl. Send
3 current Imax 3 current Imax 3 Bit 0 to 1.7
4 Number of Number of
5 starts starts
6 (Byte 0 to 3)
7 Counter 1 value Counter 1 -

8 Actual value
9 Counter 2 value Counter 2 -

10 Actual value
11 Sensor value TM - Max.
temperature

10.4 Diagram of diagnostics data

The following table shows the diagnostics data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode:
Table 10- 3 Diagram of the diagnostics data in the 3UF50 compatibility mode
Byte.Bit Setup 3UF50 - Byte.Bit Setup 3UF50 - Equivalent in SIMOCODE pro V

Device-specific diagnostics Device-specific diagnostics
according to DP standard according to DPV1
SIMOCODE DP SIMOCODE DP
6 0x0B Same as 3UF-50 diagnostics
7 0x81
8 0x04
6 0x0E 9 0x00
7.0 Free 10.0 Free
7.1 Event: DP block 10.1 Event: DP block Event - Startup parameter block
active
7.2 Event: Emergency start 10.2 Event: Emergency start Status - Emergency start
executed
7.3 Event: HW test OK 10.3 Event: HW test OK • No fault - HW fault basic unit
• No fault - Module fault
• No fault - temporary
components
7.4 Free 10.4 Free —
7.5 Event: Ext. event 1 10.5 Event: Ext. event 1 Event - Ext. fault 5
7.6 Event: Ext. event 2 10.6 Event: Ext. event 2 Event - Ext. fault 6
7.7 Event: Ext. event 3 10.7 Event: Ext. event 3 —
8.0 Warning: Ext. warning 11.0 Warning: Ext. warning Warning: Ext. fault 3
8.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40 % 11.1 Warning: Unbalance > 40 % Warning - Unbalance
8.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU 11.2 Event: Failure PLC-CPU Status - PLC / PCS (intervened)
8.3 Warning: Sensor short circuit 11.3 Warning: Sensor short circuit Warning - Thermistor short
circuit
8.4 Event: Cooling down period 11.4 Event: Cooling down period Status - Cooling down period
active active active
8.5 Status: TPF 11.5 Status: TPF Status - Test position (TPF)
9.0 Warning: Ground fault 12.0 Warning: Ground fault • Warning internal ground fault
or
• Warning external ground
fault
9.1 Warning: Overload 12.1 Warning: Overload Warning - Overload
9.2 Warning: Overload + unbalance 12.2 Warning: Overload + unbalance Warning - Overload + unbalance
9.3 Warning: I1 response level 12.3 Warning: I1 response level Warning - Warning level I >
overshot overshot


9.4 Warning: I1 response level 12.4 Warning: I1 response level Warning - Warning level I <
undershot undershot
9.5 Warning: I2 response level 12.5 Warning: I2 response level —
overshot overshot
9.6 Warning: I2 response level 12.6 Warning: I2 response level —
undershot undershot
9.7 Warning: Thermistor 12.7 Warning: Thermistor • Warning - Thermistor
overload
• Warning - Thermistor open
circuit
• Warning - TM warning T >
• Warning - TM sensor fault
• Warning - TM out of range
10.0 Trip: Ground fault 13.0 Trip: Ground fault • Fault - internal ground fault
or
• Fault - ext. ground fault
10.1 Trip: Overload 13.1 Trip: Overload Fault - overload
10.2 Trip: Overload + unbalance 13.2 Trip: Overload + unbalance Fault - overload + phase failure
10.3 Trip: I1 response level overshot 13.3 Trip: I1 response level overshot Fault - trip level I >
10.4 Trip: I1 response level 13.4 Trip: I1 response level Fault - trip level I <
undershot undershot
10.5 Trip: I2 response level overshot 13.5 Trip: I2 response level overshot —
10.6 Trip: I2 response level 13.6 Trip: I2 response level —
undershot undershot
10.7 Trip: Thermistor 13.7 Trip: Thermistor • Fault - thermistor overload
• Fault - thermistor short
circuit
• Fault - thermistor open
circuit
• Fault - TM trip T >
• Fault - TM sensor fault
• Fault - TM out of range
11.0 Trip: FB ON 14.0 Trip: FB ON Fault - feedback (FB) ON
11.1 Trip: FB OFF 14.1 Trip: FB OFF Fault - feedback (FB) OFF
11.2 Trip: Stalled rotor 14.2 Trip: Stalled rotor Fault - stalled rotor
11.3 Trip: Stalled positioner 14.3 Trip: Stalled positioner Fault - stalled positioner
11.4 Trip: Double 0 14.4 Trip: Double 0 Fault - double 0
11.5 Trip: Double 1 14.5 Trip: Double 1 Fault - double 1
11.6 Trip: End position 14.6 Trip: End position Fault - end position
11.7 Trip: Antivalence 14.7 Trip: Antivalence Fault - antivalence


12.0 Trip: ESB 15.0 Trip: ESB Fault - ext. fault 4
12.1 Trip: OPO 15.1 Trip: OPO Fault - Operational Protection
Off (OPO)
12.2 Trip: UVO 15.2 Trip: UVO Fault - power failure (UVO)
12.3 Trip: Ext. fault 1 15.3 Trip: Ext. fault 1 Fault - ext. fault 1
12.4 Trip: Ext. fault 2 15.4 Trip: Ext. fault 2 Fault - ext. fault 2
12.5 Trip: TPF fault 15.5 Trip: TPF fault Fault - Test Position Feedback
(TPF)
12.6 Trip: Runtime ON 15.6 Trip: Runtime ON Fault - execution ON command
12.7 Trip: Runtime OFF 15.7 Trip: Runtime OFF Fault - execution STOP
command
13.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 16.0 Trip: Parameter fault 0 Fault - parameterization
13.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 16.1 Trip: Parameter fault 1 —
13.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 16.4 Trip: Parameter fault 4 Fault - configuration error
13.5 Trip: Parameter fault 5 16.5 Trip: Parameter fault 5
13.6 Trip: Parameter fault 6 16.6 Trip: Parameter fault 6
13.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 16.7 Trip: Parameter fault 7 Fault - hardware fault basic unit
14 - 15 Number of overload trips Number of overload trips
16 - 17 I of the overload trip [% / IE)] Last trip current
18 - 19 Operating hours [10 h] Motor operating hours

Standard functions 11
11.1 Standard functions - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find information about the standard functions stored as function
blocks in SIMOCODE pro. Standard functions are typical motor functions that can be
activated according to need and, as applicable, individually set for each motor feeder.
Target groups
● Programmers of application programs for reference purposes.
Required knowledge
● Motor protection
● Control functions, control stations.
Further Function Blocks > Standard Functions.

Standard functions
11.2 Introduction
11.2 Introduction
Description
So-called "Standard functions" in the form of function blocks are also stored in
SIMOCODE pro, and can be used as required.
These function blocks may contain:
● Plugs ( )
● Sockets ( ) in the form of status information
● Setting values, e.g. the response when an external fault occurs ("signal," "warn," or
"tripping").
Schematic
The following schematic shows the general representation of the function block of a standard
function:
Figure 11-1 General representation of the function block of a standard function

These function blocks work independently of the selected control function and can be used
as optional supplements. They are ready to use and only require activating by connecting
the plug(s) of the respective function block. Depending on the device series, the system
offers several different function blocks for such standard functions.
Table 11- 1 Function blocks
Standard function block SIMOCODE

pro C pro S pro V
Test 2 2 2
Reset 3 3 3
Test Position Feedback (TPF) 1 1 1
External fault 4 4 6
Operational Protection Off (OPO) — — 1
Power failure monitoring (UVO) — — 1
Emergency start 1 1 1
Watchdog (PLC / PCS monitoring) 1 1 1
Time stamping — — 1
Safety-related tripping — — 1

Standard functions
11.3 Test / Reset
11.3 Test / Reset
Test / Reset description

The function of the "TEST / RESET" button on the basic unit or operator panel is generally
dependent upon the operating state of the device:
● Reset function: If a fault occurs
● Test function: In other operating states.
In addition to the TEST / RESET buttons, SIMOCODE pro allows internal Test / Reset
tripping via the "Test" function blocks. The "Test" function block consists of one plug.
A total of two function blocks, "Test 1" and "Test 2," are provided, each function block having
a slightly different function:
● Test 1: Tests / trips the output relays
● Test 2: Does not trip the output relays (normally for testing via the bus).
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of the "Test / Reset" function
blocks:
Figure 11-2 "Test / Reset" function blocks
1) The operator panel with display does not have a "SET / RESET" button. The respective
functions can be carried out via the operator panel menu or via softkeys.

Standard functions
11.3 Test / Reset
Testing
Testing can be carried out as follows:
● Via the "TEST / RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can be
deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.
● Via the plugs of the internal "Test 1" or "Test 2" function blocks
● Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu item).
Testing can be terminated at any time - it does not influence the thermal motor model of the
overload function, i.e. after switching off via test, the system can be reset immediately.
Tripping only occurs for Test 1 when the operating mode is set to "Remote."
Reset function
Resetting can be carried out as follows:
● Via the "TEST / RESET" button on the basic unit and on the operator panel (can be
deactivated), as well as via PC with SIMOCODE ES software.
● Using the "Reset input" plug of the internal function blocks via the plugs of the internal
function blocks "Reset 1," "Reset 2," and "Reset 3."
● Via the menu of the operator panel with display (e.g. the "Commands" menu item).
The "Reset" function block consists of one plug.
There are three function blocks "Reset 1" to "Reset 3."
All reset inputs (sockets) have equal priority (or function).
Test function
A SIMOCODE pro function test can also be initialized via the test function. The test function
comprises the following steps:
● Lamp / LED test (test function activated for < 2 s)
● Test of the device functionality (test function activated for 2 to 5s)
● For the "Test 1" function block only: Switching off the QE (test function activated for >
5 s).

Standard functions
11.3 Test / Reset
Test phases
The following table shows the test phases performed when the "TEST / RESET" button is
pressed for the required length of time:
Table 11- 2 States of the status LEDs / contactor controls during testing
Test State Without main current With main current

phase OK Fault1) OK Fault
Hardware test / lamp test
< 2s "DEVICE" LED orange green orange green
"GEN. FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged
Show QL
Results of the hardware test / lamp test
2 to 5s "DEVICE" LED green red green red
"GEN. FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated
Relay test
> 5s "DEVICE" LED green red green red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
LED lighted/switched on LED flashing LED flickering LED off
1) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s
Test settings
Table 11- 3 Test settings
Test 1 to 2 Description
Input Activation of the "Test" function block by any signal (any sockets
, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).
Test / Reset buttons blocked The blue Test / Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator
panel are usually intended for acknowledging faults and for
performing a device test.
The buttons can be disabled with "Test / Reset keys disabled."
These can then be used for other purposes. On the operator panel
with display, blocking is carried out via the corresponding menu
function. (Default: not disabled)

Standard functions
11.3 Test / Reset
Acknowledgment of faults
Generally, the following applies to the acknowledgement of faults:
● Faults can only be acknowledged
– if the cause of the fault has been eliminated
– if there is no "ON" control command pending.
● A reset will not be possible if the cause of the fault has not been eliminated and / or if an
"ON" control command is pending. The reset will be saved depending on the type of fault.
Saving a reset is indicated by the "GEN. FAULT" LED on the basic unit and on the control
panel. The LED changes from flashing to continuous signal.
Automatic acknowledgement of faults

Faults are automatically acknowledged in the following cases:
● A reset has been saved and the cause of the fault is no longer present (user has
previously acknowledged the fault)
● Auto-reset of overload tripping or thermistor tripping if motor protection reset = Auto
(acknowledgment is automatic after the cooling down period elapses).
The motor cannot start immediately since resetting is not possible if an ON command is
pending.
● If a configured module fails, all related faults will be acknowledged automatically.
However, a configuration fault will be generated (exception: operator panel, if
parameterized accordingly). This ensures that a module fault does not cause the general
fault to be acknowledged automatically.
● If a function or module is deactivated in the device configuration (via parameterization), all
related faults are acknowledged automatically. The motor cannot start immediately since
parameters cannot be entered if an ON command is pending.
● If a parameter of a function is changed from "Tripping" to "Warning", or to "Signaling" or
"Deactivated", all related faults will be acknowledged automatically.
● For an external fault: With its own parameter: "Auto-Reset."
Reset settings
Table 11- 4 Reset settings
Reset 1 to 3 Description
Input Activation of the "Reset" function block by any signal (any sockets
, e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).
Test / Reset buttons blocked The blue Test / Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator
panel are usually intended for acknowledging faults and for
performing a device test.
The buttons can be disabled with "Test / Reset keys disabled."
These can then be used for other purposes. On the operator panel
with display, the buttons are disabled via a menu function (default:
not disabled).

Standard functions
11.4 Test position feedback (TPF)
Description
You can carry out the "Cold run" function test using the "Test Position Feedback (TPF)"
function block. For this purpose, the function block input (plug) must be connected to the
respective socket. The activated test position will be indicated by the flashing QL of the
control function.
The "Test Position Feedback (TPF)" function block consists of
● one plug
● a "Status - test position" socket. It is set if a signal is pending at the input.
● a "Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF)" socket.
This is set if
– "TPF" is activated although current is flowing in the main circuit
– "TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the main circuit.
In total, 1 "Feedback test position" function block is available.
Note
When the test position is enabled, the QLE / QLA sockets of the control function are
activated, to indicate test operation of the motor feeder via a flashing button LED, for
example.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Test Position Feedback" function block:
Figure 11-3 "Test Position Feedback" function block

Standard functions
Cold run
If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the network.
However, the control voltage is connected.
The "cold run" function test is performed with the feeder in this state. This means the motor
feeder is tested without a current in the main circuit.
To differentiate this function from normal operation, it must be enabled via the socket on the
function block.
Feedback stating that the motor feeder is isolated from the line voltage on the primary
current side can be implemented, for example, via an auxiliary contact of the main switch in
the motor feeder that is connected to any device input (terminal). This is then internally
connected to the "Test position feedback (TPF) - Input" plug of the function block. When
using current / voltage measuring modules, this type of auxiliary contact is entirely
unnecessary. The "TPF" function block can be activated by monitoring for undervoltage
("Voltage Monitoring" function block).
Thereafter, the contactor outputs can be set via the control stations (see Chapter Control
stations (Page 172)), enabling the current-free status to be tested.
If current flows erroneously during test operation, the contactor outputs are switched off by
"Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF)."
Fault message "Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF)" and acknowledgment
Note
"Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF)" will be generated if:
• "TPF" is activated, although current is flowing in the motor feeder
• "TPF" is activated and current is flowing in the motor feeder.
Acknowledge with "Reset."

Standard functions
11.5 External fault
11.5 External fault
Description
The "External Fault 1 to 6" function blocks can be used to monitor any statuses and/or
external devices, to generate fault messages and, if necessary, to switch off the motor. To
do this, the inputs (plugs) of the "External Fault" function blocks must be connected to any
sockets (e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.). External faults can also be
"marked" in SIMOCODE pro. This facilitates their allocation to the actual malfunction.
Example: Monitoring the speed of the motor using an external speed monitor.
The "External Fault" function block consists of:
● two plugs (1 plug for setting, 1 plug for resetting)
● one "Event - External fault" socket.
This is set when a signal is applied to the input.
● four function blocks "External faults 1 to 4" on the SIMOCODE pro C and
SIMOCODE pro S basic units
● six function blocks "External faults 1 to 6" on the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "External Fault" function blocks:
Figure 11-4 "External Fault" function blocks

Standard functions
11.5 External fault
Special reset options:

A specific reset input is also available in addition to the other reset options (remote reset,
Test / Reset buttons, OFF command reset). Furthermore, Auto-Reset can also be activated.
See table below.
Settings
Table 11- 5 "External Fault" settings
External fault 1 to 6 Description

Input Activation of the "External fault" function block by the monitored signal (any
sockets , e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)
Type Specification of the input logic:
• NO contact (1-active) (default)
• NC contact (0-active)
Active status Specify in which motor operating state the external fault is to be evaluated:
• Always (default):
Evaluate regardless of whether the motor is running or at a standstill.
• Only when motor is ON:
Evaluate only when the motor is switched ON.
Response Specification of the response to an external fault when activated via the input
(see the following table and Chapter Important information (Page 19)).
Reset Acknowledge the "external fault" fault via any signal (any sockets , e.g.
device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)
Reset also by Specification of further (common) acknowledgement options using additional
reset types:
• Test/Reset buttons on the basic unit and the operator panel or, in the case
of the operator panel with display, via the menu (panel reset) (default)
• Remote reset: Acknowledgment via reset 1 to 3, DPV1, "Reset" command
(default)
• Auto reset: The fault resets itself after the cause has been eliminated
(after removal of the activation signal)
• OFF command reset: "OFF" control command, resets the fault
Marking No parameters. Optional marking for designating the event, e.g. "Speed >,"
e.g. with SIMOCODE ES. Range: maximum 10 characters.
"External fault" response
Table 11- 6 "External fault" response
Response External fault

tripping X
warn X
signal X (d)
disabled —

Standard functions
11.6 Operational protection off (OPO)
11.6.1 Response to positioner control function
Description
The "Operational Protection Off (OPO)" function block returns the positioner to a safe
position. To do this, the input (plug) must be connected to the respective socket (e.g. device
inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).
The "Operational Protection OFF" function block consists of:
● one plug
● one "Status - OPO" socket
This is set when a signal is applied to the input.
● one "Fault - OPO fault" socket
This is set when the respective, safe end position has been reached.
There is 1 "Operational Protection Off (OPO)" function block for the SIMOCODE pro V basic
unit.
The following table shows the basic operating principle:
Table 11- 7 Basic operating principle of Operational Protection Off (OPO) for the "Positioner" control
function
OPO Initial position when OPO is pending

Positioner Positioner Positioner stop / Positioner Positioner
is open opens OFF closes is closed
Reaction to OPO
Parameterized Fault reset: Fault reset: Fault reset: — —
response With close With close With close
"Positioner command command command
closes"
Positioner Positioner Positioner Positioner
closes closes closes closes
Parameterized — — Fault reset: Fault reset: Fault reset:
"Positioner With open With open With open
opens" response command command command
Positioner Positioner Positioner Positioner

opens opens opens opens

Standard functions
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Operational Protection Off (OPO)" function block:
Figure 11-5 "Operational Protection Off (OPO)" function block
Settings
Table 11- 8 Operational protection OFF settings
Operational Protection Off Description

(OPO)
Input Activation of the "Operational Protection OFF" function block by the
monitored signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, etc.)
Positioner response Specification of the response for the "Positioner" control function when
activated via the input:
• CLOSE: Positioner runs to the end position in the "CLOSED"
direction (default).
• OPEN: Positioner moves to the "Open" end position
Type Specification of the input logic
• NO contact (1-active) (default)
• NC contact (0-active)
Safety guidelines
Note
A "Fault - Operational Protection Off (OPO)" fault message is not generated if the "OPO"
command attempts to run the positioner to the end position if it is approaching or has already
reached this end position.
Note
No other control command (counter command or stop command) is performed while
"Operational protection Off (OPO)" is active.
Note
The "Fault - Operational protection Off (OPO)" fault message must be acknowledged by the
open or closed control command, depending on the present "OPO" end position.

Standard functions
Note
Acknowledgment is performed even if the desired end position has not yet been reached
Note
The fault message is available as diagnosis via PROFIBUS DP.
11.6.2 Response to other control functions
Description
For other control functions, the following scenarios can be differentiated between for OPO:
● Motor in operation: The motor is switched Off with a "Fault - Operational Protection Off
(OPO)" fault.
● The motor is off. Initially no fault. The "Fault - Operational Protection Off (OPO)" fault only
occurs when an "ON command" is issued.

Standard functions
11.7 Power failure monitoring (UVO)
Description
The "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block is activated via the plug. This is
performed via an external voltage relay that is connected to the function block via the binary
inputs of SIMOCODE pro.
Sequence (see timing charts below):
1. All contactors (QE) are disconnected immediately after the monitoring relay has been
operated/the input has been activated (UVO).
2. If the voltage is restored within the "power failure time", the motor will be reset to its
previous state. This can either take place immediately or with a time delay (restart time
delay).
3. If the "power failure time" elapses before the voltage returns, the device signals a fault
(UVO fault).
Prerequisite: The SIMOCODE pro control voltage is buffered and not interrupted.
There is 1 "Power Failure Monitoring" function block for the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block:
Figure 11-6 "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block

Standard functions
Figure 11-7 Power failure monitoring (UVO) sequence charts
Settings
Table 11- 9 Power failure monitoring settings
Power failure monitoring (UVO) Description

Input (activation) Activation of the "Power Failure Monitoring (UVO)" function block
by the monitored signal (any socket, e.g. device inputs,
PROFIBUS DP or PROFINET control bits, etc.)
Type Specification of the type of power failure monitoring:
• Deactivated (default setting)
• No interruption of device power supply. The SIMOCODE pro
control supply voltage is maintained. The failure of the line
voltage must be detected, for example, by a separate voltage
relay.
Power failure time Time that starts when the power fails. If the line voltage is restored
within the power failure time, all drives which were running prior to
the power failure are reconnected automatically. If the line voltage
is not restored within the power failure time, the drives remain
disconnected and the "Fault - Power failure (UVO)" message is
generated. Once the line voltage has been restored, this fault
message can be acknowledged with "Reset".
Range:
• 0 to 25.5 seconds in steps of 0.1 seconds
• 26 to 255 seconds in steps of 1 seconds
• 256 to 2550 seconds in steps of 10 seconds
Restart time delay The restart time delay can be set so that not all motors restart
simultaneously. (Line voltage would otherwise dip again.)
Range: 0 to 255 seconds (default: 0 seconds)

Standard functions
11.8 Emergency start
Description
Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated.
This allows the motor to be immediately restarted after an overload trip. This function can be
used to:
● enable an immediate reset and restart after an overload trip
● delete the thermal memory (motor model) during operation, if required.
NOTICE
Do not perform an emergency start more often than absolutely necessary!
If emergency starts are performed too frequently this may result in thermal overloading
of the motor!
Since the emergency start is "edge-triggered", this function cannot permanently affect the
thermal motor model. An emergency start is carried out as follows:
● By means of the function block plug.
To do this, the input (plug) of the function block must be connected to any socket (e.g.
device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).
The "Emergency Start" function block consists of:
● one plug
● one "Status - Emergency start executed" socket.
This is set if an emergency start has been executed.
There is 1 "Emergency Start" function block.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Emergency Start" function block:
Figure 11-8 Emergency Start function block

Standard functions
Settings
Table 11- 10 Emergency start settings
Emergency start Description

Input Activation of the "Emergency Start" function block by any signal (any sockets ,
e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

Standard functions
11.9 Safety-oriented tripping
Description
Note
Please note that the information made available for further processing is in the form of non-
safety-related signals.
Note
Please note that the safety-related tripping function block does not itself represent a safety-
related function.
The safety function of the DM-F Local is determined exclusively by the setting of the DIP
switch on the module.
The safety function of the DM-F PROFIsafe is determined by the fail-safe program in the F-
CPU.
Further information: See Manual SIMOCODE pro Safety fail-safe digital modules
The DM-F Local Safety-related tripping function block consists of 3 sockets:
● Event - DM-F LOCAL ok: The DM-F LOCAL is ON.
● Event - safety-related tripping: A safety-related tripping has been performed.
● Status - enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.
The DM-F PROFIsafe Safety-related tripping function block consists of 3 sockets:
● Event - PROFIsafe active: Fail-safe communication between the F-CPU and the DM-
F PROFIsafe is active.
● Event - safety-related tripping: A safety-related tripping has been performed.
● Status - enabling circuit closed: The enabling circuit is closed.
There is 1 "Safety-related tripping" function block each for SAFETY (Local) and PROFIsafe
on the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.

Standard functions
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Safety-related tripping" function block:
Figure 11-9 "Safe Tripping" function block
SET / RESET button on DM-F Local
Figure 11-10 SET / RESET button
See System Manual "Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety".
DANGER
Automatic starting after power failure. Risk of death or serious injury.
In the case of automatic starting after a power failure, the enabling circuits are connected
without pressing the Start button.

Standard functions
Settings of the DIP switches on the DM-F Local
Table 11- 11 Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F Local)
Switch setting OFF / ON

1 With /without cross-circuit
detection
2 1 NC + 1 NO evaluation / 2 NC
evaluation
3 2x 1-channel / 1x 2-channel
4 Debounce time for sensor inputs
50 ms / 10 ms
5 Sensor input automatic start /
monitored start
6 Cascading input automatic
start / monitored start
7 With / without startup testing
8 With automatic starting / without
automatic starting after power
failure
Note
The target setting of the DIP switches in the SIMOCODE ES user interface (can be made
using the mouse pointer) is transferred to the basic unit on download but does not affect the
function of the DM-F Local digital module. The desired function is thus saved as soon as the
parameterization has been created.
You must set the effective parameterization via the DIP switches on the front of the
DM-F Local (see tables below and / or the manual "Fail-safe digital modules
SIMOCODE pro Safety"). The basic unit compares the target setting (from the download)
with the actual setting on the DM-F Local. If these differ, "Configuration deviation" is output!

Standard functions
Description of the settings of the DIP switches on the DM-F Local
Table 11- 12 Description of the settings of the DIP switches, DM-F Local
DIP switches (DM-F Local) Description

With/without cross-circuit detection Cross-circuit detection is only possible with floating sensors. The sensors must be
connected between T1 - Y12, Y33 and T2 - Y22, Y34. The device anticipates the
T1 terminal test signal at the terminals Y12 and Y33, and the T2 terminal test signal
at the terminals Y22 and Y34. The device detects a sensor fault if the signal at the
Y12, Y33 or the Y22, Y34 terminals is not identical to the test signals T1, T2. Cross-
circuit detection must be deactivated if electronic sensors such as light arrays or
laser scanners are connected. The DM-F Local now no longer monitors the sensor
inputs for cross-circuit detection. Usually, the outputs of safety sensors (OSSD) are
monitored for cross circuits in the sensor itself.
When the device has been parameterized as "without cross-circuit detection", the
T1 and T2 test outputs are switched off and must not be reconnected. At the Y12,
Y22, Y33, and Y34 inputs, the DM-F LOCAL expects a +24 V DC signal from the
same current source as the one from which the device receives its power supply
(possible only in the case of DM-F LOCAL-1AB00) or from T3 (static +24 V DC). In
the case of the DM-F LOCAL-1AU00 device version, it is imperative to connect the
T3 terminal to the floating sensor contacts due to the electrical isolation between
the input circuit and the sensor power supply.
1 NC + 1 NO evaluation / 2 NC In addition to 2-channel connection of the same types of sensor contacts (NC / NC),
evaluation sensors with opposite types of contacts (NC / NO), as are frequently used for
magnetically-operated switches, can also be evaluated. In this case, ensure that the
NC contact is connected to Y12 and the NO contact to Y22.
2x 1-channel / 1x 2-channel • 2 sensors with one contact each (2x 1-channel) (NC / NC). It is expected that
both sensors are AND-connected. Simultaneity is not monitored.
• 1 sensor with two contacts each (1x 2-channel) (NC / NC). The system expects
both contacts to be simultaneously open.
Debounce time for sensor inputs Any change in the sensor signal during the debounce time is not evaluated.
50 ms / 10 ms
• Debounce time 50 ms: Changes in the switch position of strongly bouncing
contacts are suppressed (e.g. position switches on heavy protective doors).
• Debounce time 10 ms: The shorter debounce time permits faster tripping in the
case of bounce-free sensors (e.g. light arrays).
Sensor input automatic start / • Automatic start: The enabling circuits are switched to the operative position as
monitored start soon as the starting condition at sensor inputs Y12, Y22, Y34 and terminal 1
have been fulfilled. The start button connection terminal Y33 is not queried.
• Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the operative position, as
soon as the starting condition at sensor inputs Y12, Y22, Y34 and terminal 1
have been fulfilled and the start button at terminal Y33 has subsequently been
actuated (start with the falling edge).
Cascading input automatic start / • Automatic start: The enabling circuits are switched to the active position as soon
monitored start as the switch-on condition at cascading input 1 is satisfied, i.e. as soon as a
static +24 V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3).
• Monitored start: The enabling circuits are switched to the operative position as
soon as the starting condition at cascading input 1 has been fulfilled, i.e. as
soon as a static +24 V DC signal is present (e.g. from T3), and the start button
at terminal Y33 has subsequently been actuated (start with the falling edge).

Standard functions
DIP switches (DM-F Local) Description

With / without startup testing After a power failure, startup testing requires that the sensors at Y12 and Y22 are
actuated once by the system operator.
With automatic starting / without The DM-F Local can be parameterized in such a way that the enabling circuits
automatic starting after power failure automatically switch to the operative position after a power failure, i.e. without
actuation of the start button Y33.
Prerequisites:
• Y12, Y22 or the cascading input 1 are set to "monitored start."
• The starting condition at the sensor inputs and at the cascading input has been
fulfilled.
• Valid actuation of the start button prior to the power failure, i.e. the enabling
circuits were in the operative position.
Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F PROFIsafe)

Before commissioning the DM-F PROFIsafe, set the PROFIsafe address as follows:
Table 11- 13 Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F PROFIsafe)
Switch setting Value

1= 20 1
2= 21 2
3 = 22 4
4= 23 8
5 = 24 16
6 = 25 32
7= 26 64
8 = 27 128
9 = 28 256
10 = 29 512
When 1 DIP switch is set to ON, the respective value is active.

When more than 1 DIP switch is set to ON, the respective values must be added.
● Briefly press the SET / RESET button. LEDs 1 to 10 indicate the current PROFIsafe
address.
● Setting the PROFIsafe address:
– Switch off the supply voltage
– Set the DIP switch configuration
– Switch on the supply voltage again.

Standard functions
Figure 11-11 SET / RESET button
"Safety-related tripping" response

Here, you set the SIMOCODE pro response to safety-related tripping via DM-F Local or DM-
F PROFIsafe.
Note
The response of the modules is not influenced by this setting. If the conditions for safety-
related disconnection are met, the enable circuits are always disabled!
Table 11- 14 "Safety-related tripping" response
Response Safety-related tripping

tripping X
Deactivated X (d)
signal X
warn X
Note
In the event that the option "DM-F LOCAL / Separate PROFIsafe function from control
function" has been activated under "Motor control > Control function > Operating mode," only
"disabled," "signal," or "warn" can be set as the response, not "tripping."
"Safety-related tripping" reset

Here, you can select manual or automatic acknowledgment of SIMOCODE pro faults caused
by safety-related tripping.
Reset: Manual (default), Auto

Standard functions
11.10 Watchdog (Bus monitoring, PLC/PCS monitoring)
Description
The "Watchdog" function block monitors communication with the PLC via PROFIBUS DP, as
well as the operating state of the PLC in the "Remote" operating mode.
Schematic
● Bus monitoring:
With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - bus" fault is generated if:
– "Bus monitoring" is active.
– In the "Remote" operating mode (mode selector S1 = 1 and S2 = 1), cyclic data
transfer between the PLC and SIMOCODE pro is interrupted , e.g. by interruption of
the PROFIBUS DP connection.
– "Status - Bus o.k." can always be evaluated. If SIMOCODE pro is cyclically
exchanging data with the PLC, "Status - Bus o.k." is set to "1".
● PLC / PCS monitoring:
With this type of monitoring, the "Fault - PLC / PCS" fault is generated if:
– "PLC / PCS monitoring" is active.
– In the "Remote" operating mode (mode selector S1=1 and S2=1), the PROFIBUS DP
switches to the "CLEAR" status.
– The "Status - PLC / PCS in Run" can always be evaluated. If the PROFIBUS DP is in
the "CLEAR" state, the "Status - PLC / PCS in Run" is set to"0".
If the "PLC / PCS monitoring - Input" is connected primarily to the "Cyclic Receive - Bit 0.7"
bit, the status of the PLC is deduced from this bit only.
Figure 11-12 "Watchdog (PLC / PCS Monitoring)" function block
Note
"Bus monitoring" and "PLC / PCS monitoring" can only be effective if the DP slave watchdog
function is activated in the DP master system.

Standard functions
Settings
Table 11- 15 Watchdog settings
Watchdog - Description
PLC / PCS monitoring - Input Activates the "Watchdog" function block using the monitored signal
(any sockets , e.g. the PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.)
Bus monitoring • Activated (default): If a bus fault occurs, the "Fault - Bus" fault
message is generated and must be acknowledged
• Deactivated: No fault message; however, the "Status - Bus o.k."
information can be evaluated at any time.
PLC / PCS monitoring • Activated (default): If a bus fault occurs, the "Fault - PLC / PCS"
fault message is generated and must be acknowledged.
• Deactivated: No fault message; however, the "Status -
SPS/PLS in Run" information can be evaluated at any time.
Bus/PLC fault - reset You can select whether faults are to be acknowledged
automatically or manually.
Range: Manual / Auto (default: manual).
"Bus fault" / "PLC / PCS fault" response
Table 11- 16 "Bus fault" / "PLC / PCS fault" response
Response Bus fault PLC/PCS fault

Fault X (d) X (d)
Warning - -
Signaling - -
disabled X X

Standard functions
11.11 Timestamping
11.11 Timestamping
Description
SIMOCODE pro V can timestamp up to eight digital signals with high temporal precision
(10 ms). In the process, every change in the state of the digital signals will be recorded.
Possible areas of application are:
● Precise chronological recording of faults in a procedural system
● Analysis of system-wide interrelationships
● Recording and signaling of time-critical signal changes
Requirements
To use SIMOCODE pro V time stamping, the DP master being used must support time
synchronization functions via PROFIBUS (e.g. DP master connections for SIMATIC S7-400),
or a master clock must be used (e.g. SICLOCK).
Process in STEP 7
Time-of-day synchronization for SIMOCODE pro V is activated in STEP 7 HW Config in the
slave properties under "Time Synchronization".
Note
The set synchronization interval must correspond to the configuration of the clock master.
For SIMOCODE pro, transmission of time stamped information is analogous to transmission

with SIMATIC S7 IM 153-2. Therefore, the "FB 62 TIMESTMP" function block can be used
for further processing of time stamped information in the CPU, to transmit time stamped
messages from the "Standard Library > Miscellaneous Blocks" library.
Note
The "LADDR" parameter contains the diagnostic address of the DP slave from
STEP 7 HW Config. In DP mode "DPV1" of the DP master – integrated via
OM SIMOCODE pro – LADDR2 contains the diagnostic address of slot 2 of SIMOCODE pro.
For all other configurations, LADDR2 will contain the same address as LADDR.
In contrast to the STEP7 online help for the FB62, when integrating via GSD, the slot
number of the module is transmitted with Slot 1 for signal messages, and with Slot 0 for
special messages.
You will find further information about the FB 62 in the STEP7 online help.

Logic modules 12
12.1 Logic blocks - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find information about SIMOCODE pro logic modules. Logic modules
are function blocks which are modeled not only on standard logic functions, e.g. truth tables
(AND, OR,...), but also on counters and timers. In addition to the predefined control
functions, you can use this, for example, to implement logical functions, time relay functions
and counter functions without depending on external components (relays).
Target groups
● Programmers.
Required knowledge
● The basics of digital signal processing, e.g. timers, counters, etc.
Further function blocks > logic blocks.

Logic modules
12.2 Introduction
12.2 Introduction
Description
Freely programmable logic modules are function blocks that process input signals and
supply binary or analog output signals according to their internal logic components. Logic
modules can contain:
● Plugs
● An internal logic component
● Sockets
● Settings, e.g. the time for a timer.
Schematic
The following schematic shows a general representation of a logic module:
Figure 12-1 General representation of a logic module

You can use the logic modules to carry out additional functions for your application. These
can be used, for example, to implement logical operations, time relay functions and counter
functions. Depending on the device series, the system provides several logic modules:
Table 12- 1 Freely-programmable logic modules
Logic module SIMOCODE

pro C pro S pro V
Truth tables 3 inputs / 1 output 3 4 6
Truth table 2 inputs / 1 output — 2 2
Truth tables 5 inputs / 2 outputs — — 1
Timer 2 2 4
Counter 2 2 4
Signal conditioning 2 4 4
Non-volatile elements 2 2 4
Flashing 3 3 3
Flicker 3 3 3
Limit monitor — — 4
Calculation modules (Calculators)1) — — 2

Logic modules
12.3 Truth table for 3I / 1O
Description
The truth table for 3I / 1O consists of
● three plugs
● one logic component
● one socket
You can choose for which of the eight possible input conditions an output signal should be
generated.
All of the following are available:
● three truth tables 1 to 3 on the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit
● four truth tables 1 to 4 on the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
● six truth tables 1 to 6 on the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Truth Table for 3I / 1O" logic modules:
Figure 12-2 "Truth Table for 3I / 1O" logic modules

Logic modules
Example
You want to implement the following circuit:
Figure 12-3 Example of a truth table

Logic modules
Circuit and parameterization
Figure 12-4 Example circuit and parameterization for truth table 3I / 1O

Logic modules
Description
The truth table for 2I / 1O consists of:
● two plugs
● one socket
You can choose for which of the four possible input conditions an output signal should be
generated.
There are a total of two truth tables (7 and 8) available for the SIMOCODE pro S and
SIMOCODE pro V basic units.
Schematic
Example
You want to implement the following circuit:
Figure 12-6 Example of truth table 2I / 1O

Logic modules
Description
The truth table for 5I / 2O consists of:
● five plugs
● two sockets
You can choose for which of the 32 possible input conditions a maximum of two output
signals should be generated.
There is one truth table (No. 9) available for SIMOCODE pro V.
Schematic
Settings
Table 12- 2 Settings for truth table for 5I / 2O
Truth table 9 (5I / 2O) Description

Input 1 to 5 Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs,
PROFIBUS DP control bits, etc.).

Logic modules
12.6 Counter
12.6 Counter
Description
Counters are integrated in the SIMOCODE pro system. These are activated via the plugs "+"
or "-".
The counter output switches to "1" when the preset limit is reached. The counter is reset with
"Reset."
The actual value is available as a socket for further internal processing and can also be
transmitted to the automation system.
● Plug +: Increases the actual value by 1 (maximum: limit).
● Plug –: Reduces the actual value by 1 (minimum: 0).
● Reset: Resets the actual value to 0.
The counter consists of
● three plugs (input +, input – and reset)
● one socket
● one "actual value" analog socket with the current value in the range between 0 and the
limit.
It is buffered through power failures.
● two counters 1 to 2 for the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro S basic units
● four counters 1 to 4 on the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Counters" logic modules:
Figure 12-8 "Counter" logic modules

Logic modules
12.6 Counter
Note
The time between the events to be counted depends on:
• The input delay
• The device cycle time.
Note
The actual value remains the same:
• During parameterization or failure of the supply voltage
• If there are simultaneous input signals at input + and input –.
Note
The output is always 0 if a reset is pending.
Settings
Table 12- 3 Counter settings
Counters 1 to 4 - Description
Input + Increments actual value by 1
Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP
control bits, etc.).
Input - Decrements the actual value by 1.
Reset Reset the actual value to 0 (count value and output).
Limit Value that can be reached when counting and at which the counter issues an
output signal.
Range: 0 to 65535 (default: 0)

Logic modules
12.7 Timer
12.7 Timer
Description
The timer consists of:
● two plugs (input and reset)
● one socket
● One "Actual value" analog socket with the actual value.
The actual value is available as a socket for further internal processing and can also be
transmitted to the automation system.
If an input signal is applied, the timer issues an output signal according to the chosen timer
type:
● With closing delay
● With closing delay with memory
● With OFF delay
● With fleeting closing
● two timers 1 to 2 for the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro S basic units
● four timers 1 to 4 on the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Timers" logic modules:
Figure 12-9 "Timer" logic modules
Note

Logic modules
12.7 Timer
Note
The response of the plugs of all timers (input, reset) has been completely changed to level-
active for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit from version *E05* and higher and the
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit from version *E03* and higher. Use of an unchanged
parameter file utilizing integrated timers may thus result in a different response if such basic
units are used. For example, if "Fixed level - '1'" is set at the timer input, the timer function is
automatically restarted after the timer reset occurs. However, in timers with the
parameterized type = "Fleeting closing" there is no change in the response.

Logic modules
12.7 Timer
Output response of the timer

(SIMOCODE pro C basic unit before version *E05* and SIMOCODE pro V basic unit before
version *E03*)
Figure 12-10 Output response of timers (SIMOCODE pro C basic unit before version *E05* and
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit before version *E03*)

Logic modules
12.7 Timer
Output response of the timer

(SIMOCODE pro C basic unit as from version *E05* and SIMOCODE pro V basic unit as
from version *E03*)
Figure 12-11 Output response of timers (SIMOCODE pro C basic unit as from version *E05* and
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit as from version *E03*)

Logic modules
12.7 Timer
Settings for output response of the timer (SIMOCODE pro C basic unit as from version *E05* and
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit as from version *E03*), example circuit and parameterization for truth
table 3I / 1O
Table 12- 4 Timer settings
Timers 1 to 4 - Description
Input Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, PROFIBUS DP
Reset Resets the actual value to 0.

Type Different output responses
Range: With closing delay (default), closing delay with memory, with OFF delay,
with fleeting closing
Value Time during which the timer provides an output signal when activated, depending
on the output response (type).
Range: 0 to 6553.5, unit 100 ms (default: 0)

Logic modules
12.8 Signal conditioner
Description
If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioning issues an output signal according to the
selected signal conditioning type:
● Non-inverting
● Inverting
● Edge rising with memory
● Edge falling with memory
You can set the output response.
The signal conditioning consists of:
● one socket
● two signal conditionings for the SIMOCODE pro C basic unit (signal conditioning 1 to 2)
● four signal conditionings for the SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V basic units
(signal conditionings 1 to 4).
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Signal conditioning" logic modules:
Figure 12-12 "Signal conditioning" logic modules
Note

Logic modules
Types of signals / output responses
Figure 12-13 Types of signals/output responses of the signal conditioning

Logic modules
NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "inverting" type of signal:
Table 12- 5 NOR function
Input Reset Output Schematic

0 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
1 1 0
NOR switch
Settings
Table 12- 6 Signal conditioning settings
Signal conditioning 1 to 4 - Description

Input Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs,
Reset Resetting the signal conditioning to 0.

Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs,
Type Different output responses.
Range: Non-inverting (default), inverting, edge rising with memory,
edge falling with memory

Logic modules
12.9 Non-volatile elements
Description
Non-volatile elements behave like signal conditioning. The output signals are buffered during
supply voltage failures.
If an input signal is pending, the signal conditioning issues an output signal according to the
selected signal conditioning type:
● Non-inverting
● Inverting
● Edge rising with memory
● Edge falling with memory
You can set the output response.
The non-volatile element consists of
● one socket
● two non-volatile elements 1 to 2 for the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro S basic
units
● four non-volatile elements 1 to 4 on the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Non-volatile Elements" logic modules:
Figure 12-14 "Non-volatile Element" logic modules
Note

Logic modules
Types of signals / output responses
Figure 12-15 Types of signals / output responses of non-volatile elements

Logic modules
NOR function
You can implement a NOR function with the "inverting" type of signal:
Table 12- 7 NOR function
Input Reset Output Schematic

0 0 1
1 0 0
0 1 0
1 1 0
Settings
Table 12- 8 Non-volatile element settings
Non-volatile elements 1 to 4 Description

-
Input Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs,
Reset Resetting the signal conditioning to 0.

Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs,
Type Different output responses
Range: Non-inverting (default), inverting, edge rising with memory,
edge falling with memory

Logic modules
12.10 Flashing
12.10 Flashing
Description
If an input signal is pending at its plug, the "Flashing" logic module issues a signal to its
socket, which alternates between binary 0 and 1 at a fixed frequency of 1 Hz. You can use
this to make the LEDs on the operator panel flash, for example. The logic module consists
of:
● one plug
● one socket
There are 3 logic modules "Flashing 1" through "Flashing 3."
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flashing" logic modules:
Figure 12-16 "Flashing" logic modules
Settings
Table 12- 9 Flashing settings
Flashing 1 to 3 Description
Input Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. device inputs, status
information, status, etc.)

Logic modules
12.11 Flickering
12.11 Flickering
Description
You can use the "Flicker" logic modules to assign the "Flicker" function to the operator-panel
LEDs, for example.
The "Flicker" function block provides an output signal with a frequency of 4 Hz when an input
signal is present.
The function block consists of:
● one plug
● one socket
There are 3 logic modules "Flicker 1" through "Flashing 3."
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Flicker" logic modules:
Figure 12-17 Flicker function blocks
Settings
Table 12- 10 Flicker settings
Flicker 1 to 3 Description
Input Activation by any signal (any sockets , e.g. status information,
etc.)

Logic modules
12.12 Limit monitor
12.12 Limit monitor
Description
With the limit monitor, any analog values (2 bytes / 1 word) can be monitored for limit
overshooting or limit undershooting The limit monitor issues the "Limit" signal at its socket. In
addition, limit monitors can be "marked" according to their function. Example: Monitoring the
individual sensor measuring circuits of the temperature module (Temperature 1 to 3) for
overtemperature.
The limit monitor consists of:
● one analog plug
● one socket
There are 4 limit monitors 1 through 4 on the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit.
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Limit monitor" logic modules:
Figure 12-18 "Limit Monitor" logic modules

Logic modules
12.12 Limit monitor
Response
Table 12- 11 Limit monitor response
Response Limit 1 to 4
tripping —
warn —
signal X (d)
disabled —

(Page 19).
Functional principle
The limit signal issued depends on:
● the operating state of the motor
● the TPF function
● the parameterized "active status":
– ON
– ON+
– RUN
– RUN+
The following display shows a flow chart with the different "active status" parameters.
Figure 12-19 Active status of limit monitor

Logic modules
12.12 Limit monitor
Settings
Table 12- 12 Limit monitor settings
Limit monitor Description

Input Analog plug of the limit monitor for linking to the analog value to be
monitored (2 bytes), e.g. maximum current I_max, remaining cooling down
period, actual value of timers, etc.)
Type Specifies if the limit has to be monitored for overshooting (default) or
undershooting.
Active status Determines in which motor operating state the limit monitor is to be
evaluated:
• ON, i.e. always (default) evaluate, regardless of whether or not the
motor is running
• ON+, i.e. always evaluate, regardless of whether or not the motor is
running
Exception: "TPF," i.e. motor feeder is in test position.
• RUN, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is in the ON state and not in the test
position (TPF).
• RUN+, i.e. evaluate only if the motor is running and the startup
procedure is finished (i.e. the "Start active" message is no longer active)
and there is no test position feedback (TPF); example: Cos phi
monitoring
Limit Monitor response value. The return value is always determined by the "Limit
monitor - Delay" parameter.
Range: 0 to 65535 (default: 0)
Delay Specifies the time period for which the limit must be constantly overshot
before the "Event - Limit" output is set.
Range: 0 to 25.5 s (default: 0.5 s)
Marking No parameters. Optional marking for identifying the message, e.g. "Limit>";
range: max. 10 characters.
Note
When using limit monitors, always ensure that the correct range and unit are used for the
analog values connected to the limit input. These always have a direct influence on the unit
of the limit value to be set. You will find the units and ranges of all relevant values in Chapter
Data record 94 - measured values (Page 532) and in Chapter Data record 95 - Service
data/statistical data (Page 533).

Logic modules
12.12 Limit monitor
Table 12- 13 Examples of typical units and ranges in SIMOCODE pro
Unit Range
Temperatures (e.g. max. 1K 0 - 65535
temperature)
Operating hours 1s 0 - 1193046
Motor stop time 1h 0 - 65535
Active power 1W 0 - 4294967295
Apparent power 1 VA 0 - 4294967295
Timer actual value 100 ms 0 - 65535
Currents (e.g. max. current 1 % of Is 0 - 65535
I_max)
Analog module inputs — 0 to 27648 (S7 format)
Thus, for example, a limit of 473 (K) must be parameterized for a limit monitor to monitor a
maximum temperature of 200°C.

Logic modules
12.13 Calculators (calculation modules)
Description
The two logic modules "Calculator 1" and "Calculator 2" integrated in SIMOCODE pro V
basic unit are capable of the standard calculation modes and enable all analog values
featured in SIMOCODE pro to be adapted, calculated, and converted, for example:
● Conversion of the measured temperatures from K (Kelvin) to °F or °C
● Conversion of the motor current from [%] to [A]
● Conversion of the 0/4 to 20mA signals of the analog module directly into fill levels,
pressures, and flow rates.
The analog value (2 bytes / 1 word) present at the analog sockets is calculated using a
defined formula and using freely-selectable parameters (numerators, denominators,
operators, offsets). The result of the calculation is output as an analog value at the analog
socket of the logic module (2 bytes/1 word) for further processing.
Each calculator consists of:
● one analog plug (Calculator 1) or two analog plugs (Calculator 2)
● one analog socket
Schematic
The following schematic shows the "Calculators" logic modules:
Figure 12-20 "Calculators" logic modules

Logic modules
Modes for calculator 2

The mode of the "Calculator 2" logic module can be changed via the "Operation mode"
parameter:
● Operation mode 1
The analog value at input 1 is combined with the analog value at input 2 using a
predefined formula and taking into account the specified parameters (numerators,
denominators, offsets, operators). The result is available as an analog value
(1 word / 2 bytes) at the output of the function block for further processing.
● Operation mode 2
The analog values at inputs 1 and 2 are processed together as a double word. Input 1
represents the high word and input 2 the low word. The result is calculated by means of
the formula defined for this operating mode using the specified parameters (numerators,
denominators, offsets) and is output by the function block as 1 word /2 bytes. In mode 2,
it is also possible to process double words (e.g. active power, apparent power) and to
display them (2 bytes / 1 word).
Settings
Table 12- 14 Calculator settings
Calculator Description
Calculator 1 - Input Any value (2 bytes / 1 word)°; Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 1 - Output Calculated value / 2 bytes / 1 word); Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 1 - Numerator Range: -32766 to +32767, increment 1
Calculator 1 - Denominator Range: 0 to 255, in steps of 1
Calculator 1 - Offset Range: -32766 to +32767, in steps of 1
Calculator 2 - Input 1 Any value (2 bytes / 1 word); Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Input 2 Any value (2 bytes / 1 word); Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Output Calculated value (2 bytes / 1 word); Range: 0 - 65535
Calculator 2 - Numerator 1 Range: -128 to +127, in steps of 1
Calculator 2 - Denominator 1 Range: 0 to 255, in steps of 1
Calculator 2 - Numerator 2 1) Range: 0 to 255, in steps of 1
Calculator 2 - Denominator 2 1) Range: -128 to +127, in steps of 1
Calculator 2 - Offset Range: -2147483648 to +2147483647, in steps of 2
Calculator 2 - Operation mode 1 or 2
Calculator 2 - Operator 1) +, -, *, /
1) Only relevant for mode = 1

Logic modules
Calculator formulas
Figure 12-21 Calculator formulas
Examples of calculators
Example 1 - Calculator
● Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from K to °C
Figure 12-22 Example 1 - Calculator

Logic modules
● Conversion of the maximum temperature of the temperature module from K to °F
● Conversion of motor current I_max from % to A (e.g. set current Is = 3.36 A)
(only possible for motors with one rotational speed)

Communication 13
13.1 Communication - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find information about SIMOCODE pro communication options, e.g.
communication with a PLC. The default receive, send and diagnostics data settings are
sufficient for almost all applications, in which case only slight changes to the
parameterization will be necessary. Otherwise, you can adapt the settings of the individual
bits specifically for your application.
Target groups
● PLC programmers
Required knowledge
You will find the following dialogs in SIMOCODE ES:
Device Parameters > Bus Parameters
● Further Function Blocks > Outputs > Acyclic Send Data
● Further function blocks > Outputs > Cyclic send data.

Communication
13.2 Definitions
13.2 Definitions
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP protocol (decentralized peripherals). The main task of
PROFIBUS DP is to manage the fast, cyclic data exchange between the central DP master
and the I/O devices.
PROFIBUS DPV1
PROFIBUS DPV1 is an extension of the DP protocol. It enables acyclic data exchange of
parameter, diagnostic, receive and test data.
DP master
A master with characteristics to EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS with the DP protocol is
referred to as the DP master.
Class 1 master
A Class 1 master is an active station on PROFIBUS DP. It is characteristically used for cyclic
data exchange with other stations. Typical Class 1 masters include PLCs with a
PROFIBUS DP connection.
Class 2 master
A class 2 master is an optional station on the PROFIBUS DP.
Typical class 2 masters include:
● PC / PG devices with the SIMOCODE ES software
● SIMATIC PDM (PCS7)
● PC with SIMATIC powercontrol software (power management).
DPV1 slave
A slave operated on the PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS DP protocol that behaves in
accordance with EN 50 170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS is referred to as a DPV1 slave.
GSD
Device master data (GSD) contains DP slave descriptions in a standardized format. The use
of device master data simplifies the configuration of the DP slave in a DP master system.

Communication
13.2 Definitions
OM SIMOCODE pro
OM SIMOCODE pro (object manager) is used instead of GSD to integrate SIMOCODE pro
into STEP7.
OM SIMOCODE pro enables the use of SIMOCODE ES (if it is installed) for
parameterization within STEP7.
SIMATIC PDM
Software package for the configuration, parameterization, commissioning and maintenance
of devices (e.g. transducers, controllers, SIMOCODE) and for configuring networks and PCs.
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave

A SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a slave which is fully integrated into STEP7. It is connected
via OM SIMOCODE pro. It supports the S7 model (diagnosis interrupts, hardware interrupts).
Writing data
Writing data means that data is transmitted to the SIMOCODE pro system.
Reading data
Reading data means that data is transmitted from the SIMOCODE pro system.
PROFIsafe
PROFIsafe is a safety profile developed and tested according to IEC 61508 for the widely
used field bus protocols PROFIBUS and PROFINET. The PROFIsafe profile defines how
failsafe protective devices (e.g. EMERGENCY OFF pushbutton) will be connected to
programmable controllers by means of PROFIBUS.

Communication
13.3 Data transfer
13.3 Data transfer
Options for data transfer

The following figure shows the data transfer options:
Figure 13-1 Options for data transfer

Communication
13.3 Data transfer
Communication principle
The following figure shows the communication principle and the way data is transmitted
depending on the master and slave operating modes:
Figure 13-2 Communication principle

Communication
13.4 Fail-safe data transfer via PROFIBUS / PROFIsafe
13.4 Fail-safe data transfer via PROFIBUS / PROFIsafe

SIMOCODE pro V as from version *E07* in conjunction with a fail-safe control (F-CPU) and
the SIMOCODE pro expansion module DM-F PROFIsafe supports fail-safe shutdown of
motors by means of data transmission via the PROFIsafe profile.
You will find more information on using this function in System Manual "Fail-safe digital
modules SIMOCODE pro Safety."

Communication
13.5 Telegram description and data access
13.5.1 Cyclic data

Cyclic data is exchanged between the PROFIBUS DP master and the DP slave once every
DP cycle. The PROFIBUS DP master module sends the control data to SIMOCODE pro.
SIMOCODE pro responds by sending the message data to the master module.
You access the cyclic data in the PLC software via the inputs (message data) and the
outputs (control data). The length of the cyclic data which is to be transferred is set when
SIMOCODE pro is integrated into the DP master system. This is achieved by selecting the
basic type which in turn determines the structure and the length of the cyclic data.
The following basic types are available:
● Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro
● Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master.
Table 13- 1 Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to SIMOCODE pro:
Designation Length Designation Information

Basic type 1 4 bytes of receive data Cyclic receive - BU SIMOCODE pro S, pro V
bits 0.0 to 1.7
Cyclic receive - analog value
Basic type 2 2 bytes of receive data Cyclic receive - BU SIMOCODE pro C,
bits 0.0 to 1.7 pro S, or pro V
PROFIsafe 5 bytes of receive data 1 bit net data, assigned BU SIMOCODE pro V
permanently to the relay
enabling circuits
Table 13- 2 Cyclic data from SIMOCODE pro to the PROFIBUS DP master:
Designation Length Designation Information

Basic type 1 10 bytes of send data Cyclic send - bits 0.0 to 1.7 BU SIMOCODE pro S, pro V
Cyclic send – analog input
1 to 4
Basic type 2 4 bytes of send data Cyclic send - bits 0.0 to 1.7 BU SIMOCODE pro C, pro S
and pro V
Cyclic Send – analog input 1 BU SIMOCODE pro V
PROFIsafe 4-byte inputs No user data
The cyclic data contents (digital / analog information) is set by parameterization, e.g. with the
"SIMOCODE ES" software.
The cyclic I/O data is preset when the type of application (control function) is selected when
the "SIMOCODE ES" parameterization software is launched (see Chapter "Assignment of
cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions (Page 561)").

Communication
13.5.2 Diagnostics data and alarms
Diagnostic data and interrupts - overview

Diagnostics data contains important information about the status of SIMOCODE pro. This
information simplifies troubleshooting.
Unlike cyclic data, the diagnostics data is only transmitted to the master module if it changes.
PROFIBUS DP differentiates between:
● Standard diagnostics
● Status information
● Channel-related diagnostics
● DPV1 process and diagnostic interrupts.
Configuring diagnostic response

In SIMOCODE pro, you can set which diagnostic events trigger the transmission of
diagnostics data or interrupts to the PLC:
● Diagnostics for device faults, e.g. parameterization errors, hardware faults
● Diagnostics for process faults:
In the case of events identified as "S" in the column headed "DP diagnostics" in the "Data
record 92 - Diagnostics" table, the diagnostics data or interrupts are transferred to the
PLC.
● Diagnostics for process warnings:
In the case of events identified as "W" in the column headed "DP diagnostics" in the
"Data record 92 - Diagnostics" table, the diagnostics data or interrupts are transferred to
the PLC.
● Diagnostics for process events:
In the case of events identified as "M" in the column headed "DP diagnostics" in the "Data
record 92 - Diagnostics" table, the diagnostics data or interrupts are transferred to the
PLC.
Setting with SIMOCODE ES

Set the response in dialog Device Parameters > Bus Parameters >Diagnosis .

Communication
13.5.3 Structure of the slave diagnostics
Standard diagnostics/extended diagnostics
Figure 13-3 Structure of the slave diagnostics
The diagnostics telegram has a maximum length of 62 bytes.
Station status - definition

The station status provides an overview of the state of a DP slave.

Communication
Station status 1
Table 13- 3 Structure of station status 1 (byte 0)
Bit Meaning Cause / corrective measure

0 The DP master cannot address the DP slave. Check the following:
• Is the correct PROFIBUS address
set on the DP slave?
• Is the bus connection plug
connected?
• Is the DP slave connected to the
power supply?
• Is the RS485 repeater correctly
configured?
1 The DP slave is not yet ready for the data transfer. The DP slave is still starting up.
Wait until the startup is completed.
2 The configuration data transferred from the DP master to the DP slave Check that the correct station type and
does not match the DP slave configuration. the correct DP slave configuration have
been entered in the configuring
software.
3 External diagnostics data exists (group diagnostics indication). Evaluate the identifier-related
diagnostics, the status information
and / or the channel-related
diagnostics. Bit 3 is reset as soon as all
faults have been rectified. The bit will
be set again when there is a new
diagnostics message in the bytes of the
aforementioned diagnostics.
4 The function you requested is not supported by the DP slave. Check the configuration.
5 The DP master cannot interpret the response from the DP slave. Check the bus configuration.
6 The DP slave type does not match the software configuration. Enter the correct station type in the
configuring software.
7 The DP slave has been parameterized by another DP master (not by The bit is always 1, for example, if you
the DP master which has access to the DP slave at the moment). access the DP slave with the PG or
another DP master. The "Master
PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte
contains the PROFIBUS address of the
DP master that assigned parameters to
the DP slave.

Communication
Station status 2
Table 13- 4 Structure of station status 2 (byte 1)
Bit Meaning
0 The DP slave must be parameterized again.
1 A diagnostic message is pending. The DP slave will not operate until the fault is rectified (static diagnostics
message).
2 The bit is always "1" when the DP slave with this PROFIBUS address is configured.
3 Response monitoring is enabled for this DP slave.
4 The DP slave has received the "FREEZE" control command. 1)
5 The DP slave has received the "SYNC" control command. 1)
6 0: Bit is always "0".

7 The DP slave is deactivated, i.e. it is decoupled from the current processing.
1) Bit is updated only if another diagnostic message also changes.
Station status 3
Station status 3 is not relevant for the slave diagnostics.
Table 13- 5 Structure of station status3
Bit Meaning
0 to 7 Bits are always "0".
Master PROFIBUS address - definition

The PROFIBUS address of this DP master (class 1 master) is stored in the "Master
PROFIBUS address" diagnostic byte,
● that has parameterized the DP slave and
● that has read and write access to the DP slave
The master PROFIBUS address is stored in byte 3 of the slave diagnostics.
Manufacturer's ID - definition
A code is stored in the manufacturer's identification which describes the DP slave type.
Table 13- 6 Structure of the manufacturer ID
Byte 4 Byte 5 Manufacturer ID for

80H FDH SIMOCODE pro

Communication
Identifier-related diagnostics - definition

Identifier-related diagnostics begins at byte 6 and is 2 bytes long.
Identifier-related diagnostics - configuration
Figure 13-4 Configuration of identifier-related diagnostics
Status information - definition

The status information communicates the detailed status of SIMOCODE pro.
If SIMOCODE pro is operated downstream from a Y-link (module for connecting single-
channel DP slaves to S7-400H), the so-called H_STATUS is also signaled (see Fig. 13-6
"Structure of H_STATUS").

Communication
Status information - configuration

The status information is configured as follows:
Figure 13-5 Configuration of status messages
You will find the detailed messages in Chapter Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics
(Page 508).

Communication
The H_STATUS has the following structure:
Figure 13-6 Structure of H_STATUS
Channel-related diagnostics - definition

Channel-related diagnostics is a detailed version of the identifier-related diagnostics. It
supplies information about the device faults of SIMOCODE pro.

Communication
Channel-related diagnostics - configuration

Channel-related diagnostics is configured as follows:
Figure 13-7 Configuration of the channel-related diagnostics
The block for the channel-related diagnostics, which has a length of 3 bytes, is either missing
(if there is no channel-related diagnostics) or is available once or twice.
Fault types
The diagnostic message is output on channel 0.
Table 13- 7 Fault types
No. Fault type Meaning / cause

F9 01001: Error • Internal fault / device fault Precise information:
• Error during self-test See Chapter Data record 92 - Device
diagnostics (Page 525).
F16 10000: Parameterization error • Incorrect parameter value

Communication
Interrupts - diagnostic interrupt

Device faults or parameter errors are interrupt sources for diagnostic interrupts.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a diagnostic interrupt, the OB 82 diagnostic interrupt will be
started in the SIMATIC S7.
Diagnosis interrupt - structure

The diagnostic interrupt has the following structure:
Figure 13-8 Structure of the diagnostic interrupt
The first byte of the block for diagnostic interrupt can be shifted by 3 or 6 bytes depending on
the number of blocks for channel-related diagnostics.
You will find a description of the information contained in record 1 in Chapter Data record 0/1
- S7 system diagnostics (Page 518).
Interrupts - hardware interrupt

Process faults, warnings, and status information are interrupt sources for hardware
interrupts.
As soon as SIMOCODE pro sets a hardware interrupt, the hardware interrupt OB 40 will be
started in the SIMATIC S7.

Communication
Hardware interrupt - structure

The hardware interrupt has the following structure:
Figure 13-9 Structure of the hardware interrupt
The first byte of the block for hardware interrupts can be shifted by 3 or 6 bytes depending
on the number of blocks for channel-related diagnostics.
You will find the detailed messages in Chapter "Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics
(Page 508)."

Communication
13.6 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in DP master systems
13.6.1 Slave operating modes

The following table shows an overview of the slave operating modes with which SIMOCODE
pro can be operated on the class 1 master:
Table 13- 8 Slave operating modes of SIMOCODE pro
SIMOCODE pro integrated Class 1 master

as Non-vendor-specific DP Non-vendor-specific DP S7 master
master, without DPV1 master, with DPV1 interrupts
interrupts
DPV1 slave via GSD • Cyclic data exchange • Cyclic data exchange • Cyclic data exchange
• Standard diagnostics • Standard diagnostics • Standard diagnostics
• Status information • Status information • Status information
• Parameterization during • Hardware and diagnostic • Hardware and diagnostic
starting interrupts interrupts
(SIMOCODE pro C basic • Parameterization during • Parameterization during
unit only) starting starting
• Acyclic writing and (SIMOCODE pro C basic (SIMOCODE pro C basic
reading of DPV1 data unit only) unit only)
records (if supported by • Acyclic reading and • Acyclic reading and
the master) writing of DPV1 data writing of DPV1 data
records records
S7 slave via — — • Cyclic data exchange
OM SIMOCODE pro
• Standard diagnostics
• Hardware and diagnostic
interrupts
• Parameterization during
startup
• Acyclic reading and
writing of DPV1 data
records
13.6.2 Preparing the data transfer

The precondition for communication with a master class 1 (PLC) is integration according to
table "Slave modes of SIMOCODE pro" and the setting for the PROFIBUS DP address.
In Chapter Setting the PROFIBUS DP address (Page 467), you will find information about
setting the address.

Communication
13.6.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the configuring
software
SIMOCODE pro is integrated into your system as a standard slave via the GSD file.
You can download the GSD file from GSD file (http://www.siemens.com/profibus-gsd)
(switching devices).
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro C:
● SI0180FD.GSG (German)
● SI0180FD.GSE (English).
● SI0180FD.GSF (French).
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro S:
● SI0181A7.GSG (German)
● SI0181A7.GSE (English)
● SI0181A7.GSF (French).
The following GSD files are available for SIMOCODE pro V:
● SI1180FD.GSG (German)
● SI1180FD.GSE (English)
● SI1180FD.GSF (French).
Note
If you want to utilize the complete functionality of SIMOCODE pro (e.g. time stamping), your
configuration tool must support GSD files - Rev.5 such as STEP7 V5.3 and higher.
The following table describes how to integrate the GSD file in SIMATIC S7 and
SIMOCODE pro from the hardware catalog.
Table 13- 9 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the configuring software
Step STEP7, V5.1+SP2 and higher

1 Start STEP7 and select "Options" > "Install New GSD File" in HW Config.
2 In the dialog box that then opens, select the GSD file to be installed and confirm with "OK" → the field device will
be displayed in the hardware catalog in the "PROFIBUS DP" directory under "Other field devices > Switching
devices > SIMOCODE pro."
3 Enter "SIMOCODE pro C," "SIMOCODE pro S," or "SIMOCODE pro V" on the PROFIBUS.
4 For SIMOCODE pro V only:
SIMOCODE pro V can be integrated into two basic types (basic type 1 or basic type 2) (see Chapter Cyclic data
(Page 381)). The default setting is basic type 2.
If you wish to use "basic type 1," delete the default "basic type 2" module and insert "basic type 1" instead.
Only in conjunction with the fail-safe digital module DM-F PROFIsafe:
Insert the "PROFIsafe" module in the second position in addition to "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2."
You will find more information on using the DM-F PROFIsafe in System Manual "Fail-safe digital modules
SIMOCODE pro Safety."

Communication

5 Check the set DP interrupt mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the enable of the DPV-1 interrupts on the properties
page of the DP slave. These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostics data and interrupts (see Chapter
Evaluating diagnostics data (Page 397) and Chapter Timestamping (Page 344)).
6 For SIMOCODE pro C only:
It is possible to set the device parameters, which are automatically transmitted to SIMOCODE pro during every
startup, in the object properties of the DP slave under "Parameterization > Device-specific parameters" (see
Chapter Parameter data during startup (Page 402)).
13.6.4 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via
GSD) in STEP7 HW Config
SIMOCODE pro can be integrated as a PDM object into the STEP7 HW Config when
version 6.0 + SP1 or higher of the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager) is installed.
This requires the PDM option "Integration in STEP7."
The following table describes how you can insert SIMOCODE pro as a PDM object in the
STEP7 HW Config from the hardware catalog.
Table 13- 10 SIMOCODE pro as a SIMATIC PDM object (DPV1 slave via GSD) in STEP7 HW Config

1 Start STEP7 and open the "HW Config."
2 To integrate SIMOCODE pro as a PDM object, navigate to the "PROFIBUS DP > Switching Devices" directory in
the hardware catalog.
3 Enter "SIMOCODE pro C (PDM)," "SIMOCODE pro S (PDM)," or "SIMOCODE pro V (PDM)" on the PROFIBUS.
For SIMOCODE pro V only:
(Page 381)). The default setting is basic type 2.
If you wish to use "basic type 1," delete the default "basic type 2" module and insert "basic type 1" instead.
Insert the "PROFIsafe" module in the second position in addition to "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2."
You will find more information on using the DM-F PROFIsafe in the manual SIMOCODE pro Safety fail-safe digital
modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).
4 Check the set DP interrupt mode (DPV0 or DPV1) as well as the enable of the DPV-1 interrupts on the properties
page of the DP slave. These settings influence the evaluation of the diagnostics data and interrupts (see Chapter
Evaluating diagnostics data (Page 397) and Chapter Timestamping (Page 344)).
5 Start SIMATIC PDM to create the device parameters by double clicking on the slave symbol (see Chapter
SIMATIC PDM (Page 401)).

Communication
13.6.5 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro

The "OM SIMOCODE pro" software must be installed to utilize the advantages of
SIMOCODE ES and parameterize SIMOCODE pro from the STEP7 HW Config.
OM SIMOCODE pro is included in the scope of supply of the "SIMOCODE ES Premium"
software.
Install the software accordingly.
The following table describes how to insert SIMOCODE pro into STEP7 HW Config from the
hardware catalog.
Table 13- 11 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro
Step STEP7
1 Start STEP7 and open the "HW Config."
2 To integrate SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave, navigate through the hardware
catalog to directory "PROFIBUS DP > Switching Devices > Motor Management
System"
3 Enter SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S, SIMOCODE pro V" (basic type 1) or SIMOCODE pro V (basic
type 2) on the PROFIBUS.
For SIMOCODE pro V only:
(Page 381)).
Enter the desired basic type "Basic type 1" or "Basic type 2" as the module.
Enter the desired basic type "Basic type 1 - PROFIsafe" or "Basic type 2 - PROFIsafe" as the module.
You will find more information on using the DM-F PROFIsafe in the System Manual SIMOCODE pro Safety fail-
safe digital modules (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).
4 Start the "SIMOCODE ES" software to generate the device parameters with the "Parameters" button under
"Parameters" in the object properties of slot 4 of this S7 slave. The created parameters are incorporated in STEP7
and automatically transmitted to SIMOCODE pro during startup (see Chapter Parameter data during startup
(Page 402)).
If SIMOCODE pro has been integrated as an S7 slave, you can utilize the routing
functionality provided by SIMOCODE ES Premium.
A prerequisite for the availability of this function is that an online connection can be
established (for example via Industrial Ethernet) between the PC on which "SIMOCODE ES"
is installed and the SIMATIC controller that supports routing.
In this manner, you can use routing to access all SIMOCODE pro devices connected to the
controller.

Communication
13.6.6 Compatibility of SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro V

SIMOCODE pro S and SIMOCODE pro C each have their own gsd file (see Integration of
SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via GSD in the configuring software (Page 393)).
It is nevertheless possible to replace a SIMOCODE pro C basic unit with a
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit.
SIMOCODE pro S basic units can be addressed with unchanged functionality by configuring
with a SIMOCODE pro C gsd file. SIMOCODE pro C parameter settings using output 3 of
the basic unit are changed in such a way when using SIMOCODE pro S that output 1 of the
multifunction module is used instead of output 3 of the basic unit.
For configurations that use the new functions of the SIMOCODE pro S multifunction module
(additional inputs and outputs, ground fault detection, temperature measurement),
configuring using the SIMOCODE pro S gsd file is absolutely necessary.
The same applies when integrating into STEP 7 via the Object Manager of
SIMOCODE pro C.

Communication
13.7 Evaluating diagnostics data
13.7.1 Evaluating diagnostics data

The way in which the diagnostics data is read out depends in which DP master system you
have integrated SIMOCODE pro and the method of integration used (see Chapter
Integration of SIMOCODE pro in DP master systems (Page 392)).
13.7.2 SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD
DP master with DPV1 interrupt support (DPV1 interrupt mode)

(e.g. all later SIMATIC S7-300 / 400 DP master systems)
In a DP master system with DPV1 interrupt support, the diagnostics data is transferred and
evaluated by means of diagnostic and hardware interrupts.
These interrupts must be enabled in the PROFIBUS configuring tool for this purpose
(diagnostic interrupts, hardware interrupts).
Using the configuring tool, you can define the DP interrupt mode in which the integration took
place in the DP slave properties and specify whether interrupts are enabled. In
SIMATIC STEP7, this is carried out in HW Config via the properties of the DP slave.
● Behavior and sequence in STEP7: Behavior and sequence in STEP7A diagnosis interrupt
(OB 82) is triggered in the CPU every time a new device fault is diagnosed, whereas a
hardware interrupt (OB 40) is triggered every time a new process fault / warning / status
information is diagnosed. If OB 82 or OB 40 has not been programmed, the CPU
switches to "STOP" mode.
● Interrupts from a DPV1 slave, received with STEP7: The interrupt is read directly in
OB 82 or OB 40 with SFB 54 "RALRM." The data range addressed with SFB 54 by
means of the "AINFO" parameter contains the interrupt information described in Section
"Diagnostic interrupt - structure" and in the Section "Hardware interrupt - structure." The
first byte which is read corresponds to byte 28.
Note
The interface of SFB 54 "RALRM" is identical to the interface of FB "RALRM" as defined
in the "PROFIBUS Guideline PROFIBUS Communication and Proxy Function Blocks
according to IEC 61131-3" standard.
You will find further information about SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.

Communication
DP master without DPV1 interrupt support (DPV0 interrupt mode) (e.g. all later SIMATIC S7-300 / 400
DP master systems)
SIMOCODE pro diagnostics data can be evaluated via device-specific diagnostics (status
information) and channel-related diagnostics (as part of extended diagnostics, see Chapter
Structure of the slave diagnostics (Page 383)) in DP master systems without DPV1 interrupt
support.
Using the configuring tool, you can define the DP interrupt mode in which the integration took
place in the DP slave properties.
Device-specific diagnostics contain detailed information about faults, warnings and status
information which are recorded by the process via SIMOCODE pro. Information concerning
hardware faults is transmitted via channel-related diagnostics.
● Behavior and sequence in STEP7: OB 82 is started in the CPU every time a new device
or process fault / warning / status information is diagnosed. If OB 82 has not been
programmed, the CPU switches to "STOP" mode.
● Readout of the slave diagnostics data with STEP7: You can determine which DP slave
has supplied diagnostics data by evaluating the start information in OB 82
("OB82_MDL_ADDR" variable). OB82_MDL_ADDR corresponds here to the diagnostics
address of the slave that is configured in HW Config. The diagnostics data itself is read,
for instance, in the cyclic part of the user program with SFC 13 "DPNRM_DG." The
diagnostics data that is read with SFC 13 has the structure described in Chapter
Structure of the slave diagnostics (Page 383). For further information on SFC 13, please
refer to the STEP7 Online Help system.
13.7.3 Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM SIMOCODE ES
Diagnostic interrupt/hardware interrupt

The diagnostics data concerning diagnosis alarms and process interrupts is transmitted and
evaluated during the integration of SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave.
DP masters operated in DP mode "DPV1" (e.g. all later SIMATIC S7-300/400 DP master systems)
Behavior and sequence in STEP7:
Behavior and sequence in STEP7A diagnosis interrupt (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU every
time a new device fault is diagnosed, whereas a hardware interrupt (OB 40) is triggered
every time a new process fault / warning / status information is diagnosed. If OB 82 or OB 40
has not been programmed, the CPU switches to "STOP" mode.
Interrupts from a DPV1 slave, received with STEP7:
The interrupt is read directly in OB 82 or OB 40 with SFB 54 "RALRM."
The data range addressed with SFB 54 by means of the "AINFO" parameter contains the
interrupt information described in Section Structure of the slave diagnostics (Page 383). The
first byte which is read corresponds to byte 28.
You will find further information on SFB 54 in the STEP7 online help.

Communication
DP masters operated in DP mode "S7-compatible" (e.g. all early SIMATIC S7-300/400 DP master
systems)
Behavior and sequence in STEP7:
Behavior and sequence in STEP7A diagnosis interrupt (OB 82) is triggered in the CPU every
time a new device fault is diagnosed, whereas a hardware interrupt (OB 40) is triggered
every time a new process fault / warning / status information is diagnosed. If OB 82 or OB 40
has not been programmed, the CPU switches to "STOP" mode.
You will find information about the device fault in the start information of OB 82 in the
"OB82_MDL_DEFECT" variable. The start information of OB 40 contains the
"OB40_POINT_ADDR" variable, which in turn contains the data of the hardware interrupt
that is described in bytes 32 to 35 (see Section "Structure of the slave diagnostics
(Page 383)"). Reading the entire diagnosis can then be initiated, for example, from OB 40,
while the complete diagnostic record 92 is being read in the cyclic user program with the
SFC 59 "RD_REC."
You will find further information on SFB 59 in the STEP7 online help.

Communication
13.8 Data records
13.8 Data records
Records - general information

Data records contain additional information about the DP slave that can be read and, in
some cases, written.
Access is effected via acyclic DPV1 services for reading and writing these records.
Operation, monitoring, and parameterization is possible, for example, by SIMOCODE pro.
You can use these services if your DP master supports this.
You will find an overview of the records provided by SIMOCODE pro in Chapter Data
formats and data records (Page 513).
Unlike when cyclic I/O data is accessed, special function blocks must be called in the PLC to
access DPV1 data records in the user program.
Access to data records in STEP7

Read and write access to the data records takes place either by calling the system functions
SFC 59 "RD_REC" and SFC 58 "WR_REC" or, in the case of CPUs that support the "DPV1"
DP mode, with the system function blocks SFB 52 "RDREC" and SFB 53 "WRREC".
Note
The interface of SFB 52 "RDREC" and SFB 53 "WRREC" is identical to the interfaces of
FB "RDREC" and "WRREC" as defined in the "PROFIBUS Guideline PROFIBUS
Communication and Proxy Function Blocks according to IEC 61131-3" standard.
You will find further information about SFB and SFC in the STEP7 online help.

Communication
13.9 Parameterization via PROFIBUS
13.9.1 SIMOCODE ES Premium

With SIMOCODE ES Premium you can parameterize all the SIMOCODE pro devices which
are connected to the same PROFIBUS DP network from a central location. Parameter data
which has been previously created with the software can therefore be transmitted directly to
SIMOCODE pro via PROFIBUS DP.
Note
A PC with a system connection for PROFIBUS (e.g. SIMATIC NET CP 5512 or CP 5611) is
required to execute online functions via PROFIBUS DP, e.g. transfer of SIMOCODE pro
parameters.
The system connections for PROFIBUS mentioned above are operated in conjunction with
SIMOCODE ES Premium as master class 2 and use acyclic DPV1 communication functions
for communication with SIMOCODE pro.
If SIMOCODE pro has been integrated as an S7 slave, you can utilize the routing
functionality provided by SIMOCODE ES Premium. A prerequisite for the availability of this
function is that an online connection can be established (for example via Industrial Ethernet)
between the PC on which "SIMOCODE ES" is installed and the SIMATIC controller which
supports routing. In this manner, you can use routing to access all SIMOCODE pro devices
connected to the controller.
Note
The startup parameter block (Device Parameters > Bus Parameters) must always be set for
this form of parameterization to avoid the device parameters from being overwritten by any
existing parameter data during startup.
13.9.2 SIMATIC PDM

The standard version of SIMATIC PDM (PDM Basic) is available to you for parameterizing
functionality comparable to that of SIMOCODE ES Professional via PROFIBUS for
SIMOCODE pro.
The PDM options "Integration in STEP7" provides the following functions in addition:
● "Offline saving" of SIMOCODE pro parameter data in the STEP7 project and manual
transmission (no automatic transfer of parameter data during startup!)
● "Routing via S7 stations." Example: Parameterization of all SIMOCODE pro devices from
a central engineering station, together with hardware components which provide a data
record gateway (CP443-5 Extended, IE / PB link), beyond the boundaries of different
networks where required.

Communication
Note
The startup parameter block (Device parameters > Bus parameters) must always be set for
this form of parameterization to avoid the device parameters from being overwritten by any
existing parameter data during startup.
You will find further information about SIMATIC PDM in the Manual SIMATIC Process
Control System PCS 7 SIMATIC PDM
13.9.3 Parameter data during startup

Parameter data is transferred to the unit on the PROFIBUS DP each time SIMOCODE pro is
started up.
Either standard parameters only or standard and device-specific parameters
(SIMOCODE pro parameters) are transferred, depending on the master module used and
the type of integration into the DP master system. The parameters are stored in the PLC or
the DP master and automatically transferred to the DP slave when the system is started up.
You can set the device-specific parameters
● with the configuration tool with loaded GSD (SIMOCODE pro C basic unit only), e.g. with
STEP7-HW Config. This option is available for SIMOCODE pro C. The SIMOCODE pro
parameters are created by configuring the device-specific parameters on the slave
properties page.
● in the "SIMOCODE ES" software with integration of SIMOCODE pro into STEP7-
HW Config as an S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro. This option is available for
SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S, and SIMOCODE pro V. You can start the
"SIMOCODE ES" software for easy configuration of the parameterization from STEP7
HW Config using the button in the "Parameter" tab in the object properties of slot 4.
Note
To allow device parameterization during startup, the startup parameter block (Device
parameters > Bus parameters) must not be set.
SIMOCODE pro is then parameterized with the device-specific parameters stored in the
DP master. Any parameters already in the device will be overwritten.

Communication
13.10 Timestamping/time synchronization

See Chapter Timestamping (Page 344).

Communication

Mounting, wiring, interfaces 14
14.1 Mounting, wiring, interfaces - general information
In this chapter
This chapter contains information about installation and wiring of individual SIMOCODE pro
components.
Target groups
● Technicians
● Electricians
● Maintenance and service personnel.
Required knowledge
You require basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro.

Mounting, wiring, interfaces
14.2 General information about mounting and wiring
Safety guidelines
WARNING
Hazardous voltage!
Can cause electric shock and burns.
Ensure the system and devices are disconnected from the power supply before starting
work.
Note
Please also follow the SIMOCODE pro Operating Instructions (supplied with the devices),
which are listed in the table below.
You will find the Operating Instructions for SIMOCODE pro in the Internet at Operating
Instructions (www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals).
Device Order No. of Operating Instructions

Basic unit 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit 3ZX1012-0UF70-2BA1
Operator panel 3ZX1012-0UF72-1AA1
Operator panel adapter 3ZX1012-0UF78-2BA1
Operator panel with display 3ZX3012-0UF72-2AA1
Digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-1AA1
DM-F Local fail-safe digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-1BA1
DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module 3ZX1012-0UF73-3BA1
Expansion modules 3ZX1012-0UF75-1BA1
Multifunction module 3ZX1012-0UF76-1AA1
Current measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF71-1AA1
Current / voltage measuring module 3ZX1012-0UF77-1BA1
Door adapter 3ZX1012-0UF78-1AA1
Decoupling module 3ZX1012-0UF71-5BA1
Initialization module 3ZX1012-0UF70-2AA1

Mounting lugs for screw attachment
Note
Two different fixing lugs are provided for screw mounting for technical reasons:
• For the SIMOCODE pro C and pro V basic units and the suitable expansion modules and
the decoupling module: Order No. 3RP1903
• For the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit and the multifunction module: Order No. 3ZY1311-
0AA00
• For current measuring modules and current / voltage measuring modules, 45 mm and
55 mm wide: Order No. 3RV2928-0B
Removable terminals
Note
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and will only fit in a certain position!

14.3 Mounting
14.3 Mounting
14.3.1 Mounting basic units, expansion modules, and the decoupling module
You can attach these system components as follows:
● Snap-on mounting onto a 35 mm standard mounting rail, without tools
● Snap-on mounting of basic units (no tools required) onto current measuring modules of
45 mm and 55 mm in width (up to 100 A) with integrated standard mounting rail
● Screw mounting with mounting lugs (order no: 3RP1903) and screws for mounting on a
level surface. These fixing lugs are only suitable for basic units, expansion modules and
the decoupling module!

14.3 Mounting
Figure 14-1 Mounting basic unit, expansion modules or the decoupling module, SIMOCODE pro C/V

14.3 Mounting
Figure 14-2 Mounting of basic unit and multifunction module, SIMOCODE pro S
14.3.2 Mounting of digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852), Chapter "Mounting and
connection."

14.3 Mounting
14.3.3 Mounting of current measuring modules

● Current measuring modules up to 100 A: Standard mounting rail mounting or screw
attachment with mounting lugs (Order No: 3RV2928-0B) and screws for mounting on a
level surface. These mounting lugs are suitable only for current measuring modules and
current / voltage measuring modules! For current measuring modules up to 25 A you will
require an additional 25 mm spacer.
● Current measuring modules up to 200 A: Rail-mounting or screw attachment
● Current measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw mounting.
Figure 14-3 Mounting the current measuring modules

14.3 Mounting
14.3.4 Mounting the current / voltage measuring modules

● Current / voltage measuring modules up to 100 A: On a standard mounting rail or by
screw mounting with mounting lugs (order no: 3RV2928-0B) and screws for mounting on
a level surface. These mounting lugs are suitable only for current / voltage measuring
modules (and current measuring modules)! For current / voltage measuring modules up
to 25 A you will require an additional spacer, 25 mm in length.
● Current / voltage measuring modules up to 200 A: Standard mounting rail or screw
attachment.
● Current / voltage measuring modules up to 630 A: Screw mounting
Figure 14-4 Mounting the current / voltage measuring modules

14.3 Mounting
14.3.5 Mounting of the operator panel and operator panel with display
The operator panels are designed for installation in the front panels of motor control centers,
for example, or in control cabinet doors.
To install, proceed as follows:
Table 14- 1 Sequence for installing the operator panel / operator panel with display
Step Description
1 Make a cutout, e.g. in the front panel or switchgear cabinet door. Dimensions (see figure
"Mounting the operator panel" or figure "Mounting the operator panel with display").
2 Position the operator panel or the operator panel with display in the cutout.
3 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel.
4 Lock the operator panel in position by tightening the four screws on the securing brackets.
Figure 14-5 Mounting the operator panel

14.3 Mounting
Figure 14-6 Mounting the operator panel with display
WARNING
Tightening torque of the screws
To ensure that the panel will function correctly and is sealed to comply with IP54, the
tightening torque of the screws provided must not be set too high when mounting and the
seal must be properly fitted.
Note
Only a connecting cable is required for connecting the operator panel with display to
SIMOCODE pro (see Chapter An overview of system components (Page 50)). Additional
wiring for the power supply or ground is not required.

14.3 Mounting
14.3.6 Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel

To exchange a 3UF52 operator panel for the smaller 3UF720 operator panel, proceed as
follows:
Table 14- 2 Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 operator panel
Step Description
1 Unscrew the four mounting bracket screws and remove the 3UF52 operator panel from
the front panel or switchgear cabinet door.
2 Ensure that the dimensions of the cutout in the front panel or cabinet door measure
91.5 + 0.5 mm (width) and 54.5 + 0.5 mm (height) (see figure).
3 Slide the seal provided onto the operator panel adapter (see figure).
4 Position the operator panel adapter in the cutout.
5 Position the operator panel in the adapter.
6 Snap the four mounting brackets onto the operator panel.
7 Lock the operator panel in position by tightening the four mounting bracket screws (see
figure and safety information!).
Figure 14-7 Mounting the operator panel adapter (1)

14.3 Mounting
Figure 14-8 Mounting the operator panel adapter (2)
WARNING
Tightening torque of the screws
To ensure that the panel will function correctly and is sealed to comply with IP54, the
tightening torque of the screws provided must not be set too high when mounting and the
seal must be properly fitted.
Note
A SIMOCODE pro 3UF7 system operator panel is not compatible with
SIMOCODE DP 3UF5, and vice versa.

14.4 Wiring
14.4 Wiring
14.4.1 Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module
Removable terminals
Basic units, expansion modules and the decoupling module have removable terminals. You
do not have to detach the wiring to exchange these devices!
Figure 14-9 Removable terminals for basic units, expansion modules, or the decoupling module,
SIMOCODE pro C/V
Note
The removable terminals are mechanically coded and will only fit in a certain position!
Figure 14-10 Removable terminals for basic unit and multifunction module, SIMOCODE pro S

14.4 Wiring
Cables
The conductor cross sections are the same for all devices. The following table shows
conductor cross sections, strip lengths, and tightening torques of the cables for the
removable terminals:
Table 14- 3 Conductor cross sections, strip lengths, and tightening torques of the cables for the basic
units SIMOCODE pro C and pro V
Removable terminals Screwdriver Tightening torque

PZ2 / Ø 5 to 6 Torque:
mm 7 to 10.3 LB.IN
0.8 to 1.2 Nm
Strip lengths Conductor cross section
Solid 2x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
Finely 2x 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2

stranded 2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
with / without
end sleeve
The conductor cross sections are the same for all devices. The following table shows
conductor cross sections, strip lengths, and tightening torques of the cables for the
removable terminals:
Table 14- 4 Conductor cross sections, strip lengths, and tightening torques of the cables for the basic
unit SIMOCODE pro S

PZ1 / Ø 4.5 mm Torque:
5.2 to 7.0 LB.IN
0.6 to 0.8 Nm
Solid 2x 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 /
1x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 16 /
1x AWG 20 to 14
Finely stranded 2x 0.5 to 1.0 mm2/
with end sleeve 1x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
Finely stranded -
without end sleeve
PROFIBUS 2x 0.34 mm2 / 1x 0.34 mm2

14.4 Wiring
Power supply to the inputs of the basic unit

There are three possibilities for supplying the inputs:
a): 24 V DC internal
b): 24 V DC external. Input 3 is the reference potential, i.e. three inputs are available.
c): 24 V DC external. Only possible for a basic unit with 24 V DC supply voltage!
Figure 14-11 24 V DC for powering the inputs
All inputs work reaction-free, i.e. the signal statuses on neighboring inputs do not influence
each other.

14.4 Wiring
Terminal assignment of the basic units

The following table show the assignment of the removable terminals of the
SIMOCODE pro C/V basic units:
Table 14- 5 Assignment of the removal terminals, SIMOCODE pro C/V basic units
Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
1 Common potential for relay outputs 1 and 2
2 Relay output OUT1
3 Relay output OUT2
4 Digital input IN3
5 Digital input IN4
T2 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
6 Relay output OUT3
7 Relay output OUT3
8 24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4
9 Digital input IN1
10 Digital input IN2
T1 Thermistor connection (binary PTC)
Lower terminals
A1 Supply voltage terminal 1
A PROFIBUS DP terminal A
B PROFIBUS DP terminal B
SPE System shielding

14.4 Wiring
The following table shows the assignment of the removable terminals of the
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit:
Table 14- 6 Assignment of the removable terminals, SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
IN+ 24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4
A PROFIBUS DP terminal A
B PROFIBUS DP terminal B
IN1 Digital input IN1
Lower terminals
T1 Thermistor connection 1 (binary PTC)
T2 Thermistor connection 2 (binary PTC)
14 Relay output OUT1
Wiring sequence of the removable terminal of the SIMOCODE pro C/V basic units
Proceed as follows:
Table 14- 7 Wiring of the removable terminals of the SIMOCODE pro C/V basic units
Step Description
1 Connect the cables to the upper and lower terminals.
2 If you wish to use the A/B terminals for PROFIBUS DP, connect the PROFIBUS DP cable shield to
the SPE / PE terminal.
3 Connect the equipment shield to the SPE terminal.
Note
The A / B terminals are an alternative to the 9-way SUB-D connection! Baud rates of up to
1.5 Mbit / s 1) are possible.

14.4 Wiring
Note
1) Baud rates > 1.5 Mbit / s
At baud rates > 1.5 Mbit / s, the "Bus" fault is generated and the "Bus" LED lights up.
Wiring sequence of the PROFIBUS cable for SIMOCODE pro S basic units
Proceed as follows:
Table 14- 8 Wiring of the removable terminals on the basic units
Step Description
1 Insulate the PROFIBUS cable as shown below.
2 Screw the SPE cable to the bus terminal as shown below.
3 Connect the PROFIBUS cables A and B and the SPE cable to terminals A, B, and SPE as shown
below.
CAUTION
SPE connection
Connect the SPE cable to the SPE terminal or alternatively to the bus connection terminal
with a ring cable lug.
Figure 14-12 Wiring sequence of the PROFIBUS cable for SIMOCODE pro S basic units

14.4 Wiring
Connection examples basic units
Figure 14-13 Connection example of SIMOCODE pro C/V basic units

14.4 Wiring
Figure 14-14 Connection example SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
Note
Baud rates PROFIBUS DP
Baud rates up to 1.5 Mbits are possible via bus terminals A/B.

14.4 Wiring
Power supply to the inputs of the digital module

There are two possibilities for supplying the inputs:
a) Digital module with 24 V DC input supply
b) Digital module with 110 to 240 V AC / DC input supply
Figure 14-15 Power supply to the inputs of the digital module

14.4 Wiring
Terminal assignment of the digital module

The following table shows the assignment of the removable terminals:
Table 14- 9 Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module
Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
25 N / M for IN1 to IN4
Lower terminals
A1 Digital input IN3
A2 Digital input IN4

14.4 Wiring
Digital module connection example
Figure 14-16 Digital module connection example
Terminal assignment of the multifunction module
Table 14- 10 Assignment of the removable terminals, multifunction module
Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
IN- 24 V DC only for IN1 to IN4
C1 Terminal 1, 3UL23 residual current transformer
C2 Terminal 2, 3UL23 residual current transformer
Lower terminals
T1 Input T1, temperature sensor

14.4 Wiring
Connection example for multifunction module
Figure 14-17 Connection example for multifunction module

14.4 Wiring
Information on installing the 3UL23 residual current transformer:

See Chapter 14.2.5 in the Manual "3UG4/3RR2 Monitoring Relay"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50426183/133300).
NOTICE
Routing the connecting cables / using shielded cables
To avoid interference injection, which could result in incorrect measurements, route these
connecting lines parallel and twisted, if possible, or use shielded cables.
Terminal assignment of the ground-fault module

Table 14- 11 Terminal assignment of the removable terminals of the ground-fault module
Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
40 Input C1 residual current transformer
43 Input C2 residual current transformer
Lower terminals

14.4 Wiring
NOTICE
Types of ground-fault module
transformer.
transformer.
Ground-fault module connection example
Figure 14-18 Ground-fault module connection example
The output signal of the transformers 3UL22/3UL23 is connected to terminals C1 and C2 of

the corresponding ground-fault module.
Information on installing the residual current transformer 3UL23: See Manual "3UG4/3RR2
Monitoring Relay" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50426183/133300),
Chapter 14.2.5.
NOTICE
Routing the connecting cables / using shielded cables
To avoid interference injection, which could result in incorrect measurements, route these
connecting lines parallel and twisted, if possible, or use shielded cables.

14.4 Wiring
Terminal assignment of the temperature module

Table 14- 12 Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the temperature module
Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
50 Input T3, temperature sensor 1
Lower terminals
56 Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3
57 Input T1, temperature sensor 1 to 3
You can connect up to three 2-wire or 3-wire temperature sensors.

● 2-wire temperature sensors: Connect a jumper between the T2 terminals and T3
terminals.
● 3-wire temperature sensors: Assign terminals 56 and 57 twice when three sensors are
used.

14.4 Wiring
Temperature module connection example
Figure 14-19 Temperature module connection example

14.4 Wiring
Terminal assignment of the analog module

Table 14- 13 Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the analog module
Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
30 Analog input IN1+
Lower terminals
36 Analog output OUT+
37 Analog output OUT+

14.4 Wiring
Analog module connection example
Figure 14-20 Analog module connection example

14.4 Wiring
Terminal assignment of the decoupling module

Table 14- 14 Pin assignment of the removable terminals of the decoupling module
Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
—
Lower terminals
Decoupling module connection example
Figure 14-21 Decoupling module connection example
Wiring the removable terminals of the expansion modules and the decoupling module
Connect the system shielding to the PE terminal.

14.4 Wiring
14.4.2 Digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
Wiring
See Manual Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety
connection."
WARNING
Loss of safety function is possible
Note
Surge suppressors are required for inductive loads.

14.4 Wiring
Terminal assignment for digital module DM-F Local

The following table shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Table 14- 15 Terminal assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module DM-F Local,
24 V DC version and 110 to 240 V UC version.
Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
60, 66 Digital module, relay outputs 1 (60) and 2 (66)
61, 67 Relay enabling circuit 1, NO
Y12, Y22 Sensor input channel 1, channel 2
T1, T2 Supply for sensor inputs (24 V DC, pulsed)
Y33 Start button (start after rising and falling edge)
Y34 Feedback circuit
Lower terminals
A1 (+) Power supply connection 110 to 240 V AC/DC
or +24 V DC
A2 (-) N or -24 V
M Ground (reference potential for sensor inputs,
3UF7320-1AU00-0 only)
1 Cascading input
T3 Supply for sensor inputs (24 V DC, static)
SPE Protective earth

14.4 Wiring
Terminal assignment for digital module DM-F PROFIsafe
Table 14- 16 Terminal assignment of the removable terminals of the digital module DM-F PROFIsafe,
24 V DC version and 110 to 240 V UC version.
Terminal Assignment
Upper terminals
80, 86 Digital module, relay outputs 1 (80)
and 2 (86)
83 (IN1) Digital module, inputs 1, 2, 3
85 (IN2)
89 (IN3)
84 Power supply, diigital module, inputs
1 to 3, 24 V DC
90 (T) Feedback circuit supply (FBC)
24 V DC
91 (FBC) Feedback circuit
Lower terminals
A1 (+) Power supply connection 110 to
240 V AC/DC or +24 V DC
A2 (-) N or -24 V
M Ground (reference potential inputs,
only 3UF7320-1AU00-0)
1 Cascading input
T3 Supply for sensor inputs (24 V DC,
static)
SPE Protective earth

14.4 Wiring
Digital module DM-F Local connection example

DM-F Local with cross-circuit detection, 2 NCs, 2 channels, monitored start
WARNING
Fuse protection required!
Always install the prescribed fuse protection.
This ensures safe tripping in the event of a fault.
Figure 14-22 Connection example for "DM-F Local with cross-circuit detection, 2 NCs, 2 channels,
monitored start"
For further connection examples: See Manual Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro
Safety (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).

14.4 Wiring
Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe connection example
WARNING
Fuse protection required!
Always install the prescribed fuse protection.
This ensures safe tripping in the event of a fault.
Figure 14-23 Block diagram of DM-F PROFIsafe
Connection examples fail-safe digital module DM-F

See Manual Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety

14.4 Wiring
14.4.3 Current measuring module
Selection
Select the appropriate current measuring module according to the motor current:
● Through-hole connection up to 200 A: The cables of the three phases are passed through
the feed-through openings.
● Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to Siemens
contactors.
The following table shows the various current measuring modules:
Table 14- 17 Current measuring modules
Current measuring module Main circuit connection

3UF7100-1AA00-0; 0.3 to 3 A Through-hole connection
Ø feed-through openings: 7.5 mm
3UF7101-1AA00-0; 2.4 to 25 A
3UF7102-1AA00-0; 10 - 100 A
Ø feed-through openings: 14 mm
3UF7103-1AA00-0; 20 to- 200 A

3UF7103-1BA00-0; 20 to 200 A Bus connection system

Conductor cross section:
16 to 95 mm², AWG 5 to 3/0
3UF7104-1BA00-0; 63 to 630 A
50 to 240 mm²,
AWG 1/0 to 500 kcmil
Note
When connecting or routing the cables of the individual phases of the main circuit, ensure
correct assignment of the phases on the current measuring module and correct routing
direction!
Please note the information in the Operating Instructions. You will also find the Operating
Instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Operating instructions (www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals)

14.4 Wiring
14.4.4 Current / voltage measuring modules
Selection
Select the appropriate current / voltage measuring module according to the motor current.
● Through-hole connection up to 200 A: The cables of the three phases are passed through
the feed-through openings.
● Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, also for direct connection to Siemens
contactors.
The following table shows the various current / voltage measuring modules:
Table 14- 18 Current/voltage measuring modules
Current measuring module Main circuit connection

3UF7110-1AA00-0; 0.3 - 3 A Through-hole connection
3UF7111-1AA00-0; 2.4 - 25 A
3UF7112-1AA00-0; 10 - 100 A
3UF7113-1AA00-0; 20 - 200 A
3UF7113-1BA00-0; 20 - 200 Bus connection system

16 to 95 mm², AWG 5 to 3/0
3UF7114-1BA00-0; 63 to 630 A
50 to 240 mm²,
AWG 1/0 to 500 kcmil

14.4 Wiring
Safety guidelines
Note
Measurement of voltage or power-related variables:
Connect the main circuit L1, L2, L3 of a current / voltage measuring module to the clamps
(L1, L2, L3) of the removable terminal with a 3-core cable. The supply cables may require
additional cable protection, for example, via short-circuit proof cable or fuses.
Note
When connecting or routing the cables of the individual phases of the main circuit, ensure
correct assignment of the phases on the current / voltage measuring module and correct
routing direction! Please note the information in the Operating Instructions.
You will also find the Operating Instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Operating Instructions
Removable terminals
The following table shows cable cross sections, strip lengths and tightening torques of the
cables for the removable terminals:
The following figure shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Table 14- 19 Conductor cross sections, strip lengths, and tightening torques of the cables

PZ2 / Ø 5 to 6 Torque:
mm 7 to 10.3 LB.IN
0.8 to 1.2 Nm
Solid 2x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
Finely 2x 0.5 to 1.5 mm2 /

stranded 1x 0.5 to 2.5 mm2
with / without 2x AWG 20 to 16 /
end sleeve 1x AWG 20 to 14
The following figure shows the pin assignment of the removable terminals:
Figure 14-24 Terminal assignment of the terminals of the current / voltage measuring modules

14.4 Wiring
14.4.5 Measuring current with an external current transformer (interposing transformer)
Description
SIMOCODE pro can be operated with external current transformers. The secondary cables
of the current transformer are looped through the three feed-through openings of the current
measuring module, and short-circuited. The secondary current of the external current
transformer is the primary current of the SIMOCODE pro current measuring module.
Note
If the main circuit is using rated current, the secondary current of the current transformer
must be within the setting range of the current measuring module used!
Figure 14-25 Measuring current with an external 3UF18 current transformer
Transformation ratio
The transformation ratio is calculated using the following formula:
In the following examples, the displayed actual current flowing does not need to be
converted, even when an interposing transformer is used, since SIMOCODE pro only
outputs the proportional value, based upon the parameterized set current Is.

14.4 Wiring
Technical data of the current transformer

● Secondary current: 1 A
● Frequency: 50 Hz / 60 Hz
● Transformer power: Recommended ≥ 2.5 VA, depending on the secondary current and
cable length
● Instrument security factor: 5P10 or 10P10
● Accuracy class: 1
Example 1
● 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
– Primary current: 820 A at nominal load
– Secondary current: 1 A
● SIMOCODE pro with current measuring module 3UF7100-1AA00-0, set current
0.3 A to 3 A. This means:
– The secondary current of the current transformer is 1 A at rated load and is, therefore,
within the 0.3 to 3 A setting range of the current measuring module used
– The set current Is to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 1 A.
Figure 14-26 Example (1 of 2) for measuring current with an 3UF18 external current transformer

14.4 Wiring
Example 2
● 3UF1868-3GA00 current transformer:
– Primary current: 205 A at nominal load
– Secondary current: 0.25 A
● SIMOCODE pro with current measuring module 3UF7100-1AA00-0, set current 0.3 to 3
A. This means:
– The secondary current of the current transformer is 0.25 A at rated load and is,
therefore, not within the 0.3 to 3 A setting range of the current measuring module
used.
– The secondary current must be boosted by multiple looping of the secondary cables
through the feed-through openings of the current measuring module. Double-looping
results in 2 x 0.25 A = 0.5 A.
– The set current Is to be parameterized in SIMOCODE pro is 0.5 A.
Figure 14-27 Example (2 of 2) for measuring current with an 3UF18 external current transformer
Note
If the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit as from version *E03* is used, the set current does not
have to be converted but is the same as the nominal primary current.
By additionally entering the transformation ratio of the current transformer (interposing
transformer), conversion will be performed automatically in the device.

14.5 System interfaces
14.5.1 General
Information about the system interfaces

● SIMOCODE pro system components are connected to each other via the system
interfaces. The system interfaces are provided on the front and bottom of the devices.
● Connecting cables of different lengths are available for connecting the system
components.
● The PC cables, addressing plugs, and memory modules can be plugged directly into the
system interface.
● The system is always configured according to the basic unit. Basic units have two system
interfaces:
– Lower/left: For outgoing connecting cable to the current measuring module.
– Front side: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module or
operator panel, or for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs.
● Current measuring modules have one system interface:
– Bottom or front: Incoming connecting cable from the basic unit.
● Expansion modules have 2 interfaces on the front.
– Left: For incoming connecting cables from the upstream expansion module or basic
unit SIMOCODE pro V.
– Right: For outgoing connecting cables leading to an expansion module or operator
panel, and for PC cables, memory modules or addressing plugs.
● Decoupling modules have 2 interfaces on the front:
– Left: For incoming connecting cable from the upstream expansion module or basic
unit.
– Right: Exclusively for the outgoing connecting cable to the current / voltage measuring
module.

● Operator panels have two system interfaces:

– Front side: For PC cables, memory modules and addressing plugs.
– Rear side: For incoming connecting cable from the upstream expansion module or
basic unit.
● System interfaces not in use are closed with the cover (see Closing the system interfaces
with the system interface cover (Page 457)).
WARNING
Hazardous voltage
Connect the system interfaces only when they are fully de-energized!
14.5.2 System interfaces on basic units, expansion modules, decoupling module,

current measuring modules and current / voltage measuring modules
Examples of connection of system components to the system interface and system structure
Close system interfaces not in use with the system interface cover (see Closing the system
interfaces with the system interface cover (Page 457).
WARNING
System interface on the operator panels (degree of protection IP54):
To ensure degree of protection IP 54
• press the cover into the socket as far as it will go when it is used for the first time!
• When fastening the operator panel with the screws supplied, do not apply an excessive
tightening torque.
WARNING
Hazardous voltage

The following figure shows an example of connecting system components to the system
interfaces - SIMOCODE pro C/V
Figure 14-28 Example of system interfaces - SIMOCODE pro C/V

The following figure shows an example of connecting system components to the system
interfaces - SIMOCODE pro S
Figure 14-29 Example of system interface - SIMOCODE pro S
The following figure shows an example of a SIMOCODE pro V system installation:
Figure 14-30 Example of SIMOCODE pro V installation

The following figure shows an example of a SIMOCODE pro S system installation:
Figure 14-31 Example of SIMOCODE pro S installation

Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface

Proceed as follows:
Table 14- 20 Connecting to the system interface
Step Description
1 Place the plug in the plug shaft, keeping it is as straight as possible. Ensure the locking
mechanisms of the connector slot audibly snap onto the connector enclosure.
2 System interfaces not in use can be closed using the system interface cover.
Figure 14-32 Sequence for connecting cables to the system interfaces

Safety guidelines
Note
With SIMOCODE pro C, the system interface on the bottom can only be used for the current
measuring module!
Note
Only a current / voltage measuring module may be connected to the right-hand system
interface of the decoupling module. Memory modules, addressing plugs or PC cables will not
be recognized there.
Note
Observe the color coding of the connecting cable (see diagram)!
14.5.3 System interfaces on the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
See System Manual SIMOCODE pro Safety fail-safe digital modules
connection."
14.5.4 System interfaces on the operator panel and the operator panel with display
System interfaces on the operator panel and the operator panel with display
The operator panel has two system interfaces:
● Rear side system interface. This is not normally accessible on an integrated operator
panel. The incoming cable from the basic unit or expansion module is always connected
here.
● Front system interface. This is normally accessible on an integrated operator panel.
Components are only connected directly when needed, and removed again after use.
These can be:
– Memory module
– Addressing plug
– PC cable for connecting a PC / PG
– Cover (if the system interface is not in use).

WARNING
Hazardous voltage
WARNING
tightening torque.
Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel and the operator panel
with display
Proceed as follows:
Table 14- 21 Connecting system components to the system interface
Step Description
1 Place the plug in the plug shaft, keeping it is as straight as possible. Ensure the locking
mechanisms of the connector slot audibly snap onto the connector enclosure.
The incoming connecting cable is connected on the rear.
2 System interfaces not in use can be closed using the system interface cover.
Note
Throughout connection, you can place the cover on one of the two "park positions" (see
figure below).
Note
Observe the color coding of the connecting cable (see diagram)!

Figure 14-33 Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel

Figure 14-34 Sequence for connecting cables to the system interface of the operator panel with
display

14.5.5 Closing the system interfaces with the system interface cover
Examples of closing the system interface with the system interface cover
Figure 14-35 Examples of closing the system interface with the system interface cover
WARNING
tightening torque.

14.6 PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D socket
14.6 PROFIBUS DP to a 9-pole SUB-D socket
PROFIBUS DP connection
The PROFIBUS DP can be connected to the basic unit.
System PROFIBUS DP via Sub-D PROFIBUS DP via terminals

A/B
SIMOCODE pro C 12 Mbaud 1.5 Mbaud
SIMOCODE pro S - 1.5 Mbaud
SIMOCODE pro V 12 Mbaud 1.5 Mbaud
Note
The 9-way SUB-D connection is an alternative to the A / B terminals!
Sequence for connecting PROFIBUS DP to the SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V basic units
Proceed as follows:
Table 14- 22 Sequence for connecting PROFIBUS DP to the basic unit
Step Description
1 Connect the PROFIBUS DP cable with the 9-pole SUB-D plug to the PROFIBUS DP
interface.
Figure 14-36 Connecting the PROFIBUS DP to the 9-way SUB-D socket

14.7 Mounting the bus terminal
14.7 Mounting the bus terminal
Sequence for mounting the bus terminal on the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
Proceed as follows:
Table 14- 23 Mounting the bus terminal on the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
Step Description
1 Screw the two PROFIBUS cables to the bus terminal as shown
2 Attach the bus terminal to the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit as shown.
Figure 14-37 Mounting the bus terminal on the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

14.8 Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP
Definition
The key data contained in this chapter is valid for Siemens products and cables.
PROFIBUS User Organization (PNO) installation guidelines

In the case of electric PROFIBUS networks, note also the PROFIBUS DP / FMS installation
guidelines defined by the PROFIBUS user organization. These contain important information
about cable routing and the commissioning of PROFIBUS networks.
Publisher:
PROFIBUS-Nutzerorganisation e. V.
Haid-und-Neu-Strasse 7
76131 Karlsruhe / Germany
Phone: ++49 721 965 85 90
Fax: ++49 721 965 85 89
Internet: PROFIBUS user organization (http://www.profibus.com)
Guideline: Order no. 2.111
See also Manual "SIMATIC NET PROFIBUS Networks
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/1971286)."

Application of bus termination modules

The 3UF1900-1K.00 bus termination module is primarily intended for use in MCC motor
feeders. It provides correct bus termination, even when MCC plug-in units have been
removed. The bus termination module can also be utilized when a standard SUB-D plug
cannot be used for the last device on a bus line.
The 3UF1900-1KA00 bus termination module can be connected to either a 220 / 230 V,
380 / 400 V, 115 / 120 V or 24 V AC supply. The 3UF1900-1KB00 type can be used for a
24 V DC supply.
Note
Use of SIMOCODE pro S basic units
In particular, when using SIMOCODE pro S basic units, use the bus termination module for
connecting a PROFIBUS segments.
Figure 14-38 Bus termination module


Commissioning and service 15
15.1 Commissioning and service - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find information about how SIMOCODE pro is commissioned, how
components are replaced and how statistics are read.
Target groups
● Technicians
Required knowledge
● Basic general knowledge about SIMOCODE pro
● Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES.

Commissioning and service
15.2 General information about commissioning and service
Safety guidelines
WARNING
Hazardous voltage!
Can cause electric shock and burns.
Before starting work, disconnect the system and the device from the power supply.
Note
Please also observe the following SIMOCODE pro Operating Instructions (supplied with the
devices):
Table 15- 1 Operating Instructions SIMOCODE pro
Device Order No. of Operating Instructions

Basic unit 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
Prerequisites
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled for commissioning and servicing:
● SIMOCODE pro is already installed and wired
● The motor is switched off.

Parameterization methods
You can parameterize SIMOCODE pro as follows:
● With the memory module in which the parameters have already been saved from a basic
unit. The memory module is plugged into the system interface. If the memory module is
connected to the system interface and the supply voltage returns to the basic unit, the
basic unit will be automatically parameterized by the memory module. The parameters
can also be downloaded to the basic unit from the memory module by pressing the
TEST / RESET button briefly.
● With the SIMOCODE ES software via serial or USB interface: The PC / PG is connected
to the system interface with a PC cable.
● With an automation system and/or SIMOCODE ES software via PROFIBUS DP. For this
purpose, the PROFIBUS DP cable is connected to the PROFIBUS DP interface of the
basic unit.
● With the initialization module in which the parameters have already been saved from a
basic unit. The initialization module is permanently installed in the switchboard in a Motor
Control Center (MCC). If a withdrawable unit with a SIMOCODE pro S or
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit into the MCC and the power supply returns to the basic unit,
it will automatically be parameterized by the initialization module.
Commissioning options
There are two commissioning options:
1. Standard case: SIMOCODE pro has not yet been parameterized and has the factory
setting: If it is connected to the PROFIBUS DP, the green "Bus" LED flashes when a DP
master is connected.
2. SIMOCODE pro has already been parameterized:
– The parameters have already been loaded into the basic unit.
– The parameters from a previous application still exist. Check whether the parameters
(e.g. the set current) are correct for the new application. Change these accordingly, if
necessary.

15.3 Commissioning
15.3 Commissioning
15.3.1 Step sequence

Please observe the information in Chapter General information about commissioning and
service (Page 464).
To commission SIMOCODE pro, proceed as follows:
Table 15- 2 Commissioning the basic unit
Step Description
1 Switch on the power supply. In a fault-free state, the following LEDS should light up or flash
green:
• "Device" (lights up)
• "Bus" if PROFIBUS DP is connected (lights up or flashes).
Proceed to Step 2.
Otherwise, carry out diagnostics according to the LED display. For more information, see
Chapter Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel (Page 468).
Try to rectify the fault.
2 If you wish to make SIMOCODE pro available on the PROFIBUS DP, set the PROFIBUS DP
address. For more information, see Chapter Setting the PROFIBUS DP address (Page 467).
3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro or check the existing parameterization, e.g. with a PC on which
SIMOCODE ES software is installed. For this, connect the PC / PG to the system interface
with the PC cable (see the figure below).
Notice
With SIMOCODE pro C use the system interface on the front and with SIMOCODE pro S use
the right-hand system interface.
Figure 15-1 Connecting a PC to the basic unit

15.3 Commissioning
15.3.2 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Note
This setting cannot be made if the TEST / RESET button has been blocked.
Proceed as follows:
Table 15- 3 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing plug
Step Description
1 Set the desired valid address on the DIP switch.
The switches are numbered.
For example, address 21: Put the "16"+"4"+"1" switches in the "ON" position.
2 Plug the addressing plug into the system interface. The "Device" LED is lighted yellow.
3 Briefly press the TEST / RESET button. The address you set is now stored. The "Device" LED
flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
4 Remove the addressing plug from the system interface.
Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE ES

Proceed as follows:
Table 15- 4 Setting the PROFINET address with SIMOCODE ES
Step Description
1 Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
3 Open menu Switching Device > Open online.
4 Select RS232 and the corresponding COM interface.
Click OK to confirm.
5 Open the Device parameters > Bus parameters dialog box.
6 Select the DP address.
7 Save the data in the basic unit with Target System > Load to switching device. The address is
set.
Setting the PROFIsafe address on DM-F PROFIsafe

See Chapter Safety-oriented tripping (Page 336).

15.3 Commissioning
15.3.3 Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on the operator panel
The basic units and the operating panel have three LEDs for displaying specific device
states:
Table 15- 5 Diagnostics via LED display
LED Status Display Description Corrective measures for

faults
Device Device Green Device ON -
status Flickering green Internal fault Send the basic unit in for
repair
Yellow Memory module or -
addressing plug
recognized, Test/Reset
buttons control the
memory module or
addressing plug
Yellow flashing Memory module / _
addressing plug read in;
factory settings restored
(duration: 3 s)
Yellow flickering Memory module -
programmed (duration:
3 s)
Red Parameterization Parameterize again, then
incorrect (also Gen. Fault switch the control voltage
on) off and on again
Basic unit defective (also Replace the basic unit!
Gen. Fault on)
Red flashing Memory module, Reprogram/replace the m
addressing plug, emory module, replace
expansion modules the expansion modules
defective (also Gen. Fault
on - flashing)
Off Supply voltage too low Check whether the supply
voltage is
connected/switched on
Bus Bus status Off Bus not connected or bus Connect the bus or check
fault the bus parameters
Green flashing Baud rate -
recognized / communicati
on with PC / programming
device
Green Communication with -
PLC/PCS
Gen. Fault Fault status Red Fault pending; reset has Rectify fault, e.g.,
been saved overload
Red flashing Fault pending; reset has Rectify fault, e.g.,
not been saved overload
Off No fault -

15.3 Commissioning
15.3.4 Diagnostics via LED display on the modules DM-F Local or DM-F PROFIsafe
See Chapter Technical data of the DM-F LOCAL digital module (Page 613) and Technical
data of the DM-F-PROFIsafe digital module (Page 615) or Manual "Fail-safe digital modules
SIMOCODE pro SAFETY." (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)

15.4 Service
15.4 Service
15.4.1 Preventive maintenance
Preventive maintenance - general information

Preventive maintenance is an important step towards avoiding faults and unforeseen costs.
Industrial plants require regular professional maintenance, for example, to avoid production
losses due to plant downtimes. Preventive maintenance ensures that all components are
always kept in perfect working order.
Reading out statistical data

SIMOCODE pro makes statistical data available that can, for example, be read out with
SIMOCODE ES under Target System > Service data / statistical data. For example, based
on "Motor operating hours" and "Number of starts," you can decide whether motor and / or
motor contactors should be replaced.

15.4 Service
Figure 15-2 Reading out statistical data

15.4 Service
15.4.2 Backing up and saving parameters
Core statement
Always save the parameters in the memory module or in a SIMOCODE ES file. This
particularly applies if you replace a basic unit, or if you wish to transfer data from one basic
unit to another.
Saving parameters from the basic unit into the memory module
Note
This function will not be available if the TEST / RESET button has been disabled.
Proceed as follows:
Table 15- 6 Saving the parameters into the memory module
Step Description
1. Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow for
approx. 10 seconds. During this time, press the "TEST / RESET" button for approx.
3 seconds. The parameters will be saved in the memory module. After successful data
transfer, the "Device" LED flickers yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
2. If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.
Saving parameters from the basic unit into a SIMOCODE ES file
Note
Proceed as follows:
Table 15- 7 Saving parameters to a SIMOCODE ES file
Step Description
1. Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2. Start SIMOCODE ES.
3. Open the menu Target System > Load into PC. The parameters are loaded into the main
memory from the basic unit.
4. Open menu Switching Device > Save copy as ..... The parameters are saved from the main
memory into a SIMOCODE ES file.

15.4 Service
Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit
Note
Proceed as follows:
Table 15- 8 Saving parameters from the memory module into the basic unit
Step Description
1. Plug the memory module into the system interface. The "Device" LED lights up yellow for
approx. 10 seconds. During this time, briefly press the "TEST / RESET" button. The
parameters will be transferred to the basic unit. After successful data transfer, the "Device"
LED flashes yellow for approx. 3 seconds.
2. If necessary, unplug the memory module from the system interface.
Note
If the memory module is plugged in, the parameters will be transferred from the memory
module to the basic unit when the supply voltage is switched on.
Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into the basic unit

Proceed as follows:
Table 15- 9 Saving parameters from a SIMOCODE ES file into the basic unit
Step Description
1. Plug the PC cable into the system interface.
2. Start SIMOCODE ES.
3. Open menu Switching Device > Open. The parameters from the SIMOCODE ES file are
loaded into the main memory.
4. Open menu Target System > Load to Switching Device. The parameters will be saved into
the basic unit from the main memory.

15.4 Service
15.4.3 Replacing SIMOCODE pro components
Safety guidelines
WARNING
Requirements
The main power for the feeder and the supply voltage for the basic unit must be switched
off before replacing current measuring modules and current / voltage measuring modules.
Note
Please observe the information contained in the Operating Instructions!
Note
It is not necessary to detach the wiring from the removable terminals to replace the
components!
Replacing the basic unit

Proceed as follows:
Table 15- 10 Replacing the basic unit
Step Description
1. Save the parameters. For information on this, see Chapter Backing up and saving
parameters (Page 472).
2. Switch off the main power for the unit feeder and the power supply for the basic unit.
3. Withdraw the PC cable if necessary, then remove the cover or the connecting cable from the
system interface.
4. Withdraw the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
5. Dismantle the basic unit.
6. Withdraw the removable terminals from the new basic unit.
7. Mount the new basic unit.
8. Connect the wired, removable terminals.
9. Connect the cables to the system interfaces.
10. Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
11. Save the parameters into the basic unit. For information on this, see Chapter Backing up
and saving parameters (Page 472).
12. Switch on the main power for the unit feeder.

15.4 Service
Replacing an expansion module or a decoupling module

Proceed as follows:
Table 15- 11 Replacing an expansion module or a decoupling module
Step Description
1. Switch off the main power for the feeder and switch off the power supply for the basic unit
and the DM-F.
2. Withdraw the PC cable if necessary, then remove the cover or the connecting cable from the
system interface.
3. Withdraw the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
4. Remove the expansion module or decoupling module.
5. Withdraw the removable terminals from the new basic expansion module or decoupling
module.
6. Install the new expansion module or decoupling module.
7. Connect the wired, removable terminals.
8. Connect the cables to the system interfaces.
9. Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
10. Switch on the main power for the unit feeder.
Replacing a DM-F
Proceed as follows:
Table 15- 12 Replacing a DM-F
Step Description
1 First, switch off the main power for the feeder and then the supply voltage for the basic unit
and the DM-F.
2 Withdraw the PC cable if necessary, then remove the cover or the connecting cable from the
system interface.
3 Withdraw the removable terminals. You do not need to detach the wiring.
4 Dismantle the DM-F.
5 Withdraw the removable terminals from the new DM-F.
6 Mount the new DM-F.
7 Connect the wired, removable terminals.
8 Connect the cables to the system interfaces.
9 DM-F PROFIsafe only:
Set the DIP switches for the PROFIsafe address according to the configuration in the F-
controller (see Chapter "Configuring the DM-F PROFIsafe and integrating it into the fail-safe
automation system" in the System Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro
SAFETY (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)).
10 Switch on the power supply for the DM-F and the basic unit.
11 DM-F Local only
Configure the DM-F Local correctly (see Chapter "Configuring the DM-F Local" in the
System Manual Fail-safe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro SAFETY
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852))
12 Switch on the main power for the unit feeder.

15.4 Service
Replacing the current measuring module and the current / voltage measuring module
Proceed as follows:
Table 15- 13 Replacing the current measuring module and the current / voltage measuring module
Step Description
1 Switch off the main power for the unit feeder and the power supply for the basic unit.
2 Pull out the connecting cable from the system interface.
3 Remove the removable terminal from the module as illustrated below (current / voltage
measuring modules only).
4 Disconnect the three cables of the three phases of the main circuit.
5 Replace the module (see Chapter Mounting of current measuring modules (Page 411) and
Chapter Mounting the current / voltage measuring modules (Page 412)).
6 Connect the three cables of the main circuit, leading them through the feed-hole openings.
7 Plug the removable terminals onto the module (current / voltage measuring modules only).
8 Connect the cable to the system interface.
9 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit.
10 Switch on the main power for the unit feeder.
Figure 15-3 Replacing current / voltage measuring modules
15.4.4 Restoring factory settings

With the factory settings, all parameters are reset to the factory values.

15.4 Service
Restoring the factory settings with the TEST / RESET button on the basic unit
Proceed as follows (also deletes any previous password setting!):
Table 15- 14 Restoring the factory settings with the TEST / RESET button
Step Description
1 Switch off the supply voltage for the basic unit.
2 Press the TEST / RESET button on the basic unit and keep it pressed.
3 Switch on the supply voltage for the basic unit. The "Device" LED is lighted yellow.
4 Release the TEST / RESET button after approx. two seconds.
5 Press the TEST / RESET button again after approx. two seconds.
6 Release the TEST / RESET button after approx. two seconds.
7 Press the TEST / RESET button again after approx. two seconds.
8 The factory setting is restored.
Note
If any of the steps stated above are not carried out correctly, the basic unit will revert to
normal operation.
Note
This function is always active, irrespective of the "TEST / RESET keys disabled" parameter.
Restoring the factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software

Prerequisite: SIMOCODE pro is connected to the PC / PG via PROFIBUS DP or via the
system interface and SIMOCODE ES is started.
Proceed as follows (resets to factory settings, excluding the password):
Table 15- 15 Restoring the factory settings with the SIMOCODE ES software
Step Description
1. Select menu item Switching Device > Open online.
2. From the menu, select Target system > Command > Factory Settings.
3. Confirm with "Yes".
4. The factory setting is restored.

15.5 Reading our error buffer / error log (protocol)

Timestamping in the error buffer is based on the operating hours (resolution: 1 s) of
SIMOCODE pro.
The "Error/Fault" and "Power - On" events are logged. Each of these events is given a time
stamp.
● Error/Fault: The last 21 errors are stored in a ring buffer; the incoming error (rising edge)
is always logged. An outgoing error (falling edge) will not be logged.
● Power on: If the most recent entry is "Power - On," this is not logged multiple times.
Instead, the error number is used as a power-on counter. Thus, the error buffer cannot be
deleted by frequent on/off operations.
Entry 1 is the most recent entry and entry 21 the oldest.
The data will be displayed via the "SIMOCODE ES" software.
Example:
Figure 15-4 Example of event logging using the "SIMOCODE ES" software
SIMOCODE pro has an error buffer, in which the 21 most recent errors / faults, "power-on"
events are recorded with a time stamp. Time stamps are based upon the operating hours of
the device (resolution 1 s), i.e. the length of time for which the device is supplied with control
supply voltage.

Example:
The most recent "power-on" event was logged at a device operating time of 17 days,
21 hours and 31 minutes. Therefore, at the moment of "Power - On", the device was
operating (supplied with voltage) for 17d 21h 31min. The "Number of starts >" fault was
logged at a device operating time of 18 days, 22 hours, 17 minutes, i.e. 24h 46min after the
most recent "power-on."
When using a DM-F, the events "Enabling circuit closed" and "Enabling circuit open" are
logged for the DM-F Local and/or the DM-F PROFIsafe in a separate window:
● Time
● Event: "Enabling circuit closed" or "Enabling circuit open"
– Number:
Line 1 200 or 202
Line 2 201 or 203
– Text:
Line 1 "DM-F Local enabling circuit 0 -> 1" or "DM-F PROFIsafe enabling circuit 0 ->
1"
Line 2 "DM-F Local enabling circuit 1 -> 0" or "DM-F PROFIsafe enabling circuit 1 ->
0."
The current DIP switch position of the DM-F Local and/or the DM-F PROFIsafe is displayed
under "DIP switch position DM-F during the last event"
See also Chapter Data record 72 - Error buffer (Page 523).

15.6 Event memory
15.6 Event memory

In addition to the error buffer, various events can be stored in the event buffer
Note
This event memory is supported by the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit as from firmware
version V3.0.
The following events are stored:
• last event "DM-F enabling circuit closed"
• last event "DM-F enabling circuit open"
• Initialization module read in
• Initialization module written.
See also Chapter Data record 73 - Event memory (Page 524).

Alarms, faults and system events 16
16.1 Alarms, faults, and system events - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter you will find information about troubleshooting.
Target groups
● Service and maintenance personnel
● PLC programmers
Required knowledge
● Knowledge about SIMOCODE ES software

Alarms, faults and system events
16.2 Alarms, faults, and system events - error handling
Table 16- 1 Alarm, fault, and system messages
Event Description Troubleshooting Acknowledgment / Contactor control Error

(alphabetical) fault rectification No.*)
Analog module An open circuit has Check the measured value Reset 64
open circuit occurred in the analog sensor and the measuring
value measuring circuit. circuit.
Startup The startup parameter
parameter block prevents transfer of
block active SIMOCODE pro
parameters that can be
saved in the DP master.
The block must be set if
• SIMOCODE ES or
• SIMATIC PDM is used
for parameterizing.
The block may not be set if
• SIMOCODE pro C/S/V
is integrated in STEP7
via the SIMOCODE pro
Object Manager (OM),
or
• SIMOCODE pro C has
been parameterized via
GSD.
Notice
On devices in the as-
delivered condition or after
the factory settings have
been restored, the
parameter block is not
active!
Antivalence Only for positioner 5 Limit switch defect, open Tripped
control function: The circuit limit switch
change-over contacts of
the limit switch do not
issue an antivalent signal.
Configuration The configured unit • Check whether all the Rectify the proble Tripped 3
error configuration does not configured components m; reset
match the actual are available
configuration.
• Check the actual
configuration with
"Configuration".


Execution The motor feeder could not • The contactor contact Rectify the Tripped 9
STOP be turned off after a STOP is welded problem; reset
command command was issued.
• Parameter execution
time is too short
• The "open" end
position has not been
reached during the
parameterized runtime
(only for the
"Positioner" and
"Solenoid valve" control
functions).
Execution ON The motor feeder could not • Main circuit is Reset or Tripped 8
command be turned on after an ON interrupted (fuse, circuit OFF command/
command is issued. breaker) counter command
• The motor contactor or
contactor control is
defective
• Parameter execution
time is too short.
Trip level The power factor (cos phi) Please check the Tripped 44
Cos Phi< has undershot the trip application that is being
level. Possible causes: The driven by the motor.
motor is being operated
without a load.
Trip level I < The maximum current has Please check the Tripped 41
undershot undershot the trip level. application that is being
driven by the motor.
Trip level I > The maximum current has Please check the Tripped 40
overshot overshot the trip level. application that is being
driven by the motor.
Trip level P < The active power of the Please check the Tripped 43
undershot motor has undershot the application that is being
trip level. driven by the motor.
Trip level P > The active power of the Please check the Tripped 42
overshot motor has overshot the trip application that is being
level. driven by the motor.
Trip level U < The voltage in the motor Check the motor feeder. Tripped 45
undershot feeder has undershot the
trip level. Possible causes:
• Undervoltage in the
network
• Fuse has tripped.
Trip level The measured value at the Check the measuring Tripped 47
0/4 - 20 mA < analog input has undershot station.
undershot the trip level.


Trip level The measured value at the Check the measuring Tripped 46
0/4 - 20 mA > analog input has overshot station.
overshot the trip level.
Operational An "Operational Protection Reset Tripped; for 19
Protection Off (OPO)" signal is positioners: QE1
Off (OPO) pending. A switched-on or QE2 switched
motor feeder has been on until end
switched off. The feeder position is
cannot be switched on reached -
while the OPO signal is depending upon
active. configuration
Motor operating The configured limit value Please adopt the
hours > for motor operating hours maintenance measures
monitoring has been intended for the feeder.
exceeded.
Stalled rotor The maximum motor Please check the Reset Tripped 48
current has exceeded the application that is being
threshold for stalled rotor driven by the motor.
protection. Possible
causes: The motor is
blocked.
Stalled The torque switch has • The positioner may be Counter command Tripped 12
positioner activated before or without blocked. "OPEN /
the respective limit switch. CLOSED!"
• Acknowledge the fault
by releasing with the
"OPEN/CLOSED"
counter command.
• Please check the
positioner application
and the limit switches.
DM-F feedback The DM-F Local or DM- • Check the wiring of the Rectify fault so Tripped
circuit F PROFIsafe has detected feedback circuit that the feedback
a fault in the feedback circuit is closed.
circuit (the feedback circuit • Check the contact
must be closed as the blocks in the feedback
enabling circuit is switched circuit.
on); The "GF" (general
fault) LED on the front of
the DM-F Local or DM-F
PROFIsafe is flashing red.
DM-F safety- The DM-F has tripped the The motor can only be Acknowledge with Tripped 66
related tripping enabling circuit for safety switched on again after the "Reset", if auto-
reasons. DM-F module enabling reset is not active.
circuits have been closed.
DM-F test The enabling circuits of the The function of the Please apply the
requirement DM-F Local or DM- enabling circuit relay maintenance
F PROFIsafe have not contacts can only be tested measures
been opened and closed when they are switched. prescribed for this
again within the configured Perform a function test. scenario.
time period.


DM-F wiring DM-F module wiring fault • Check the wiring of the Reset Tripped 67
(short-circuit to ground in sensor circuits /
the sensor circuit/feedback feedback circuit
circuit); the "GF" (general
fault) LED on the front of • Rectify the fault.
the DM-F Local is lighted
red.
DM-FL actual The actual configuration of Check whether the
and set the DM-F Local does not effective configuration of
configuration correspond to the the DM-F Local
different parameterized set corresponds to the
configuration. parameterized set
configuration. Correct the
effective configuration by
changing the DIP switch
settings or adjusting the
set configuration by means
of parameterization if
required.
DM-FL The DM-F LOCAL has Check the switching Rectify the fault by Tripped
simultaneity detected a discrepancy elements in the sensor opening or closing
error in the 2-channel circuit. the sensor inputs
sensor circuit.
DM-FL The DM-F Local is in Complete the configuration
configuration "configuration mode"; the (see Manual SIMOCODE
mode "DEVICE" LED on the front pro Safety fail-safe digital
of the DM-F Local is modules
lighted yellow. (http://support.automation.
siemens.com/WW/view/en/
50564852), Chapter 7.4).
DM-FL cross Cross circuit in sensor • Check the wiring of Reset Tripped 68
circuit circuit of DM-F Local; the both sensor circuits for
"GF" (general fault) LED cross circuiting
on the front of the DM-F
Local is lighted red. • Rectify the fault.
DM-FL waiting The DM-F LOCAL is in the Perform the startup test by
for startup test "Waiting for start-up test" actuating the sensor in the
status. sensor circuit.
DM-FP Prm The parameter settings of Check the PROFIBUS /
error the PROFIsafe profile are PROFIsafe parameters of
incorrect or the set SIMOCODE pro that were
PROFIsafe address is not set on the DP master
identical to the configured system.
address.
Double 0 Both torque switches have • Open circuit torque Tripped 13
activated simultaneously. switch.
The motor feeder has been
turned off. • Torque switch is
defective.
Double 1 Both limit switches have Limit switch is defective. Tripped 14
activated simultaneously.


End position Except positioner 5 control Counter command Tripped 15
function: The state of the "OPEN / CLOSED
limit switch has changed !"
without a command
(positioner has left the end
position without a
command).
Ground-fault A short-circuit has Check the line to the Rectify the Tripped
module short- occurred in the wiring to residual current problem; reset
circuit the residual current transformer
transformer
External ground External ground-fault Please check the motor Reset Tripped 29
fault monitoring has responded. connection cable for
An impermissibly high damage.
residual current is flowing.
External Fault A signal is pending at the Check the motor feeder. Tripped 56,
1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 input (socket) of the 57,
"External fault 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 58,
or 6" standard function. 59,
60,
61
Required At least one parameterized Activate only the functions
function is not function is not supported that are supported by the
supported by the version of the basic version of the basic unit.
unit. For example,
SIMOCODE pro V basic
units with the version
*E01* do not support
voltage measurement, the
temperature module, or the
analog module.
Hardware fault The SIMOCODE pro basic Replace the basic unit. Rectify the fault Tripped 0
unit hardware is defective. See Chapter Replacing
SIMOCODE pro
components (Page 474).
Initialization The initialization module is Deactivate write protection
module write- completely write-protected. of the initialization module.
protected
Initialization The initialization modules Deactivate write protection
module write- is completely or partially of the initialization module.
protected, write-protected.
parameter Reparameterization of
changes not SIMOCODE pro is denied
allowed because the initialization
module is write-protected.


Initialization Reparameterization has • Select a
module - been rejected because the parameterization with
identification initialization module is identical addressing
data write- write-protected. and I&M data
protected
• Deactivate the partial
write protection of the
initialization module.
Initialization The parameters of the
module read in initialization module were
read into SIMOCODE.
Initialization The reparameterization
module was accepted in the
programmed initialization module.
Initialization The initialization module
module cleared has been cleared and is
now back in the as-
delivered condition.
Internal ground Internal ground-fault Please check the motor Reset Tripped 28
fault monitoring response. An connection cable for
impermissibly high residual damage.
current is flowing.
No start The permissible number of Reset Tripped
possible starts in the monitoring
timeframe has been
attained. The next start
should not be carried out
until the interlocking time
has expired.
Module fault At least 1 SIMOCODE pro • Connecting cable Rectify the Tripped 1
module is not ready for defective or incorrectly problem; reset
use. connected
Module defective.
Replace the module.
See Chapter Replacing
SIMOCODE pro
components
(Page 474).
Module supply Supply voltage on the DM- • The terminals are not Rectify the Tripped
voltage is not F Local is too low or not wired properly problem; reset
present present.
• Module defective.
Please replace the
module. See Chapter
Replacing
SIMOCODE pro
components
(Page 474).


Power failure The power failure lasted Rectify the fault; Tripped 18
(UVO) longer than the set power reset or OFF
failure time. command
Just one start The start after the next one
possible should not be carried out
until the interlocking time
has expired.
Parameter is The parameter data is The designation of the Rectify the Tripped 4
incorrect incorrect. faulty parameter can be problem; reset
("general fault" found via the number (byte
category) No.) in the System Manual,
ChapterTables (Page 493).
Parameter is The parameter data Check the parameter data
incorrect transferred to the unit is (data records 130 through
("Event" incorrect. Errors in the 133) that has been
category) parameter data can occur, transmitted to the device
for example, if the device for the correct content.
has not been
parameterized with
SIMOCODE ES or
SIMATIC PDM.
Parameter You attempted to change Many parameters can only
changes not at least one parameter that be changed if the motor
allowed in the cannot be changed in the feeder is switched off and
current current operating state. not in "Remote" mode. The
operating state following parameters can
always be changed: See
Chapter Data formats and
data records (Page 513).
Wrong SIMOCODE pro Please use the correct
password parameters are protected password for changing the
by a password. An attempt parameters. If you do not
has been made to change know the password, new
the parameters without parameters can only be
entering the password. entered after the factory
settings have been
restored. For a description
of how to restore the
factory settings, see
Chapter Restoring factory
settings (Page 476).
Phase The limit value for phase Check the motor feeder Reset Tripped 25
unbalance unbalance has been and the motor.
exceeded. Phase
unbalance can cause an
overload. Possible causes:
• Phase failure
• Fault in the motor
windings.


Feedback OFF The current flow in the • The main circuit has Reset or OFF Tripped 11
motor feeder has been been interrupted (fuse, command
interrupted without the circuit breaker, main
motor feeder being turned
switch).
off.
• The motor contactor or
contactor control is
defective
Feedback ON Current is flowing in the • Contactor contacts Rectify the fault; Tripped 10
motor feeder without the have been manually reset or OFF
motor feeder being activated command
switched on
• Contactor has not been
switched on via
SIMOCODE
Test Position Current is flowing in the The main circuit is not Reset or OFF Tripped 17
Feedback motor feeder although the interrupted in test command
(TPF) motor feeder is in the test operation.
position (TPF).
Status - The motor feeder has been The motor can only be
Cooling down switched off due to switched on again after the
period active overload. cooling down period has
expired.
Status - DM-F Shows the status of the
enabling circuit enabling circuit:
• closed or
• tripped
Status - The thermal memory has The motor can be switched
Emergency been cleared with the on again immediately after
start executed function "Emergency start". an overload trip.
Status - Test The motor feeder is in the
position (TPF) test position (TPF). The
main circuit has been
interrupted and the feeder
can be "cold started".
Stop time > The configured limit value Please take the
for motor stop time maintenance measures
monitoring has been intended for the feeder. If
exceeded. possible, switch on the
feeder.
Fault - bus PROFIBUS DP Check the PROFIBUS Reset, auto-reset Tripped 5
communication has been connection (plugs, cables,
interrupted or is etc.).
interrupted.
Fault - The PLC that controls the Check the operating state Reset, auto-reset Tripped 6
PLC/PCS feeder was or is in STOP of the PLC.
mode.


Trip antivalence The limit switches are not • Limit switch open circuit Counter command Tripped 16
reporting any antivalent "OPEN/CLOSED"
• Please check the
signals.
positioner application
and the limit switches.
Fault - A short circuit has occurred Check the line to the Reset 38
EM open circuit in the wiring to the 3UL23 residual current
3UL23 residual current transformer
transformer.
Fault - A short-circuit has Check the line to the Reset 39
EM short-circuit occurred in the wiring to 3UL23 residual current
the 3UL23 residual current transformer
transformer.
Trip end Positioner/solenoid valve Acknowledge the fault by Reset; counter Tripped 15
position has left the end position releasing with the counter command
without a command being command
issued. The motor feeder "OPEN/CLOSED."
has been turned off.
Fault - One of the following Replace the defective Rectify the Tripped 2
temporary components is defective: components. See Chapter problem; reset
components Replacing SIMOCODE pro
• Addressing plug
(e.g. memory components (Page 474).
module) • Memory module
• PC cable.
Temperature The temperature trip level Check the temperature 35
module trip has been overshot. measuring station.
level overshot
Temperature The temperature warning Check the temperature
module warning level has been exceeded. measuring station.
level exceeded
Temperature Temperature sensor is Check the temperature Reset Tripped 37
module out of delivering impermissible sensor.
range values.
Temperature Either a short circuit or an Check the temperature Rectify the Tripped 36
module sensor open circuit has occurred sensor and the sensor problem; reset
fault in the temperature sensor cable.
circuit.
Test trip The motor feeder has been Reset Tripped 65
checked and switched off
by a test trip.
Thermistor trip Thermistor protection Please check the motor Reset, auto-reset Tripped 31
level response. The temperature and the application that is
of the motor is too high. being driven by the motor.
The motor cannot be
switched on again until the
temperature has reached
the reset point of the
thermistor.


Thermistor An open circuit has Check the thermistor Rectify the Tripped 33
open circuit occurred in the thermistor sensor cable and the problem; reset
sensor cable. thermistor.
Thermistor A short circuit has occurred Check the thermistor Rectify the Tripped 32
short circuit in the thermistor sensor sensor cable and the problem; reset
cable. thermistor.
Overload The motor feeder has been Please check the motor Reset, auto-reset Tripped 26
overloaded. and the application that is
being driven by the motor.
The motor can be switched
on again after the cooling
down period has expired or
after an emergency start.
Overload and There is a load unbalance Check the motor feeder Reset, auto-reset Tripped 27
unbalance on the motor feeder and the motor. The motor
phases. Possible causes: can be switched on again
after the cooling down
• Phase failure
period has expired or after
• Fault in the motor an emergency start.
windings.
Pre-warning The motor feeder is in Please check the motor
overload overload operation. If this and the application that is
(I > 115 %) condition continues to being driven by the motor.
persist, the motor feeder
will trip within a short
period of time due to
overload.
Warning level The power factor cos phi Please check the
cos phi < has undershot the warning application that is being
level. Possible causes: The driven by the motor.
motor is being operated
without a load.
Warning The maximum current has Please check the
level I < undershot the warning application that is being
undershot level. driven by the motor.
Warning The maximum current has Please check the
level I > overshot the warning level. application that is being
overshot driven by the motor.
Warning The active power of the Please check the
level P < motor has undershot the application that is being
undershot warning level. driven by the motor.
Warning The active power of the Please check the
level P > motor has overshot the application that is being
overshot warning level. driven by the motor.


Warning The voltage in the motor Check the motor feeder.
level U < feeder has undershot the
undershot warning level. Possible
causes:
• Undervoltage in the
network
• Fuse has tripped.
Warning The measured value at the Check the measuring
level 0/4 - analog input has undershot station.
20 mA < the warning level.
undershot
Warning level The measured value at the Check the measuring
0/4 - 20 mA > analog input has overshot station.
overshot the warning level.
Permissible The permissible number of Reset Tripped 52
number of starts in the monitoring
starts exceeded timeframe has already
been exceeded. The next
start should not be carried
out until the interlocking
time has expired.
*) See also "Error number" in Chapter Data record 72 - Error buffer (Page 523)

Tables 17
17.1 Tables - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find various tables that can help you when working with
SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target group: Configuring engineers.
Required knowledge
You need sound knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.

Tables
17.2 Active control stations, contactor controls, lamp controls and status
information for the control functions
Table 17- 1 Active control stations of control functions
Designation / control function Control station

ON << ON < OFF ОN > ON >>
Overload 1) 2) 3) - - - - -
contactor 3)

Tables
Table 17- 2 Contactor control with control functions
Designation / control function Contactor control

QE1 QE2 QE3 QE4 QE5
Overload 1) 2) 3) - - Active - -
Direct-on-line starter 1) 2) 3) ON - - - -
Reversing starter 1) 2) 3) CW CCW - - -
Circuit breaker 1) 2) 3) ON pulse - OFF pulse - -
Star-delta starter 2) 3) Star Delta Line - -
contactor contactor contactor
Star-delta reversing starter 3) Star Delta RIGHT line LEFT line -
contactor contactor contactor contactor
Dahlander 3) FAST SLOW Star - -
contactor
FAST
Dahlander reversing starter 3) CW-FAST CW-SLOW Star CCW-SLOW CCW-FAST
contactor
FAST
Pole-changing starter 3) FAST SLOW - - -
Pole-changing reversing CW-FAST CW-SLOW - CCW-SLOW CCW-FAST
starter 3)
Solenoid valve 3) OPEN - - - -
Soft starter 2) 3) ON line - Reset ON -
contactor command
Soft starter with reversing RIGHT line LEFT line Reset ON -
contactor 3) contactor contactor command

Tables
Table 17- 3 Lamp control with control functions
Designation / control function Lamp control

QLE << QLE < QLA (OFF) QLE < QLE >>
(ON <<) ON <) (ON >) (ON >>)
Overload 1) 2) 3) - - - - -
Pole-changing reversing CCW-FAST CCW-SLOW OFF CW-SLOW CW-FAST
starter 3)
contactor 3)
1) SIMOCODE pro C
2) SIMOCODE pro S
3) SIMOCODE pro V

Tables
17.3 Abbreviations and specifications
Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
Table 17- 4 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
BU0 SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
BU1 SIMOCODE pro C basic unit
BU2 SIMOCODE Pro V basic unit
IM Current measuring module
UM Current / voltage measuring module
DM1 Digital module 1
DM-FL DM-F Local fail-safe digital module
DM-FP DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module
OP Operator panel
OPD Operator panel with display
AM Analog module
EM 3UF7500 ground-fault module
EM+ 3UF7510 ground-fault module
MM Multifunction module
TM Temperature module
Th Thermistor
GF Group fault, control function
Cycl. Cyclic
Acycl. Acyclic
F Fault
M Status information
W Warning

Tables
Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:
Table 17- 5 Table specifications (example)
Designation Type Range Unit Information

Reserved Byte[4] *)
Cos phi Byte 0 ... 100 1% BU2
Reserved Byte[5] *)
Max. current I_max Word 0 ... 65535 1 % / Is BU0, BU1, BU2 **)
*) Items in italics are not relevant (reserved) and must be filled with "0" when written to.
**) Entry relevant for basic unit 1 and basic unit 2
Parameters that can be changed during operation
Event - PRM error number (bytes):

If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (PRM group) that
caused the error is communicated here.
Figure 17-1 Example for parameter group

Tables
17.4 Socket assignment table - digital

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (digital). You only need
these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user program to fill data records and
write them back.
Table 17- 6 Socket assignment table - digital
No. Designation Designation Information

0 Static level Not connected BU0 BU1 BU2
1 Fixed level ,0 BU0 BU1 BU2
2 Fixed level ,1 BU0 BU1 BU2
3 Reserved
4 Reserved
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 Reserved
8 Basic unit (BU) BU - Test / Reset button BU0 BU1 BU2
9 BU - Input 1 BU0 BU1 BU2
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
16 Digital module DM DM1 - Input 1 DM1 MM
17 DM1 - Input 2 DM1 MM
20 DM2 - Input 1 DM2
24 DM-FL sensor channel 1 Y12 DM-FL
25 DM-FL sensor channel 1 Y22 DM-FL
26 Reserved
27 Reserved
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 Reserved
31 Reserved

Tables

32 Operator panel OP / OPD OP - Test / Reset button OP OPD
33 OP - Button 1 OP OPD
37 Reserved
38 Reserved
39 Reserved
40 DPV1/RS-232 interface Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.0 BU0 BU1 BU2
41 (acyclic data) Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.1 BU0 BU1 BU2
42 Acyclic receive data - Bit 0.2 BU0 BU1 BU2
56 PLC/PCS Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.0 BU0 BU1 BU2
57 interface PLC [DPV0] (cyclic data) Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.1 BU0 BU1 BU2
58 Cyclic receive data - Bit 0.2 BU0 BU1 BU2

Tables

72 Enabled control command Enabled control command ON<< Dependent on the
73 Enabled control command ON< control function
74 Enabled control command - OFF

75 Enabled control command ON>
76 Enabled control command ON>>
77 Reserved
78 Reserved
79 Reserved
80 Contactor controls Contactor controls 1 QE1 Dependent on the
81 Contactor controls 2 QE2 control function
82 Contactor controls 3 QE3
85 Reserved
86 Reserved
87 Reserved
88 Lamp controls Display - QLE<<(ON<<) Dependent on the
89 Display - QLE<(ON<) control function
90 Indication - QLA (OFF)

91 Display - QLE>(ON>)
92 Display - QLE>>(ON>>)
93 Display - QLS (fault) BU0 BU1 BU2
94 Reserved
95 Reserved
96 Status information - General Status - General fault BU0 BU1 BU2
97 Status - General warning BU0 BU1 BU2
98 Status - Device BU0 BU1 BU2
99 Status - Bus BU0 BU1 BU2
100 Status - PLC/PCS BU0 BU1 BU2
101 Status - current flowing IM UM
102 Reserved
103 Reserved
104 Status information - Receive Status - ON<< Dependent on the
105 Status - ON< control function
106 Status - Off

107 Status - ON>
108 Status - ON>>
109 Status - Start active BU0 BU1 BU2
110 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing starters
and positioners
111 Status - Change-over pause active Star-delta, Dahlander,
pole-changing starters

Tables

112 Status - Runs in open direction Dependent on the
113 Status - Runs in close direction control function
114 Status - FC
115 Status - FO
116 Status - TC
117 Status - TO
118 Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU0 BU1 BU2
119 Status - OPO BU2
120 Status - Remote mode BU0 BU1 BU2
121 Status information - Protection Status - Emergency start executed IM UM
122 Status - Cooling down period active IM UM
123 Status - Pause time active IM UM
124 Status information - Miscellaneous Status - Device check active BU0 BU1 BU2
125 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM
126 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM
127 Status - DM-F enabling circuit DM-F
128 Events - Protection Event - Overload operation IM UM
129 Event - Unbalance IM UM
130 Event - Overload IM UM
131 Event - overload + phase failure IM UM
132 Event - internal ground fault IM UM
133 Event - external ground fault EM MM
134 Event - warning ext. ground fault EM MM
135 Event - Thermistor overload Th
136 Event - Thermistor short-circuit Th
137 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th
138 Event - TM warning T> TM MM
139 Event - TM trip T> TM MM
140 Event - TM sensor fault TM MM
141 Event - TM out of range TM MM
142 Event - EM+ open circuit EM+ MM
143 Event - EM+ short-circuit EM+ MM
144 Events - Level monitoring Event - Warning I> IM UM
145 Event - Warning I< IM UM
146 Event - Warning P> UM
147 Event - Warning P< UM
148 Event - Warning cos phi< UM
149 Event - Warning U< UM
150 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
151 Event - Warning 0/4 - 20 mA < AM
152 Event - Trip I> IM UM
153 Event - Trip I< IM UM

Tables

154 Event - Trip P> UM
155 Event - Trip P< UM
156 Event - Trip cos phi< UM
157 Event - Trip U< UM
158 Event - trip 0/4-20mA> AM
159 Event - trip 0/4-20mA< AM
160 Event - Stalled rotor IM UM
161 Reserved
162 Reserved
163 Event - no start permitted BU0 BU1 BU2
164 Event - No. of starts > BU0 BU1 BU2
165 Event - Just one start possible BU0 BU1 BU2
166 Event - motor operating hours > BU0 BU1 BU2
167 Event - Motor stop time > BU0 BU1 BU2
168 Event - Limit 1 BU2
172 Events - Miscellaneous Event - External fault 1 BU0 BU1 BU2
173 Event - External fault 2 BU0 BU1 BU2
176 Event - External fault 5 BU2
177 Event - External fault 6 BU2
178 Reserved
179 Reserved
180 Event - Analog module open circuit AM
181 Event - DM-F safety-related tripping DM-F
182 Event - DM-F - Test requirement DM-F
183 Reserved
184 Events - Time stamp function Event - Timestamping function active + OK BU2
185 Reserved
186 Events - Miscellaneous Event - DM-FL safety o.k DM-FL
187 Event - DM-FP PROFIsafe active DM-FP
188 Events - System interface Event - Configured operator panel missing BU0 BU1 BU2
189 Reserved
190 Warnings - Miscellaneous Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-F
191 Warning - DM-FL simultaneity DM-FL
192 Trips - General Fault - hardware fault basic unit BU0 BU1 BU2
193 Fault - Module fault (e.g. IM, DM) BU0 BU1 BU2
194 Fault - temporary components (e.g. memory module) BU0 BU1 BU2
195 Fault - configuration error BU0 BU1 BU2

Tables

196 Fault - parameterization BU0 BU1 BU2
197 Fault - bus BU0 BU1 BU2
198 Fault - PLC/PCS BU0 BU1 BU2
199 Reserved
200 Faults - control Fault - execution time ON Not for overload relays
201 Fault - execution time OFF
202 Fault - feedback (FB) ON
203 Fault - feedback (FB) OFF
204 Fault - stalled positioner Positioner
205 Fault - double 0 Solenoid valve /
positioner
206 Fault - double 1 Solenoid valve /
positioner
207 Fault - end position Solenoid valve /
positioner
208 Fault - antivalence Positioner
209 Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF) BU0 BU1 BU2
210 Fault - power failure (UVO) BU2
211 Fault - Operational Protection Off (OPO) BU2
212 Reserved
213 Reserved
214 Reserved
215 Reserved
216 Freely-programmable elements Truth table 1 3I/1O output BU0 BU1 BU2
217 Truth table 2 3I/1O output BU0 BU1 BU2
218 Truth table 3 3I/1O output BU0 BU1 BU2
219 Truth table 4 3I/1O output BU0 BU2
220 Truth table 5 3I/1O output BU2
221 Truth table 6 3I/1O output BU2
224 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 1 BU2
225 Truth table 9 5I/2O output 2 BU2
226 Reserved
227 Reserved
228 Reserved
229 Reserved
230 Reserved
231 Reserved
232 Timer 1 output BU0 BU1 BU2
233 Timer 2 output BU0 BU1 BU2
234 Timer 3 output BU2
235 Timer 4 output BU2

Tables

236 Counter 1 output BU0 BU1 BU2
237 Counter 2 output BU0 BU1 BU2
238 Counter 3 output BU2
339 Counter 4 output BU2
240 Signal conditioning 1 output BU0 BU1 BU2
241 Signal conditioning 2 output BU0 BU1 BU2
242 Signal conditioning 3 output BU0 BU2
243 Signal conditioning 4 output BU0 BU2
244 Non-volatile Element 1 output BU0 BU1 BU2
245 Non-volatile Element 2 output BU0 BU1 BU2
246 Non-volatile Element 3 output BU2
247 Non-volatile Element 4 output BU2
248 Flashing 1 output BU0 BU1 BU2
251 Flicker 1 output BU0 BU1 BU2
254 Reserved
255 Reserved

Tables
17.5 Socket assignment table - analog

This table contains all assignment numbers (No.) of the sockets (analog). You only need
these assignment numbers if you, for example, use a user program to fill data records and
write them back. All inputs for analog data can only process values of type "Word" (2 bytes).
In order to also be able to process values of type "Byte", the following applies:
● The byte value is processed as a low byte, the high byte is always 0.
Table 17- 7 Socket assignment table - analog
No. Designation Unit Information

0 Not connected BU0 BU1 BU2
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
3 Reserved
4 Timer 1 - Actual value 100 ms BU0 BU1 BU2
5 Timer 2 - Actual value 100 ms BU0 BU1 BU2
6 Timer 3 - Actual value 100 ms BU2
7 Timer 4 - Actual value 100 ms BU2
8 Counter 1 - Actual value BU0 BU1 BU2
9 Counter 2 - Actual value BU0 BU1 BU2
10 Counter 3 - Actual value BU2
11 Counter 4 - Actual value BU2
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 Reserved
15 Reserved
16 Max. current I_max 1 % / Is IM UM
17 Current I_L1 1 % / Is IM UM
20 Phase unbalance 1% IM UM
21 Reserved
22 Reserved
23 Reserved
24 Voltage U_L1 1V UM
27 Cos phi 1% UM
28 Reserved
29 Reserved
30 Reserved
31 Reserved
32 Thermal motor model 2% IM UM

Tables
No. Designation Unit Information

33 Time to trip 100 ms IM UM
34 Recovery time 100 ms IM UM
35 Last trip current 1 % / Is IM UM
36 TM - Max. temperature 1K TM MM
37 TM - Temperature 1 1K TM MM
38 TM - Temperature 2 1K TM
39 TM - Temperature 3 1K TM
40 Permissible starts - actual value BU0 BU1 BU2
41 Motor stop time 1h BU0 BU1 BU2
42 DM-F - Time until test required 1 week DM-F
43 Analog value ground fault 1 mA EM MM
44 AM - Input 1 See 1) AM
45 AM - Input 2 See 1) AM
46 Reserved
47 Reserved
48 Acyclic receive data - analog value BU0 BU1 BU2
49 Cyclic receive data - Analog value BU2
50 Reserved
51 Reserved
52 Motor operating hours - H word 1s BU0 BU1 BU2
53 Motor operating hours - L word BU0 BU1 BU2
54 Int. motor operating hours - H word BU0 BU1 BU2
55 Int. motor operating hours - L word BU0 BU1 BU2
56 Device operating hours - H word BU0 BU1 BU2
57 Device operating hours - L word BU0 BU1 BU2
58 Number of starts - H word BU0 BU1 BU2
59 Number of starts - L word BU0 BU1 BU2
60 Int. number of starts CW - H word BU0 BU1 BU2
61 Int. number of starts CW - H word BU0 BU1 BU2
62 Int. number of starts left - H word BU0 BU1 BU2
63 Int. number of starts left - L word BU0 BU1 BU2
64 Reserved
... Reserved
69 Reserved
70 Active power P - H word 1W BU2
71 Active power P - L word BU2
72 Apparent power S - H word 1 VA BU2
73 Apparent power S - L word BU2
75 Reserved
... Reserved
255 Reserved
1) S7 format: 0/4mA=0; 20mA=27648

Tables
17.6 Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics

The following table contains the detailed messages of the slave diagnostics for status
information and the process alarm. This information is also contained in data record 92.
Table 17- 8 Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics
Byte.Bit Status message Information

0.0 Faults - control Fault - execution ON command BU0 BU1 BU2
0.1 Fault - execution STOP command BU0 BU1 BU2
0.2 Fault - feedback (FB) ON BU0 BU1 BU2
0.3 Fault - feedback (FB) OFF BU0 BU1 BU2
0.4 Fault - stalled positioner BU2
0.5 Fault - double 0 BU2
0.6 Fault - double 1 BU2
0.7 Fault - end position BU2
1.0 Fault - antivalence BU2
1.1 Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF) BU0 BU1 BU2
1.2 Fault - power failure (UVO) BU2
1.3 Fault - Operational Protection Off (OPO) BU2
1.4 Reserved
2.0 Reserved
2.1 Trip - Protection Fault - unbalance IM UM
2.2 Fault - overload IM UM
2.3 Fault - overload + phase failure IM UM
2.4 Fault - int. ground fault IM UM
2.5 Fault - ext. ground fault EM
2.6 Reserved
2.7 Fault - thermistor overload Th
3.0 Fault - thermistor short circuit Th
3.1 Fault - thermistor open circuit Th
3.2 Reserved
3.3 Fault - TM trip T> TM MM
3.4 Fault - TM sensor fault TM MM
3.5 Fault - TM out of range TM MM
3.6 Fault - EM+ open circuit MM EM+
3.7 Fault - EM+ short-circuit MM EM+
4.0 Trips - level monitoring Fault - trip I> IM UM
4.1 Fault - trip I< IM UM
4.2 Fault - trip P> UM
4.3 Fault - trip P< UM
4.4 Fault - trip cos phi< UM
4.5 Fault - trip U< UM
4.6 Fault - trip 0/4 - 20 mA> AM

Tables

4.7 Fault - trip 0/4 - 20 mA< AM
5.0 Fault - stalled rotor IM UM
5.1 Reserved
5.4 Fault - number of starts > BU0 BU1 BU2
5.5 Reserved
6.0 Trips - Miscellaneous Fault - external fault 1 BU0 BU1 BU2
6.1 Fault - external fault 2 BU0 BU1 BU2
6.4 Fault - external fault 5 BU2
6.5 Fault - external fault 6 BU2
6.6 Reserved
6.7 Reserved
7.0 Fault - analog module open circuit AM
7.1 Fault - test trip BU0 BU1 BU2
7.2 DM-F safety-related tripping DM-FL DM-FP
7.3 Fault - DM-F wiring DM-FL DM-FP
7.4 Fault - DM-FL cross circuit DM-FL
8.0 Warnings - Protection Warning - Overload operation IM UM
8.1 Warning - Unbalance IM UM
8.2 Warning - Overload IM UM
8.3 Warning - Overload + phase failure IM UM
8.4 Warning - internal ground fault IM UM
8.5 Warning - external ground fault EM MM
8.6 Reserved
8.7 Warning - Thermistor overload Th
9.0 Warning - Thermistor short circuit Th
9.1 Warning - Thermistor open circuit Th
9.2 Warning - TM warning T> TM MM
9.3 Reserved
9.4 Warning - TM sensor fault TM MM
9.5 Warning - TM out of range TM MM
9.6 Reserved

Tables

10.0 Warnings - Level monitoring Warning - Warning I> IM UM
10.1 Warning - Warning I< IM UM
10.2 Warning - Warning P> UM
10.3 Warning - Warning P< UM
10.4 Warning - Warning cos phi< UM
10.5 Warning - Warning U< UM
10.6 Warning - warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
10.7 Warning - warning 0/4 - 20 mA> AM
11.0 Warning - Stalled rotor IM UM
11.1 Reserved
11.3 Warning - No start possible BU0 BU1 BU2
11.4 Warning - Number of starts > BU0 BU1 BU2
11.5 Warning - Just one start possible BU0 BU1 BU2
11.6 Warning - Motor operating hours> BU0 BU1 BU2
11.7 Warning - Motor stop time > BU0 BU1 BU2
12.0 Warnings - Miscellaneous Warning - external fault 1 BU0 BU1 BU2
12.1 Warning - external fault 2 BU0 BU1 BU2
12.4 Warning - external fault 5 BU2
12.5 Warning - external fault 6 BU2
12.6 Reserved
12.7 Reserved
13.0 Warning - Analog module open circuit BU2
13.1 Warning - DM-F safety-related tripping
13.2 Warning - Test requirement DM-FL DM-FP
13.3 Reserved
13.4 Reserved
13.5 Reserved
13.6 Warning - DM-F feedback circuit DM-FL DM-FP
13.7 Warning - DM-FL DM-FL
14.0 Reserved
14.1 Status information - Protection Status - Emergency start executed IM UM
14.2 Status - Cooling down period active IM UM
14.3 Status - Pause time active IM UM
14.4 Reserved
14.5 Reserved
14.6 Status information - Receive Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU0 BU1 BU2
14.7 Reserved

Tables

15.0 Events - parameterization Event - startup parameter block active BU0 BU1 BU2
15.1 Event - Parameter changes not allowed in the BU0 BU1 BU2
current operating state
15.2 Event - Device does not support the required BU0 BU1 BU2
functions
15.3 Event - Wrong parameter BU0 BU1 BU2
15.4 Event - Wrong password BU0 BU1 BU2
15.5 Event - Password protection active BU0 BU1 BU2
15.6 Event - Factory settings BU0 BU1 BU2
15.7 Event - Parameterization active BU0 BU1 BU2
17.0 Event - DM-FL configuration mode DM-FL
17.1 Event - DM FL configuration deviation DM-FL
17.2 Event - DM-FL waiting for start-up test DM-FL
17.3 Event - DM FP F PRM error DM-FP
17.4 Reserved

Tables

Data formats and data records 18
18.1 Data formats and data records - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find information about the data records of SIMOCODE pro.
Target groups
● PLC programmers
Required knowledge
● Sound knowledge of writing/reading data records
● Sound knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.
Data records - Overview

Table 18- 1 Data records - Overview
Data record No. Description Read / write

1 S7 system diagnostics Read
63 Analog value recording Read
67 Process image output Read
69 Process image input Read
72 Error buffer Read
73 Event memory Read
92 Device diagnostics (faults, warnings, Read
status information)
94 Measured values Read
95 Service / statistical data Read / write
130 Basic device parameters 1 (BU0 BU1 BU2) Read / write
131 Basic device parameters 2 (BU0 BU1 BU2) Read / write
132 Extended device parameters 1 (BU2) Read / write
133 Extended device parameters 2 (BU0 BU2) Read / write
139 Marking Read / write
160 Communication parameters Read / write
165 Identification Read / write
202 Acyclic receive Read / write
203 Acyclic send Read
224 Password protection Write

Data formats and data records
18.2 Handling data records

This section contains helpful information about how best to handle data records.
18.2.1 Writing / reading data records
Access to data records via the slot and index

● Slot: Access via slot 1
● Index: Data record number
Writing / reading data records with STEP7

You can access the data records from the user program.
● Writing data records:
– S7-DPV1 master: by calling SFB 53 "WR_REC" or SFC 58
– S7 master: by calling SFC58
● Reading data sets:
– S7-DPV1 master: by calling SFB 52 "RD_REC" or SFC 59
– S7 master: by calling SFC 59
Further information
You will find further information about the SFBs:
● in Reference Manual System software for the S7-300/400, system and standard functions
● In the STEP7 online help

Byte arrangements
When data longer than one byte is stored, the bytes are arranged as follows ("big endian"):
Figure 18-1 Byte arrangement in "big endian" format

18.2.2 Abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the tables:
Table 18- 2 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
BU0 SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
BU1 SIMOCODE pro C basic unit
BU2 SIMOCODE pro V basic unit
DM-FL DM-F Local fail-safe digital module
DM-FP DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital module
OP Operator panel
OPD Operator panel with display
AM Analog module
EM Ground-fault module
Th Thermistor
GF Control function
Cycl. Cyclic
Acycl. Acyclic
F Fault
M Status information
W Warning

18.2.3 Specifications
The following specifications apply in the tables:
Table 18- 3 Table specifications (example)
Designation Type Range Unit Information

Reserved *) Byte[4] *)
Max. current Word 0 … 65535 1 % / Is BU0 BU1 BU2

I_max
*) Items in italics are not relevant (reserved) and must be filled with "0" when written to.
Parameters that can be changed during operation.

BU0 BU1 BU2: Entry relevant for basic units SIMOCODE pro S, SIMOCODE pro C, and
SIMOCODE pro V.
Settings are valid/can only be made when the corresponding system components are used.

18.3 Data record 0/1 - S7 system diagnostics
Table 18- 4 Data record 0/1 S7 system diagnostics
Byte DR0 DS1 Designation Type No error Error Information

Bit
0.0 X X Module fault / OK Bit 0 1
0.1 X X Internal fault Bit 0 0
0.2 X X External fault Bit 0 1
0.3 X X Channel fault Bit 0 1
0.4 X X External auxiliary voltage missing Bit 0 0
0.5 X X Front panel plug missing Bit 0 0
0.6 X X Module not parameterized Bit 0 0
0.7 X X Wrong parameters on module Bit 0 0
1.0 X X Module type Bit[4] 3 3
1.4 X X Channel information available Bit 1 1
1.5 X X Application information available Bit 0 0
1.6 X X Substitute diagnosis alarm Bit 0 0
1.7 X X Reserved = 0 Bit 0 0
2.0 X X Application module wrong / missing Bit 0 0
2.1 X X Communication fault Bit 0 0
2.2 X X Operating state (0=RUN, 1=STOP) Bit 0 0
2.3 X X Time monitoring activated Bit 0 0
2.4 X X Supply voltage within module failed Bit 0 0
2.5 X X Battery flat (BATTF) Bit 0 0
2.6 X X Total backup power failed Bit 0 0
3.0 X X Rack failure (detected by IM / UM) Bit 0 0
3.1 X X Processor failure Bit 0 0
3.2 X X EEPROM error Bit 0 0
3.3 X X RAM error Bit 0 0
3.4 X X ADU/DAU error Bit 0 0
3.5 X X Blown fuse Bit 0 0
3.6 X X PRAL missing Bit 0 0
4.0 X Channel type Byte 0x7D 0x7D
5.0 X Length of the channel-specific diagnostics Byte 0x20 0x20
6.0 X Number of channels Byte 0x01 0x01
7.0 X Channel fault vector (one bit per channel) Byte 0x00 0x01
8.0 X Reserved Bit 0 0
8.1 X Short circuit Bit 0 0
8.2 X Undervoltage Bit 0 0
8.3 X Overvoltage Bit 0 0

Byte DR0 DS1 Designation Type No error Error Information

Bit
8.4 X Overload Bit 0 0
8.5 X Overtemperature Bit 0 0
8.6 X Open circuit Bit 0 0
8.7 X Upper limit overshot Bit 0 0
9.0 X Lower limit undershot Bit 0 0
9.1 X Error Bit 0 X Fault F9
10.0 X Parameterization error Bit 0 X Fault F16
10.1 X Sensor or load voltage missing Bit 0 0
10.2 X Fuse defective Bit 0 0
10.4 X Earth fault Bit 0 0
10.5 X Reference channel fault Bit 0 0
10.6 X Process alarm missing Bit 0 0
10.7 X Actuator warning Bit 0 0
11.0 X Actuator trip Bit 0 0
11.1 X Safety-related tripping Bit 0 0
11.2 X External fault Bit 0 0
11.3 X Non-specific error Bit 0 0
12.0 X Reserved Byte[4] 0 0

18.4 Data record 63 - Analog value recording
18.4 Data record 63 - Analog value recording
Table 18- 5 Data record 63 - Analog value recording
Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Information

0.0 StartPos Word 0 BU2
2.0 Channel No. Byte 1 BU2
3.0 Analog value record Bit 0, 1 BU2
currently running
3.1 Trigger event occurred Bit 0, 1 BU2
3.2 Reserved Bit[6] 0
4.0 Measured value (0) Word 0 ... 65535 BU2
...
124.0 Reserved Byte[76] 0
The unit of the measured value is dependent on the assigned analog value. You will find all
available analog values with their units in Chapter Socket assignment table - analog
(Page 506).

18.5 Data record 67 - Process image output
18.5 Data record 67 - Process image output
Table 18- 6 Data record 67 - Process image output
Byte.Bit Designation Default (also see parameters) Type Information

0.0 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.0 Control station - PLC/ PCS [DP] ON< Bit BU0 BU1 BU2
0.1 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.1 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] OFF Bit
0.2 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.2 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON> Bit
0.3 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.3 Test 1 Bit
0.4 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.4 Motor protection - Emergency start Bit
0.5 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.5 Mode selector S1 Bit
0.6 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.6 Reset 1 Bit
0.7 Cyclic receive - Bit 0.7 Not assigned Bit
2.0 to 3.7 Cyclic receive - Analog value Not assigned Word BU2

18.6 Data record 69 - Process image input
18.6 Data record 69 - Process image input
Table 18- 7 Data record 69 - Process image input
Byte.Bit Designation Default (also see parameters) Type Information

0.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Status - ON< Bit BU0 BU1 BU2
0.1 Cyclic send - Bit 0.1 Status - Off Bit
0.2 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Status - ON> Bit
0.3 Cyclic send - Bit 0.3 Event - Overload operation Bit
0.4 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active Bit
0.5 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode Bit
0.6 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Status - General fault Bit
0.7 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Status - general warning Bit
1.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.0 Not assigned Bit
2.0 PLC/PCS analog input 1 Max. current I_max Word
4.0 PLC/PCS analog input 2 Not assigned Word BU2

18.7 Data record 72 - Error buffer
18.7 Data record 72 - Error buffer
Table 18- 8 Data record 72 - Error buffer
Byte.Bit Entry Designation Type Information

0.0 1 Time stamp D-word BU0 BU1 BU2
4.0 Type Byte
5.0 Error number Byte
6.0 2 Time stamp D-word
10.0 Type Byte
...
120.0 21 Time stamp D-word BU0 BU1 BU2
124.0 Type Byte
Time stamp
The operating hours of the device are used as a time stamp (resolution: 1 s).
Type/error number
If the type has the value 71, the entry contains a fault: Refer to the error numbers for detailed
information. You will find the mean in Chapter Data record 92 - Device diagnostics
(Page 525) in column "Error number" of table "Data record 92 - Diagnostics."
If the type has the value 255, the entry displays "Power - ON." In this case, the error number
contains the number of power ON operations, reduced by 1 (0 = 1x power ON, ...).

18.8 Data record 73 - Event memory
18.8 Data record 73 - Event memory
Table 18- 9 Data record 73 - Event memory
Byte.Bit Entry Designation Type Information

0.0 1 Time stamp D-word BU0 BU2
4.0 Type Byte BU0 BU2
5.0 Information Byte BU0 BU2
8.0 2 Time stamp D-word BU0 BU2
12.0 Type Byte BU0 BU2
13.0 Information Byte BU0 BU2

18.9 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics

Table 18- 10 Data record 92 - Device diagnostics
Byte.Bit Designation Information DP Diagn.*) Error No. ***)

0.0 Reserved
1.0 Status information - Status - General fault BU0 BU1 BU2
general
1.1 Status - General warning BU0 BU1 BU2
1.2 Status - Device BU0 BU1 BU2
1.3 Status - Bus BU0 BU1 BU2
1.4 Status - PLC/PCS BU0 BU1 BU2
1.5 Status - current flowing IM UM
1.6 Reserved
2.0 Status information - Status - ON<< Dependent on the
Receive control function
2.1 Status - ON<
2.2 Status - Off
2.3 Status - ON>
2.4 Status - ON>>
2.5 Status - Start active BU0 BU1 BU2
2.6 Status - Interlocking time active All reversing
starters and
positioners
2.7 Status - Change-over pause Star-delta,
active Dahlander, pole-
changing starters
3.0 Status - Runs in open direction Dependent on the
3.1 Status - Runs in close direction control function
3.2 Status - FC
3.3 Status - FO
3.4 Status - TC
3.5 Status - TO
3.6 Status - Cold starting (TPF) BU0 BU1 BU2 M
3.7 Status - OPO BU2
4.0 Status - Remote mode BU0 BU1 BU2
4.1 Status information - Status - Emergency start IM UM M
Protection executed
4.2 Status - Cooling down period IM UM M
active
4.3 Status - Pause time active IM UM
4.4 Status information - Status - Device check active BU0 BU1 BU2
Miscellaneous
4.5 Status - Phase sequence 1-2-3 UM
4.6 Status - Phase sequence 3-2-1 UM
4.7 Status - DM-F enabling circuit DM-F


5.0 Events - Protection Event - Overload operation IM UM
5.1 Event - Unbalance IM UM
5.2 Event - Overload IM UM
5.3 Event - overload + phase IM UM
failure
5.4 Event - internal ground fault IM UM
5.5 Event - external ground fault EM
5.6 Event - warning ext. ground EM
fault
5.7 Event - Thermistor overload Th
6.0 Event - Thermistor short-circuit Th
6.1 Event - Thermistor open circuit Th
6.2 Event - TM warning T> TM MM
6.3 Event - TM trip T> TM MM
6.4 Event - TM sensor fault TM MM
6.5 Event - TM out of range TM MM
6.6 Event - EM+ open circuit MM EM+ 1)
6.7 Event - EM+ short-circuit MM EM+ 1)
7.0 Events - Level monitoring Event - Warning I> IM UM
7.1 Event - Warning I< IM UM
7.2 Event - Warning P> UM
7.3 Event - Warning P< UM
7.4 Event - Warning cos phi< UM
7.5 Event - Warning U< UM
7.6 Event - warning 0/4 - 20mA> AM
7.7 Event - warning 0/4 - 20mA< AM
8.0 Event - Trip I> IM UM
8.1 Event - Trip I< IM UM
8.2 Event - Trip P> UM
8.3 Event - Trip P< UM
8.4 Event - Trip cos phi< UM
8.5 Event - Trip U< UM
8.6 Event - trip 0/4 - 20mA> AM
8.7 Event - trip 0/4 - 20mA< AM
9.0 Event - Stalled rotor IM UM
9.1 Reserved
9.3 Event - no start permitted BU0 BU1 BU2
9.4 Event - No. of starts > BU0 BU1 BU2
9.5 Event - Just one start possible BU0 BU1 BU2
9.6 Event - motor BU0 BU1 BU2
operating hours >
9.7 Event - Motor stop time > BU0 BU1 BU2
10.0 Event - Limit 1 BU2


10.4 Events - Miscellaneous Event - Ext. fault 1 BU0 BU1 BU2
10.5 Event - Ext. fault 2 BU0 BU1 BU2
11.0 Event - Ext. fault 5 BU2
11.1 Event - Ext. fault 6 BU2
11.2 Reserved
11.3 Reserved
11.4 Event - Analog module open AM
circuit
11.5 Event - DM-F safety-related DM-F
tripping
11.6 Event - DM-F - Test DM-F
requirement
11.7 Reserved
12.0 Events - Time stamp Event - Timestamping function BU2
function active + OK
12.1 Reserved
12.2 Events - Miscellaneous Event - DM-FL safety ok DM-FL
12.3 Event - DM-FP PROFIsafe DM-FP
active
12.4 Events - System Event - Configured operator BU0 BU1 BU2
interfaces panel missing
12.5 Event - Module not supported BU0 BU1 BU2
12.6 Event - No module voltage BU2
13.0 Events - Memory module Event - Memory module read in BU0 BU1 BU2
13.1 Event - Memory module BU0 BU1 BU2
programmed
13.2 Event - Memory module erased BU0 BU1 BU2
13.3 Reserved
13.4 Event - Initialization module BU0 BU2
read in
programmed
cleared
13.7 Event - Addressing plug Event - Addressing plug read in BU0 BU1 BU2


14.0 Events - parameterization Event - startup parameter block BU0 BU1 BU2 M
active
14.1 Event - Parameter changes not BU0 BU1 BU2 M
allowed in the current operating
state
14.2 Event - Device does not BU0 BU1 BU2 M
support the required functions
14.3 Event - Wrong parameter BU0 BU1 BU2 M
14.4 Event - Wrong password BU0 BU1 BU2 M
14.5 Event - Password protection BU0 BU1 BU2
active
14.6 Event - Factory settings BU0 BU1 BU2
14.7 Event - Parameterization active BU0 BU1 BU2
15.0 Event - PRM error number BU0 BU1 BU2
(bytes) **
16.0 Event - DM-FL configuration DM-FL
mode
16.1 Event - DM-FL actual and set DM-FL
configuration are different
16.2 Event - DM-FL waiting for start- DM-FL
up test
16.3 Event - DM FP PRM error DM-FP
16.4 Reserved
17.0 Warnings - Protection Warning - Overload operation IM UM W
17.1 Warning - Unbalance IM UM W
17.2 Warning - Overload IM UM W
17.3 Warning - Overload + phase IM UM W
failure
17.4 Warning - internal ground fault IM UM W
17.5 Warning - external ground fault EM MM W
17.6 Reserved
17.7 Warning - Thermistor overload Th W
18.0 Warning - Thermistor short Th W
circuit
18.1 Warning - Thermistor open Th W
circuit
18.2 Warning - TM warning T> TM MM W
18.3 Reserved
18.4 Warning - TM sensor fault TM MM W
18.5 Warning - TM out of range TM MM W
18.6 Warning - EM+ open circuit MM EM+ 1) W
18.7 Warning - EM+ short-circuit MM EM+ 1) W
19.0 Warnings - Level Warning - Warning I> IM UM W
monitoring
19.1 Warning - Warning I< IM UM W


19.2 Warning - Warning P> UM W
19.3 Warning - Warning P< UM W
19.4 Warning - Warning cos phi< UM W
19.5 Warning - Warning U< UM W
19.6 Warning - Warning AM W
0/4 - 20mA>
19.7 Warning - Warning AM W
0/4 - 20mA<
20.0 Warning - Stalled rotor IM UM W
20.1 Reserved
20.3 Warning - No start possible BU0 BU1 BU2 W
20.4 Warning - Number of starts > BU0 BU1 BU2 W
20.5 Warning - Just one start BU0 BU1 BU2 W
possible
20.6 Warning - Motor operating BU0 BU1 BU2 W
hours>
20.7 Warning - Motor stop time > BU0 BU1 BU2 W
21.0 Warnings - Miscellaneous Warning - ext. fault 1 BU0 BU1 BU2 W
21.1 Warning - ext. fault 2 BU0 BU1 BU2 W
21.4 Warning - ext. fault 5 BU2 W
21.5 Warning - ext. fault 6 BU2 W
21.6 Reserved
21.7 Reserved
22.0 Warning - Analog module open AM W
circuit
22.1 Warning - DM-F safety-related DM-F W
tripping
22.2 Warning - DM-F test DM-F W
requirement
22.3 Reserved
22.6 Warning - DM-F feedback DM-F W
circuit
22.7 Warning - DM-FL simultaneity DM-FL W
23.0 Trips - General Fault - hardware fault basic unit BU0 BU1 BU2 F9 0
23.1 Fault - Module fault BU0 BU1 BU2 F9 1
(e.g. module IM, UM, DM)
23.2 Fault - temporary components BU0 BU1 BU2 F9 2
(e.g. memory module)
23.3 Fault - configuration error BU0 BU1 BU2 F16 3
23.4 Fault - parameterization BU0 BU1 BU2 F16 4
23.5 Fault - bus BU0 BU1 BU2 5
23.6 Fault - PLC/PCS BU0 BU1 BU2 6


23.7 Reserved
24.0 Faults - control Fault - runtime ON CF = positioner F 8
24.1 Fault - execution STOP CF = positioner F 9
command
24.2 Fault - feedback (FB) ON CF = positioner F 10
24.3 Fault - feedback (FB) OFF CF = positioner F 11
24.4 Fault - stalled positioner CF = positioner F 12
24.5 Fault - double 0 CF = positioner F 13
24.6 Fault - double 1 CF = positioner F 14
24.7 Fault - end position CF = positioner F 15
25.0 Fault - antivalence CF = positioner F 16
25.1 Fault - Test Position Feedback BU0 BU1 BU2 F 17
(TPF)
25.2 Fault - power failure (UVO) BU2 F 18
25.3 Fault - Operational Protection BU2 F 19
Off (OPO)
25.4 Reserved
26.0 Reserved
26.1 Trip - Protection Fault - unbalance IM UM F 25
26.2 Fault - overload IM UM F 26
26.3 Fault - overload + phase failure IM UM F 27
26.4 Fault - int. ground fault IM UM F 28
26.5 Fault - ext. ground fault EM MM F 29
26.6 Reserved
26.7 Fault - thermistor overload Th F 31
27.0 Fault - thermistor short circuit Th F 32
27.1 Fault - thermistor open circuit Th F 33
27.2 Reserved
27.3 Fault - TM trip T> TM MM F 35
27.4 Fault - TM sensor fault TM MM F 36
27.5 Fault - TM out of range TM MM F 37
27.6 Fault - EM+ open circuit MM EM+ 1) F
27.7 Fault - EM+ short-circuit MM EM+ 1) F
28.0 Faults - level monitoring Fault - trip I> IM UM F 40
28.1 Fault - trip I< IM UM F 41
28.2 Fault - trip P> UM F 42
28.3 Fault - trip P< UM F 43
28.4 Fault - trip cos phi< UM F 44
28.5 Fault - trip U< UM F 45
28.6 Fault - Trip 0/4 - 20mA> AM F 46
28.7 Fault - Trip 0/4 - 20mA< AM F 47
29.0 Fault - stalled rotor IM UM F 48
29.1 Reserved


29.4 Fault - number of starts > BU0 BU1 BU2 F 52
29.5 Reserved
30.0 Trips - Miscellaneous Fault - external fault 1 BU0 BU1 BU2 F 56
30.1 Fault - external fault 2 BU0 BU1 BU2 F 57
30.4 Fault - external fault 5 BU2 F 60
30.5 Fault - external fault 6 BU2 F 61
30.6 Reserved
30.7 Reserved
31.0 Fault - analog module open AM F 64
circuit
31.1 Fault - test trip BU0 BU1 BU2 F 65
31.2 Fault - DM-F - safety- DM-F F 66
related tripping
31.3 Fault - DM-F wiring DM-F F 67
31.4 Fault - DM-FL cross circuit DM-FL F 68
31.5 Reserved
*) The "DP Diagn." column contains the bits that are additionally available in the diagnostics
using PROFIBUS DP:
● F: Fault
● M: Status information
● W: Warning
● F9, F16: Fault types
See also Chapter Detailed messages of the slave diagnostics (Page 508).
**) Events - PRM error number (bytes):
If parameterization is not possible, the number of the parameter group (PRM group) that
caused the error is communicated here. You will find the parameter group in the parameter
data records 130 to133.
Figure 18-2 Example for parameter group
***) See also "Error number" in Chapter Data record 72 - Error buffer (Page 523).
1) 3UF7510-1AA00-0 ground-fault module

18.10 Data record 94 - measured values
18.10 Data record 94 - measured values
Table 18- 11 Data record 94 - Measured values
Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Information

0.0 Reserved Byte[4]
4.0 Thermal motor model Byte 0 - 255 See 2) IM UM
5.0 Phase unbalance Byte 0 - 100 1% IM UM
6.0 cos phi Byte 0 - 100 1% UM
12.0 Max. current I_max Word 0 - 65535 1 % / Is IM UM
14.0 Current I_L1 Word 0 - 65535 1 % / Is IM UM
20.0 Last trip current Word 0 - 65535 1 % / Is IM UM
22.0 Time to trip Word 0 - 65535 100 ms IM UM
24.0 Cooling-down period Word 0 - 65535 100 ms IM UM
26.0 Voltage U_L1 Word 0 - 65535 1V UM
32.0 AM output Word 0 - 32767 See 1) AM
34.0 AM - Input 1 Word 0 - 32767 AM
36.0 AM - Input 2 Word 0 - 32767 AM
38.0 Reserved
40.0 TM - Max. temperature Word 0 - 65535 1 K see 3) TM MM
42.0 TM - Temperature 1 Word 0 - 65535 1 K see 3) TM MM
44.0 TM - Temperature 2 Word 0 - 65535 1 K see 3) TM
46.0 TM - Temperature 3 Word 0 - 65535 1 K see 3) TM
48.0 EM+ 4) - ground-fault current Word 0 - 65535 1 mA MM EM+
50.0 EM+ 4) - last tripping current Word 0 - 65535 1 mA MM EM+
52.0 Active power P D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1W UM
56.0 Apparent power S D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 VA UM
1) S7 format:
0/4 mA = 0
20 mA = 27648
2) Representation of the "Thermal motor model":
Value always refers to symm. trip level,
representation in 2 % increments in bits 6 - 0 (range 0 to 254 %), bit 7 shows unbalance
(fixed level 50 %).
3) Representation in Kelvin.

18.11 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data
18.11 Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data
Writing the service data/statistical data

Writing is only possible if password protection is not active.
Additional abbreviations:
● r / w = value can be written / changed
● r = value can only be read
Table 18- 12 Data record 95 - Diagnostics - Statistical data
Byte.Bit Designation Type Range Unit Information

0.0 Coordination Byte[4] BU0 BU1 BU2
4.0 Permissible starts - actual value Byte 0 - 255 r1) BU0 BU1 BU2
5.0 DM-F - Time until test required Byte 0 - 255 1 week r BU2
8.0 Number of parameterizations Word 0 - 65535 r BU0 BU1 BU2
10.0 Number of overload trips Word 0 - 65535 r/w BU0 BU1 BU2
12.0 Number of internal overload Word 0 - 65535 r BU0 BU1 BU2
trips
14.0 Motor stop time Word 0 - 65535 1h r/w BU0 BU1 BU2
16.0 Timer 1 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r BU0 BU1 BU2
18.0 Timer 2 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r BU0 BU1 BU2
20.0 Timer 3 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r BU2
22.0 Timer 4 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 100 ms r BU2
24.0 Counter 1 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r BU0 BU1 BU2
26.0 Counter 2 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r BU0 BU1 BU2
28.0 Counter 3 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r BU2
30.0 Counter 4 - Actual value Word 0 - 65535 r BU2
32.0 Calculation module 1 - Output Word 0 - 65535 r BU2
34.0 Calculation module 2 - Output 0 - 65535 r BU2
36.0 Reserved Byte[4] 0
40.0 Motor operating hours D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r/w BU0 BU1 BU2
44.0 Int. motor operating hours D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r BU0 BU1 BU2
48.0 Device operating hours D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1s r BU0 BU1 BU2
52.0 Number of starts D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF r/w BU0 BU1 BU2
56.0 Internal number of starts CW D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF r BU0 BU1 BU2
60.0 Internal number of starts CCW D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF r BU0 BU1 BU2
64.0 Energy consumed D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 kWh r/w UM
1) Can only be written when the start monitoring function is active!

18.12 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1
Table 18- 13 Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1
Byte. Designation Type Range Default Note Information

Bit (PRM group)
0.0 Device class Byte 5, 7, 9 5 = BU1 BU0 BU1 BU2
7 = BU0
9 = BU2
1.0 Thermistor Bit 0, 1 1 = active; thermistor in the BU BU0 BU1 BU2
1.1 Reserved Bit[5]
1.6 Multifunction Bit 0, 1 BU0
module (MM).
1.7 Initialization Bit 0, 1 BU0 BU2
module (InM)
2.0 Operator panel (OP) Bit 0, 1 BU0 BU1 BU2
2.1 Analog module 1 (AM1) Bit 0, 1 BU2
2.2 Temperature Bit 0, 1 BU0 BU2
module 1 (TM1)
2.3 3UF7500 ground-fault Bit 0, 1 BU2
module for
3UL22 residual current
transformer
2.4 Digital module 1 (DM1) Bit[2] 0-3 0 = no digital module BU0 BU2
2.6 Digital module 2 (DM2) Bit[2] 0-2 1 = monostable BU2
2 = bistable
3 = special type (see 3.4)
3.0 Operator panel with Bit 0, 1 BU2
display (OPD)
3.1 3UF7510 ground-fault Bit 0, 1 BU0 BU2
module for
3UL23 residual current
transformer
3.4 DM1 - Special type Bit[2] 0, 1 0 = DM-FL BU2
1 = DM-FP
3.6 Reserved Bit[2]
4.0 Current measuring (IM) Bit[7] 0-5 0 = no current measurement BU0 BU1 BU2
1 = 0.3 A to 3 A
2 = 2.4 A to 25 A
3 = 10 A to 100 A
4 = 20 A to 200 A5 = 63 A to
630 A
4.7 Voltage measuring Bit 0, 1 BU2
module (UM)
5.0 Reserved


Bit (PRM group)
6.0 Control function (CF) 0x00 0x00 = Overload BU0 BU1 BU2
0x10 0x10 = Direct starter BU0 BU1 BU2
0x11 0x11 = Reversing starter BU0 BU1 BU2
0x12 0x12 = Linked device BU0 BU1 BU2
0x20 0x20 = Star-delta starter BU0 BU2
0x21 0x21 = Star-delta reversing BU2
0x30 starter BU2
0x31 0x30 = Dahlander BU2
0x40 0x31 = Reversing Dahlander BU2
starter
0x41 BU2
0x40 = Pole-changing starter
0x50 BU2
0x41 = Pole-changing reversing
0x60 BU2
starter
0x61 BU2
0x50 = Solenoid valve
0x62 BU2
0x60 = Positioner 1
0x63 BU2
0x61 = Positioner 2
0x64 BU2
0x62 = Positioner 3
0x70 BU0 BU2
0x63 = Positioner 4
0x71 BU2
0x64 = Positioner 5
0x70 = Soft starter
0x71 = Soft starter with
reversing contactor
7.0 Reserved Bit[8]
12.0 Bit parameters (16)
12.0 No configuration fault Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
due to OP
12.1 Startup parameter block Bit 0, 1 1 BU0 BU1 BU2
active
12.2 Test / Reset keys Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
disabled
12.3 Bus and PLC/PCS - Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual BU0 BU1 BU2
Reset 1 = Auto
12.1 Startup parameter block Bit 0, 1 1 BU0 BU1 BU2
active
disabled
Reset 1 = Auto
Reset 1 = Auto
disabled
Reset 1 = Auto


Bit (PRM group)
12.4 Reserved Bit 0
12.5 Reserved Bit 0
12.6 Reserved Bit 0
12.7 Reserved Bit 0
13.0 Diagnostics for process Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
events
warnings
faults
13.3 Diagnostics for device Bit 0, 1 1 BU0 BU1, BU2
faults
13.4 Reserved Bit 0
13.5 Reserved Bit 0
13.6 Bus monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU0 BU1 BU2
13.7 PLC/PCS monitoring Bit 0, 1 1 BU0 BU1 BU2
14.0 Overload protection - Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 3-phase IM UM
Type of load 1 = 1-phase
14.1 Overload protection - Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual IM UM
Reset 1 = Auto
14.2 Reserved Bit 0
14.3 Saving change-over Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
command
14.4 Non-maintained Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
command mode
14.5 Cold starting level (TPF) Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact BU0 BU1 BU2
1 = NC contact
14.6 Load type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Motor BU0 BU1 BU2
1 = ohmic load
14.7 Reserved Bit 0
15.0 External fault 1 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact BU0 BU1 BU2
15.1 External fault 2 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 1 = NC contact BU0 BU1 BU2
15.2 External fault 3 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
15.3 External fault 4 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
15.4 External fault 1 - active Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always BU0 BU1 BU2
status 1 = Only motor ON
15.5 External fault 2 - active Bit 0, 1 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
status
status
status


Bit (PRM group)
16.0 Bit[2] - Parameters (20)
16.0 Thermistor - Overload Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 3 0 = disabled Th
response 1 = signal
16.2 Thermistor - Response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 2 = warn Th
to sensor fault
3 = tripping
16.4 Internal ground fault - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
Response
16.6 Motor protection - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 3 IM
Overload response
17.0 Motor protection - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 IM
Overload response
17.2 Unbalance protection - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 IM
Response
17.4 Trip response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
17.6 Warning response I> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
18.0 Trip response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
18.2 Warning response I< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
18.4 Stalled rotor - Response Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
18.6 EM+ 1) - response to Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU0 BU2
sensor fault
19.0 Monitoring the number of Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
starts - Response to
overshoot
19.2 Monitoring the number of Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
starts - Response to
prewarning
19.4 Motor operating hours Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
monitoring - Response
19.6 Motor stop time Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
monitoring - Response
20.0 External fault 1 - Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 BU0 BU1 BU2
Response
Response
Response
Response
21.2 Basic unit - Debounce Bit[2] 0-3 1 Offset 6 ms BU0 BU1 BU2
time inputs
21.4 Timer 1 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With closing delay BU0 BU1 BU2
21.6 Timer 2 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = Closing delay with memory BU0 BU1 BU2
2 = With opening delay
3 = With fleeting closing


Bit (PRM group)
22.0 Signal conditioning 1 - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non-inverting BU0 BU1 BU2
Type 1 = Inverting
22.2 Signal conditioning 2 - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = Edge rising with memory BU0 BU1 BU2
Type
3 = Edge falling with memory
22.4 Non-volatile element 1 - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
Type
22.6 Non-volatile element 2 - Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
Type
23.0 EM+ 2) - monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = on, BU0 BU2
23.2 EM+ 2) - monitoring Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = on+, BU0 BU2
warning 2 = run,
3 = run+
23.4 EM - response to an Bit[2] 1, 3 1 0 = disabled, BU0 BU1 BU2
external ground fault 1= signal,
23.6 EM - response to Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 0 2 = warn, BU0 BU1 BU2
warning of an external 3 = tripping
ground fault
24.0 Part - Bit[4] parameters
24.0 External fault 1 - Reset Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] = Panel reset BU0 BU1 BU2
also by Bit[1] = Auto-reset
24.4 External fault 2 - Reset Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[2] = Remote reset BU0 BU1 BU2
also by
Bit[4] = OFF command reset
25.0 External fault 3 - Reset Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU0 BU1 BU2
also by
25.4 External fault 4 - Reset Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B BU0 BU1 BU2
also by
26.0 Limit monitor - Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 BU0 BU1 BU2
Hysteresis for limit
monitor
26.4 EM+ 2) - hysteresis Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 BU0 BU2
28.0 Byte parameters (28)
28.0 Internal ground fault - Byte 0 - 255 5
IM / UM
Delay
29.0 Overload protection - Byte 5, 10 ... 35, 40 10
BU0 BU1 BU2
Class
30.0 Motor protection - Delay Byte 0 - 255 5 IM / UM
with overload operation
31.0 Motor protection - Byte 0 - 100 40
IM / UM
level
32.0 Unbalance protection - Byte 0 - 255 5
IM / UM
Delay with unbalance
33.0 Interlocking time Byte 0 - 255 0
34.0 FB time Byte 0 - 255 5 0 = disabled


Bit (PRM group)
35.0 Trip level I> Byte 0 - 255 0 IM / UM
36.0 Warning level I> Byte 0 - 255 0
IM / UM
37.0 Trip level I< Byte 0 - 255 0 IM / UM
38.0 Warning level I< Byte 0 - 255 0 IM / UM
39.0 Stalled rotor level Byte 0 - 255 0 IM / UM
40.0 Trip delay I> Byte 0 - 255 5 IM / UM
41.0 Warning delay I> Byte 0 - 255 5 IM / UM
42.0 Trip delay I< Byte 0 - 255 5 IM / UM
43.0 Warning delay I< Byte 0 - 255 5 IM / UM
44.0 Blocking delay Byte 0 - 255 5
IM / UM
45.0 Monitoring the number of Byte 1 - 255 1
BU0 BU1 BU2
starts - Permissible
starts
46.0 Reserved Byte 0
47.0 EM+ 2) - delay warning Byte 0 - 255 0
BU0 BU2
48.0 Truth table 1 type 3I/1O Byte 0 - 11111111B 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
52.0 Word parameters (32)
52.0 Motor protection - Word 600 - 65535 3000
IM / UM
Cooling down period
54.0 Motor protection - Pause Word 0 - 65535 0 0 = disabled
IM / UM
time
56.0 Execution time Word 0 - 65535 10 0 = disabled
BU0 BU1 BU2
58.0 Monitoring the number of Word 0 - 65535 0
BU0 BU1 BU2
starts - Time range for
starts
60.0 Monitoring the number of Word 0 - 65535 0
BU0 BU1 BU2
starts - Interlocking time
62.0 Motor stop time level > Word 0 - 65535 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
64.0 Timer 1 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
66.0 Timer 2 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
BU0 BU1 BU2
68.0 Counter 1 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
70.0 Counter 2 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0
BU0 BU1 BU2
72.0 EM+ - tripping
2) Word 30 - 40000 1000 BU0 BU2
threshold


Bit (PRM group)
74.0 EM+ 2) - warning Word 30 - 40000 500 BU0 BU2
threshold
76.0 D-word parameters (36)
76.0 Operator control enable Bit[32] 0 ... 1..1B 0..0B
80.0 Motor protection - Set D-word 1) 30 IM / UM
current Is1
84.0 Motor operating hours D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
level >
88.0 Reserved D-word 0
1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM / UM and the conversion factor

18.13 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2 (plug binary)
Table 18- 14 Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2
Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Default Note Information

4.0 BU - Output 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
5.0 BU - Output 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
6.0 BU - Output 3 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU1 BU2
7.0 Reserved Byte 0
8.0 OP - LED green 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP OPD
12.0 OP - LED yellow 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 OP
16.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 - 255 105 Default: Status - ON< BU0 BU1 BU2
17.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.1 Byte 0 - 255 106 Default: Status - Off BU0 BU1 BU2
18.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.2 Byte 0 - 255 107 Default: Status - ON> BU0 BU1 BU2
19.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.3 Byte 0 - 255 128 Default: Event - Overload BU0 BU1 BU2
operation
20.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.4 Byte 0 - 255 110 Default: Status - BU0 BU1 BU2
Interlocking time active
21.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.5 Byte 0 - 255 120 Default: Status - Auto BU0 BU1 BU2
mode
22.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.6 Byte 0 - 255 96 Default: Status - General BU0 BU1 BU2
fault
23.0 Cyclic send - Bit 0.7 Byte 0 - 255 97 Default: Status - General BU0 BU1 BU2
warning
24.0 Cyclic send - Bit 1.0 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
32.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.0 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2


48.0 Monitoring PLC/PCS input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
49.0 Motor protection - Emergency start Byte 0 - 255 60 Default: Cyclic receive - IM UM
Bit 0.4
52.0 Mode selector S1 Byte 0 - 255 61 Default: Cyclic receive - BU0 BU1 BU2
Bit 0.5
53.0 Mode selector S2 Byte 0 - 255 2 Default: Fixed level value BU0 BU1 BU2
"1"
54.0 Control station - Local control [LC] Byte 0 - 255 0 Dependent on
ON< the control
55.0 Control station - Local control [LC] Byte 0 - 255 0 function
OFF
56.0 Control station - Local control [LC] Byte 0 - 255 0
ON>
57.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] Byte 0 - 255 56 Default: Cyclic receive -
ON< Bit 0.0
OFF Bit 0.1
ON> Bit 0.2
60.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON< Byte 0 - 255 0
61.0 Control Station - PC[DPV1] OFF Byte 0 - 255 0
62.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON> Byte 0 - 255 0
63.0 Control station - Operator Byte 0 - 255 0
panel [OP] ON<
64.0 Control station - Operator panel Byte 0 - 255 0
[OP] OFF
65.0 Control station - Operator panel Byte 0 - 255 0
[OP] ON>
66.0 Control function - ON< Byte 0 - 255 73 Default: Group control
station ON<


67.0 Control function - OFF Byte 0 - 255 74 Default: Group control
station OFF
68.0 Control function - ON> Byte 0 - 255 75 Default: Group control
station ON>
69.0 Control function - Feedback ON Byte 0 - 255 101 Default: Status - current
flowing
70.0 External fault 1 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
74.0 External fault 1 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
78.0 Cold starting (TPF) Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
79.0 Test 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 59 Default: Cyclic receive - BU0 BU1 BU2
Bit 0.3
80.0 Test 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
81.0 Reset 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 62 Default: Cyclic receive - BU0 BU1 BU2
Bit 0.6
82.0 Reset 2 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
83.0 Reset 3 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
88.0 Truth table 1 3I/1O - input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
98.0 Timer 1 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
99.0 Timer 1 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
100.0 Timer 2 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
101.0 Timer 2 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
102.0 Counter 1 - input + Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
103.0 Counter 1 - input - Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
104.0 Counter 1 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2


105.0 Counter 2 - input + Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
106.0 Counter 2 - input - Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
107.0 Counter 2 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
108.0 Signal conditioning 1 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
109.0 Signal conditioning 1 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
110.0 Signal conditioning 2 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
111.0 Signal conditioning 2 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
112.0 Non-volatile element 1 - ιnput Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
113.0 Non-volatile element 1 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
114.0 Non-volatile element 2 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
115.0 Non-volatile element 2 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
116.0 Flashing 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
119.0 Flicker 1 - Input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU1 BU2
122.0 Analog parameters (44)
122.0 PLC/PCS analog input Byte 0 - 255 16 Default: Max. BU0 BU1 BU2
current I_max

18.14 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1
Table 18- 15 Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1
Byte.Bit Designation (PRM group) Type Range Unit Default Note Information
0.0 Coordination Byte[4] BU0 BU2
4.0 Bit parameters (17)
4.0 3UF50 compatibility mode Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
4.1 3UF50 operating mode Bit 0, 1 0 0 = DPV0 BU2
1 = DPV1
4.2 Reserved Bit 0
4.3 Reserved Bit 0
4.4 Reserved Bit 0
4.5 Reserved Bit 0
4.6 Reserved Bit 0
4.7 Reserved Bit 0
5.0 Reserved Bit 0
5.1 Reserved Bit 0
5.2 Reserved Bit 0
5.3 Reserved Bit 0
5.4 Analog module - Measuring Bit 0, 1 0 0 = 0 - 20mA AM1
range input 1 = 4 - 20mA
5.5 Analog module - Measuring Bit 0, 1 0 AM1
range output
5.6 Reserved Bit 0
5.7 Reserved Bit 0
6.0 Overshooting/undershooting Bit 0, 1 0 0 = ">" BU2
limit 1 (overshooting)
6.1 Overshooting/undershooting Bit 0, 1 0 1 = "<" BU2
limit 2 (undershooting)
6.2 Overshooting/undershooting Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
limit 3
6.3 Overshooting/undershooting Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
limit 4
6.4 Line-to-line voltage Bit 0, 1 0 0 = No, 1 = Yes BU2
6.5 OPO level Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact BU2
1 = NC contact
6.6 Positioner response for OPO Bit 0, 1 0 0 = CLOSED BU2
1 = OPEN
6.7 Star-delta - Transformer Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Delta BU0 BU2
mounting 1 = In supply
cable
7.0 External fault 5 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 0 = NO contact BU2
7.1 External fault 6 - Type Bit 0, 1 0 1 = NC contact BU2
7.2 Reserved Bit 0

7.3 Reserved Bit 0
7.4 Monitoring external fault 5 Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Always BU2
7.5 Monitoring external fault 6 Bit 0, 1 0 1 = Only motor BU2
ON
7.6 Reserved Bit 0
7.7 Reserved Bit 0
8.0 Calculation module 2 - Operating Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Word BU2
mode 1 = D-word
8.1 Reserved Bit 0
8.2 DM-F - Safe tripping function Bit 0, 1 0 0 = No DM-F
1 = Yes
8.3 DM-F - reset safety- Bit 0, 1 0 0 = Manual, DM-F
related tripping 1 = Auto
8.4 Time stamping active Bit 0, 1 0 BU2
8.5 Reserved Bit 0
8.6 Reserved Bit 0
8.7 Reserved Bit 0
9.0 DM-FL - Configuration 1 Bit 0, 1 0 Configurable DM-FL
9.1 DM-FL - Configuration 2 Bit 0, 1 0 parameters DM-FL
comparable
9.2 DM-FL - Configuration 3 Bit 0, 1 0 with the module DM-FL
9.3 DM-FL - Configuration 4 Bit 0, 1 0 configuration DM-FL
9.4 DM-FL - Configuration 5 Bit 0, 1 0 DM-FL
10.0 3UF50 basic type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 BU2
10.6 UVO operating mode Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0= BU2
Deactivated,
1 = Activated
11.0 Trip monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 0 = ON UM
11.2 Warning monitoring U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 1 (always) UM
1 = on+
(always, not
TPF)
2 = RUN (motor
ON, not TPF)
12.0 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = ON AM1
12.2 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 (always) AM1

12.4 Trip monitoring 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = ON + AM1
12.6 Warning monitoring 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 (always, AM1
not TPF)
13.0 Monitoring limit 1 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
2 = RUN (motor
13.2 Monitoring limit 2 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 ON, not TPF) BU2
13.4 Monitoring limit 3 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 3 = RUN+ BU2
13.6 Monitoring limit 4 Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 (motor ON, not BU2
TPF, startup
override)
14.6 AM1 - active inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = 1 input AM1
1 = 2 inputs
2 = 3 inputs
15.0 DM - Debounce time inputs Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 10 ms 1 Offset 6ms DM1 DM2 M
M
15.2 AM1 - Response for open circuit Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 2 0 = disabled AM1
15.4 EM - response to an external Bit[2] 1, 3 1 1 = signal EM EM+ MM
ground fault 2 = warn
15.6 EM - response to warning of an Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 3 = tripping EM EM+ MM
external ground fault
16.4 DM-F - Test requirement Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 0 = disabled DM-F
response 1 = signal
16.6 DM-F - safety-related tripping Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 2 = warn DM-F
response
3 = tripping
17.0 TM1 - Trip response T> Bit[2] 1, 3 3 TM1 MM
17.2 TM1 - Warning response T> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 TM1 MM
17.4 TM1 - Response to a sensor Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 2 TM1 MM
fault / out of range
17.6 TM1 - Active sensors Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 2 0 = 1 sensors TM1 MM
1 = 2 sensors
2 = 3 sensors
18.0 Trip response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 0 = disabled UM
18.2 Warning response P> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 1 = signal UM
18.4 Trip response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 2 = warn UM
18.6 Warning response P< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 3 = tripping UM
19.0 Trip response cos phi < Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
19.2 Warning response cos phi < Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
19.4 Trip response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 UM
19.6 Warning response U< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 UM
20.0 Trip response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM1
20.2 Warning response 0/4-20 mA> Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM1

20.4 Trip response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 3 0 AM1
20.6 Warning response 0/4-20 mA< Bit[2] 0, 1, 2 0 AM1
22.0 External fault 5 - Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 0 = disabled BU2
22.2 External fault 6 - Response Bit[2] 1, 2, 3 1 1 = signal BU2
2 = warn
3 = tripping
23.0 Analog-value recording - Trigger Bit[2] 0, 1 0 0 = positive BU2
edge 1 = Negative
25.0 Timer 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = With closing BU2
25.2 Timer 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 delay BU2
1 = Closing
delay with
memory
2 = With
opening delay
3 = With
fleeting closing
25.4 Signal conditioning 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = Non- BU0 BU2
25.6 Signal conditioning 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 inverting BU0 BU2
26.0 Non-volatile element 3 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 1 = Inverting BU2
2 = Edge rising
26.2 Non-volatile element 4 - Type Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 BU2
with memory
3 = Edge falling
with memory
26.4 Calculation module 2 - Operator Bit[2] 0, 1, 2, 3 0 0 = +, BU2
1 = -,
2 = *,
3=/

28.0 TM - sensor type Bit[3] + 000B to 100B 000B 000B = PT100 TM1 MM
Bit 001B = PT1000
010B = KTY83
011B = KTY84
100B = NTC
29.0 External fault 5 - Reset also by Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B Bit[0] = Panel BU2
29.4 External fault 6 - Reset also by Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0101B reset BU2
Bit[1] = Auto-
reset
Bit[2] = Remote
reset
Bit[3] = OFF
command reset
32.0 Truth table 7 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0 BU0 BU2
32.4 Truth table 8 type 2I/1O Bit[4] 0 - 1111B 0 BU0 BU2
33.0 Is1 conversion factor - Bit[4] 0 - 15 0 BU2
Denominator
33.4 Is2 conversion factor - Bit[4] 0 - 15 0 BU2
Denominator
34.0 Hysteresis P - Cos phi - U Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% UM
34.4 Hysteresis 0/4-20 mA Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% AM1
35.0 Hysteresis free limits Bit[4] 0 - 15 5 1% BU2
37.0 EM - Delay Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5
EM MM
38.0 Trip level cos phi< Byte 0 - 100 1% 0 UM
39.0 Warning level cos phi< Byte 0 - 100 1% 0 UM
40.0 Trip level U< Byte 0 - 255 8V 0
UM
41.0 Warning level U< Byte 0 - 255 8V 0
UM
42.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 *128 0
AM1
43.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM1
44.0 Trip level 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 *128 0
AM1

45.0 Warning level 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 *128 0 AM1
46.0 Trip delay P> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5
UM
47.0 Warning delay P> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
48.0 Trip delay P< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
49.0 Warning delay P< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
50.0 Trip delay cos phi< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
51.0 Warning delay cos phi< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
52.0 Trip delay U< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
53.0 Warning delay U< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 UM
54.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5
AM1
55.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA> Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5 AM1
56.0 Trip delay 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5
AM1
57.0 Warning delay 0/4-20 mA< Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5
AM1
58.0 Delay limit 1 Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 5
BU2
BU2
BU2
BU2
62.0 TM - Hysteresis Byte 0 - 255 1K 5 TM1 MM
63.0 Max. star time Byte 0 - 255 1s 20 Star-delta BU0 BU2
starter
64.0 UVO time Byte 0 - 255 100 ms 0 BU2
65.0 Staggering time Byte 0 - 255 1s 0 BU2
66.0 Analog value recording - Byte 0 - 20 5% 0 BU2
Sampling rate
67.0 Calculation module 2 - Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
Denominator 1
Numerator 2
Denominator
70.0 Truth table 4 type 3I/1O Byte 0 - 11111111B 0 BU0, BU2
71.0 Truth table 5 type 3I/1O Byte 0 - 11111111B 0 BU2
72.0 Truth table 6 type 3I/1O Byte 0 - 11111111B 0 BU2
73.0 Calculation module 2 - Byte -128 - 127 0
BU2
Numerator 1
74.0 Calculation module 2 - Byte -128 - 127 0 BU2
Denominator 2
75.0 DM-F - Test requirement level Byte 0 - 255 1 week 0
BU2

76.0 Word parameters (33)
76.0 Analog module - Start value Word 0 - 65535 0 Value for AM1
output 0/4mA
78.0 Analog Module - End value Word 0 - 65535 27648 Value for 20mA AM1
output
80.0 TM - Trip level T> Word 0 - 65535 1K 0 TM1 MM
82.0 TM - Warning level T> Word 0 - 65535 1K 0 TM1 MM
84.0 Limit monitor 1 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 0 BU2
92.0 Timer 3 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0 BU2
94.0 Timer 4 - Limit Word 0 - 65535 100 ms 0 BU2
BU2
BU2
100.0 Change-over pause Word 0 - 65535 10 ms 0
102.0 Analog value recording - Word 1 - 50000 1 ms 100

BU2
Sampling rate
104.0 Is1 conversion factor - Word 0 - 65535 0
BU2
Numerator
106.0 Is2 conversion factor - Word 0 - 65535 0 BU2
Numerator
108.0 D-word parameters (37)
108.0 Motor protection - Set current Is2 D-word 1) 10 mA 0
BU2
112.0 Trip level P> D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM
116.0 Warning level P> D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0 UM
120.0 Trip level P< D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0
UM
124.0 Warning level P< D-word 0 - 0xFFFFFFFF 1 W 0
UM
128.0 Truth Table 9 5I/2O type - Bit[32] 0 ... 1..1B 0 BU2
Output 1
132.0 Truth Table 9 5I/2O type - Bit[32] 0 ... 1..1B 0 BU2
Output 2
136.0 Calculation module 2, offset D-word -0x800000000 0 BU2
x7FFFFFFF
140.0 Calculation module 1, D-word 2x - 0 BU2
numerator / offset 32768..32767
1) Value range dependent on current range of the IM / UM and the conversion factor

18.15 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters 2 (plug binary)
Table 18- 16 Data record 133 - Extended device parameters

4.0 DM1 - Output 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM1 DM-F MM
5.0 DM1 - Output 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM1 DM-F MM
6.0 DM2 - Output 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM2
7.0 DM2 - Output 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 DM2
8.0 Reserved Byte 0
9.0 Reserved Byte 0
12.0 Time stamping - input 0 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
20.0 Analog-value recording - Trigger input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
22.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0 Dependent on
23.0 Control station - Local control [LC] ON>> Byte 0 - 255 0 the control
function
24.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0
25.0 Control station - PLC/PCS [DP] ON>> Byte 0 - 255 0
26.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0
27.0 Control station - PC[DPV1] ON>> Byte 0 - 255 0
28.0 Control station - Operator panels [OP] ON>> Byte 0 - 255 0
29.0 Control station - Operator panels [OP]<>/<<>> Byte 0 - 255 0
30.0 Control function - ON<< Byte 0 - 255 0
31.0 Control function - ON>> Byte 0 - 255 0
32.0 Auxiliary control input - FC Byte 0 - 255 0
33.0 Auxiliary control input - FO Byte 0 - 255 0
34.0 Auxiliary control input - TC Byte 0 - 255 0
35.0 Auxiliary control input - TO Byte 0 - 255 0
36.0 External fault 5 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
37.0 External fault 6 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2


40.0 External fault 5 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
41.0 External fault 6 - Reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
44.0 UVO fault Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
45.0 OPO error Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
46.0 Truth table 4 3E/1A - input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2
47.0 Truth table 4 3I/1O - input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2
49.0 Truth table 5 3I/1O - input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
64.0 Timer 3 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
65.0 Timer 3 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
66.0 Timer 4 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
67.0 Timer 4 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
68.0 Counter 3 - input + Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
69.0 Counter 3 - input - Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
70.0 Counter 3 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
71.0 Counter 4 - input + Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
72.0 Counter 4 - input - Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
73.0 Counter 4 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
74.0 Signal conditioning 3 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2
75.0 Signal conditioning 3 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2
76.0 Signal conditioning 4 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2
77.0 Signal conditioning 4 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2
78.0 Non-volatile element 3 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
79.0 Non-volatile element 3 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
80.0 Non-volatile element 4 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
81.0 Non-volatile element 4 - reset Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2


88.0 Analog parameters (45)
88.0 Analog module - output Byte 0 - 255 0 AM1
89.0 Analog input limit 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
93.0 Calculator 1 - input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
94.0 Analog value recording - analog input Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
95.0 PLC/PCS analog input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU0 BU2
98.0 Calculator 2, input 1 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2
99.0 Calculator 2, input 2 Byte 0 - 255 0 BU2

18.16 Data record 139 - Marking
18.16 Data record 139 - Marking

For external faults, limit monitors, and monitoring functions of the temperature and analog
modules, user-specific texts can be configured for marking. The diagnostics
● External fault 1 to 6 (status information, warnings, and faults)
● Limit 1 to 4 (status information)
● TM warning T> / tripping T> (status information, warnings, and faults)
● AM Warning / tripping 0/4-20mA<> (status information, warnings, and faults)
can be parameterized to have various meanings, e.g. fill level >, bearing hot, etc. To simplify
diagnostics, these texts can be saved in the device. These can be created, read out and
displayed, for example, with SIMOCODE ES. The texts do not contain any functions.
You can access the following texts via data record 139:
Table 18- 17 Data record 139 - Marking
Byte.Bit Designation Type Information

10.0 Marking - External fault 1 Byte[10] BU0 BU1 BU2
50.0 Marking - External fault 5 Byte[10] BU2
60.0 Marking - External fault 6 Byte[10] BU2
90.0 Marking limit 1 Byte[10] BU2
130.0 Marking - TM warning T> Byte[10] BU0 BU2
140.0 Marking - TM trip T> Byte[10] BU0 BU2
150.0 Marking warning 0/4-20mA> Byte[10] BU2
160.0 Marking - Warning 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10] BU2
170.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA> Byte[10] BU2
180.0 Marking - Trip 0/4-20 mA< Byte[10] BU2

18.17 Data record 160 - Communication parameters
18.17 Data record 160 - Communication parameters
Note
Only the address is relevant for writing. The baud rate is detected automatically. The actual
baud rate is read.
Table 18- 18 Data record 160 - Communication parameters

0.0 Reserved Byte[4] BU0 BU1 BU2
4.0 Station address Byte
5.0 Baud rate Byte
6.0 to 9.0 Reserved Byte[6]
10.0 PROFIsafe address (read only) Word BU2

18.18 Data record 165 - Identification
18.18 Data record 165 - Identification
Table 18- 19 Data record 165 - Identification

4.0 Plant identifier Byte[32]
36.0 Location designation Byte[22]
58.0 Date installed Byte[16]
112.0 Description Byte[54]

18.19 Data record 202 - Acyclic receive
18.19 Data record 202 - Acyclic receive
Description
The acyclic receive data can be used for any functions. The receive data is available as
device-internal outputs (sockets).
Table 18- 20 Data record 202 - Acyclic receive

4.0 Acyclic receive - Bit 0.0 Bit
6.0 Acyclic receive - Analog value Word

18.20 Data record 203 - Acyclic send
18.20 Data record 203 - Acyclic send
Description
Any data can be transmitted via the acyclic send data. The send data is available as device-
internal inputs (plugs).
Table 18- 21 Data record 203 - Acyclic send

0.0 Acyclic send - Bit 0.0 Bit BU0 BU1 BU2
0.1 Acyclic send - Bit 0.1 Bit

18.21 Data record 224 - Password protection
18.21 Data record 224 - Password protection
Description
● Password protection ON
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is activated
and the password applied. If "Password protection on" applies and the password is not
identical at the time of receipt, the event "Event - Wrong password" is set and no change
will be made.
● Password protection OFF
If the data record is received with this control flag, the password protection is deactivated.
If the password is incorrect, the event "Event - Wrong password" is set and no change is
made.
Table 18- 22 Data record 224 - Password protection

4.0 Control flag: Bit
0 = Password protection off, 1 = Password protection on
4.1 Reserved Bit[31]
8.0 Password Byte[8] BU0 BU1 BU2

18.22 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control functions
18.22 Assignment of cyclic receive and send data for predefined control
functions
18.22.1 Overload relay
Table 18- 23 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, overload relay

Cycl. receive data
Bit 0.0 Not connected
Bit 0.3 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Test1 - Input
Bit 0.4 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Emergency start → Emergency start - Input
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset1 - Input
Byte 2/3 *) (analog value) Not connected
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.3 Event - Prewarning overload (I>115 %)
Bit 0.6 Status - General fault
Bit 0.7 Status - general warning
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Maximum current I_max


*) for SIMOCODE pro V, basic type 1 only

18.22.2 Direct starter
Table 18- 24 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, direct starter (direct-on-line starter)
Cycl. receive data

Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON
Bit 0.5 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → Mode selector S1
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 - Input
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.1 Status - Off
Bit 0.2 Status - ON>
Bit 0.5 Status - Remote mode

18.22.3 Reversing starter
Table 18- 25 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, reversing starter
Cyclic receive data

Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset1 - Input
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON<
Bit 0.4 Status - Interlocking time active

18.22.4 Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)
Table 18- 26 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)
Cyclic receive data
Cyclic send data

18.22.5 Star-delta starter
Table 18- 27 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, star/delta starter

Cyclic receive data
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.2 Status - ON
Bit 0.4 Status - Change-over pause active

18.22.6 Star-delta reversing starter
Table 18- 28 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, star/delta reversing starter
Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON <
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations -> PLC/PCS [DP] -> OFF
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON >
Cyclic send data

18.22.7 Dahlander
Table 18- 29 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, Dahlander

Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON >>
Cyclic send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON>>

18.22.8 Dahlander reversing starter
Table 18- 30 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, Dahlander reversing starter
Cyclic receive data
Bit 1.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON <<
Cyclic send data
Bit 1.0 Status - ON<<

18.22.9 Pole-changing starter
Table 18- 31 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, pole-changing starter

Cyclic receive data
Cyclic send data

18.22.10 Pole-changing reversing starter
Table 18- 32 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, pole-changing reversing starter
Cyclic receive data
Bit 1.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → ON <<
Cyclic send data
Bit 1.0 Status - ON<<

18.22.11 Solenoid valve
Table 18- 33 Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, solenoid valve

Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → Close
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → Open
Bit 0.6 Further function blocks → Standard functions → Test / Reset → Reset 1 → Input
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF (CLOSED)
Bit 0.2 Status - ON > (OPEN)
Byte 2/3 (analog value) Not connected

18.22.12 Positioner
Table 18- 34 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, positioner

Cyclic receive data
Bit 0.0 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → Close
Bit 0.1 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → Stop
Bit 0.2 Device parameters → Motor control → Control stations → PLC/PCS [DP] → Open
Cycl. send data
Bit 0.0 Status - ON < (CLOSED)
Bit 0.1 Status - OFF (Stop)
Bit 0.2 Status - ON > (OPEN)
Bit 1.0 Status - positioner runs in OPEN direction
Bit 1.2 Status - positioner runs in CLOSED direction

18.22.13 Soft starter
Table 18- 35 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, soft starter

Cycl. receive data
Cycl. send data

18.22.14 Soft starter with reversing contactor
Table 18- 36 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, soft starter with reversing contactor
Cycl. receive data
Cycl. send data


Dimension drawings 19
19.1 Dimension drawings - general information
In this chapter
This chapter contains the technical dimension drawings of the SIMOCODE pro system
components.
Target groups
● Technicians.
Required knowledge
● Sound knowledge of switchboard configuration.

Dimension drawings
19.2 3UF70 basic unit
19.2.1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 basic unit
Figure 19-1 SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000 basic unit

Dimension drawings
19.2.2 Basic unit SIMOCODE pro S 3UF7020
Basic unit SIMOCODE pro 3UF7020
Figure 19-2 Dimension drawing SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Dimension drawings
19.2.3 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 basic unit
Figure 19-3 SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 basic unit

Dimension drawings
19.3 3UF710 current measuring module
19.3.1 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A,

3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A
Figure 19-4 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7100. 0.3 A to 3 A, 3UF7101,
2.4 A to 25 A

Dimension drawings
19.3.2 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A
Figure 19-5 Current measuring module (through-hole transformer) 3UF7102, 10 A to 100 A

Dimension drawings
Figure 19-6 Current measuring module (through-hole transformer) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A

Dimension drawings
19.3.4 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A
Figure 19-7 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A

Dimension drawings
Figure 19-8 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A

Dimension drawings
19.4 Current / voltage measuring modules
19.4.1 Current / voltage measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7110, 0.3 A to

3 A, 3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A
Figure 19-9 Current / voltage measuring module (through-hole transformer) 3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A,
3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A

Dimension drawings
Figure 19-10 Current / voltage measuring module (through-hole transformer) 3UF7112, 10 A to 100 A

Dimension drawings
19.4.3 Current measuring module (through-hole converter) 3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200

A
Figure 19-11 Current / voltage measuring module (through-hole transformer) 3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to

200 A

Dimension drawings
19.4.4 Current measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A
Figure 19-12 Current / voltage measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A

Dimension drawings
Figure 19-13 Current / voltage measuring module (bus connection) 3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A

Dimension drawings
19.5 3UF7200 and 3UF7210 operator panels
19.5.1 3UF7200 operator panel
Figure 19-14 3UF7200 operator panel

Dimension drawings
19.5.2 3UF7210 operator panel with display
Figure 19-15 3UF7210 operator panel with display

Dimension drawings
19.6 Expansion modules / decoupling module
19.6 Expansion modules / decoupling module
Figure 19-16 Expansion modules / decoupling module

● 3UF73 digital modules
● 3UF7500-1AA00-0 and 3UF510-1AA00-0 ground-fault modules
● 3UF7700 temperature module
● 3UF7400 analog module
● 3UF715 decoupling module

Dimension drawings
19.7 Multifunction module
19.7 Multifunction module
3UF7600 multifunction module
Figure 19-17 Dimension drawing SIMOCODE pro S multifunction module

Dimension drawings
19.8 Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-PROFIsafe
19.8 Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-PROFIsafe
Figure 19-18 Digital module DM-F Local, DM-PROFIsafe

Dimension drawings
19.9 Accessories
19.9 Accessories
19.9.1 Door adapter
Figure 19-19 Door adapter

Dimension drawings
19.9 Accessories
19.9.2 Operator panel adapter
Figure 19-20 Operator panel adapter

Dimension drawings
19.9 Accessories
19.9.3 Initialization module
Figure 19-21 Initialization module
Figure 19-22 Y connecting cable

Dimension drawings
19.9 Accessories
19.9.4 Bus connecting terminal
Figure 19-23 Bus connecting terminal
19.9.5 3UL23 residual current transformer
Dimension drawings residual current transformer 3UL23

See Manual "3UG4/3RR2 Monitoring Relay"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50426183/133300)

Dimension drawings
19.9 Accessories

Technical data 20
20.1 Technical data - general information
In this chapter
This chapter contains information about SIMOCODE pro technical data.
Target groups
This chapter is addressed to the following target group: Configuring engineers
Required knowledge
● Sound knowledge of switchboard configuration
● Sound knowledge of SIMOCODE pro.

Technical data
20.2 Common technical data
Table 20- 1 Common technical data
Common technical data

Standards EN 60204-1, EN 1760-1, ISO 13849-1, IEC 61508, IEC/EN 60947-4-1,
IEC/EN 60947-5-1
Test verification documents Certificates:
www.siemens.com/sirius/approvals
Permiss. ambient temperature
In operation -25 to +60°C1)
For storage and transport -40 to +80°C2)
at installation altitude above MSL
≤ 2000 m
≤ 3000 m Max. +50 °C (no protective separation)
≤ 4000 m Max. +40 °C (no protective separation)
Degree of protection (according to IEC 60529)
All components (except current measuring IP20
modules with bus connection, operator
panel and door adapter)
Current measuring modules with bus IP00
connection
Operator panel (front) and door adapter IP54
(front) with cover
Vibration resistance
• General 1-6 Hz / 15 mm; 6-500 Hz / 2 g
• SIMOCODE pro S basic unit and 1-4 Hz / 15 mm; 4-500 Hz / 1 g
SIMOCODE pro S multifunction
module assembled on a current
measuring module
Shock resistance (sine pulse)
according to DIN EN 60068-2-27
• General 15 g / 11 ms
• SIMOCODE pro S basic unit and 10 g / 11 ms
SIMOCODE pro S multifunction
module assembled on a current
measuring module
Mounting orientation Any
Frequencies 50/60 Hz ± 5 %

Technical data
Common technical data

EMC stability according to IEC 60947-1 Corresponds to degree of severity 3
• IEC 60947-1, IEC 60947-5-1,
SN 27095, NE21
• DM-F: IEC 61326-3-1
Conducted interference, burst according 2 kV (power ports)
to IEC C 61000-4-4 Surge suppressor is required for inductive loads.
1 kV (signal ports)
Conducted interference immission, high- 10 V
frequency according to IEC 61000-4-6
Conducted interference immission, surge 2 kV (line to earth)
according to IEC 61000-4-5 1 kV (line to line)
Electrostatic discharge, ESD according to 8 kV (air discharge)
IEC 61000-4-2 4) 6 kV (contact discharge) 3)
Radiated interference immission 10 V/m

according to IEC 61000-4-3
This is a Class A product. This product DIN EN 55011/DIN EN 55022 (CISPR11/CISPR22)
can cause radio interference if used in a (corresponds to Degree of Severity A)
domestic environment. Therefore, the user
may need to implement suitable
countermeasures.
Conducted and radiated interference
emission
Protective separation according to All SIMOCODE pro circuits are isolated from each other according to
IEC 60947-1 IEC 60947-1, i.e. dimensioned with double creepage distance and air
clearance.
Notice
Please observe the information in the "Protective Separation" test report,
No. 2668.
Connecting cable 3UF793:
Rated voltage 300 V
Rated operating voltage 24 V
1) for operator panel with display 3UF721 0 - 60 °C

2) for operator panel with display 3UF721 -20 - 70 °C
3) for operator panel with display 3UF721 4kV
4) 3UF7020: Operator input during operation only on the front

Technical data
20.3 Technical data of the basic units
Table 20- 2 Technical data of the basic units
Technical data of the basic units

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted
using additional push-in lugs
Cabinet mounting basic unit SIMOCODE pro S Minimum distance to be maintained
(3UF7020)
• from cabinet rear wall for series mounting at side: 0 mm
• from grounded parts at side: 2 mm
Display
Red / green / yellow "DEVICE" LED • Red: "Function test negative, device disabled"
• Green: "Ready for operation"
• Yellow: "Memory module or addressing plug detected"
• OFF: "No control supply voltage"
Green "BUS" LED • Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"
• Flashing: "Baud rate recognized/communication with PC/PG"
Red "GEN. FAULT" LED Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault," e.g. overload tripping
"TEST/RESET" button • Resets the device after tripping
• Function test (system self-test)
• Operation of memory module or addressing plug
System interfaces
Front For connecting an operator panel or expansion modules. The memory
module, addressing plug or a PC cable can also be connected to the
system interface for parameterization purposes.
Bottom/front Connection of a current measuring module or a current / voltage
measuring module
PROFIBUS DP interface
Interface (physical) RS485
Connection system 9-way sub D socket (12 Mbit)
Terminals (1.5 Mbit)
Connection of a PROFIBUS DP cable via terminal connection or a 9-pole
sub D socket.
Rated control supply voltage Us (according to 110 V to 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz
DIN EN 61131-2) 24 V DC
Operating range 0.85 x Us to 1.1 x Us 0.8 x Us to 1.2 x Us
Power consumption
Basic unit SIMOCODE pro C (3UF7000) 7 VA / 5 W 5W
Basic unit SIMOCODE pro S (3UF7020) 5 VA / 4 W 4W
Basic unit SIMOCODE pro V (3UF7010) 10 VA / 7 W 7W
(including two expansion modules connected to
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit)
Rated insulation voltage Ui 300 V (at pollution degree 3)

Technical data

Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 4 kV
Power failure backup time(longer power failures SIMOCODE pro C
lead to shutdown of the relay outputs 24 V DC Typ. 50 ms
(monostable))
110 V to 240 V AC/DC
SIMOCODE pro S Typ. 50 ms
SIMOCODE pro V - 24 V DC Typ. 50 ms
SIMOCODE pro V - 110 V - 240 V AC/DC Typ. 200 ms
Relay outputs
Number Monostable relay outputs:
3 (SIMOCODE pro C, pro V)
2 (SIMOCODE pro S)
Function Isolated NO contacts (NO contact response parameterizable via internal
signal conditioning), 2 relay outputs connected to common potential, one
separate relay output, freely-assignable to control functions (e.g. line,
star or delta contactor or operating state status information.)
Stipulated short-circuit protection for auxiliary • Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, quick-response 10 A
contacts (relay outputs) (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 6 A, C characteristic (Ik < 500 A)
Rated uninterrupted current 5A
6 A at max. +50 °C
Rated switching capacity • AC-15:
6 A / 24 V AC;
6 A / 120 V AC;
3 A / 230 V AC
• DC-13:
2 A / 24 V DC;
0.55 A / 60 V DC;
0.25 A / 125 V DC
Inputs (binary) 4 inputs connected to common potential that are supplied via the device
electronics (24 V DC) for measuring process signals (e.g. local control
station, key-operated switch, limit switch, etc.), freely-assignable to
control functions.
24 V DC
Cable lengths (single) 300 m
Input characteristic Type 1 according to EN 61131-2
Thermistor motor protection (PTC binary)
Total cold resistance ≤ 1.5 kOhm
Response value 3.4 kOhm to 3.8 kOhm
Return value 1.5 kOhm to 1.65 kOhm

Technical data

Cable lengths, cable cross sections: 2x 250 m: 2.5 mm2
2x 150 m: 1.5 mm2
2x 50 m: 0.5 mm2
Connection of SIMOCODE pro C / pro V basic units
• Tightening torque TORQUE: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm
• Connection cross sections

- solid 2 x0.5 mm2 ... 2.5 mm2; 1 x 0.5 mm2 ... 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
- finely stranded with ferrule 2 x 0.5 mm2 ... 1.5 mm2; 1 x 0.5 mm2 ... 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
- PROFIBUS cable 2 x 0.34 mm2 AWG 22
Connection of SIMOCODE pro S basic unit
• Tightening torque TORQUE: 5.2 LB.IN to 7.0 LB.IN
0.6 Nm to 0.8 Nm
- solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 ... 1.5 mm2; 1 x 0.5 mm2 ... 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
- PROFIBUS cable 2 x 0.34 mm2 / 1 x 0.34 mm2
AWG 22

Technical data
20.4 Technical data of the current measuring modules or current / voltage measuring modules
20.4 Technical data of the current measuring modules or current / voltage

measuring modules
Table 20- 3 Technical data of the current measuring modules or current / voltage measuring modules
Technical data of the current measuring modules or current / voltage measuring modules
Mounting
Set Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-
current Is = 0.3 A to 3 A; 2.4 A to 25 A; 10 A to 100 A mounted using additional push-in lugs
(3UF71.0, 3UF71.1, 3UF71.2)
Set current Is = 20 A to 200 A Snap-on mounting onto 35-mm standard mounting rails, screw
(3UF7103, 3UF7113) attachment onto the mounting plate or direct mounting onto the
contactor
Set current Is = 63 A to 630 A Screw attachment to the mounting plate or direct mounting onto the
(3UF7104, 3UF7114) contactor
System interface for main circuit For connection to a basic unit or decoupling module
Set current Is 3UF71.0: 0.3 A to 3 A 3UF71.3: 20 A to 200 A
3UF71.1: 2.4 A to 25 A 3UF71.4: 63 A to 630 A
3UF71.2: 10 A to 100 A
Rated insulation voltage 690 V 1)
Ui (at pollution degree 3)
Rated operating voltage Ue 690 V
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp 6 kV 2)
Rated frequency 50/60 Hz
Type of current Three-phase
Short circuit Additional short-circuit protection is required in the main circuit 3)
Accuracy of current measuring (ranging from +/- 3 %

1 x minimum set current Iu to 8 x maximum set
current Io)
Typical voltage measuring range
Line-to-line voltage/voltage between lines 110 V - 690 V (only the phase voltages are available in the system
(e.g.: UL1L2) as measured values)
Phase voltage (e.g. UL1) 65 V to 400 V
Voltage measuring accuracy in the range from +/- 3 % (typical)
230 V to 400 V
Accuracy of cos phi measurement +/- 5 % (typical)
(in the nominal load range cos phi = 0.4 to 0.8)
Accuracy of apparent power measurement +/- 5 % (typical)
(in the nominal load range)
Notes on voltage measurement
Current / voltage measuring modules must be used Caution
with a decoupling module in certain types of power Note that the supply cables for voltage measurement may require
system. See the table in Chapter Decoupling module additional cable protection.
(DCM) for current / voltage measuring modules
(Page 100).

Technical data
20.4 Technical data of the current measuring modules or current / voltage measuring modules
Technical data of the current measuring modules or current / voltage measuring modules
Feed-through opening Diameter
Set current 0.3 A to 3 A; 2.4 A to 25 A 7.5 mm
Set current 10 A to 100 A: 14.0 mm
Set current 20 A to 200 A: 25.0 mm
Bus connection
Set current Is 20 A to 200 A 63 A to 630 A
Connection screw M8x25 M10x30
Tightening torque 10 Nm to 14 Nm 14 Nm to 24 Nm
Solid with cable lug 16 mm2 to 95 mm 2) 4) 5) 50 mm2 to 240 mm 2) 4) 6)
Stranded with cable lug 25 mm2 to 120 mm 2) 4) 5) 70 mm2 to 240 mm 2) 4) 6)
AWG cable 6 kcmil to 300 kcmil 1/0 kcmil to 500 kcmil
Connection for voltage measurement

- connection cross sections, solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 4 mm2;
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
- connection cross sections, finely stranded with 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2
ferrule 2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
1) for 3UF7103 or 3UF7104 to 1000 V
2) for 3UF7103 or 3UF7104 to 8 kV
3) You will find more information at this address http://www.siemens.com/simocode and in Chapter Short-circuit protection
with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V (Page 627).
4) Screw connection is possible with an appropriate 3RT19 box terminal.
5) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 95 mm2, the 3RT19
56-4EA1 terminal cover is required to maintain phase separation.
6) When connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46234 to cables with a cross section larger than 240 mm2 and when
connecting cable lugs complying with DIN 46235 to cables with a cross section larger than 185 mm2, the 3RT19 56-4EA1
terminal cover is required to maintain phase separation.

Technical data
20.5 Technical data of the decoupling module
20.5 Technical data of the decoupling module
Table 20- 4 Technical data of the decoupling module
Technical data of the decoupling module

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted using
additional push-in lugs.
Display
• Green "READY" LED
System interfaces The left interface is for connection to a basic unit or an expansion module, the right
interface is exclusively for connection to a current / voltage measuring module.
Connection cross sections
• Tightening torque Torque: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm

- solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
- finely stranded with ferrule 2 x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14

Technical data
20.6 Technical data of the expansion modules
20.6.1 Technical data of the digital modules
Table 20- 5 Technical data of the digital modules
Technical data of the expansion modules (digital modules)

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted using
additional push-in lugs
Display
• Green "READY" LED • Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
• Flashing: "No connection to basic unit"
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a current
measuring module or a current / voltage measuring module or the operator
panel
Control circuit
Relay outputs
• Number 2 monostable or bistable relay outputs (depending on the type)
• Function Isolated NO contacts (NC contact response parameterizable via internal signal
conditioning), relay outputs all with connection to common potential, freely-
assignable to control functions (e.g. line, star or delta contactor or operating
state status information).
• Stipulated short-circuit protection for • Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, quick-response 10 A (IEC 60947-5-1)
auxiliary contacts (relay outputs) • Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Rated uninterrupted current • 5A

• 6 A at max. +50 °C
• Rated switching capacity

AC-15 6 A / 24 V AC;
6 A / 120 V AC;
3 A / 230 V AC
DC-13 2 A / 24 V DC;
0.55 A / 60 V DC;
0.25 A / 125 V DC

Technical data
Technical data of the expansion modules (digital modules)

Inputs (binary) 4 externally supplied, isolated inputs (24 V DC or 110 V to 240 V AC / DC,
depending on the type), connected to common potential for measuring process
signals (e.g. local control station, key-operated switches, limit switches, ...),
freely-assignable to control functions.
• 24 V DC:
300 m
Cable lengths (single)
Type 2 according to EN 61131-2
Input characteristic
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC:
200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF / km)
—
Connection Removable terminal block with screw connection

- solid 2 x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2
2 AWG 20 to 14 / 1 x AWG 20 to 12
- finely stranded with ferrule 2 x 0.5 mm2 - 1.5 mm2 / 1 x 0.5 mm2 - 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14
20.6.2 Technical data, digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
Table 20- 6 Technical data, digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe
Technical data, digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or screw-mounted using additional
push-in lugs
Enclosure width 45 mm
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a current measuring
module or a current / voltage measuring module or the operator panel
Rated control supply voltage Us • 24 V DC
(according to DIN EN 61131-2)
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC, 50/60 Hz
Operating range • 24 V DC: 0.8 to 1.2 x Us
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC: 0.85 to 1.1 x Us
Power consumption DM-F LOCAL:
• 24 V DC: 3 W
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC: 9.5 VA/4.5 W
DM-F PROFIsafe:
• 24 V DC: 4 W
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC: 11.0 VA/5.5 W

Technical data
Technical data, digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe

Protective separation according to Between relay enabling circuits / relay outputs and electronics
IEC 60947-1
Rated impulse withstand 4 kV
voltage Uimp
Mains buffering time • 24 V DC, typ. 20 ms at 0.8 x Us
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC: typ. 20 ms at 0.85 x Us; typ. 200 ms at 230 V
Relay outputs 2 monostable relay outputs
• Number • Common potential connection is internally disconnected in a fail-safe manner by a
relay enabling circuit
• Function • Normally open contact, freely assignable to the control functions

Electrical service life of relay 0.1 million switching cycles (AC-15, 230 V/3 A)
outputs
Relay enabling circuits
• Number 2 common switching-type, fail-safe relay enabling circuits
• Function Fail-safe normally open contacts
• Stipulated short-circuit Fuse links operating class gL/gG 4 A (IEC 60947-5-1), separate for each relay
protection for relay enabling enabling circuit
circuits / relay outputs
• Rated uninterrupted current of 5A

relay enabling circuits
• Rated switching capacity of AC-15: 3 A / 24 V AC; 3 A / 120 V AC; ,5 A / 230 V AC

relay enabling circuits DC-13: 4 A / 24 V DC; 0.55 A / 60 V DC; 0.22 A / 125 V DC; 0.11 A / 250 V DC
• Electrical service life of relay 0.1 million switching cycles (AC-15, 240 V/ 2 A)
enabling circuits
• Switching rate of the relay 2000/h

enabling circuits
Connection Removable terminals with screw connection

- solid 2x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- finely stranded with ferrule 2x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

Technical data
20.6.3 Technical data of the DM-F LOCAL digital module
Table 20- 7 Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module
Technical data of the DM-F LOCAL digital module

LEDs on DM-F LOCAL Color Meaning
"READY" OFF System interface not connected / supply voltage too low / device defective
Green Device ON/system interface OK
Flashing green Device ON / system interface not active or not OK
"DEVICE" OFF Supply voltage too low
Green Device ON
Flashing green Self-test
Yellow Configuration mode
Flashing yellow Configuration error
Red Device defective or faulty
"OUT" OFF Safety-related output not active
Green Safety-related output active
Flashing green Feedback circuit not closed although start condition satisfied
"IN" OFF Input not active
Green Input active
Flashing green Fault detected (e.g., cross circuit at input, sensor simultaneity not fulfilled)
"GF" OFF No general fault
Red Group fault (wiring error, cross-circuit, configuration error)
Flashing red Group fault (feedback circuit fault, simultaneity condition not satisfied)
"1" OFF Cross-circuit detection Off
Yellow Cross-circuit detection On
Flashing yellow Configuration mode waiting for confirmation
Flickering yellow Configuration error
"2" OFF NC contact/NO contact
Yellow NC contact/NC contact
"3" OFF 2 x 1-channel
Yellow 1 x 2-channel
"4" OFF Debounce time Y12, Y22, Y34 ~ 50 ms
Yellow Debounce time Y12, Y22, Y34 ~ 10 ms

Technical data
Technical data of the DM-F LOCAL digital module

"5" OFF Sensor circuit, automatic start
Yellow Sensor circuit, monitored start
"6" OFF Cascading input 1, automatic start
Yellow Cascading input 1, monitored start
"7" OFF With startup testing
Yellow Without startup testing
"8" OFF Automatic starting after power failure
Yellow No automatic starting after power failure
DIP switch for setting safety functions
"SET / RESET" button • Application of parameters set via DIP switch
• Resetting of faults (also possible via "TEST/RESET" button on basic unit)
Inputs with safety relay 2 sensor inputs 24 V DC (Y12, Y22)
function
• Supply via terminal T1 and T2 with cross-circuit detection or external supply (static
+24 V DC) without cross-circuit detection
• Functions parameterizable via DIP switch
1 start signal input 24 V DC (Y33)
• For monitored reconnection of the relay enabling circuits after a safety-related trip
• Supply via terminal T1 with/without T3 (static +24 V DC) without cross-circuit detection
1 cascading input 24 V DC (1)
• For use in connection with a higher-level safety relay
• Supply via terminal T3 (static +24 V DC)
1 feedback circuit input 24 V DC (Y34)
• For contactor monitoring of the motor and incoming supply contactors via series-connected
auxiliary switch normally-closed contacts
• Supply via terminal T2 with/without T3 (static +24 V DC) without cross-circuit detection
Cable length (single) 1500 m

Technical data
20.6.4 Technical data of the DM-F-PROFIsafe digital module
Table 20- 8 Technical data of the DM-F-PROFIsafe digital module
Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module

LED display Color Meaning
DM-F PROFIsafe
"READY" OFF System interface not connected / supply voltage too low / device defective
Green Device ON/system interface OK
Flashing green Device ON / system interface not active or not OK
"DEVICE" OFF Supply voltage too low
Green Device ON
Red Device defective or faulty
"OUT" OFF Safety-related output not active
Green Safety-related output active
Flashing green Feedback circuit not closed although start condition satisfied
"GF" OFF No general fault
Red Group fault (PROFIsafe not active, incorrect PROFIsafe address, wiring
error, device defective)
"1" Yellow PROFIsafe address 1
DIP switch for setting the PROFIsafe address
"SET / RESET" button • Displays the set PROFIsafe address
• Application of the set PROFIsafe address (restart of the module)
• Resetting of faults (also possible via "TEST/RESET" button on basic unit)
Inputs binary • 3 inputs (83, 85, 89) 24 V DC
• Supply via terminal 84 or external supply
(static +24 V)
• Common connected, electrically isolated inputs for acquiring process signals (e.g., local
control station, keyswitch, limit switch, etc.), freely assignable to control functions
Input with safety relay • 1 feedback circuit input (91/FBC) 24 V DC
function
• For contactor monitoring of the motor and incoming supply contactors via series-connected
auxiliary switch contacts
• Supply via terminal 90/T

Technical data
Technical data of the DM-F PROFIsafe digital module

Cable length (single) 300 m
20.6.5 Safety-related technical data of the digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F
PROFIsafe
See Chapter "Technical Data" in the System Manual "Fail-safe Digital Modules
SIMOCODE pro Safety." (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852)
20.6.6 Technical data of the analog module
Table 20- 9 Technical data of the analog module
Technical data of the analog module

Display
System interfaces For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion module, a current measuring
module or a current / voltage measuring module or the operator panel.
Control circuit
Connection type: 2-wire connection
Inputs:
• Channels 2 (passive)
• Parameterizable measuring 0/4 mA to 20 mA

ranges
• Cable shielding Recommended for up to 30 m and outside the cabinet; shielding mandatory for
cables of 30 m or longer
• Max. input current (destruction 40 mA
limit)
• Accuracy ±1 %
• Input resistance 50 ohms
• Conversion time 150 ms
• Resolution 12 bits
• Open-circuit detection For measuring range 4 mA to 20 mA
• Isolation of the inputs from the No

device electronics

Technical data
Technical data of the analog module

Outputs:
• Channels 1
• Parameterizable output range 0/4 mA to 20 mA
• Cable shielding Recommended for up to 30 m and outside the cabinet; shielding mandatory for
cables of 30 m or longer
• Max. output voltage 30 V DC
• Accuracy ±1 %
• Max. output load 500 ohms
• Conversion time 25 ms
• Resolution 12 bits
• Short-circuit proof Yes
• Isolation of the outputs from the No

device electronics
Connection:
• Tightening torque Torque: 7 LB.IN to 10.3 LB.IN 0.8 Nm to 1.2 Nm

- solid: 2x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- finely stranded with ferrule: 2x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

Technical data
20.6.7 Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7500-1AA00-0
Table 20- 10 Technical data of the ground-fault module
Technical data of the ground-fault module

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 5-mm standard mounting rail or screw-
mounted using additional push-in lugs.
Display
System interface For connecting to a basic unit, an additional expansion
module, a current measuring module or a current / voltage
measuring module or the operator panel.
Control circuit
Connectable 3UL22 residual current transformer with rated 0.3 / 0.5 / 1 A
fault currents IN
• Iground fault ≤ 50 % IN No tripping
• Iground fault ≥ 100 % IN Tripping
Response delay (conversion time) 300 ms to 500 ms, additional delay possible
Connection

- connection cross sections, solid: 2x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 4 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
- connection cross sections, finely stranded with ferrule: 2x 0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2 / 1x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

Technical data
20.6.8 Technical data of the ground-fault module 3UF7510-1AA00-0
Table 20- 11 Technical data of the ground-fault module
Technical data of the ground-fault module

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 5-mm standard mounting rail or screw-
mounted using additional push-in lugs.
Display
Control circuit
Connectable residual current transformer 3UL23 1) - feed- 35 mm to 210 mm
through diameter
Type of current to be monitored AC and pulsating DC (type A)
Measurable line frequency 16 Hz to 400 Hz
Response value current (settable) 0.03 A to 40 A
Measuring accuracy (relative) ground-fault module ±5 %
Measuring accuracy (relative) transformer 3UL23 ±2,5 %
Reaction time (maximal) 100 ms
Connection

2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14
1) Technical data residual current transformer 3UL23: See Manual "3UG4/3RR2 Monitoring
Relay" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50426183/133300).

Technical data
20.6.9 Technical data of the temperature module
Table 20- 12 Technical data of the temperature module
Technical data of temperature module

Mounting Snap-mounted onto 35-mm standard mounting rail or
screw-mounted using additional push-in lugs
Display
Sensor circuit
Conversion time 500 ms
Type of connection 2-wire or 3-wire connection
Typical sensor current:
• PT100 1 mA (typical)
• PT1000 / KTY83 / KTY84 / NTC 0.2 mA (typical)
Open circuit detection / short-circuit detection / measuring

range:
• PT100 / PT1000 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -50 °C ...
+500 °C
• KTY83-110 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -
50 °C to +175 °C
• KTY84 Open circuit, short circuit; measuring range: -
40 °C to +300 °C
• NTC Short circuit; measuring range: +80 °C to +160 °C
Measuring accuracy at an ambient temperature of 20 °C (T20) < ±2 K, ±1 digit

Deviation due to ambient temperature (as % of measured 0.05 per K deviation from T20
value)
Isolation of the inputs from the device electronics No
Connection

2x AWG 20 to 14 / 1x AWG 20 to 12
2x AWG 20 to 16 / 1x AWG 20 to 14

Technical data
20.7 Technical data of the multifunction module
Technical data of the multifunction module

Cabinet mounting Minimum distance to be maintained
• from cabinet rear wall for series mounting at side: 0 mm
• from grounded parts at side: 2 mm
Display
Green "READY" LED • Continuous light: "Ready for operation"
System interfaces For connection to a SIMOCODE pro S basic unit or an operator panel
Digital module function
Control circuit
Inputs (binary) 4 externally supplied, isolated inputs (24 V DC or 110 V to 240 V AC /
DC, depending on the type), connected to common potential for
measuring process signals (e.g. local control station, key-operated
switches, limit switches, ...), freely-assignable to control functions.
• 24 V DC:
300 m
Type 2 according to EN 61131-2
• 110 V to 240 V AC/DC:
200 m (cable capacitance 300 nF / km)
—
Relay outputs
• Number 2 monostable relay outputs (depending on the type)
• Function Isolated NO contacts (NC contact response parameterizable via

internal signal conditioning), relay outputs all with connection to
common potential, freely-assignable to control functions (e.g. line, star
or delta contactor or operating state status information).
• Stipulated short-circuit protection for auxiliary • Fuse links, operating class gL/gG 6 A, quick-response 10 A
contacts (relay outputs) (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Miniature circuit breaker 1.6 A, C characteristic (IEC 60947-5-1)
• Rated uninterrupted current • 5A

• 6 A at max. +50 °C

Technical data

• Rated switching capacity
AC-15 6 A / 24 V AC;
6 A / 120 V AC;
3 A / 230 V AC
DC-13 2 A / 24 V DC;
0.55 A / 60 V DC;
0.25 A / 125 V DC
Ground-fault module function
Connectable 3UL23 residual current transformer - 35 mm to 210 mm
feed-through diameter
Type of current to be monitored AC and pulsating DC (type A)
Measurable line frequency 16 Hz to 400 Hz
Response value current (settable) 0.03 A to 40 A
Measuring accuracy (relative) ground-fault ±5 %
module
Measuring accuracy (relative) transformer 3UL23 ±2,5 %
Reaction time (maximal) 100 ms
Temperature module function
Sensor circuit
Versions of the cable shielding for the sensor • Up to 30 m, cable shielding recommended
circuit
• From 30 m, cable shielding necessary
Versions of the cable shielding for the sensor
circuit
Conversion time 500 ms
Type of connection 2-wire or 3-wire connection
Typical sensor circuit
• PT100 1 mA (typical)
• PT1000 / KTY83 / KTY84 / NTC 0.2 mA (typical)
Measuring range open circuit detection / short-

circuit detection
• PT100 / PT1000 -50 °C ... +500 °C (open circuit, short circuit)
• KTY83-110 -50 °C to +175 °C (open circuit, short circuit)
• KTY84 -40 °C to +300 °C (open circuit, short circuit)
• NTC +80 °C to +160 °C (short circuit)
Measuring accuracy at an ambient temperature < ±2 K, ±1 digit

of 20 °C (T20)
Deviation due to ambient 0.05 per K deviation from T20
temperature (as % of measured value)
Isolation of the inputs from the device electronics No

Technical data

Connection
• Tightening torque TORQUE: 5.2 LB.IN to 7.0 LB.IN
0.6 Nm to 0.8 Nm
- solid 2 x0.5 mm2 to 1.5 mm2; 1 x 0.5 mm2 to 2.5 mm2
2 x AWG 20 to 16 / 1 x AWG 20 to 14

Technical data
20.8 Technical data of the operator panels
20.8.1 Technical data of the operator panel
Table 20- 13 Technical data of the operator panel
Technical data of the operator panel

Mounting Installation in a cabinet door or in a front panel, with IP54 system interface
cover.
LED displays
• Red / green / yellow "DEVICE" LED • Red blocked: "Function test negative, device disabled"
• Flashing green: "No connection to basic unit"
• Green "BUS" LED • Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"

• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED • Continuous light /

• Flashing: "Feeder fault," e.g. overload tripping
• 3 yellow LEDs / 4 green LEDs For freely assigning any status signals
Buttons
• Test / Reset • Resets the device after tripping
• Function test (system self-test)
• Operation of memory module or addressing plug
• Control buttons • For controlling the motor feeder, freely assignable

System interfaces
• Front For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug, or a PC cable for
parameterization purposes
• Rear face For connecting a cable to the basic unit or the expansion module

Technical data
20.8.2 Technical data of the operator panel with display
Table 20- 14 Technical data of the operator panel with display
Technical data of the operator panel with display

Mounting Installation in a cabinet door or in a front panel, with IP54 system interface
cover.
LED displays
• Red / green / yellow "DEVICE" LED • Red blocked: "Function test negative, device disabled"
• Flashing green: "No connection to basic unit"
• Green "BUS" LED • Continuous light: "Communication with PLC/PCS"

• Red "GEN. FAULT" LED • Continuous light/flashing: "Feeder fault," e.g. overload tripping
• 4 green LEDs For freely assigning any status signals (preferably for feedback on the switching
state, e.g. ON, OFF, CCW, CW)
Display Graphic display of current measured values, operating and diagnostics data or
status information.
Buttons
• Control buttons • Control of the motor feeder, freely assignable
• Arrow keys • Navigation in the display menu
• Softkeys • Various functions, depending upon the menu, e.g. test, reset, operation of
memory module and addressing plug
System interfaces
• Front For connecting a memory module, an addressing plug, or a PC cable for
parameterization purposes
• Rear face Connection to the basic unit or to an expansion module

Technical data
20.9 Technical data compartment identification
20.9 Technical data compartment identification
Technical data initialization module
Technical data initialization module

Order No. (MLFB) 3UF7 902-0AA00-0
Ambient temperature -25 ... +80 °C
Rated voltage 300 V
Rated operating voltage 24 V
Technical data Y connecting cable
Technical data Y connecting cable

Order No. (MLFB) 3UF7 931-0CA00-0, 3UF7 932-0CA00-0,
3UF7 937-0CA00-0
Lengths of system cable / open end of cable
3UF7 931-0CA00-0 0.1 m / 1.0 m
3UF7 932-0CA00-0 0.5 m / 1.0 m
3UF7 937-0CA00-0 1.0 m / 1.0 m

Technical data
20.10 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V
20.10 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit
currents up to 100 kA and 690 V
Figure 20-1 Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeder for short-circuit currents up to 100 kA
and 690 V for 3UF7 8 (1)

Technical data
You will find the selection tables for fuseless motor feeders in the manuals "Configuring
SIRIUS Innovations - Selection Data for Fuseless and Fused Load Feeders"
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/39714188) and "SIRIUS Configuration
- Selection Data for Fuseless Load Feeders"
1) , 2) , 3) , 4): See below.

Technical data
Figure 20-2 6050-21 DS 05_Sys_TabD-13

Technical data
You will find the selection tables for fuseless motor feeders in the following manuals.
● "Configuring SIRIUS Innovations - Selection Data for Fuseless and Fused Load Feeders"
● "SIRIUS Configuration - Selection Data for Fuseless Load Feeders"
● "Configuration Manual Configuring SIRIUS Innovations UL - Selection Data for Fuseless
and Fused Load Feeders"
● "Configuration Manual Configuring SIRIUS - Selection Data for Load Feeders in Fuseless
Design" (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/40625241).
1) Assignment and short-circuit protective devices acc. to IEC 60947-4-1
WARNING
Type of coordination 1
With type of coordination 1, the contactor or starter must not pose a hazard to people or
equipment in the event of a short circuit!
The contactor or starter must be suitable for further operation without repair and
replacement of parts.
WARNING
Type of coordination 2
With type of coordination 2, the contactor or starter must not pose a hazard to people or
equipment in the event of a short circuit!
The contactor or starter must be suitable for further use.
There is a risk of contact welding.
2) No contactor installation possible

3)
NOTICE
Operating voltage
Pay attention to the operating voltage!

Technical data
20.11 Typical reaction times
20.11.1 SIMOCODE pro C/V basic units
Table 20- 15 Typical reaction times of SIMOCODE pro C device series
Time inputs Time processing Time outputs

Basic unit: Set delay time 30 ms 10 ms
Thermistor: 400 ms -
PROFIBUS: 30 ms 30 ms
Current measurement: 200 ms -
Internal ground fault: 300 ms ... 600 ms + set -
delay
Table 20- 16 Typical reaction times of SIMOCODE pro V device series1)
Component Time: Inputs Time: Time:

Processing Outputs
PROFIBUS: 5 ms 5 ms
Current measurement: 300 ms -
Voltage measurement: 300 ms -
Active power / cos phi: 1000 ms -
Internal ground fault: 300 ms ... 600 ms + set delay -
Ground-fault module / external 300 ms ... 500 ms + set delay -
ground fault
Digital modules:
• 24 V DC version 15 ms + delay time 25 ms
• 110 V - 240 V AC/DC 50 ms + delay time 25 ms
version
Analog module 150 ms 25 ms
Temperature module 500 ms -
DM-F Local ≤ 75 ms + delay time 30 ms
DM-F PROFIsafe 15 ms + delay time 30 ms
1) Based upon a typical hardware set-up: Basic unit + current measuring module +
2 expansion modules
Reaction time = inputs conversion time + internal processing time + outputs conversion time

Technical data
Example:
You wish to switch a relay output of the basic unit via PROFIBUS when the "remote" bit is
set:
● SIMOCODE pro C: Reaction time = 30 ms + 30 ms + 10 ms = 70 ms
● SIMOCODE pro V: Reaction time = 5 ms + 5 ms + 10 ms = 20 ms.
In the case of the data from and to the PLC, you must also add the times for bus runtime,
IM/CP cycles, and PLC-CPU cycle.
You will find the corresponding information in the device descriptions.
20.11.2 SIMOCODE pro S device series
Table 20- 17 Typical reaction times of the SIMOCODE pro device series
Component/control function Time inputs Time: Time:

Processing Outputs
PROFIBUS: 30 ms 30 ms
Current measurement 300 ms -
Internal ground fault 300 ms ... 600 ms + set delay -
• 24 V-DC version 30 ms + delay time 40 ms
• 110 V - 240 V AC/DC version 65 ms + delay time 40 ms
Ground-fault module function 100 ms + set delay -

Temperature module function 500 ms -
Star-delta starter - typical 100 ... 150 ms 1) -
switchover time from star to delta
1) QE2 and QE3 must be parameterized to the outputs of the basic unit.
Example:
You wish to switch a relay output of the basic unit via PROFIBUS when the "remote" bit is
set:
Reaction time = 30 ms + 30 ms + 10 ms = 70 ms
In the case of the data from and to the PLC, you must also add the times for bus runtime,
IM/CP cycles, and PLC-CPU cycle.
You will find the corresponding information in the device descriptions.

Example circuits 21
21.1 Example circuits - general information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find example circuits for the following parameterizable control
functions:
● Overload relay
● Direct starter (direct-on-line starter)
● Reversing starter
● Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)
● Star-delta starter
● Star-delta reversing starter
● Dahlander
● Dahlander reversing starter
● Pole-changing starter
● Pole-changing reversing starter
● Solenoid valve
● Positioner
● Soft starter
● Soft starter with reversing contactor
● Direct starter for single-phase loads
Target groups
This manual is addressed to the following target groups:
● Planners
● Technicians
● Electricians
Required knowledge
● Basic SIMOCODE pro knowledge (see Chapter System description (Page 23))
● Basic knowledge about SIMOCODE ES parameterization software.

Example circuits
21.2 Example circuits - purpose, steps, preconditions
21.2 Example circuits - purpose, steps, preconditions
Purpose of example circuits

The example circuits should:
● Show you how to implement a circuit for a specific control function using SIMOCODE pro.
● Help you modify these examples for your respective application.
● Help you implement other applications easily.
Fundamental steps
● Implementation of external wiring (for control and feedback of main circuit devices and
control and signaling devices)
(see circuit diagrams)
● Implementation / activation of internal SIMOCODE pro functions, with control and
evaluation of the SIMOCODE pro inputs / outputs (internal SIMOCODE pro wiring)
(see function circuit diagrams with the function blocks of the graphic editor of the
"SIMOCODE ES" configuration software).
● Setting up the cyclic receive and send data for the communication of SIMOCODE pro
with a PLC
(see function circuit diagrams and the "Assignment of cyclic receive and send data"
tables).
Prerequisites
● Load feeder / motor is present
● PLC / PCS with PROFIBUS DP interface is present
● The main circuit is already connected.
● PC / PG is present
● SIMOCODE ES software is installed
● The basic unit has the factory settings. More information about how to apply the factory
settings can be found in Section "Restoring the factory settings" of the SIMOCODE pro
manual.

Example circuits
21.3 "Overload relay" example circuit
21.3.1 "Overload relay" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V
Figure 21-1 "Overload relay" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V basic units

Example circuits
21.3.2 "Overload relay" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S
Figure 21-2 "Overload relay" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S°basic unit

Example circuits
21.3.3 "Overload relay" function circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V
Figure 21-3 "Overload relay" function circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V basic units

Example circuits
21.3.4 "Overload relay" function circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S
Figure 21-4 "Overload relay" function circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Example circuits
21.4 "Direct starter" example circuit
21.4.1 "Direct-on-line starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V
Figure 21-5 "Direct-on-line starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro V, pro V basic units

Example circuits
21.4.2 "Direct-on-line starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S
Figure 21-6 "Direct-on-line starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Example circuits
21.4.3 "Direct-on-line starter" function circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V
Figure 21-7 "Direct-on-line starter" function circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V basic units

Example circuits
21.4.4 "Direct-on-line starter" function circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S
Figure 21-8 "Direct-on-line starter" function circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Example circuits
21.5 "Reversing starter" example circuit
21.5.1 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V
Figure 21-9 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V basic units

Example circuits
21.5.2 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S
Figure 21-10 "Reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Example circuits
21.5.3 "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V
Figure 21-11 "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V basic units

Example circuits
21.5.4 "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S
Figure 21-12 "Reversing starter" function circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Example circuits
21.6 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" example circuit
21.6.1 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C,
pro V
Figure 21-13 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V basic units

Example circuits
21.6.2 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit diagram - SIMOCODE pro S
Figure 21-14 "Circuit breaker" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Example circuits
21.6.3 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" function circuit diagram -

SIMOCODE pro C, pro V
Figure 21-15 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" function circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C,
pro V

Example circuits
21.6.4 "3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" function circuit diagram -

SIMOCODE pro S
Figure 21-16 "Circuit breaker" function circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Example circuits
21.7 "Star-delta starter" circuit example
21.7.1 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta) –

SIMOCODE pro V
Figure 21-17 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta), SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

Example circuits
21.7.2 Circuit diagram of star-delta starter (current measuring in delta) –

SIMOCODE pro S
Figure 21-18 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in delta), SIMOCODE pro S basic
unit

Example circuits
21.7.3 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta) -

SIMOCODE pro V
Figure 21-19 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in

delta), SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

Example circuits
21.7.4 Functional diagram of star-delta starter (current measuring in delta) -

SIMOCODE pro S
Figure 21-20 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in delta), SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Example circuits
21.7.5 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable) -

SIMOCODE pro V
Figure 21-21 "Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring in supply cable), SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro V
Figure 21-22 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply
cable), SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

Example circuits
SIMOCODE pro S
Figure 21-23 "Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current measuring in supply
cable), SIMOCODE pro S basic unit

Example circuits
21.8 "Star-delta reversing starter" circuit example
21.8.1 "Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram
Figure 21-24 "Star delta reversing starter" circuit diagram

Example circuits
21.8.2 "Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram
Figure 21-25 "Star-delta reversing starter" function circuit diagram

Example circuits
21.9 "Dahlander" circuit diagram
21.9.1 "Dahlander" circuit diagram
Figure 21-26 "Dahlander" circuit diagram

Example circuits
21.9.2 "Dahlander" function circuit diagram
Figure 21-27 "Dahlander" function circuit diagram

Example circuits
21.10 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram
21.10.1 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram
Figure 21-28 "Dahlander reversing starter" circuit diagram

Example circuits
21.10.2 "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram
Figure 21-29 "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram (1/2)

Example circuits
Figure 21-30 "Dahlander reversing starter" function circuit diagram (2/2)

Example circuits
21.11 "Pole-changing starter" example circuit
21.11.1 "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram
Figure 21-31 "Pole-changing starter" circuit diagram

Example circuits
21.11.2 "Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram
Figure 21-32 "Pole-changing starter" function circuit diagram

Example circuits
21.12 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit example
21.12.1 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram
Figure 21-33 "Pole-changing reversing starter" circuit diagram

Example circuits
21.12.2 "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram
Figure 21-34 "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram (1/2)

Example circuits
Figure 21-35 "Pole-changing reversing starter" function circuit diagram (2/2)

Example circuits
21.13 "Solenoid valve" example circuit
21.13.1 "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram
Figure 21-36 "Solenoid valve" circuit diagram

Example circuits
21.13.2 "Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram
Figure 21-37 "Solenoid valve" function circuit diagram

Example circuits
21.14 "Positioner" example circuit
21.14.1 "Positioner 1" circuit diagram
Figure 21-38 "Positioner 1" circuit diagram

Example circuits
21.14.2 "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram
Figure 21-39 "Positioner 1" function circuit diagram

Example circuits

Example circuits

Example circuits

Example circuits

Example circuits

Example circuits

Example circuits

Example circuits

Example circuits
21.15 "Soft starter" (example 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) circuit example
21.15.1 "Soft starter" circuit diagram (for example, 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) -
SIMOCODE pro V
Figure 21-48 "Soft starter" circuit diagram (for example, 3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404); SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

Example circuits
21.15.2 Circuit diagram of soft starter (for example, 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) -
SIMOCODE pro S
Figure 21-49 "Soft starter" circuit diagram (for example, 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404), SIMOCODE
pro S basic unit

Example circuits
21.15.3 "Soft starter" function circuit diagram (for example, 3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404) - SIMOCODE pro V
Figure 21-50 "Soft starter" function circuit diagram (for example, 3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404), SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

Example circuits
21.15.4 Functional diagram of soft starter (for example, 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) -
SIMOCODE pro S
Figure 21-51 "Soft starter" function circuit diagram (for example, 3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404), SIMOCODE pro S basic
unit

Example circuits
21.16 "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407) example circuits
21.16.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)
Figure 21-52 Circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)

Example circuits
21.16.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)
Figure 21-53 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)

Example circuits
21.17 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) example circuit
21.17 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)

example circuit
21.17.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404)
Figure 21-54 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404)

Example circuits
21.17 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404) example circuit
21.17.2 Function circuit diagram of "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW402,
3RW403, 3RW404)
Figure 21-55 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" function circuit diagram (3RW402, 3RW403,
3RW404)

Example circuits
21.18 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (example 3RW405, 3RW407) example circuit
21.18 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (example 3RW405, 3RW407)

example circuit
21.18.1 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)
Figure 21-56 Circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405, 3RW407)

Example circuits
21.18 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (example 3RW405, 3RW407) example circuit
21.18.2 Function circuit diagram "Soft starter with reversing contactor" (3RW405,
3RW407)
Figure 21-57 "Soft starter with reversing contactor" function circuit diagram (3RW405, 3RW407)

Example circuits
21.19 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" example circuit
21.19.1 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit diagram
Figure 21-58 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" circuit diagram

Example circuits
21.19.2 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" function circuit diagram
Figure 21-59 "Direct starter for 1-phase loads" function circuit diagram

Example circuits

Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas 22
22.1 Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas - general
information
In this chapter
In this chapter, you will find safety and commissioning information for hazardous areas. It is
imperative that you observe this information for the protection of any motors in hazardous
areas.
Target groups
Required knowledge
● Explosion protection
● IEC 60079-14 / EN 60079-14 / DIN VDE 0165-1 Electrical equipment for locations with
explosive gas atmosphere - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (except mines)
● IEC 60079-17 / EN 60079-17 / DIN VDE 0165-10-1 Electrical equipment for locations with
explosive gas atmosphere - Testing and maintenance of electrical installations in
hazardous areas (except mines)
● IEC 61241-14 / DIN VDE 0165-2 Electrical equipment for use in the presence of
combustible dust - Selection and installation
● IEC 61241-17 / DIN VDE 0165-10-2 Electrical equipment for use in the presence of
combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous
areas (other than mines)
● VDE 0118 Erection of electrical installations in mines
● Betriebssicherheitsverordnung - BetrSichV. (German Ordinance on Industrial Safety and
Health)

Safety and commissioning information for EEx areas
22.2 Information and standards
Information and standards

Type of protection EEx e and EEx d:
The overload protection and thermistor motor protection of the SIMOCODE pro system
meets the requirements for overload protection of explosion-proof motors for the following
types of protection:
● EEx d "explosion-proof enclosure," e.g. according to DIN EN 50018 or DIN EN 60079
● EEx e "increased safety," e.g. according to DIN EN 50019 or DIN EN 60079-7.
Increased danger in hazardous areas means it is necessary to carefully observe the
following notes and standards:
● IEC 60079-14 / EN 60079-14 / DIN VDE 0165-1 Electrical equipment for locations with
explosive gas atmosphere - Electrical installations in hazardous areas (except mines)
● IEC 60079-17 / EN 60079-17 / DIN VDE 0165-10-1 Electrical equipment for locations with
explosive gas atmosphere - Testing and maintenance of electrical installations in
hazardous areas (except mines)
● IEC 61241-14 / DIN VDE 0165-2 Electrical equipment for use in the presence of
combustible dust - Selection and installation
● IEC 61241-17 / DIN VDE 0165-10-2 Electrical equipment for use in the presence of
combustible dust - Inspection and maintenance of electrical installations in hazardous
areas (other than mines)
● VDE 0118 Erection of electrical installations in mines
● Betriebssicherheitsverordnung - BetrSichV. (German Ordinance on Industrial Safety and
Health)
All 3UF7 devices are approved under Device Group I, Category "M2" (mining) and Device
Group II, Category 2 in the area "GD" (areas in which explosive gas, steam, fog, air mixtures
and inflammable dust are present):
● BVS 06 ATEX F 001 I (M2) *)
● BVS 06 ATEX F 001 II (2) GD *).
*)
Note
This safety and commissioning information is also valid for devices with certificate numbers
BVS 04 ATEX F 003.
These devices are suitable for the protection of motors in hazardous areas and comply with
the standards listed above.
Tests other than those legally stipulated (Ordinance on Industrial Safety and Health) are not
required.

WARNING
Qualified personnel required
All work involved in connecting, commissioning and maintenance must be carried out by
qualified, responsible personnel.
Failure to follow proper procedures may result in personal injury and damage to property.

22.3 Set-up and commissioning
22.3.1 Operating Instructions
Note
Also follow the following SIMOCODE pro Operating Instructions (included with the devices).
Device Order No.

SIMOCODE pro C/V basic units 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1
22.3.2 Setting the rated motor current
Notes/example
Set the 3UF7 to the rated motor current (according to the type plate or design test certificate
of the motor).
Note
Pay attention to the trip class or the tripping characteristic of the 3UF7.
Choose the trip class so that the motor is thermally protected even with a blocked rotor.
The motor, cables, and contactor must be dimensioned for the selected trip class.
Note
Set the response of the overload protection to "Trip"!

Example
Motor 500 V, 50 / 60 Hz, 110 kW, 156 A, temperature class T3, time TE = 11 s, IA / Is = 5.5:
Figure 22-1 Tripping conditions of the EExe motor, selected: CLASS 10

22.3.3 SIMOCODE pro with thermistor input

On 3UF70, you can use temperature sensor type A with a characteristic according to
IEC 60947-8 (DIN VDE 0660, part 303), DIN 44081 and DIN 44082.
Depending on the number of sensors, the following tripping and restart temperatures apply.
Figure 22-2 Typical characteristic curve of a type A sensor (logarithmic scale)
Depending on the number of sensors, the following tripping and restart temperatures will
result based on the TNF (rated response temperature of the sensor):
Table 22- 1 Tripping and restart temperatures
Tripping temperature Restart temperature

3 sensors TNF +4 K TNF -7 K
6 sensors TNF -5 K TNF -20 K
The temperatures listed are limit values.
CAUTION
Response setting
Set the response for the activated thermistor to "Trip"!

22.3.4 Sensor circuit wiring
NOTICE
Installing the measuring circuit cables
Lay the measuring circuit cables as separate control cables. It is not permissible to use the
cores of the motor supply cable or other main supply cables.
Shielded control cables should be used if extremely inductive or capacitive interference is
expected as a result of power cables routed in parallel.
Maximum cable lengths of the sensor circuit cables:
Table 22- 2 Maximum cable length of the sensor circuit cables
Cable cross section Cable lengths at the thermistor input

Without short-circuit detection With short-circuit detection 1)
2.5 mm2 2x 2800 m 2x 250 m
1.5 mm2 2x 1500 m 2x 150 m
0.5 mm2 2x 500 m 2x 50 m
1) A short circuit in the sensor circuit will be detected up to these maximum cable lengths.
Evaluating the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable is recommended.

If the short-circuit detection of the sensor cable is not evaluated, when commissioning or
after modifications / maintenance work (assembly, disassembly) of the system, the sensor
resistor must be measured using a suitable measuring instrument.
22.3.5 Short-circuit protection for type of coordination 2 according to IEC 60947-4-1

Short-circuit protection must be carried out by separately arranged overcurrent protection
devices.
NOTICE
Fuse protection of the contactor for type of coordination 2
When combining with other contactors, observe the respective maximum fuse protection of
the contactor for type of coordination 2.

22.3.6 Cable protection
NOTICE
Cable cross sections
Avoid impermissibly high cable surface temperatures by correctly dimensioning the cross
sections!
Choose a sufficient cable cross section, especially for heavy-starting motors CLASS 20 to
CLASS 40 (see Chapter Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeders for short-circuit
currents up to 100 kA and 690 V (Page 627))!
22.3.7 Test
Testing - general information

SIMOCODE pro offers users a convenient method of checking the complete motor protection
chain (incl. actuators and sensors such as contactors, circuit breakers, thermistors). This can
be used, for example, for testing according to IEC 60079-17. The test encompasses a full
function test. For this purpose, all three test phases are to be carried out (hardware test,
current feedback, motor protection tripping, see below). The test can be carried out using the
"TEST / RESET" buttons provided, or automatically via the bus. Due to existing self-test
routines, tripping currents do not need to be injected in order to carry out testing.
Test phases
● Phase 1: Hardware test / lamp test (0 s to 2 s):
The hardware (e.g. the thermistor electronics) is tested, all LEDs and displays are
activated, including the lamp control. Contactor controls remain unchanged.
● Phase 2: Hardware test results (2 s to 5 s):
If there is a fault, the "HW fault basic unit" fault is triggered.
If there is no fault:
– The "GEN. FAULT" LED flashes when no main current is flowing
– The "GEN. FAULT" LED flickers if main current is flowing in all three phases
(exception: with a "1-phase load" in one phase).
● Phase 3: Relay test (> 5 s):
If testing is carried out with tripping, the contactor controls are deactivated.

The following table shows the test phases performed when the "TEST / RESET" button is
pressed for the required length of time:
Table 22- 3 States of the status LEDs / contactor controls during testing
Test phase Status Without main current With main current

OK Fault *) OK Fault
Hardware test / lamp test
<2s "DEVICE" LED orange green orange green
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged Unchanged
Show QL *)
Results of the hardware test / lamp test

2 to 5 s "DEVICE" LED green red green red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Unchanged Deactivated Unchanged Deactivated
Relay test
>5s "DEVICE" LED green red green red
"GEN.FAULT" LED
Contactor control Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated Deactivated
LED lighted / LED flashing LED flickering LED off
switched on
*) "Fault" only displayed after 2 s
22.3.8 Further safety guidelines
WARNING
Safety information for DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital modules
Pay attention to the safety notes in the "Failsafe Digital Modules SIMOCODE pro Safety"
manual (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50564852).
CAUTION
Using relay outputs for the protection function
For the protection function, only the relay outputs of the 3UF70 basic unit, of a monostable
digital module 3UF730, of a multifunction module 3UF76 or of a failsafe expansion module
3UF732/3UF73 may be used!

WARNING
The 3UF7 is not suitable for installation in hazardous areas.
The device is only allowed to be installed in a control cabinet with the minimum degree of
protection of IP 4x.
If installed in hazardous areas, there must be no ignition hazard from the 3UF7. Appropriate
measures must be taken (e.g. encapsulation).
WARNING
Electrical isolation required
For SIMOCODE pro devices with a 24 V DC control supply, galvanic isolation must be
ensured with a battery or a safety isolating transformer according to DIN EN 61558-2-6.
Note
The 3UF7 is not suitable for load-side operation on frequency converters.
22.3.9 Ambient conditions

Permissible ambient temperature range:
● Storage / transportation: -40 °C to +80 °C
● Operation: -25 °C to +60 °C; BBD: 0 °C to +60 °C
22.3.10 Safety data

● SIL (IEC 61508): SIL 1
● PFDavg (IEC 61508) < 3.0 * 10-2
● Repeat test: DIN EN 60079-17, Section 4.4

22.4 Maintenance and repairs
22.4 Maintenance and repairs

These devices are maintenance-free.
WARNING
Repairs
Repairs to the device may only be carried out by the manufacturer.

22.5 Warranty
22.5 Warranty
Note
To meet the conditions of the warranty, you must observe the safety and commissioning
instructions from the following operating instructions.
You can find the Operating Instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Operating Instructions
(www.siemens.com/sirius/manuals).
Device Order No.

SIMOCODE pro C/V basic unit 3ZX1012-0UF70-1AA1

22.6 Further information

You will find further information on the Internet:
● Internet (www.siemens.com/simocode)
● Information and Download Center (www.siemens.com/sirius/infomaterial)
● Product Information System (ProdIS) (www.siemens.com/sirius/support)
● Service and support (www.siemens.com/sirius/technical-assistance)
● ATEX (www.siemens.com/sirius/atex)
● Certificates (www.siemens.com/sirius/approvals)


Compartment identification 23
23.1 Compartment identification - general information
In this chapter
This chapter provides information about how SIMOCODE pro is operated with an
initialization module that is permanently installed in the switchgear.
Target groups
● Technicians
Required knowledge
● Knowledge about the "SIMOCODE ES" software.

Compartment identification
23.2 Introduction to compartment identification
Applications and advantages of compartment identification

The compartment identification described in this chapter is mainly used in application in
which SIMOCODE pro is used in a withdrawable motor control center (MCC).
In withdrawable motor control centers, all components belonging to the motor feeder are
grouped together as one unit in a switchboard-specific enclosure. In this way, a complete
withdrawable module can be replaced very quickly and without isolating the MCC if a
component is defective.
This principle is very often used in the various branches of the process industry. That is why
a SIMOCODE pro with such a design is used in very many of its applications.
With the compartment identification mechanism, programming a SIMOCODE pro S/pro V
device when a withdrawable module is replaced is completely automated.
The initialization module (3UF7 902-0AA00-0) permanently installed in the switchboard
contains a copy of the SIMOCODE device parameters and the device addressing, which are
taken over completely automatically by the new SIMOCODE pro S/pro V device after
replacement of the withdrawable module.
In the future, no special knowledge of SIMOCODE will be necessary to replace withdrawable
modules and at the same time the risk of incorrect parameterization in the SIMOCODE
device is also reduced.
Figure 23-1 Compartment identification

CAUTION
Basic units SIMOCODE pro C (3UF7000*) and basic units SIMOCODE pro V (3UF7010*)
to E08, V3.0
These basic units do not support the initialization module and start with the internal
parameters.
A configuration such as the one shown above ensures,

● that, during device startup of SIMOCODE pro S/pro V/pro V PN, the parameters, the
device addressing, and the I&M data of the initialization module are loaded into the
SIMOCODE basic unit
● when parameterizing SIMOCODE pro, the parameters, the device addressing, and
I&M data are additionally also written into the initialization module.
This makes it simple for a user to change a withdrawable module without having to deal with
further details of parameterization or address assignment.
The advantages of operation with a permanently installed initialization module in the
switchboard:
● Device parameters and device addressing are automatically stored in the initialization
module in the motor control center and loaded form this initialization module (initialized).
● It is possible to replace an MCC motor feeder without special knowledge of
SIMOCODE pro.
● Manual addressing and parameterization are no longer necessary. The simplifies
operation of the switchboard.

23.3 Hardware and software requirements for compartment identification
23.3 Hardware and software requirements for compartment identification
Basis unit versions

The compartment identification function is supported by the following basic units:
● SIMOCODE pro S basic units
● SIMOCODE pro V basic units as from product version E09, firmware version V3.1
● SIMOCODE pro V PN basic units as from product version E01, firmware version V1.0.
NOTICE
to E08, V3.0
These basic units do not support the initialization module and start with the internal
parameters.
NOTICE
Current measuring module required
To operate SIMOCODE pro with an initialization module, a current measuring module must
be connected to the basic unit.
Version of the operator panel with display

The compartment identification function is supported by operator panels with display as from
product version *E07*.
SIMOCODE ES version
The compartment identification function is supported as from version "SIMOCODE ES+SP4."

23.4 Operating compartment identification
Safety guidelines
Note
Startup with an initialization module
During device startup with an initialization module, there must be no memory module in the
system interface of the SIMOCODE basic unit.
If there is a memory module in the system interface of the SIMOCODE pro basic unit,
• the "Fault - parameterization" fault message will be output
• the "Gen.Fault" LED will flash red.
Note
Contacting of the initialization module
The initialization module must be contacted before or together with the voltage supply of the
basic unit.
Loading parameters from the initialization module

As soon as contact has been established with the initialization module and the voltage has
been switched on, the parameters of the initialization module are loaded into the basic unit.
The previous parameterization is overwritten and the compartment identification is activated
(see the following topic "Autoactivation of compartment identification").
You can also track successful read-in of the parameters from the initialization module with
the "initialization module read in" event in the SIMOCODE ES online functions.
Note
Loading parameters from the initialization module into the SIMOCODE pro V basic units with
an earlier product version
Basic units SIMOCODE pro C (3UF7000*) and SIMOCODE pro V (3UF7010*) to E08, V3.0
do not detect the initialization module and ignore its parameters!
Note
Connection of a SIMOCODE pro S or SIMOCODE pro V basic unit with an empty
initialization module
Because a SIMOCODE pro S or SIMOCODE pro V basic unit does not find any valid
parameters on startup with an empty initialization module, "Fault - parameterization" is
signaled. The "general fault" LED of the basic unit flashes red.
Reparameterization of the device, e.g., with SIMOCODE ES, writes valid parameters to the
basic unit and the initialization module again.
You can then acknowledge the fault message.

Saving parameters onto the initialization module

If an initialization module is connected to a SIMOCODE pro S or SIMOCODE pro V basic
unit, all parameters that are saved to the Simocode basic unit, e.g. SIMOCODE ES, are
automatically copied into the initialization module.
You can also track successful writing of the parameters into the initialization module with the
"initialization module programmed" event in the SIMOCODE ES online functions.
Parameter settings in the "SIMOCODE ES" software.

Technologically, the initialization module is handled like an extension module of
SIMOCODE pro S/pro V.
To use the mechanism of compartment identification, choose the "initialization module"
option in the "Device configuration" dialog box in the "SIMOCODE ES" software.
Autoactivation of compartment identification

If a SIMOCODE pro S or SIMOCODE pro V basic unit detects a connected initialization
module during device startup, it will automatically load the parameters stored in it and will
start with these parameters.
At the same time, the "Initialization module" parameter of the device configuration in the
SIMOCODE pro basic unit is activated so that, on each new device startup, an initialization
module is expected.
Note
Device startup when the "initialization module" parameter is activated
If no initialization module is detected during device start-up, SIMOCODE pro will signal "Trip
- Configuration fault." The "General Fault" LED of the basic unit flashes.
The basic unit can only be reset when the configuration error has been remedied by
connecting an initialization module or when a configuration has been loaded into the device
without the "initialization module" option.
Deactivation of the compartment identification

To prevent SIMOCODE pro V from expecting an initialization module during device startup,
you clear the "Initialization module" check mark in the "Device configuration" dialog box. In
this case, no initialization module must be connected to the SIMOCODE pro S or
SIMOCODE pro V basic unit while this configuration is being downloaded.
A further way of deactivating the compartment identification is to reset the SIMOCODE pro
basic unit to the factory settings. Resetting is performed in the "Commands" dialog box. In
this case, too, no initialization module must be connected to the SIMOCODE pro basic unit.
The parameter settings can then also be reloaded into the SIMOCODE pro basic unit.

Commands
"Initialization module write protection on" command
All contents of the initialization module are write-protected. This prevents any inadvertent
changes to the contents of the initialization module and any parameter changes for the
connected SIMOCODE pro S or SIMOCODE pro V basic unit. An inadvertent modification of
parameters for a motor feeder is prevented. SIMOCODE pro signals successful execution of
the command with the "initialization module write-protected" event.
"Initialization module write protection off" command

With this command, you can remove the write protection of the initialization module.
"Initialization module write protection identification data on" command

The device addressing stored in the initialization module and the I&M data (identification &
maintenance) are write-protected. With this command, you can
● prevent inadvertent changes to the addressing and I&M data for the motor feeder.
● continue to make parameter changes in the initialization module as well as in the
SIMOCODE pro S or SIMOCODE pro V basic unit if the address data and I&M data are
identical to the data already contained in the device when parameters are downloaded
SIMOCODE pro signals the successful execution of the command with the "initialization
module identification data write-protected" event.
"Initialization module write protection identification data off" command

With this command, you can remove the write protection of the identification data of the
"Clear initialization module data" command:

With this command
● all contents of the initialization module are erased
● The initialization module is reset to the as-delivered state.
SIMOCODE pro signals the successful deletion with the "Initialization module cleared" event.
On startup with an empty initialization module, the basic unit signals "Fault -
parameterization." The "general fault" LED of the basic unit flashes red.
Reparameterization of the device, e.g., with SIMOCODE ES, writes valid parameters to the
basic unit and the initialization module again. You can then acknowledge the fault message
Messages
You can check the states of the initialization module by the following events (in the
"Trips/warnings/events" dialog box of the "SIMOCODE ES" software):
● Initialization module write-protected
● Initialization module write-protected, parameter changes not allowed
● Initialization module identification data write-protected
● Initialization module read in
● Initialization module programmed
● Initialization module cleared.
See Alarm, fault, and system events for compartment identification (Page 720).

23.5 Mounting, wiring, interfaces, compartment identification
Mounting the initialization module in the switchboard

Mounting the initialization module with the mounting lugs in the switchboard
Figure 23-2 Mounting the initialization module
Wiring the initialization module

Unlike the other expansion components of the system, the initialization module does not
have a connector. It is intended for installation in the fixed part of the switchboard. Connect
the initialization module to a motor control center's control connector toward the switchboard
using the four connecting wires.
On the mating side, there is a withdrawable module to whose control connectors the
corresponding four connecting wires of the Y connecting cable are connected (see figure).
Connect each of the wires that are of the same color on the initialization module and the Y
connecting cable.
NOTICE
Note the correct colors!
Incorrect wiring can destroy the initialization module.
Note
Cable routing
When wiring the initialization module make sure the individual conductors are routed as
close together as possible (ribbon cable).
NOTICE
Maximum length of the connecting cable
basic unit!

Figure 23-3 Wiring the initialization module
CAUTION
SIMOCODE pro V basic units with an earlier product version
to E08, V3.0 do not support the initialization module and start with the internal parameters.

Connecting the Y connecting cable to the basic unit and to the current measuring module or
to the current/voltage measuring module
● Connect the connector in the middle of the Y connecting cable (1) on the basic unit
● Connect the connector at the end of the Y connecting cable (2) to a current measuring
module or current/voltage measuring module
● If you are using a decoupling module:
– Connect the connector at the end of the initialization cable (2) on the decoupling
module
– Connect the decoupling module with a system interface connecting cable to the
current measuring module or current/voltage measuring module.
Figure 23-4 Connecting the Y connecting cable to the basic unit and to the current measuring
module or to the current/voltage measuring module

23.6 Commissioning and service compartment identification
23.6 Commissioning and service compartment identification

General safety information
Note
Operating Instructions
During commissioning and service work, also heed the relevant "Initialization Module"
Operating Instructions!
You will find the Operating Instructions for SIMOCODE pro at Manuals/operating instructions
Commissioning the initialization module

Sequence for initial startup of a new SIMOCODE pro basic unit and a new initialization
module
Table 23- 1 Sequence for initial startup of a new SIMOCODE pro basic unit and a new initialization
module
Step Description
1 Connect the SIMOCODE pro basic unit to the planned expansion modules and to the
2 Switch on the power supply. The following LED states result:
• "Device" LED lights up green
• "Bus" LED lights up or flashes green when the bus is connected
• "Gen.Fault" LED flashes red
At the same time, the "Fault - parameterization" fault message is output.
3 Parameterize SIMOCODE pro with a PC with the SIMOCODE ES software installed. For
this, connect the PC / PG to the system interface with the PC cable (see the figure below) or
to the basic unit via "PROFIBUS."
Acknowledge the fault with the "TEST/RESET" button.
Figure 23-5 Connecting a PC to the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit

23.7 Alarm, fault, and system events for compartment identification
23.7 Alarm, fault, and system events for compartment identification
Messages
Table 23- 2 Alarm, fault, and system messages
Message Description Troubleshooting

Initialization module write-protected The initialization module is completely Deactivate write protection of the
write-protected. initialization module.
Initialization module write-protected, The initialization modules is completely Deactivate write protection of the
parameter changes not allowed or partially write-protected. initialization module.
Reparameterization of SIMOCODE pro
is denied because the initialization
module is write-protected.
Initialization module identification data The device addressing and the I&M • Select a parameterization with
write-protected data in the initialization module are identical addressing and I&M data
write-protected. Parameterization will
only be accepted by SIMOCODE if the • Deactivate the partial write
new parameter set is identical to the protection of the initialization
data stored in the initialization module module.
at that time.
Initialization module read in The parameters of the initialization
module were read into SIMOCODE.
Initialization module programmed The reparameterization was accepted
in the initialization module.
Initialization module cleared The initialization module has been
cleared and is now back in the as-
delivered condition.

List of abbreviations A
A.1 List of abbreviations
Overview
Table A- 1 Guide to the abbreviations
Abbreviation Term
AM Analog module
AS Alarm switch
ATEX "Atmosphère explosible" according to ATEX Directive 94/9/EC
AWG American Wire Gauge
Acycl. Acyclic
OP Operator panel
OPD Operator Panel with Display for SIMOCODE pro
OPO Operational Protection Off
CPU Central Processing Unit
DCM Decoupling module
DIP Dual In-Line Package
DM Digital module
DM-F Fail-safe digital module (DM-FL or DM-FP)
DM-FL Digital Module Failsafe Local
DM-FP Digital Module Failsafe PROFIsafe
TO Torque open
TC Torque closed
DP Distributed peripherals
DS Data record
DTM Device Type Manager
EEx European Norm EXplosion-proof: Specifies the protection classes for categorizing motors for use in
hazardous areas.
ex Explosion-proof
EM Ground-fault module
EMF Electromotive force
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
F-CPU Fail-safe CPU (controller)
FMS Fieldbus Message Specification
BU Basic unit
GSD Device master data
AUXS Auxiliary switch
I&M Identification and Maintenance

List of abbreviations
A.1 List of abbreviations
Abbreviation Term
InM Initialization module
IT Isolation-Terre (isolation ground)
NTC Negative temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
OB Organization block
OM Object Manager for PROFIBUS DP slaves for integration into STEP 7
OSSD Part of the electro-sensitive protective equipment (ESPE) that is connected to the machine control
system and that switches to the OFF state if the sensor part is tripped during operation for the
intended purpose.
PCS Process Control System
PDM Process Device Manager
PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage
PFD Probability of failure of demand: Probability of dangerous failure of a safety function on demand
PFDavg Average probability of failure of demand: Average probability of dangerous failure of a safety
function on demand
PFHD Probability of dangerous failure per hour: Average probability of hazardous failure occurring each
hour
PG Programming device
PL Performance Level
PCS Process Control System
PROFIBUS Process fieldbus
PTC Positive temperature coefficient (resistance dependent on temperature)
PZ Pozidriv
FB Feedback
FO Feedback open
TPF Test position feedback
FC Feedback closed
SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage
GF, CF Group fault, control function
SIL Safety Integrity Level
SFB System function block
SFC System function
PLC Programmable logic controller
Th Thermistor
TOFDT Total one fault delay time (maximum response time when error is present)
TWCDT Total worst case delay time (maximum response time in error-free state)
UVO Undervoltage off
LC Local control
Cycl. Cyclic

Appendix B
B.1 Correction sheet
Correction sheet
Have you noticed any errors while reading this manual? If so, please use this form to tell us
about them. We welcome comments and suggestions for improvement.
Fax response
From (please complete):

To Name
SIEMENS AG
I IA CE MK&ST 3 Company / Department
92220 Amberg / Germany
Address
_________________________________________________________________________________
Fax: +49 (0)9621-80-3337
Manual title:
Errors, comments, and suggestions for improvements

Appendix
B.1 Correction sheet

Glossary
0/4 to 20 mA monitoring
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase monitoring of the analog signals of a transducer (scaled
0/4 to 20 mA output signal). The analog signals are fed to the "0/4 to 20 mA monitoring"
function block via the analog module.
Addressing plug
The addressing plug is necessary to enable the hardware-based allocation of the
PROFIBUS DP address to a basic unit without a PC / PG.
Analog module (AM)

The analog module provides a way of optionally extending the SIMOCODE pro V basic unit
with analog inputs and outputs (0/4 to 20 mA). This makes it possible to measure and
monitor any process variables that can be mapped onto a 0/4 to 20 mA signal. The
automation system has free access to the measured process variables.
ATEX
French abbreviation for "atmosphère explosible" (explosive atmosphere).
ATEX is used as a synonym for the two directives of the European Communities covering
explosion protection, that is the ATEX product directive 94/9/EC and the ATEX workplace
directive 1999/92/EC.
Basic unit (BU)

The basic units are the fundamental components of the SIMOCODE pro system. Basic units
are always necessary when using SIMOCODE pro. They have the same enclosure width of
45 mm and are equipped with removable terminals.
The SIMOCODE pro C basic unit is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro C
device series. It contains the essential motor control functions and motor protection
functions.
Basic unit pro S is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro S device series and is
used in conjunction with a current measuring module and an optional operator panel.
The SIMOCODE pro V basic unit is the fundamental component of the SIMOCODE pro V
device series. It contains all functions and fulfills all requirements for motor protection, motor
control, diagnostics and monitoring.

Glossary
Baud rate
The baud rate is the speed at which data is transferred and indicates the number of
transmitted bits per second (baud rate = bit rate). With PROFIBUS DP, baud rates between
9.6 kbaud and 12 Mbaud are possible.
Bus
A common transmission path with which all stations are connected. It has two defined ends.
With PROFIBUS, the bus is a two-wire cable (copper cable) or a fiber optic cable.
Bus segment
PROFIBUS DP consists of at least one bus segment. A bus segment has at least two
stations, one of which must be a DP master. A maximum of 32 stations can be connected to
a bus segment.
Cascading input
Safe, 1-channel input of a safety relay, e.g. DM-F LOCAL and DM-F PROFIsafe. Internally,
this input is evaluated like a sensor signal. If no voltage is present, the safety relay trips the
enabling circuits (outputs) in a safety-related way.
CLASS
Unit for the trip class. Indicates the maximum tripping time in which SIMOCODE must trip at
a current that is 7.2 times the value of the set current Ie in a cold state (motor protection
according to IEC 60947). If Class 10 is set for SIMOCODE pro, for example, it is ensured
that the (cold) motor will switch off after 10 seconds if a current occurs that is 7.2 times the
set current. The trip class can be set to 8 different settings ranging from Class 5 to Class 0.
Class 1 master
Active station on PROFIBUS DP. It is characteristically used for cyclic data exchange with
other stations. Typical Class 1 masters include PLCs with a PROFIBUS DP connection.
Class 2 master
Optional station on PROFIBUS DP. Typical class 2 masters include:
● PC / PG devices with the SIMOCODE ES software
● PDM (PCS7)
● PC with "SIMARIS manager" software (power management).

Glossary
Connecting cable
Connecting cables are necessary for connecting the individual basic units with their current
measuring modules and, if required, with their expansion modules or operator panels. They
are available in various versions and lengths (ribbon cable 0.025 m, 0.1 m, 0.3 m, 0.5 m;
round cable 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 2.5 m).
Notice
Maximum length of the connecting cable:
basic unit!
Contactor
Electromagnetically operated low-voltage switch with only one position of rest; it cannot be
manually operated. Contactors can energize, carry, and deenergize currents in a circuit
under normal operating conditions, including operational overload. The contact system
consists of main and auxiliary contacts (NC, NO). Depending on the size of the contactor,
the main contacts can switch several hundred amps while the auxiliary contacts are only
rated for control currents of a few amps.
Control functions
Control functions (e.g. direct-on-line starters, reversing starters) are used for controlling load
feeders. They are characterized by the following important features:
● Monitoring the switch-on / switch-off process (no current flows in the main circuit without
the ON command)
● Monitoring the OFF state (no current flows in the main circuit without the ON command)
● Monitoring the ON status
● Tripping if a fault occurs.
Control stations
Control stations are places from which control commands are issued to the motor. The
"Control Stations" function block is used for administration, switching and prioritization of
these different control stations. SIMOCODE pro allows parallel administration of up to four
different control stations. Dependent on the control function, up to 5 different control
commands can be transmitted from every control station to SIMOCODE pro.
● Local control, in the direct vicinity of the motor. Control commands via pushbuttons.
● PLC/PCS, switching commands are issued by the automation system (remote).
● PC, control commands are issued via an operator control station or via PROFIBUS DPV1
with the SIMOCODE ES software.
● Operator panel / operator panel with display, control commands are issued via the
buttons of the operator panel / operator panel with display in the switchgear cabinet door.

Glossary
Cooling down period

The cooling down period is the amount of time that must elapse before an overload trip can
be reset. This is usually 5 minutes. Supply voltage failures of SIMOCODE pro during this
time extend the specified time correspondingly
Cos phi monitoring

Cos phi monitoring monitors the load condition of inductive loads. The main field of
application is for asynchronous motors in 1-phase or 3-phase networks with loads that
fluctuate significantly. The power factor (cos phi) is measured by evaluating the phase
displacement between the voltage and current in a phase.
Current measuring module (IM)

Current measuring modules are used together with the basic units of the SIMOCODE pro C,
SIMOCODE pro S, and SIMOCODE pro V device series. The current measuring module
must be selected according to the set current to be monitored (rated operating current of the
motor). The current measuring modules cover current ranges between 0.3 A and 630 A, with
intermediate transformers up to 820 A.
Current / voltage measuring module (UM)

The SIMOCODE pro V device series allows use of a current / voltage measuring module
instead of a current measuring module. In addition to measuring the motor current, current /
voltage measuring modules also enable:
● Monitoring of voltages up to 690 V
● Calculation and monitoring of power and power factor (cos phi)
● Monitoring of the phase sequence.
Current limit monitoring

Current limit monitoring is used for process monitoring. This enables incipient anomalies in
the system to be detected in good time. If a current limit is exceeded but still below the
overload limit, it can, for example, indicate a dirty filter on a pump, or an increasingly
sluggish motor bearing. If the current limit is undershot, it can be the first sign of a worn-out
drive motor belt.
Decoupling module
A module for connection between a current / voltage measuring module and the basic unit at
the system interface when voltage and power measurements are implemented in non-
grounded networks.

Glossary
Device master data (GSD file)

Information on the input and output range, as well as the consistency of the cyclically
transmitted data is defined in the device data file (GSD file), tested with the configuration
telegram from the device and, if appropriate, declared to be valid. The GSD file is used for
integrating the device into SIMATIC S7 or any DP standard master system (automation
system).
Digital module (DM)

Digital modules offer the option of further increasing the types and number of binary inputs
and outputs on SIMOCODE pro V as required. Up to two digital modules can be connected
to one SIMOCODE pro V basic unit. All types can be combined with each other.
SIMOCODE pro V can thus be extended to a maximum of twelve binary inputs and seven
binary outputs.
DIP switch
Small switch used to make certain basic settings. The abbreviation stands for Dual In-line
Package, a device package with two parallel rows of electrical connection pins.
DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe digital modules

The DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe fail-safe digital modules are used as safety relays in
EMERGENCY STOP devices in accordance with EN 418 and in safety circuits in
accordance with EN 60204 (11.98):
DM-F Local digital module:
For applications that require local safety-related tripping with EMERGENCY OFF buttons.
DM-F PROFIsafe digital module:
For applications that require decentralized safety-related tripping with EMERGENCY OFF
buttons. A fail-safe SIMATIC controller applies the logical connection between the
EMERGENCY OFF button and DM-F PROFIsafe digital module.
Door adapter
The door adaptor is necessary for making the system interface of a basic unit available at an
easily accessible location (e.g. front panel), thus enabling fast parameterization.
DP master
A master which works with the DP protocol according to the EN 50 170 standard, Volume 2,
PROFIBUS. Cyclic send data is exchanged between the DP master and the DP slave once
in every DP cycle. The DP master sends the cyclic receive data to SIMOCODE pro. In
response, SIMOCODE pro sends the cyclic send data to the DP master.

Glossary
DP slave/DP standard slave

A slave that is operated on PROFIBUS with the PROFIBUS DP protocol and works
according to the EN 50170 standard, Volume 2, PROFIBUS.
Emergency start
Emergency start deletes the thermal memory from SIMOCODE pro each time it is activated.
This allows the motor to be immediately restarted after an overload trip. This function can be
used to:
● Enable an immediate restart/reset after an overload trip
● Influence the thermal memory (motor model) during operation, if required.
Since the emergency start is edge-triggered, this function cannot permanently affect the
thermal motor model.
EMERGENCY STOP
Shutdown in case of emergency according to EN 418 (ISO 13850).
An action in an emergency that is intended to stop a process or motion that would result in a
hazard.
EMERGENCY STOP command device

Contact block ("EMERGENCY STOP" mushroom pushbutton according to
EN EN 418 (ISO 13850), cable-operated switch with positive opening contacts according to
EN 60204-1) that causes the process, machine or plant to be stopped when actuated in
hazardous situations. This must have positive-opening contacts, be easy to reach and be
tamper-proof.
EMERGENCY STOP device

Protective device that is operated in response to an emergency according to
EN 418 (ISO 13850), EN 60204-1.
Enabling circuit
An enabling circuit is used to generate a safety-related output signal. From an external
viewpoint, enabling circuits act as NO contacts (however, in terms of functionality, safety-
related opening is always the most important aspect). A single enabling circuit, that is
internally redundantly configured in the safety relay (two-channel) can be used for Category
3/4 according to EN 954-1 (ISO 13849-1).
European standard EXplosion safe (EEx)

Specifies the protection classes for categorizing motors for use in hazardous areas.

Glossary
Expansion modules
Expansion modules are intended as optional additions for the SIMOCODE pro V basic units.
The following expansion modules are available:
● Digital module (DM)
● Analog module (AM)
● Ground-fault module (EM)
● Temperature module (TM)
● Multifunction module (MM).
All expansion modules are equipped with 2 system interfaces (incoming/outgoing) and
removable terminals.
F_WD_Time
Monitoring time in the fail-safe PROFIsafe option. A valid, current safety telegram must be
received from the F-CPU within this monitoring time. Otherwise, the PROFIsafe option goes
to the safe state.
Factory settings
The factory settings are used to reset all parameters of a device to the default settings to
which they were set at the factory. The factory settings can be restored using the
"TEST / RESET" button on the basic unit or via the SIMOCODE ES software.
Feedback circuit
A feedback circuit is used to monitor controlled actuators (e.g., relays or contactors with
positively driven contacts). The evaluation unit can only be activated if the feedback circuit is
closed.
Note:
The NC contacts of the relays to be monitored are connected in series and integrated into
the feedback circuit of the safety relay. If a contact in the enabling current path is welded, the
safety relay can no longer be activated because the feedback circuit remains in the open
position.
Field/field level
The field or field level of an automation system contains the individual sensors and
actuators, as opposed to the control level which is located above it in the hierarchy.
Fieldbus
Industrial communication system that connects a large number of field devices such as
probes (sensors), actuators and drives to a control device.

Glossary
Function block
Defined group of functions that can be freely parameterized by the user and connected to
other function blocks to create a complete feeder-specific logic system. This means
conventional wired control circuits containing auxiliary relays, time relays, etc. can be
completely replaced.

The ground-fault module and the multifunction module enable implementation of powerful
external ground fault monitoring with the 3UL22 (for 3UF7 500-1AA00-0) and 3UL23 (for
3UF7 510-1AA00-0) summation current transformers. In addition to the internal ground-fault
monitoring function, which is supported by both device series, SIMOCODE pro S and
SIMOCODE pro V can be extended by an additional and more precise external ground-fault
monitoring system.
See "Ground-fault monitoring."
SIMOCODE pro acquires and monitors all three phase currents. By evaluating the
summation current of the three current values, the motor feeder can be monitored for a
possible residual current or ground fault. There is a difference between internal and external
ground-fault monitoring:
Internal ground-fault monitoring:
Internal ground-fault monitoring via current measuring modules or current / voltage
measuring modules is only possible for motors with a 3-phase connection in power systems
that are either grounded solidly or with low impedance. The basic unit uses the total current
to detect a possible residual current / ground-fault current.
External ground-fault monitoring with SIMOCODE pro V:
The external ground-fault monitoring using the summation current transformer and ground-
fault module is normally used for power systems that are grounded with high impedance, or
in cases, in which precise detection of the ground-fault current is necessary, for example, for
condition monitoring. The ground-fault module (EM) evaluates rated fault currents using an
externally connected summation current transformer (e.g. 3UL23).
I&M data
I&M data identification and maintenance data.
Information stored in a module that help you to check the plant configuration, to locate
hardware modifications in a plant, or to remedy errors in a plant. I&M data can be used to
identify modules uniquely on the network.

Glossary
I/O
The term I/O devices is used in automation engineering to refer to peripheral devices, for
example, devices that are connected to centralized controls.
Independent operation
SIMOCODE pro C, pro S, and pro V protect and control the motor feeder independently of
the automation system. Even if the automation system (PLC) fails, or if communication is
disrupted, the motor feeder remains fully protected and controllable. SIMOCODE pro can be
used without being connected to PROFIBUS DP. This can easily be connected later, if
required.
Initialization module
Memory module permanently installed in the switchboard or the motor control center in
which the device parameters of intelligent switching devices are stored.
The initialization module is used in motor control centers with a withdrawable design in which
all functions concerning the motor feeder are fitted in an exchangeable withdrawable
module.
The initialization module can be permanently installed in the switchboard and enables
backup of all parameters of a system and completely automatic transmission to a new
system, e.g. device replacement.
IT system
The IT system (FR Isolé Terre) is a specific type of ground connection for increased fail-safe
protection in case of insulation faults.
Logic modules
Logical operations, time relay functions and counter functions are implemented using logic
modules.
Low voltage
All voltage levels used for the distribution of electricity that are within a range whose upper
limit in AC systems is generally 1000 V.
Master
PROFIBUS DP is based on a master-slave architecture. Telegrams are sent by the master
to the addressed station (slave) and responded to by the slave.

Glossary
Memory module
The memory module is plugged into the system interface and is used for fast reading in or
out of the entire SIMOCODE pro parameterization, e.g. if a unit is exchanged.
Note
The basic units SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V as from product version *E08*
support only the memory module 3UF7900-0AA00-0. The SIMOCODE pro S and
SIMOCODE pro V basic units as from product version *E09* also support the memory
module 3UF7910-0AA00-0.
The following monitoring functions
● Ground-fault monitoring
● Current limit monitoring
● Voltage monitoring
● Cos phi monitoring
● Active power monitoring
● 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring
● Operation monitoring
● Temperature monitoring (analog)
Operate "in the background" in the same way as motor protection and motor control. They
can be active or not, according to the control function selected.
Monitoring the number of starts

Monitoring the number of starts can protect system parts (motors and switching devices such
as soft starters and converters) from too many start processes within a parameterizable time
frame and thus prevent damage. This is particularly useful for commissioning or manual
control.
Motor protection
The basic unit has several protection mechanisms for current-dependent motor protection:
Motor stop time monitoring

SIMOCODE pro can monitor the stop times of a motor to avoid plant downtimes due to failed
motors caused by either running too long (wearing out) or being stopped for too long.

Glossary
Universal module of the SIMOCODE pro S device series with the following functions:
● Digital module function with four digital inputs and two monostable relay outputs
● Ground fault module function with the possibility of implementing powerful external
ground-fault monitoring in conjunction with the 3UL23 summation current transformer
● Temperature module function with an input for connecting an analog temperature
sensor PT100, PT1000, KTY83, KTY84, or NTC.
Operating hours monitoring

The motor operating hours monitoring function enables the operating hours (service life) of a
motor to be recorded so that motor maintenance prompts can be generated in good time as
applicable.
Operation monitoring
SIMOCODE pro can monitor the operating hours and stop times of a motor and restrict the
number of startups in a defined time frame in order to avoid plant downtimes due to failed
motors caused by running or being stopped for too long.
Operational Protection Off (OPO)

The "Operational Protection Off (OPO)" function block puts the positioner into a safe position
and switches the motor off.
Operator panel with display (OPD)

The operator panel with display can be used as an alternative to the standard operator
panel (OP). It displays the current measured values, operating and diagnostic data, status
information for the motor feeder at the switchgear cabinet and the device-internal error log. It
also contains all the status LEDs that are present on the basic unit and facilitates access to
the system interface from outside the cabinet. Its keys can be used to control the motor and
to navigate the display menu. The operator panel with display can only be used in
conjunction with a SIMOCODE pro V basic unit from version *E03* onwards.
Operator panel (OP)

The operator panel controls the motor feeder from the switchgear cabinet. It contains all the
status LEDs that are on the basic units, the "TEST/RESET" button and the external system
interface. It can be used with all device series (SIMOCODE pro C, SIMOCODE pro S,
SIMOCODE pro V).
Organization block
Organization blocks form the interface between the CPU operating system and the user
program. The order in which the user program is processed is specified in the organization
blocks.

Glossary
Overload protection
SIMOCODE pro protects three-phase or AC motors in accordance with IEC 60947-4-1
requirements. The trip class can be set to eight different settings, ranging from Class 5 to
Class 40.
Pause time
The pause time is the specified time for the cooling down response of the motor when
tripped under normal operating conditions (not in the case of an overload trip). After this
interval, the thermal memory in SIMOCODE pro is erased and a new cold start is possible.
This means that many startups can be performed in a short space of time.
PC cable
The PC cable is used to connect the serial interface of the PC to the system interface of a
basic unit for device parameterization.
PELV
Protective Extra-Low Voltage. Protective measure against electric shock (formerly referred to
as "protective extra low voltage with safe isolation").
In contrast to an SELV circuit, live parts and bodies of the equipment may be grounded and
connected to the protective conductor. Safe isolation means that the primary circuit of the
transformer must be separated from the secondary circuit by double or reinforced insulation.
PELV is used whenever operational reasons dictate that live conductors of the low voltage or
bodies of the equipment must be grounded. This is the case, for instance, if equipotential
bonding is necessary to prevent sparking in containers or hazardous areas. However, owing
to the chassis ground, dangerous leakage currents can flow through the body regardless of
the low voltage if a fault occurs in the higher-level power system.
Use of power supply units according to IEC 60536, protection class III (SELV or PELV):
See Chapters "safety-related tripping," "Fail-safe digital modules (DM-F)," and "Digital
modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe."
Performance Level (PL)

Defined by standard EN ISO 13849-1 as "a discrete level specifying the ability of safety-
related control parts to execute a safety function under anticipated conditions." Five
Performance Levels are specified (a to e) with defined ranges of the probability of a
dangerous failure per hour. PL "e" corresponds to SIL 3 and is specified as the highest level.
Pozidriv (PZ)
Type of fixing screws and cross-tip screwdrivers.

Glossary
Process Automation (PA)

Automation of continuous production processes. For instance, it controls production
processes in the chemical industry or in water supply systems.
PROFIBUS
Process Fieldbus, a European process and fieldbus standard defined in the PROFIBUS
standard (EN 50170, Volume 2, PROFIBUS). It specifies the functional, electrical and
mechanical characteristics of a bit-serial field bus system.
PROFIBUS is a bus system that networks PROFIBUS-compatible automation systems and
field devices at the cell and field level. PROFIBUS is available with the DP (= Distributed
Peripherals), FMS (= Fieldbus Message Specification), PA (= Process Automation), or TF (=
Technological Functions) protocol.
PROFIBUS User Organization (PNO) installation guidelines

The PROFIBUS DP / FMS installation guidelines published by the PROFIBUS User
Organization must be complied with when installing PROFIBUS networks. These contain
important information about cable routing and the commissioning of PROFIBUS networks.
PROFIBUS DP
PROFIBUS bus system with the DP (distributed I/Os - decentralized peripherals) protocol.
The main task of PROFIBUS DP is to manage the fast, cyclic data exchange between the
central DP devices and the I/O devices.
PROFIBUS DP interface
SIMOCODE pro has an integrated PROFIBUS DP interface (SUB-D socket or terminal
connection on the basic units).
PROFIBUS DPV1
Extension of the DP protocol. It enables acyclic data exchange of parameter, diagnostic,
receive and test data.
PROFINET
Standard for industrial Ethernet in automation systems.

Glossary
PROFIsafe
The PROFIBUS safety profile specifies communication between fail-safe I/O devices and
fail-safe controllers. It is based on the standards for safety-related applications as well as on
the experience of PLC users and manufacturers who are members of PROFIBUS
International (PI). The PROFIBUS safety profile has TÜV and BIA (Institute for Occupational
Safety and Health of the German Social Accident Insurance) certification. The newest
version of the PROFIsafe specification is the Profile for Safety Technology V1.11
specification, published in 07/2001.
Programmable logic controller (PLC)

Controller whose functionality is stored in the control equipment as a software program. The
PLC comprises a CPU, memory, input/output modules, and an internal bus system. The I/O
and the programming language are oriented toward control engineering needs.
Programming device
A compact and transportable PC, suitable for industrial purposes. Its distinguishing feature is
the special hardware and software for SIMATIC programmable logic controllers.
Protection functions
The protection functions
operate alongside motor control "at a higher level in the background." They can be active or
not, according to the control function selected.
Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV)

Protective measure against electric shock (formerly referred to as "protective extra low
voltage with safe isolation").
In contrast to an SELV circuit, live parts and bodies of the equipment may be grounded and
connected to the protective conductor. Safe isolation means that the primary circuit of the
transformer must be separated from the secondary circuit by double or reinforced insulation.
PELV is used whenever operational reasons dictate that live conductors of the low voltage or
bodies of the equipment must be grounded. This is the case, for instance, if equipotential
bonding is necessary to prevent sparking in containers or hazardous areas. However, owing
to the chassis ground, dangerous leakage currents can flow through the body regardless of
the low voltage if a fault occurs in the higher-level power system.

Glossary
SELV
Safety extra low voltage Low electric voltage that offers significant protection against electric
shock due to its low value and insulation. For certain requirements, the highest voltage must
be defined below 50 V AC or 120 V smoothed DC, especially if direct contact with live parts
is permissible. At a nominal voltage of 120 V, the greatest peak value in a smoothed DC
system is 140 V, and at a nominal voltage of 60 V it is 70 C.
Use of power supply units according to IEC 60536, protection class III (SELV or PELV):
See Chapters "safety-related tripping," "Fail-safe digital modules (DM-F)," and "Digital
modules DM-F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe."
SFB
System function block A block integrated in the S7 CPU operating system that can be called
like a function block (FB) in the user program if required.
SFC
System function:
A function integrated in the S7 CPU operating system that can be called like a function (FC)
in the user program if required.
SIL (Safety Integrity Level)

Measure, defined in IEC 61508, for the safety-related performance of an electrical or
electronic control device.
The IEC standard defines four SIL levels SIL1 to SIL4, which are defined as the safety
implementations of electrical and electronic equipment. The SIL value describes the
specified safety function in the event of a fault.
SIMATIC
Name of products and systems for industrial automation from Siemens AG.
SIMATIC PDM
You can also configure SIMOCODE pro using the SIMATIC PDM (Process Device Manager)
software. The following options exist:
● SIMATIC PDM as a standalone program
● PDM integrated in STEP 7
SIMOCODE ES
Standard parameterization software for SIMOCODE pro, which can be run on a PC / PG
under Windows XP or Windows 7 Ultimate and Windows 7 Professional.

Glossary
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave

The SIMOCODE pro S7 slave is a special slave with the following characteristics:
● It supports the S7 model (diagnostic interrupts, process interrupts)
● It can be parameterized
SIMOCODE pro object manager (OM)

Part of SIMOCODE ES. When SIMOCODE ES and SIMOCODE pro object manager are
installed on a PC/PG, SIMOCODE ES can be called directly from STEP 7 HW Config. This
enables simple and universal SIMATIC S7 configuration.
SIMOCODE pro PCS-7 library

The SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library is used to connect SIMOCODE pro to the
SIMATIC PCS 7 process control system. It contains:
● The diagnostics and driver modules corresponding to the diagnostics and driver concept
of SIMATIC PCS 7
● The elements (symbols and faceplates) necessary for operating and monitoring.
Service packs and hot fixes:
The PCS 7 libraries are subject to continual updating and improvement. At
http://www.siemens.com/simocode →Support → Software Downloads, you can download the
latest service packs and hot fixes.
Slave
PROFIBUS DP is based on a master-slave architecture. Telegrams are sent by the master
to the addressed station (slave) and responded to by the slave.
Stalled rotor protection

If the motor current rises above an adjustable stalled rotor protection level (current
threshold), a defined and delayable response can be configured for SIMOCODE pro. In this
case, for example, the motor can be shut down independently of the overload protection.
The stalled rotor protection is only active after the parameterized class time has elapsed,
e.g. for Class 10 after 10 seconds, and prevents unnecessarily high thermal and mechanical
loads as well as premature aging of the motor.
Standard function
Standard functions are typical motor functions that can be activated according to need and,
as applicable, individually set for each motor feeder. They are already available, work
independently of the selected control function and can be used/activated as optional
additions.

Glossary
Station
A device that can send, receive or amplify data via the bus, e.g. master, slave.
Statistical data
SIMOCODE pro makes statistical data available, which can be read out, for example, with
SIMOCODE ES under Target System → Service Data / Statistical Data.
STEP7
The basic STEP 7 software is the standard tool for the SIMATIC S7, SIMATIC C7, and
SIMATIC WinAC automation systems.
Stop category 0
Non-controlled shutdown by immediately switching off the power to the machine's drive
elements.
System interface cover IP54

Cover to protect the system interface on the door adaptor or on the operator panel/operator
panel with display from soiling or to seal it.

The temperature module offers the option of expanding the SIMOCODE pro V device series
by an analog temperature monitoring system. With this, up to three analog sensor measuring
circuits (two-wire or three-wire systems) can be connected. The temperatures recorded can
be fully integrated into the process, can be monitored and are also available for a higher-
level automation system. You can, for example, implement analog temperature monitoring of
the motor windings, bearings, coolant or gear box oil. SIMOCODE pro V supports various
sensor types (NTC, KTY83/84, PT100 and PT1000) for use with solid, liquid, or gaseous
media.
Temperature monitoring
See temperature module (TM).
Terminal block
Insulating part comprised of one or more terminals, insulated from one another, for mounting
on a strip.

Glossary
Test Position Feedback (TPF)

If the motor feeder is in the test position, its main circuit is isolated from the network.
However, the control voltage is connected.
The "cold run" function test is performed with the feeder in this state. This means the motor
feeder is tested without a current in the main circuit.
Thermistor protection
The SIMOCODE pro C and SIMOCODE pro V basic units provide the option of connecting
thermistor sensors (binary PTC) for monitoring the motor temperature.
TN-C system
In a TN-C system (FR Terre Neutre Combiné) 1 wire is used simultaneously as a protective
earth (PE) and neutral wire (N).
TN-S system
In a TN-S system (FR Terre Neutre Séparé) the neutral wire and the protective earth are led
separately from the transformer up to the appliance.
Trip class
See "Class".
The extent of the phase unbalance can be monitored and transmitted to the control system.
A definable and delayable response can be triggered when an adjustable limit has been
overshot. If the phase unbalance is more than 50 %, the tripping time is also automatically
reduced in accordance with the overload characteristic since the heat generation of the
motors increases in asymmetrical conditions.
Universal Current (UC)

Universal current. Property of devices that can be operated with both AC and DC.
USB PC cable
The USB-PC cable is used to connect the USB interface of the PC to the system interface of
a basic unit for device parameterization.
Voltage monitoring
See monitoring voltage

Glossary
Voltage monitoring
SIMOCODE pro supports two-phase undervoltage monitoring of either a three-phase
network or a one-phase network for freely selectable limits, direction of rotation (for AC) or
readiness to start. The response of SIMOCODE pro on reaching a prewarning level or trip
level can be freely parameterized and delayed. Voltage measurement is performed using
current / voltage measuring modules.

Software tool for converting "old" Win SIMOCODE DP parameter files (3UF5 device series)
into SIMOCODE ES parameter files for SIMOCODE pro.
Y connecting cable
Connecting cable with which a connection can be made via the system interface from a
SIMOCODE pro basic unit to both an initialization module and a current measuring module.

Glossary

Index
"Soft starter with reversing contactor" function circuit

diagram (3RW405, 3RW407), 691
" "Soft starter" circuit diagram (for example, 3RW402,
3RW403, 3RW404), SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, 683
"3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" circuit
"Soft starter" circuit diagram (for example, 3RW402,
diagram - SIMOCODE pro C, pro V basic units, 647
3RW403, 3RW404); SIMOCODE pro V basic unit, 684
"3VL molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB)" function
"Soft starter" function circuit diagram (for example,
circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C, pro V, 649
3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404), SIMOCODE pro S basic
"At operating temperature" state, 163
unit, 685
"Bus fault" / "PLC / PCS fault" response, 343
"Soft starter" function circuit diagram (for example,
"Circuit breaker" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S
3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404), SIMOCODE pro V basic
basic unit, 648
unit, 684
"Circuit breaker" function circuit diagram,
"Star-delta starter" circuit diagram (current measuring
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, 650
in delta), SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, 652
"Direct-on-line starter" circuit diagram,
in delta), SIMOCODE pro V basic unit, 651
"Direct-on-line starter" circuit diagram,
SIMOCODE pro V, pro V basic units, 639
in supply cable), SIMOCODE pro V basic unit, 655
"Direct-on-line starter" function circuit diagram,
"Star-delta starter" function circuit diagram (current
SIMOCODE pro C, pro V basic units, 641
measuring in delta), SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, 654
"Direct-on-line starter" function circuit diagram,
measuring in delta), SIMOCODE pro V basic unit, 653
"DM1 / DM2 Outputs" settings, 282
"Extended control", 186
measuring in supply cable), SIMOCODE pro S basic
"External fault" response, 328
unit, 657
"Internal ground-fault monitoring" response, 244
"Overload relay" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C,
measuring in supply cable), SIMOCODE pro V basic
pro V basic units, 635
unit, 656
"Overload relay" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro S
"TEST/RESET" button, 107
basic unit, 636
"Trip level" response for monitoring current limits I
"Overload relay" function circuit diagram,
>, 250
SIMOCODE pro C, pro V basic units, 637
"Warning level" response for monitoring current limits I
"Overload relay" function circuit diagram, SIMOCODE
>, 250
pro S basic unit, 638
"Park position" for memory module, 63
"Reversing starter" circuit diagram, SIMOCODE pro C,
pro V basic units, 643
0
"Reversing starter" function circuit diagram, 0/4 ... 20 mA monitoring, 260
SIMOCODE pro C, pro V basic units, 645 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring, 239
"Reversing starter" function circuit diagram, 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring function block, 132
"Safety-related tripping" reset, 341
"Safety-related tripping" response, 341 3
"Sensor fault / Out of range" response, temperature
3UF50 compatibility mode, 46, 313, 314
module inputs, 303
"SET/RESET" button DM-F Local, 614
"SET/RESET" button DM-F PROFIsafe, 615
"Soft starter with reversing contactor" function circuit
A
diagram (3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404), 689 Abbreviations, 497, 516

Index
Access to data records in STEP7, 400 Application selection, 187

Access to data records via the slot and index, 514 Applications of SIMOCODE pro, 30
Acknowledgment of faults, 324 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data,
Active control stations of control functions, 236, 494 Dahlander, 568
Active power monitoring, 42, 239, 258 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, Dahlander
Active status motor operating hours monitoring, 265, reversing starter, 569
266 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, direct starter
Active status trip level, warning level, 0/4 to 20 mA (direct-on-line starter), 563
monitoring, 262 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, molded-case
Active status trip level, warning level, active power circuit breaker (MCCB), 565
monitoring, 259 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, overload
Active status trip level, warning level, ground-fault relay, 561
monitoring, 247 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, pole-
Active status trip level, warning level, monitoring changing reversing starter, 571
current limits I< (lower limit), 251 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, pole-
Active status trip level, warning level, monitoring changing starter, 570
current limits I> (upper limit), 250 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data,
Active status trip level, warning level, monitoring positioner, 573
temperature, 269 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, reversing
Active status trip level, warning level, monitoring starter, 564
voltage, 254 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, soft
Active status trip level, warning, level, cos phi starter, 574
monitoring, 257 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, soft starter
Active status, number of starts monitoring, 267 with reversing contactor, 575
Acyclic reading and writing of DPV1 data records, 392 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, star/delta
Acyclic receive, 293, 307 reversing starter, 567
Acyclic receive function block, 121 Assignment of cyclic receive / send data, star/delta
Acyclic send, 289 starter, 566
Acyclic send data, 289 Assignment of cyclic receive/send data, solenoid
Acyclic send data settings, 289 valve, 572
Acyclic send function block, 121 ATEX, 707
Acyclic services, 46, 289, 307 Autoactivation of compartment identification, 714
Addressing plug, 55, 61, 113, 447, 453 Automatic acknowledgement of faults, 324
Addressing plug - adopt DP address, 93 Automatic baud rate detection, 46
Adjustable responses "Overload Protection," Auto-Reset, 328
"Unbalance Protection," and "Stalled Rotor
Protection", 156
Alarm, fault, and system events for compartment B
identification, 720
Basic unit inputs, 293, 294
Alarms, 481
Basic unit inputs function block, 127
Alarms according to DPV1, 46
Basic unit inputs settings, 295
Ambient conditions, 704
Basic unit output settings, 277
Analog module, 32, 53, 261
Basic unit outputs, 276
Analog module (AM), 105, 109
Basic unit outputs function block, 126
Analog module connection example, 434
Basic units, 50
Analog module input settings, 305
Baud rates, 46
Analog module inputs, 293, 304
Box terminal blocks, 57
Analog module open circuit, 482
Bus connecting terminal, 57
Analog module output, 283
Bus connection current measuring modules /
Analog value recording, 309, 310, 311
current/voltage measuring modules, 608
Analog value recording function block, 120
Bus connection system from 20 A to 630 A, 441
Antivalence, 482
Bus monitoring, 342

Index
Bus termination module, 57, 461 Color coding of the connecting cable, 454
Buttons of the operator panel, 624 Commands, 80, 715
Buttons of the operator panel with display, 625 Commissioning, 463, 698
Byte arrangements, 515 Commissioning and service compartment
identification, 719
Commissioning the basic unit, 466
C Commissioning the initialization module, 719
Communication, 30, 80, 375
Cabinet mounting, 604
Communication principle, 379
Cable cross sections, 702
Compartment identification, 710
Cable length (single) DM-F Local, 614
Conductor cross sections, 418, 418
Cable length (single) DM-F PROFIsafe, 616
Conductor cross sections, strip lengths, and tightening
Cable lengths of the sensor circuit cables, 701
torques, 443
Calculation modules (calculators), 47
Conductor cross sections, strip lengths, and tightening
Calculator, 371
torques of the cables
Calculator formulas, 373
for the basic units SIMOCODE pro C and
Calculator function block, 123
pro V, 418
Calculator settings, 372
for the SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, 418
Certificates, 21, 707
Configuration error, 482
Change-over pause, 190, 203, 206, 208, 209, 211,
Configuration information for using an operator panel
213, 215, 216, 218, 219, 222
with display and/or a decoupling module, 104
Channel-related diagnostics, 382, 388
Configuring a reversing starter, 141
Characteristic curve of a type A sensor, 700
Configuring diagnostic response, 382
Circuit and parameterization for truth table 3I / 1O, 349
Connecting cable, 55, 113, 447, 603
Circuit breaker, 45, 182, 201, 494
Connecting cables to the system interface of the
Circuit breaker control (MCCB), 60
operator panel, 455
Circuit breaker settings, 201
Connecting cables to the system interface of the
Circuit diagram of Dahlander, 660
operator panel with display, 456
Circuit diagram of Dahlander reversing starter, 662
Connecting connecting cables to the system
Circuit diagram of direct starter (direct-on-line starter)
interface, 452
for 1-phase loads, 692
Connecting plugs with sockets, 119
Circuit diagram of pole-changing reversing starter, 667
Connecting the Y connecting cable to the basic unit
Circuit diagram of pole-changing starter, 665
and to the current measuring module or to the
Circuit diagram of positioner 1, 672
current/voltage measuring module, 718
Connection conductor SIMOCODE pro S basic
unit, 606
Connection conductors analog module, 617
Connection conductors digital modules, 611
Circuit diagram of soft starter (for example, 3RW405,
Connection conductors digital modules DM-F, 612
3RW407), 686
Connection conductors for voltage measurement
Circuit diagram of soft starter with reversing contactor
current measuring modules / current/voltage measuring
(3RW402, 3RW403, 3RW404), 688
modules, 608
Circuit diagram of soft starter with reversing contactor
Connection conductors ground-fault module, 618, 619
(3RW405, 3RW407), 690
Connection conductors multifunction module, 623
Circuit diagram of solenoid valve, 670
Connection conductors SIMOCODE pro C / pro V basic
Circuit diagram of star-delta reversing starter, 658
units, 606
Class, 161
Connection conductors temperature module, 620
Class 1 master, 376, 392
Connection cross sections decoupling module, 609
Class 2 master, 376
Connection example for "DM-F Local with cross-circuit
Class time, 167
detection, 2 NCs, 2 channels, monitored start", 439
Clear memory module, 93
Connection example for multifunction module, 428
Cold run, 326
Connection examples basic units, 423
Color coding of connecting cable, 453

Index
Connection examples fail-safe digital module DM- Cyclic receive function block, 139
F, 440 Cyclic send, 287, 381
Contacting of the initialization module, 713 Cyclic send data, 287
Contactor control with control functions, 237, 495 Cyclic send data settings, 288
Contactor controls, 184 Cyclic send function block, 139
Control circuit digital modules, 610 Cyclic services, 46, 287, 306
Control circuit ground-fault module, 618, 619
Control circuit multifunction module, 621
Control circuit of the analog module, 616 D
Control commands, 171, 196, 199, 202, 205, 209, 212,
Dahlander, 45, 60, 182, 188, 211, 494
216, 219, 223, 225, 230, 233
Dahlander control function, 209
Control function, 171
Dahlander reversing starter, 182, 188, 215, 494
Control function settings for Dahlander reversing
Dahlander reversing starter control function, 212
starter, 215
Dahlander settings, 211
Control functions, 38, 182
Data formats, 513
Control of a soft starter, 60
Data record 0/1 S7 system diagnostics, 518
Control of lamps for displaying operating states, 277
Data record 130 - Basic device parameters 1, 534
Control station, 171
Data record 131 - Basic device parameters 2, 541
Control station function block, 130
Data record 132 - Extended device parameters 1, 545
Control station local control, 36, 142, 172, 180
Data record 133 - Extended device parameters, 552
Control station operator panel, 174
Data record 139 - Marking, 555
Control station PC, 174
Data record 160 - Communication parameters, 556
Control station PC [DPV1], 180
Data record 165 - Identification, 557
Control station PLC / PCS [DP], 180
Data record 202 - Acyclic receive, 558
Control station PLC/PCS, 173
Data record 203 - Acyclic send, 559
Control station settings, 180
Data record 224 - Password protection, 560
Control stations, 172
Data record 63 - Analog value recording, 520
Cooling-down period, 163
Data record 67 - Process image output, 521
Correction sheet, 723
Data record 69 - Process image input, 522
Cos phi, 98
Data record 72 - Error buffer, 523
Cos phi monitoring, 42, 239, 256
Data record 73 - Event memory, 524
Cos phi monitoring function block, 133
Data record 92 - Device diagnostics, 525
Counter function block, 138
Data record 94 - Measured values, 532
Counter settings, 353
Data record 95 - Service data/statistical data, 533
Counters, 47, 352
Data records, 400, 513, 514
Cover, 61
Data records - Overview, 513
Cross-circuit detection, 339
Data transfer, 378
Current / voltage measuring module, 31
Deactivation of the compartment identification, 714
Current / voltage measuring module (through-hole
Debounce time, 106
transformer) 3UF7113-1AA, 20 A to 200 A, 588
Debounce time for inputs, 300
Current / voltage measuring modules, 99
Decoupling module, 52, 100, 100
Current limit monitoring, 40, 239, 249
Decoupling module connection example, 435
Current limits function block, 131
Decoupling module in different power systems, 101
Current measuring module installed in delta / in the
Degree of protection (according to IEC 60529), 602
supply cable, 191, 204, 208
Delay prewarning, 165
Current measuring modules, 51
Delta configurations, 103
Current threshold, 167
Device I/Os, 80
Current/voltage measuring modules, 52
Device master data (GSD), 376
Cyclic data exchange, 392
Device replacement, 113
Cyclic data from the PROFIBUS DP master to
Device series, 31
SIMOCODE pro:, 381
Device startup when the "initialization module"
Cyclic receive, 293, 306, 381
parameter is activated, 714

Index
Diagnostic interrupt, 390, 392 Dimension drawing current measuring module

Diagnostic interrupt/hardware interrupt, 398 (through-hole transformer) 3UF7100, 0.3 A to 3 A,
Diagnostics data, 29, 49, 382 3UF7101, 2.4 A to 25 A, 581
Diagnostics for device faults, 382 Dimension drawing current measuring module
Diagnostics for process events, 382 (through-hole transformer) 3UF7102, 10 A to
Diagnostics for process faults, 382 100 A, 582
Diagnostics for process warnings, 382 Dimension drawing current measuring module
Diagnostics via LED display on the basic unit and on (through-hole transformer) 3UF7103, 20 A to
the operator panel, 468 200 A, 583
Diagnostics via LED display on the modules DM-F Dimension drawing digital modules DM-F Local, DM-
Local or DM-F PROFIsafe, 469 PROFIsafe, 595
Diagram of enables and enabled control Dimension drawing door adapter, 596
command, 178 Dimension drawing expansion modules / decoupling
Diagram of the diagnostics data in the 3UF50 module, 593
compatibility mode, 316 Dimension drawing initialization module, 598
Diagram of the receive and send data in 3UF50 Dimension drawing of SIMOCODE pro C 3UF7000
compatibility mode, 315 basic unit, 578
Digital module Dimension drawing operator panel 3UF7200, 591
DM-F Local, 43 Dimension drawing operator panel adapter, 597
DM-F PROFIsafe, 43 Dimension drawing SIMOCODE pro V 3UF7010 basic
Digital module (DM), 106 unit
Digital module 1 inputs, 293 3UF7010, 580
Digital module 2 inputs, 293 Dimension drawing Y connecting cable, 598
Digital module connection example, 427 Dimension drawings, 577
Digital module DM-F Local connection example, 439 DIP switch DM-F LOCAL, 614
Digital module DM-F PROFIsafe connection DIP switch DM-F PROFIsafe, 615
example, 440 Direct starter (direct-on-line starter), 34, 45, 60, 182,
Digital module function multifunction module, 621 188, 195
Digital module inputs, 298 Direct starter (direct-on-line starter) control
Digital module inputs function block, 124 function, 194
Digital module outputs, 281 Display, 604
Digital module outputs function block, 123 Display commands (OPD), 77
Digital modules, 52 Display device I/Os, OPD, 75
Digital modules (DM), 105 Display elements of the operator panel with display, 67
Digital modules, fail-safe, 53 Display error buffer (OPD), 78
Dimension drawing 3UF7210 operator panel with Display faults (OPD), 78
display, 592 Display identification (OPD), 79
Dimension drawing bus connecting terminal, 599 Display messages (OPD), 77
Dimension drawing current / voltage measuring module Display of the operator panel with display, 625
(bus connection) 3UF7113-1BA, 20 A to 200 A, 589 Display PROFIBUS communication (OPD), 74
Dimension drawing current / voltage measuring module Display settings, 80
(bus connection) 3UF7114, 63 A to 630 A, 590 Display settings (OPD), 76
Dimension drawing current / voltage measuring module Display statistics/maintenance, OPD, 73
(through-hole transformer) 3UF7110, 0.3 A to 3 A, Display warnings (OPD), 77
3UF7111, 2.4 A to 25 A, 586 Displays of the operator panel with display, 67
Dimension drawing current / voltage measuring module DM-F DIP switch settings, 106, 107
(through-hole transformer) 3UF7112, 10 A to DM-F feedback circuit, 484
100 A, 587 DM-F LOCAL digital module, 105
Dimension drawing current measuring module (bus DM-F Local inputs, 124
connection) 3UF7103, 20 A to 200 A, 584 DM-F PROFIsafe digital module, 105
Dimension drawing current measuring module (bus DM-F PROFIsafe inputs, 124
connection) 3UF7104, 63 A to 630 A, 585 DM-F safety-related tripping, 484

Index
DM-F system interfaces, 107 Execution ON command, 483

DM-F test requirement, 484 Execution STOP command, 483
DM-F wiring, 485 Execution time, 190, 195, 198, 201, 204, 208, 211,
DM-FL actual and set configuration different, 485 215, 218, 222, 225, 229, 232, 235
DM-FL configuration mode, 485 Expansion modules, 39, 105
DM-FL cross circuit, 485 Explosion protection, 695
DM-FL simultaneity, 485 Extended control function block, 125
DM-FL waiting for startup test, 485 Extended protection ("overload protection," "unbalance
DM-FP Prm error, 485 protection," and "stalled rotor protection"), 155
Door adapter, 56, 114 Extended protection function block, 125
Double 0, 485 Extended status and fault messages, 185
Double 1, 485 external fault, 327
DP master, 376 External fault, 46, 320, 328, 486
DP master with DPV1 interrupt support (DPV0 interrupt External fault function block, 126
mode), 398 External ground fault, 486
DP master with DPV1 interrupt support (DPV1 interrupt External ground-fault monitoring, 41, 240
mode), 397 External ground-fault monitoring (with 3UL22 residual
DP masters operated in DP mode "DPV1", 398 current transformer), 245
DP masters operated in DP mode "S7- External ground-fault monitoring (with summation
compatible", 399 current transformer 3UL23), 246
DPV1 hardware and diagnostic interrupts, 382
DPV1 slave, 376
DPV1 slave via GSD, 392 F
Factory settings, 94, 142, 477, 634
Fail-safe data transfer via PROFIBUS /
E PROFIsafe, 380
EEx e applications, 162, 169, 269 Fail-safe digital module DM-F, 107
Electrical life of the relay outputs digital modules DM- Fault - bus, 489
F, 612 Fault - EM open circuit, 490
EMC stability according to IEC 60947-1, 603 Fault - EM short-circuit, 490
Emergency start, 46, 320, 334 Fault - PLC/PCS, 489
Emergency Start function block, 127 Fault - temporary components, 490
Emergency start settings, 335 Fault feedback message, 190
Enabled command - example, 179 Fault message, 21
Enables, 171, 177 Fault message "Fault - Test Position Feedback (TPF)"
End position, 486 and acknowledgment, 326
Engineering software migration from V7 to V8, 58 Fault types, 389
Engineering software V7, 58 Faults, 81
Error buffer, 81 Feedback OFF, 489
Error messages, 481 Feedback ON, 189, 489
Error number, 523 Feedback time, 190, 195, 198, 201, 204, 208, 211,
Evaluating diagnostics data, 397 215, 218, 222, 229, 232, 235
Event memory, 81, 480 Feed-through opening current measuring modules /
OPD, 78 current/voltage measuring modules, 608
Example circuits, 633, 634 Flashing, 47, 365
Example of a truth table for 3I / 1O, 348 Flashing function block, 122
Example of truth table 2I/1O, 350 Flashing settings, 365
Examples of calculators, 373 Flicker, 47, 366
Examples of typical units and ranges in Flicker function block, 126
SIMOCODE pro, 370 Flicker settings, 366
Exchanging a 3UF52 operator panel for a 3UF720 Floating License for one user, 57
operator panel, 415 Frequencies, 602

Index
Full motor protection, 28 I

Function block, 117
Identification, 81
Function block analog module inputs, 120
Identifier-related diagnostics, 386
Function block analog module outputs, 120
Independent operation, 32
Functional diagram of Dahlander, 661
Information and Download Center, 21, 707
Functional diagram of Dahlander reversing starter, 663
Information and standards, 696
Functional diagram of direct starter (direct-on-line
Initialization module, 55, 113
starter) for 1-phase loads, 693
Initialization module - identification data write-
Functional diagram of pole-changing reversing
protected, 487
starter, 668
Initialization module cleared, 487, 720
Functional diagram of pole-changing starter, 666
Initialization module identification data write-
Functional diagram of positioner 1, 673
protected, 720
Initialization module programmed, 487, 720
Initialization module read in, 487, 720
Initialization module write-protected, 486, 720
Initialization module write-protected, parameter
Functional diagram of soft starter (for example,
changes not allowed, 486, 720
3RW405, 3RW407), 687
Input characteristic DM-F Local, 614
Functional diagram of solenoid valve, 671
Input characteristic DM-F PROFIsafe, 616
Functional diagram of star-delta reversing starter, 659
Input types, 292
Further information, 707
Inputs, 291, 292
Inputs (binary), 605, 621
DM-F PROFIsafe, 615
G Inputs (binary) digital modules, 611
Ground-fault detection, 32 Inputs of the analog module, 616
Ground-fault module, 53 Inputs temperature module function block, 132
Ground-fault module (EM), 105, 110 Inputs with safety relay function DM-F Local, 614
Ground-fault module connection example, 430 Inputs with safety relay function DM-F PROFIsafe, 615
Ground-fault module function multifunction Installation, 698
module, 622 Installation guidelines for the PROFIBUS DP, 460
Ground-fault module short-circuit, 486 Installing the measuring circuit cables, 701
Ground-fault monitoring, 41, 239, 240 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a DPV1 slave via
Ground-fault monitoring function blocks, 133 GSD in the configuring software, 393
GSD file, 116 Integration of SIMOCODE pro as a SIMATIC PDM
object (DPV1 slave via GSD) in STEP7 HW
Config, 394
H Integration of SIMOCODE pro as an S7 slave via
OM SIMOCODE pro, 395
Hardware fault, 486
Integration of SIMOCODE pro in SIMATIC S7 with OM
Hardware interrupt, 390, 392
SIMOCODE ES, 398
Hardware test, 323
Interface covers, 55
Hysteresis for current limits I>, 251
Interfaces, 405
Hysteresis for monitoring functions, 271
Interlocking time, 190, 196, 198, 208, 215, 222, 229,
Hysteresis for voltage, cos phi, power, voltage
235
monitoring, 255
Interlocking time, number of starts monitoring, 267
Hysteresis ground-fault current, 248
Internal ground fault, 487
Hysteresis, 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring, 263
Internal ground-fault monitoring, 31, 41, 240, 244
Hysteresis, monitoring current limits I< (lower
Internet, 21, 707
limit), 252

Index
J Max. star time, 191, 204, 208

Maximum configuration with expansion modules, 104
Just one start possible, 488
Measured curves, 28
Measured values display, 80
Measured values display, OPD, 71
K Measurement functions, 38
Key-operated switch operation, 175 Measuring current with an external current transformer
(interposing transformer), 444
Memory module, 55, 61, 113, 447, 453
L Memory module write protection off, 94
Memory module write protection on, 94
Labeling strips, 56, 62, 65
Menu navigation OPD, 68
Lamp control with control functions, 238, 496
Menus OPD, 68
Lamp controls, 185
Messages, 81, 715
Lamp test, 323
Messages of the slave diagnostics, 508
LED display, 604
Mode selector, 176, 181
LED display decoupling module, 609
Modes for calculator 2, 372
LED display digital modules, 610
Module fault, 487
LED display DM-F PROFIsafe, 615
Module supply voltage is not present, 487
LED display ground-fault module, 618, 619
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB), 188
LED display multifunction module, 621
Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) control
LED display of the analog module, 616
function, 199
LED display temperature module, 620
Monitoring
LED displays of the operator panel, 624
PLC/PCS, 46
LED displays of the operator panel with display, 625
Monitoring additional process variables via the analog
LEDs for DM-F device diagnostics, 107
module, 43
LEDs on DM-F LOCAL, 613
Monitoring any measured values using unrestricted
Level motor operating hours monitoring, 265
limit monitors, 40, 43
Level motor stop time monitoring, 266
Monitoring current limits I< (lower limit), 251
Limit monitor, 47, 367
Monitoring functions, 38, 239
Limit monitor function block, 127
Monitoring interval for mandatory testing, 239, 270
Limit monitor response, 368
Monitoring interval for mandatory testing function
Limit monitor settings, 369
block, 135
List of abbreviations, 721
Monitoring of current limits I> (upper limit), 250
Load feeders, 35
Monitoring operating hours, stop time, and number of
Load type, 164, 190, 193, 195, 198, 201, 204, 208,
starts, 42
211, 215, 218, 222, 229, 232, 235
Monitoring the number of starts, 266
Loading parameters from the initialization module, 713
Motor control, 29, 171
Local control station, 145
Motor control function, 59
Locking the contactor, 189
Motor feeder, 34
Logic modules, 345, 346
Motor operating hours >, 484
Motor operating hours monitoring response, 265
Motor operation monitoring response, 265
M Motor stop time monitoring, 265, 266
Main display, 80 Motor stop time monitoring response, 266
Main display (OPD), 70 Motor temperature monitoring, 40
Main menu OPD, 69 Mounting, 405, 604
Maintenance, 705 Mounting basic unit, expansion modules or the
Manual operation, 175 decoupling module, SIMOCODE pro C/V, 409
Manufacturer's ID, 385 Mounting current measuring modules / current/voltage
Marking, 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring, 263 measuring modules, 607
Master PROFIBUS address, 385 Mounting decoupling module, 609

Index
Mounting digital modules, 610 Operator controls of the operator panel with display, 68
Mounting digital modules DM-F, 611 Operator panel, 50, 61
Mounting lugs, 407, 408, 411 Operator panel [OP], 181
Mounting of basic unit and multifunction module, Operator panel adapter, 56, 114
SIMOCODE pro S, 410 Operator panel buttons, 293, 296
Mounting of the operator panel with display, 625 Operator panel buttons function block, 122
Mounting operator panels (OP), 413 Operator panel LED settings, 280
Mounting orientation, 602 Operator panel LEDs, 278
Mounting temperature module, 620 Operator panel LEDs function block, 121
Mounting the current measuring modules, 411 Operator panel with display, 32, 51, 64
Mounting the initialization module in the OPO function block, 122
switchboard, 716 Output modes, 275
Mounting the operator panel, 413, 624 Output of the effective motor current
Mounting the operator panel adapter, 415 Entire range, 284
Mounting the operator panel with display, 414 Part of range, 285
Mounting, wiring, and interfaces of digital modules DM- Output response of the timer, 356
F Local and DM-F PROFIsafe, 410 Outputs, 273, 274
Multifunction module, 54 Outputs of the analog module, 617
Multifunction module (MM)., 111 Overload, 491, 494
Overload protection, 40, 153, 154
Overload relay, 45, 60, 182, 188
N Overload relay control function, 192
Overload relay settings, 193
No start possible, 487
Overtemperature, 169, 269
Non-maintained command mode, 189, 195, 198, 201,
Overview of function blocks (alphabetical), 120
204, 207, 211, 215, 218, 222, 225, 229, 232, 235
Non-safety functions (fail-safe digital modules), 301
Non-volatile element settings, 364
Non-volatile elements, 47, 362
P
Non-volatile elements function block, 127 Panel reset, 328
NOR function, 361, 364 Parameter changes not allowed in the current
Number of starts, 267 operating state, 488
Number of starts overshoot, 265 Parameter data during startup, 402
Number of starts prewarning, 265 Parameter is incorrect ("Event" category), 488
Parameter is incorrect ("general fault" category), 488
Parameter settings in the "SIMOCODE ES"
O software., 714
Parameterization, 146
OFF command reset, 328
Parameterization during starting (SIMOCODE pro C
OM SIMOCODE pro, 115, 377
basic unit only), 392
Operating data, 29, 48
Parameterization methods, 465
Operating hours monitoring, 265, 265
Parameterization with SIMATIC PDM, 401
Operating Instructions, 21, 464
Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES, 148
Operating modes, 171, 175
Parameterization with SIMOCODE ES Premium, 401
Operation as DPV1 slave downstream from the Y
Parameters
link, 46
Backing up and saving, 472
Operation monitoring, 239, 264
Saving from basic unit to SIMOCODE ES file, 472
Operation monitoring function block, 122
Saving from memory module to basic unit, 473
Operational Protection Off, 46, 320, 484
Saving from SIMOCODE ES to basic unit, 473
Operational Protection Off (OPO), 329
Saving to the memory module, 472
Operational protection OFF settings, 330
Parameters for control functions, 189
Operator controls and display elements, system
Pause time, 163
interfaces basic units, 61
PC cable, 55, 112, 447

Index
PC cable for connecting a PC / PG, 453 Protection/Control, 184

Performance level, 107 Protection/Control function block, 128
Performance Level, 44 Protective separation acc. to IEC 60947-1 digital
Permissible ambient temperature, 602 modules, DM-F, 612
Permissible number of starts exceeded, 492 Protective separation according to IEC 60947-1, 603
Permissible starts, number of starts monitoring, 267 PTC, 168
Phase balance formula, 166 PTC thermistor, 168
Phase failure protection, 40 Pump, 36
Phase sequence, 98 Push-in lugs for screw mounting, 56
Phase sequence detection, 43
Phase unbalance, 166, 488
Pin assignment of the terminals of the current / voltage R
measuring modules, 443
Rail mounting, 411
PLC / PCS monitoring, 342
Rated control supply voltage Us, 604
Plugs, analog, 117
Rated control supply voltage Us digital modules DM-
Plugs, binary, 117
F, 611
Pole-changing reversing starter, 182, 188, 222, 494
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp, 605
Pole-changing reversing starter control function, 219
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp digital modules
Pole-changing reversing starter settings, 222
DM-F, 612
Pole-changing starter, 45, 60, 182, 188, 218, 494
Rated insulation voltage Ui, 604
Pole-changing starter control function, 216
Rated insulation voltage Ui, digital modules DM-F, 612
Pole-changing starter settings, 218
Rated motor current, 698
Positioner, 45, 182, 228, 330
Read out event memory (OPD), 78
Positioner control, 60, 228
Reading data, 377
Positioner control function, 225
Reading out statistical data, 470
Positioners 1,2,3,4,5, 494
Reading the error buffer, 478
Power consumption DM-F digital modules, 611
Reading the error log, 478
Power consumption of basic unit, 604
Receive data from PROFIBUS DP, 117
Power failure (UVO), 488
Relay enabling circuits digital modules DM-F, 612
Power failure backup time basic unit, 605
Relay outputs, 605
Power failure back-up time digital modules DM-F, 612
Relay outputs digital modules, 610
Power failure monitoring (UVO), 46, 320, 332
Relay outputs DM-F digital modules, 612
Power failure time, 333
Relay outputs multifunction module, 621
Power monitoring function block, 134
Relay test, 323
Power supply to the inputs of the basic unit, 419
Remote operation, 175
Power supply to the inputs of the digital module, 425
Remote reset, 328
Powerpack for SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic, 58
Removable terminals, 407, 443
Pre-trigger, 310
Removable terminals for basic unit and multifunction
Preventive maintenance, 470
module, SIMOCODE pro S, 417
Pre-warning level, 165
Removable terminals for basic units, expansion
Pre-warning overload (I > 115 %), 491
modules, or the decoupling module, SIMOCODE pro
Product Information System (ProdIS), 21, 707
C/V, 417
PROFIBUS DP, 46, 142, 324, 376
Repair, 705
PROFIBUS DP connection, 458
Replacing a decoupling module, 475
PROFIBUS DP interface, 46, 604
Replacing a DM-F, 475
PROFIBUS DP to a 9-way SUB-D socket, 458
Replacing the basic unit, 474
PROFIBUS DPV1, 307, 376
Replacing the current / voltage measuring module, 476
PROFIBUS User Organization (PNO) installation
Replacing the current measuring module, 476
guidelines, 460
Replacing the expansion modules, 475
PROFIsafe, 377
Required function is not supported, 486
Program memory module, 93
Reset, 46, 94, 165, 320
Protection functions, 38
Reset bus / PLC fault, 343

Index
Reset function, 322 Safety guidelines, 453

Reset function block, 131 Safety integrity level, 107
Reset settings, 324 Safety Integrity Level, 44
Residual current, 240 Safety-related tripping, 43, 320, 336
Residual current transformer, 32 Safety-related tripping "Local", 46
Resistive load, 190 Safety-related tripping "PROFIsafe", 46
Response, 20 Safety-related tripping, DM-F Local function block, 129
Response - Monitoring interval for mandatory Safety-related tripping, DM-F PROFIsafe function
testing, 270 block, 129
Response to other control functions, OPO, 331 Saving change-over command, 189, 198, 208, 211,
Response to overshooting the number of starts, 215, 218, 222, 235
number of starts monitoring, 267 Saving parameters onto the initialization module, 714
Response to sensor fault, ground-fault monitoring, 248 Screw mounting, 407, 408, 411
Response to trip level 0/4 to 20 mA > (upper limit), Screw terminals, 117
0/4 to 20 mA < (lower limit), 0/4 to 20 mA Sensor circuit fault, 169
monitoring, 262 Sensor circuit multifunction module, 622
Response to trip level 0/4 to 20 mA> (upper limit), Sensor circuit of the temperature module, 620
0/4 to 20 mA< (lower limit), 0/4 to 20 mA Sensor circuit wiring, 701
monitoring, 263 Sensor fault, 169
Response to trip level P> (upper limit), P< (lower limit), Sensor measuring circuits, 42
active power monitoring, 259 Sensor types, 111
Response to trip level, cos phi monitoring, 257 Separate fail-safe function from control function, 193,
Response to trip level, ground-fault monitoring, 247 195, 198, 201, 204, 208, 211, 215, 218, 222, 225, 229,
Response to trip level, monitoring current limits I< 232, 235
(lower limit), 251 Separating DM-FL/FP function from control
Response to trip level, monitoring current limits I> function, 190
(upper limit), 250 Sequence for connecting PROFIBUS DP to the basic
Response to trip level, monitoring voltage, 254 unit, 458
Response to warning level P> (upper limit), P< (lower Sequence for mounting the bus terminal on the
limit), active power monitoring, 259 SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, 459
Response to warning level, cos phi monitoring, 257 Service and support, 707
Response to warning level, ground-fault Service and Support, 21
monitoring, 247 Service data, 29, 48
Response to warning level, monitoring current limits I< Set current Is1, 157
(lower limit), 252 Set current Is2, 159
Response to warning level, monitoring current limits I> SET/RESET button DM-F Local, 337
(upper limit), 250 Setting ranges for set current Is2, 159
Response to warning level, monitoring voltage, 255 Setting ranges for set current ls1, 157
Response, monitoring temperature, 269 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address, 151
Restart, 94 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via SIMOCODE
Restart time delay, 333 ES, 151, 467
Reversing starter, 45, 60, 142, 146, 182, 188, 198, 494 Setting the PROFIBUS DP address via the addressing
Reversing starter control function, 196 plug, 151, 467
Reversing starter settings, 198 Setting the PROFIsafe address on DM-F
Runtime license V7, 58 PROFIsafe, 467
Setting the rated motor current, 698
Settings for analog module output, 283
S Settings for DM1 / DM2 inputs, 300
Settings for external fault, 328
S7 slave via OM SIMOCODE pro, 392
Settings for power failure monitoring (UVO), 333
Safety and commissioning information for EEx
Settings for truth table for 5I / 2O, 351
areas, 695
Settings of the DIP switches (DM-F PROFIsafe), 340
Safety functions, 38

Index
Settings of the DIP switches on the DM-F Local, 338 Standards, 602
Short-circuit protection according to IEC 60947-4-1, Star networks, 102
type of coordination 2, 701 Star-delta connection, 206, 240
Short-circuit protection with fuses for motor feeder for Star-delta reversing starter, 45, 182, 188, 207, 494
short-circuit currents up to 100 kA and 690 V, 627 Star-delta reversing starter control function, 205
Signal conditioning, 47, 359 Star-delta reversing starter settings, 207
Signal conditioning function block, 128 Star-delta starter, 60, 182, 188, 204, 494
Signal conditioning settings, 361 Star-delta starter control function, 202
SIMATIC PDM, 376, 377 Star-delta starter settings, 204
SIMATIC powercontrol, 376 Startup override, 190, 262
SIMATIC S7, 116 Startup parameter block active, 482
SIMOCODE ES, 114, 142, 153, 328, 376 State of status LED, 323
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Basic, 57 States of the status LEDs / contactor controls during
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Premium, 58 testing, 703
SIMOCODE ES 2007 Standard, 57 Station status 1, 384
SIMOCODE pro C, 50 Station status 2, 385
SIMOCODE pro C basic unit, 59 Station status 3, 385
SIMOCODE pro function block library for SIMATIC Statistics/Maintenance, 80
PCS 7, 58 Status Cooling down period active, 489
SIMOCODE pro integrated with GSD, 397 Status display, 80
SIMOCODE pro PCS 7 library, 116 Status display motor protection/motor control
SIMOCODE pro S, 50 (OPD), 72
SIMOCODE pro S basic unit, 60 Status DM-F enabling circuit, 489
SIMOCODE pro S7 slave, 377 Status emergency start executed, 489
SIMOCODE Pro V basic unit, 60 Status information, 185, 382, 386, 392
Single-phase systems, 103 Status test position (TPF), 489
Slave diagnostics, 385 Stop time >, 489
Slave operating modes, 392 Strip lengths, 418, 418
Snap-on mounting, 408 Summation current evaluation, 240
Socket assignment table - digital, 499 Switching from star to delta, 202, 205
Socket assignment table, analog, 506 Switching the direction of rotation, 196, 206, 212, 219,
Soft reversing starter, 45 233
Soft run-down time, 235 Switching the direction of travel, 226
Soft starter, 45, 182, 494 Switching the speed, 209, 212, 216, 219
Soft starter control function, 230, 232 System events, 481
Soft starter with reversing contactor, 182, 235, 494 System interface
Soft starter with reversing contactor control Connection of cables, 454
function, 232 Connection of system components, 454
Soft starter with reversing contactor settings, 235 Operator panel, 453
Software, 57, 114 Operator panel with display, 453
Software Update Service, 58 System interface analog module, 616
Solenoid valve, 45, 182, 188, 225, 494 System interface cover, 114, 448, 453
Solenoid valve control, 60 System interface ground-fault module, 618, 619
Solenoid valve control function, 223 System interface main circuit current measuring
Solenoid valve control function settings, 225 modules / current/voltage measuring modules, 607
Stalled positioner, 484 System interface multifunction module, 621
Stalled rotor, 484 System interface temperature module, 620
Stalled rotor level, 167 System interfaces, 447, 604
Stalled rotor protection, 40, 153, 154, 167 System interfaces decoupling module, 609
Standard diagnostics, 382, 392 System interfaces digital modules, 610
Standard function blocks, 320 System interfaces digital modules DM-F Local and DM-
Standard functions, 46, 319, 320 F PROFIsafe, 107

Index
System interfaces DM-F digital modules, 611 Terminal assignment of the digital module, 426
System interfaces of the operator panel, 624 Terminal assignment of the ground-fault module, 429
System interfaces of the operator panel with Terminal assignment of the multifunction module, 427
display, 625 Terminal assignment of the temperature module, 431
Terminal covers, 56
Test, 46, 94, 320
T Test / Reset, 321
Test function block, 131
Table specifications, 498, 517
Test interval, monitoring interval for mandatory
Tables, 493
testing, 270
Technical data, 601, 602
Test phases, 323, 702
Technical data of the analog module, 616
Test Position Feedback (TPF), 46, 320, 325, 489
Technical data of the basic units, 604
Test position feedback (TPF) function block, 128
Technical data of the current measuring modules or
Test settings, 323
current / voltage measuring modules, 607
Test trip, 490
Technical data of the current transformer, 445
Test verification documents, 602
Technical data of the decoupling module, 609
Testing, 322
Technical data of the digital modules, 610
Thermal motor model, 163
Technical data of the DM-F Local digital module, 613
Thermistor, 168
Technical data of the DM-F-PROFIsafe digital
Thermistor function block, 131
module, 615
Thermistor motor protection (PTC binary), 605
Technical data of the ground-fault module, 618, 619
Thermistor open circuit, 491
Technical data of the initialization module, 626
Thermistor protection, 40, 153, 154, 168
Technical data of the multifunction module, 621
Thermistor short circuit, 491
Technical data of the operator panel, 624
Thermistor trip level, 490
Technical data of the operator panel with display, 625
Through-hole connection up to 200 A, 441
Technical data of the temperature module, 620
Tightening torques, 418, 418
Technical data of the Y connecting cable, 626
Time range for starts, 267
Technical data, digital modules DM-F Local and DM-F
Time range for starts, number of starts monitoring, 267
PROFIsafe, 611
Time stamp, 523
Temperature module, 42, 54
Time stamping, 46, 320, 344
Temperature module (TM), 111
Time stamping function block, 138
Temperature module connection example, 432
Time stamping/time synchronization, 403
Temperature module function multifunction
Time synchronization via PROFIBUS, 46, 344
module, 622
Timer function block, 131
Temperature module input settings, 303
Timer settings, 358
Temperature module inputs, 293, 302
timers, 354
Temperature module out of range, 490
Timers, 47
Temperature module sensor fault, 490
Transformation ratio active, 158, 159
Temperature module trip level overshot, 490
Transformation ratio current transformer, 444
Temperature module warning level overshot, 490
Transformation ratio primary, 158, 159
Temperature monitoring, 42, 111, 239, 268
Transformation ratio secondary, 158, 159
Temperature monitoring function block, 135
Trip antivalence, 490
Temperature monitoring settings, 268
Trip class, 161, 698
Temperature sensor, 31
Trip end position, 490
Temperature sensors, 268
Trip level 0/4 - 20 mA < undershot, 483
Terminal assignment for digital module DM-F
Trip level 0/4 - 20 mA > overshot, 484
Local, 437
Trip level Cos-Phi<, 483
Terminal assignment for digital module DM-F
Trip level I < undershot, 483
PROFIsafe, 438
Trip level I > overshot, 483
Terminal assignment of the analog module, 433
Trip level P > overshot, 483
Terminal assignment of the basic units, 420
Trip level P< undershot, 483
Terminal assignment of the decoupling module, 435

Index
Trip level U< undershot, 483 Warning level I< undershot, 491
Trip level, warning level, 0/4 to 20 mA monitoring, 262 Warning level I> overshot, 491
Trip level, warning level, active power monitoring, 259 Warning level P< undershot, 491
Trip level, warning level, ground-fault monitoring, 246 Warning level P> overshot, 491
Trip level, warning level, monitoring voltage, 254 Warning level U< undershot, 492
Trip level, warning, level, cos phi monitoring, 256 Warnings, 81
Tripping characteristic, 698 Warranty, 706
Tripping conditions of the EExe motor, 699 Watchdog, 342
Tripping time, 161 Watchdog (PLC/PCS Monitoring), 46, 320
Truth table for 2I / 1O, 350 Watchdog function block, 137
Truth table for 2I / 1O function block, 136 Watchdog settings, 343
Truth table for 3I / 1O, 347 Win SIMOCODE DP converter, 116, 314
Truth table for 3I / 1O function block, 136 Wiring, 405
Truth table for 5I / 2O, 351 Wiring basic units, expansion modules, decoupling
Truth table for 5I / 2O function block, 137 module, 417
Truth tables, 47 Wiring digital modules DM-F Local and DM-
Type, 523 F PROFIsafe, 436
Type of protection EEx e and EEx d:, 696 Wiring of current / voltage measuring modules, 442
Types of basic units, 59 Wiring of current measuring module, 441
Types of current measuring modules, 97 Wiring sequence of the PROFIBUS cable for
Types of positioner control, 228, 229 SIMOCODE pro S basic units, 422
Types of signals / output responses of non-volatile Wiring sequence of the removable terminal of the
elements, 363 SIMOCODE pro C/V basic units, 421
Types of signals / output responses of the signal Wiring the initialization module, 716
conditioning, 360 Wiring the removable terminals of the expansion
Typical reaction times of SIMOCODE pro C, 631 modules and the decoupling module, 435
Typical reaction times of SIMOCODE pro S, 632 Working range DM-F digital modules, 611
Typical reaction times of SIMOCODE pro V, 631 Working range of basic unit, 604
Writing / reading data records with STEP7, 514
Writing data, 377
U Wrong password, 488
Unbalance, 491
Unbalance level, 166
Unbalance protection, 40, 153, 154, 166
Y
Upgrade for PCS 7 block library SIMOCODE pro, V 6.0 Y connecting cable, 55
or V 6.1 to version SIMOCODE pro V 7, 58
Upgrade for SIMOCODE ES as from 2004, 58
USB PC cable, 56
USB-to-serial adapter, 56, 112
UVO function block, 136
V
Voltage monitoring, 41, 239, 253
Voltage monitoring function block, 135
W
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA < undershot, 492
Warning level 0/4 - 20 mA > overshot, 492
Warning level cos phi <, 491

Service & Support
Internet:
www.siemens.com/simocode
Download catalogs and information material:
www.siemens.com/sirius/infomaterial
Newsletter - always up to date:
www.siemens.com/sirius/newsletter
E-Business in the Industry Mall:
www.siemens.com/sirius/mall
Online-Support:
www.siemens.com/sirius/support
Certificates:
www.siemens.com/sirius/approvals
Contact for all technical information:
Technical Assistance
Tel.: +49 (911) 895-5900
e-mail: [email protected]
www.siemens.com/sirius/technical-assistance
Siemens AG Subject to change without prior notice

Industry Sector 3UF7970-0AA00-0
Postfach 23 55
90713 FUERTH © Siemens AG 2005
GERMANY
Industrial
Controls
SIRIUS
www.siemens.com/automation

Manual SIMOCODE Pro PROFIBUS en-US 2014 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual SIMOCODE Pro PROFIBUS en-US 2014 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual SIMOCODE Pro PROFIBUS en-US 2014 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SIMOCODE pro

Motor Management and Control Devices

Answers for industry.

Data formats and data

Siemens AG 3UF7970-0AA00-0 Copyright © Siemens AG 2005.

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

5.2.3 Enables and enabled control command ................................................................................ 177

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

11.6.1 Response to positioner control function ................................................................................ 329

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

13.7 Evaluating diagnostics data ...................................................................................................397

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

15.4 Service ................................................................................................................................. 470

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

18.17 Data record 160 - Communication parameters.......................................................................556

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

19.8 Digital modules DM-F Local, DM-PROFIsafe ........................................................................ 595

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

21.4 "Direct starter" example circuit ...............................................................................................639

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

21.14 "Positioner" example circuit .................................................................................................. 672

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

22.4 Maintenance and repairs .......................................................................................................705

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

Purpose of this manual

Required basic knowledge

Topic Target group

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

Topic Target group

SIMOCODE pro response tables

Response Function 1 Function 2 Function 3

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

Short description of the responses:

Further support (Service and Support)

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

Recording of measured curves

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

Detailed operating, service and diagnostics data:

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

Additional control programs are integrated in SIMOCODE pro V (star-delta starters,

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

● A ground-fault detection system can be integrated together with a summation current

Figure 2-3 Typical SIMOCODE pro C hardware configuration

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

Figure 2-4 Typical SIMOCODE pro S hardware configuration

Figure 2-5 Typical SIMOCODE pro V hardware configuration

SIMOCODE pro PROFIBUS

2.4 Simplifying configuration with SIMOCODE pro

Conventional configuration without SIMOCODE pro

Figure 2-6 Conventional configuration of a motor feeder (direct starter)